Manual LSY9600

AlcatelLucent 9600LSY
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System

9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x
LHR version
Hardware Installation and Technical Handbook

3DB 02839 AAAA
Ed.10
i Navigation principles
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

document, use and communication of its contents not
This manual can be delivered both on paper support and in electronic format (file Adobe Acrobat pdf)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

inside the specific 9600LSY Customer Documentation CDROM. Take into account these notes if you are
reading this manual using:
either the pdf file or the paper copy:
Parts: this manual is composed by the following parts:
front matter, with general information, table of contents, and list of figures and tables
part A: the Hardware Installation Handbook (this part), whose structure is described in
para.11.1 on page 34
part B: the Technical Handbook, starting on page 189, whose structure is described in
Revision bars: in general, and if present, they can be useful to Customers owing the previous
edition of this manual, in that they can easily identify changes. Other Users, reading this manual
for the first time, can simply ignore them.
the paper copy; this manual is divided by separators, for an easier access to the information herein
contained:
CONTENTS SEPARATOR
FRONT MATTER
ii Preliminary information
iii Quick Guide : allows to access immediately the most frequently needed
operative pieces of information contained in this handbook and in other related
handbooks.
iv Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD norms and equipment labelling
v Cautions to avoid equipment damage
vi Notes on present edition
vii Customer documentation feedback
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
PART A : HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK
1
SECTION 1 : HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK
PART B : TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
2
SECTION 2 : SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 3 : SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS AND PROVISIONING 3
SECTION 4 : MAINTENANCE 4
SECTION 5 : FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 5
SECTION 6 : APPENDICES 6
SECTION 7 : ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
Enclosed documents are divided by other separators
7
the pdf file; for a comfortable navigation, two hyperlink types are present:
those inside the text window, marked by a blue rectangle around any crossreference to a
figure, table, part, section, chapter, paragraph, numbered list, and page: by clicking such a blue
rectangle, you are led to the referenced component
the bookmarks, present on the left side of the text window. Most of them represent the online
handbook table of contents. Bookmarks can be expanded (clicking on [+] ) or reduced (clicking
on [] ). By clicking on one bookmark, you are led to the referenced part.
Moreover, at the bookmark window bottom, there are some red bookmarks: clicking one of them
opens the relevant enclosed document file.
WARNING: the bookmark window is not visible if you use Acrobat reader in fullscreen modality.
For further information, refer to Acrobat reader help online.
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x LHR version INSTALLATION AND TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
FRONT MATTER
2 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
ii Preliminary information
a) Warranty
Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this
handbook refers to.
AlcatelLucent makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims
the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. AlcatelLucent will not
be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential,
incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b) Information
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of AlcatelLucent.
c) Copyright Notification
The technical information of this manual is the property of AlcatelLucent and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d) Safety recommendations
The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:
1 ) Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment.
2 ) Access to the Equipment
Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.
3 ) Safety norms
Recommended safety norms are indicated in this manual as described in para.61.3 on pages
450 onwards.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should
be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety
instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local
norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in this manual
will prevail.
e) Service Personnel skill
Service Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications and in
particular on the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without an adequate training, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in
para.64.2 on page 497 is usually not enough to properly install, operate and maintain equipment.
f) Notes for Readers
Crossreferences in this handbook (e.g. see ... on page 45) must always be meant to the
specified page of this handbook. References to other handbooks are made just indicating the
Handbook name or, in some cases, a specific part (but never its page number).
Verbose instructions: many operative instructions given in this handbook (mainly those
regarding maintenance tasks) may appear too verbose to skilled Operators (in particular to
AlcatelLucent personnel). These skilled people must understand that such instructions are
addressed to Operators who have never carried out the jobs described, so that instructions
must be as detailed as possible to make them able to carry out operations in the correct way
and to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
INSTALLATION AND TECHNICAL HANDBOOK 9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x LHR version
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 3 / 522
iii Quick guide

9600LSYLHR Rel.1.0 & 2.x HARDWARE INSTALLATION AND TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Tab. 1. below allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces of information
contained in this manual and in other related handbooks.
To find any other kind of information not listed in this table, please refer to the TABLE OF CONTENTS of
this handbook, or, if you are using the pdf file of it, use the Acrobat Reader Find function.
Tab. 1. Quick guide

If you need immediate operative information on how to:
TUTORIAL
know changes of this issue read page 12
have a very short description of the
read para.23.4 on pages 208 to 216
LHR and WMSN standard system
have an additional very short
read para.62.1 on pages 471 to 473
description of the LHR(HPA system
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
install and commission a LHR or
read Chapter 12 Installation and commissioning
WMSN radio link system as
summary on page 35
delivered from Alcatel factory
GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND

MAINTENANCE
on page 5
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
on page 6
EQUIPMENT CRAFT TERMINAL USE AND SYSTEM UPGRADE PROCEDURES

on page 6
EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING AND ITEMS PART NUMBERS

on page 7
FRONT MATTER
4 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 1. Quick guide
a) GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND

MAINTENANCE
get information on safety, EMC,
EMF, ESD norms and equipment read Appendix A on page 449
labelling
acknowledge cautions to avoid
read pages 9 to 11
equipment damage
read following paragraph according to the unit / area type:
PSU and PSF: para.18.2.1 on page 107
SYSCO and FLASH CARD: para.18.2.2 on page 108
SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE: para.18.2.3 on
page 113
RRACHANNEL and optional optical module:
para.18.2.4 on page 115
RRASTANDBY and optional optical module:
get operative information regarding
the units (connectors, leds, buttons, Adapter cables for old optical modules: para.18.2.6
hardware setting) of LHR standard on page 118
system MODEM: para.18.2.7 on page 119
LPS SHELF: para.18.5 on page 124
TRANSCEIVER: chapter 19 from page 127
Branching: para.19.7 on page 145
FAN UNIT: para.18.3 on page 122
TRU and Kit Loudspeaker: para.16.3 from page 84
Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable and
Additional Housekeeping Unit: para.15.4 from page
74
have details on system cabling of
read chapter 110 on page 147
LHR standard system
have details on Branching of LHR use handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching
standard system drawings (Ref.[B] on page 499 in this manual)
have details on Branching of use handbook 9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Branching

LHR/HPA system drawings (Ref.[G] on page 500 in this manual)
carry out unit hardware setting read para.12.8 on page 50
set and use the EOW functions of

the equipment
get additional operative information
read para.62.5 on page 478
regarding the LHR/HPA system
Tab. 1. continues ..
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 5 / 522
Tab. 1. Quick guide

b) SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHR
provision and manage spare parts

read para.43.3 on page 298
for LHR standard system
carry out First Level Maintenance

(system state display) of LHR read chapter 44 on page 301
standard system
carry out Preventive Maintenance

of LHR standard system
read:
carry out Corrective Maintenance chapter 46 on page 309 (troubleshooting)

(troubleshooting and repair) of LHR
chapter 47 on page 325 (unit replacement)
standard system
chapter 48 on page 353 (faulty unit repair and repair
form)
LHR/HPA
get additional maintenance
information regarding the LHR/HPA read para.62.6 on pages 479 484
system
c) EQUIPMENT CRAFT TERMINAL USE AND SYSTEM UPGRADE
PROCEDURES
know general characteristics of ECT read para.23.8.6 on page 243
login and logoff according to SWPversion used, get associated CT Operators

Handbook (Ref. page in this manual):
use ECT for all equipment
management functions for SWP 1.0 : Ref.[O] on page 504
upgrade ECT and/or equipment for SWP 2.0 (from V.2.0.2): Ref.[P] on page 504
software with a new SWP or a
new SWPversion and read read its QUICK GUIDE
expand the number of channels of a get 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Expansion procedures
LHR system both from hardware (Ref.[E] on page 499 in this manual) and proceed as
and software points of view specified by it
FRONT MATTER
6 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 1. Quick guide
d) EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING AND ITEMS PART NUMBERS

LHR
for:
system as a whole, read chapter 31 on page 249
BaseBand and Transceiver shelves as a whole, read

subrack and units of LPS subsystem, read para.32.2.2
logically configure a station (or
on page 275
change its configuration) and
logically provision equipment boards units in BaseBand shelf, read para.32.3.1 on page 280
of LHR standard system
units in Transceiver shelf, read para.32.4.2 on page 285
FANS shelf, read para.32.5 on page 286
units in ADM shelf, refer to handbooks cited in

para.64.2.5.2 on page 507
for:
common parts (frequency independent), read chapter

111 on page 183
get item P/Ns of LHR standard
system frequency dependent items, refer to the enclosed
Transceiver Reference Manual (REF.[D] in Tab. 91. on
page 521 of this handbook)
read:
choose channel plan or get the enclosed Transceiver Reference Manual (REF.[D]
information on channel plan used in in Tab. 91. on page 521 of this handbook)
your system (LHR standard system)
get information on system

read Appendix D on page 495
documentation
LHRHPA
get specific information regarding
the LHR rack equipment read para.62.3 on pages 474477
provisioning for LHR/HPA system
get specific information regarding

refer to 9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook
the HPA rack equipment
(REF.[F] on page 500 of this manual).
provisioning for LHR/HPA system
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 7 / 522

a) Please refer to Appendix A on page 449 to obtain details regarding following information:
Compliance with International norms
Safety rules:
TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT

General rules
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Harmful optical signals
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heatradiating mechanical parts
Equipment emitting RF power

(EMF norms)
Other labels:
TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment) Logo
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
Other Labels affixed to the Equipment
b) Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than

AlcatelLucents, loaded with software applications described in this or other Handbooks, is
supplied in the Constructors technical documentation.
FRONT MATTER
8 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
v Cautions to avoid equipment damage
a) Antistatic protection device kit
When operating on boards out of the equipment shelf, this kit must be always warn and its termination
must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices
for electrostatic discharges. This kit (Fig. 1. below) consists of:
an elasticized band worn around the wrist
a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack or the racks
antistatic points [see (7) in Fig. 9. on page 58].
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
Fig. 1. Antistatic protection device kit
b) Boards extraction/insertion levers
Most equipments boards are provided with levers to facilitate their extraction and insertion from/into
the shelf. In turn, such levers are provided with screws that:
must be loosened, before operating on levers for the unit extraction from the shelf; this prevents
breakage of levers
must be tightened, after the unit insertion in the shelf; this ensures the equipment EMIEMC
performance.
Please refer to pages 1011 for more information [ points h ) , i ) and j ) ].
c) Unit assemblies and transceiver subassemblies
Each unit assembly (main board + baby board(s) + front plate), transceiver included, must be
always considered an unique item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such an
assembly is supplied by AlcatelLucent as it is and must never be disassembled.
d) Screw fixing
All boards and dummy plates are provided with screws that, in normal operation conditions, must be
always tightened onto the shelf to avoid their detachment and to ensure the equipment EMIEMC
performance and correct ventilation.
The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 % 2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 9 / 522
e) PSU and Transceiver insertion/extraction

Before to extract or insert a PSU or Transceiver unit from/into the shelf, verify that its ON/OFF switch

is in O position.

f) Craft Terminal connection
To connect the CT cable (at IDUs F interface and/or PC side):

verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off
it)
connect suitable cable to IDUs F interface and PC side
now the PC can be safely switched on.
g) Craft Terminal disconnection
To disconnect the CT cable (at IDUs F interface and/or PC side):

perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications
close all other running applications, if any
switch off the PC
now the cable can be safely disconnected.
h) Right operations for board insertion in the subrack
2) To mate the plastic body of

1) Open the levers the connectors: push on
before to plug the the front panel, balancing
unit. the strain without push on
the levers.
4) Fix the unit to the subrack by means

3) Push on the levers of screws (max tightening torque
in order to finish the specified in point d ) on page 9
connector mating.
FRONT MATTER
10 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
i) Forbidden operations for board insertion in the subrack
NO Dont push just on one lever only.
NO Dont force the units.
NO Avoid impact during the units handling.
j) To populate an empty subrack

1 ) insert one unit at a time
2 ) fix the unit to the subrack by means of screws, before to insert another unit.
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 11 / 522
vi Notes on present edition

Ed.10, validated, archived and released, annuls and replaces previous ED.09.
Following information can be useful for users owing the previous edition of this manual. Other users can
simply ignore it.
This edition has been made for the following major changes:
changes for new items/features:

new LPS subsystem and related new SWP 2.1. Main affected parts: whole chapter 12 from
page 35 , para.18.5 from page 124 , chapter 22 on pages 197 and 201 , para.32.2.2
on page 275
new LC Optical Module. Main affected parts: chapter 18 on pages 116 and 118 , chapter
111 on pages 186 and 187 , chapter 32 on page 282 , chapter 43 on page 298 , chapter
47 on pages 341 to 342, appendix C on page 493
new FLASH CARD 128 MB. Main affected parts: chapter 111 on pages 185 and 187 ,
para.43.3.4 on page 299 , appendix C on page 494
new ADM (1850TSS). Main affected parts: whole chapter 12 from page 35 , chapter 16
on page 91 , chapter 110 on page 162
other changes:
75 W 120 W Balun adapter on page 150
in chapter 31 System configurations, removed information regarding Reused systems
with two protection channels, not available
in Appendix Documentation guide information regarding Documentation set description
updated.
Errors found in previous edition have been corrected.
For detailed information regarding handbook applicability and purpose, please refer to para.64.1 on page
495.
INFORMATION FOR ALCATELLUCENT INTERNAL USE ONLY

DATE CHANGE NOTE
ED APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
(yymmdd) ECO
10 080205 00000 57196 V.Rodella, B.Gabbrielli E.Corradini
FRONT MATTER
12 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
The meaning of this section is to collect customer feedback about this handbook.
Scope of this activity is the improvement and innovation of customer documentation through the
understanding of customer needs.
Your comments are welcome.
Please send your comment also if you appreciate the handbook.
You can send them to your Local Alcatel Technical Assistance Center.
They will be addressed to the team in charge of the relevant manual.
The following form supplies an example only of useful info, as a guide of the type of expected feedback.
It is possible fill part of the form, add other data and so on.
How to send feedback:
copying the example form, filling it and sending it to your Local Alcatel Technical Assistance
Center. In this case handbook data are already available at the page bottom.
using the same form (if available) as a file in the relevant documentation CDROM, saving,
filling and sending it by email to your Local Alcatel Technical Assistance Center.
creating a dedicated form on paper or file and sending it to your Local Alcatel Technical
Assistance Center.
Well take into account of your suggestion.
We reserve to modify consequently the handbook according to the correctness and congruence of the
suggestion and requests.
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 13 / 522
CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK
Handbook data

Product release, version: 9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x LHR version

Handbook type: INSTALLATION AND TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Handbook part number and edition: 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
General evaluation
SUBJECT 5 (max.) 4 3 2 1 (min.)
Total evaluation
Info quantity
Info quality
Info structure
Consulting facility
Layout
Section evaluation
SECTION 5 (max.) 4 3 2 1 (min.)
FRONT MATTER
1 : Hardware installation handbook
2 : System description and technical specifications
3 : System configurations and provisioning
4 : Maintenance
5 : Functional description
6 : Appendices
7 : Enclosed documents
Your comments (strictly necessary when value is less than 3)
Suggestion for improvements

Which subject to deepen:
How to deepen:
Subject to eliminate or reduce:
Other comments/suggestions:
Error identified
Reader Info
Name: Date;
Company: Job:
Address:
Email:
Phone: Fax:
FRONT MATTER
14 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
i Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
ii Preliminary information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
iii Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
iv Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD norms and equipment labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
v Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
vi Notes on present edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
vii Customer documentation feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Part A: Hardware Installation Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SECTION 1: HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
11 ABOUT THIS HANDBOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
11.1 Handbook structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
11.2 Installation Handbook structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
11.3 Installation and commissioning documentation set for the standard LHR system 34
12 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

12.1 Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
12.1.1 Regenerator equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
12.1.2 Regenerator supply conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
12.1.3 Regenerator installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
12.2 High power Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
12.2.1 High power Regenerator equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
12.2.2 High power Regenerator supply conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
12.2.3 High power Regenerator installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
12.3 WMSN case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
12.3.1 WMSN equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
12.3.2 WMSN supply conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
12.3.3 WMSN installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
12.4 High power WMSN case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
12.4.1 High power WMSN equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
12.4.2 High power WMSN supply conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
12.4.3 High power WMSN installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
12.5 Regenerator + LPS case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12.5.1 Regenerator + LPS equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
12.5.2 Case of Regenerator + LPS supplied by AlcatelLucent factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
12.5.3 Upgrade of a Regenerator station to a Regenerator+LPS station . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
12.6 High power Regenerator + LPS case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
12.6.1 High power Regenerator + LPS equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
12.6.2 High power Regenerator + LPS supply conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
12.6.3 High power Regenerator + LPS installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
12.7 High power WMSN + LPS case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
12.7.1 High power WMSN+ LPS equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
12.7.2 High power WMSN+ LPS supply conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
12.7.3 High power WMSN + LPS installation and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 15 / 522
12.8 Summary of hardware settings of equipment boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
13 UNPACKING AND WAREHOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

13.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

13.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
13.2.1 Preliminary checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
13.2.2 Unpacking phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
13.3 Warehousing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
14 INSTALLATION RULES AND SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

14.1 General installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
14.2 Installation sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
15 HARDWARE INSTALLATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

15.1 Introduction to the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
15.1.1 Rack general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
15.1.2 LHR rack dimensions and antenna circulators output interaxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
15.1.3 User cables installation description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
15.2 Information to retrieve from the Plant Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
15.3 Rack Positioning and Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
15.3.1 Fixing the Rack Using Expansion Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
15.3.2 Fixing to floating floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
15.4 Connections between TRU and input housekeepings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
15.4.1 Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
15.4.2 Additional Housekeeping Unit fastening to the rack and cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
15.5 Installation of FAN UNIT for LHR and/or ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
16 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

16.1 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
16.2 RACK Protection ground connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
16.2.1 Grounding the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
16.2.2 Grounding the racks rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
16.3 TRU description and cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
16.3.1 TRU description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
16.3.2 TRU front cover remotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
16.3.3 TRU Installation, cabling and usage of TRU Kit Loudspeaker (optional) . . . . . . . . 88
16.3.4 Electrical connections from TRU toward the Station Power Supply batteries . . . . . . 89
16.3.5 TRU breaker types, installation and replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
16.3.6 Electrical connections from TRU toward the equipment shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
16.3.7 Final operations on TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
16.4 Signal cabling of FAN UNIT for LHR and/or ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
17 TRU ALARMS SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

17.1 Software Configuration Sequence with Additional Housekeeping Substitutive
Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
17.1.1 CT Labelling Configuration with Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable . . . . . 99
17.1.2 H.A. C.T. Software Labelling Configuration Procedure with Additional
Housekeeping Substitutive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
17.2 Software Configuration Sequence with Additional Housekeeping Unit . . . . . . . . . . 101
17.2.1 Additional Housekeeping Unit software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
17.2.2 CT Labelling Configuration with Additional Housekeeping Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
17.2.3 H.A. C.T. Software Labelling Configuration Procedure with Additional
Housekeeping Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
18 OPERATIVE INFORMATION ON EQUIPMENT BOARDS (EXCEPT MICROWAVE AREA) 105

18.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
FRONT MATTER
16 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
18.2 Boards of BaseBand shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
18.2.1 PSU and PSF units operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
18.2.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information . . . . . . . . . 108
18.2.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

18.2.4 RRACHANNEL unit and optional optical module operative information . . . . . . . . . 115
18.2.5 RRASTANDBY unit and optional optical module operative information . . . . . . . . . . 117
18.2.6 Adapter cables for old optical modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
18.2.7 MODEM unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
18.3 FAN UNIT operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
18.4 TRU shelf operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
18.5 LPS subrack operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
19 OPERATIVE INFORMATION ON MICROWAVE AREA (TRANSCEIVERS AND

BRANCHING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
19.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
19.2 Transceiver assembly supply to Customer and spare part policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
19.3 Warmup time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
19.4 Transceiver front views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
19.5 Front connectors usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
19.5.1 Usage of LO monitoring J7, J8 and J15 sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
19.6 Transceiver hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
19.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
19.6.2 Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
19.6.3 Hardware setting dipswitches on transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
19.6.4 Frequency setting by HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
19.6.5 Hardware setting of the transceiver Tx and Rx frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
19.6.6 Settings for reuse configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
19.6.7 Example of hardware setting of two transceivers in a radio link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
19.6.8 Propaedeutic explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
19.7 Branching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
19.7.1 Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
19.7.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
110 SYSTEM CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

110.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
110.2 Shelves connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
110.2.1 TRU connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
110.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
110.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
110.2.4 BALUN adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
110.2.5 Transceiver shelf connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
110.3 Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
110.4 Power supply distribution connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
110.5 Connections between TRU and input housekeepings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
110.6 Signal connections between shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
110.7 ModemTransceiverBranching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
110.8 External interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
110.8.1 Power Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
110.8.2 SDH interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
110.8.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
110.8.4 Input / Output Protected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
110.8.5 Auxiliary Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
110.8.6 Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
110.8.7 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
110.8.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 17 / 522
111 EQUIPMENT PART LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Part B: Technical Handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

SECTION 2: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . 191

21 ABOUT THIS HANDBOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
21.1 Handbook structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
21.2 Technical Handbook structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
22 INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600LSY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

22.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
22.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
22.3 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
22.4 System usage in MW links and networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
22.5 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
23 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

23.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
23.2 Introduction to system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
23.2.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
23.2.2 Station types and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
23.2.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
23.3 General block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
23.4 Hardware components of LHR rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
23.4.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
23.4.2 Rack and Top Rack Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
23.4.3 Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
23.4.4 Baseband subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
23.4.5 ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
23.4.6 FAN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
23.4.7 System wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
23.5 Radio Transmission features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
23.5.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
23.5.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller . . . . . 217
23.5.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
23.6 Signal Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23.6.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23.6.2 STM0 & STM1 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
23.6.3 SDH mapping adopted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
23.6.4 SDH interface usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
23.6.5 SOH bytes and service channel access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
23.7 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
23.7.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
23.7.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
23.7.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
23.7.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
23.8 Equipment Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
23.8.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
23.8.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
23.8.3 The NE architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
23.8.4 The F interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
23.8.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
23.8.6 ECT and RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
24 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

24.1 9600LSY standard LHR technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
FRONT MATTER
18 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
24.2 9600LSY LHRHPA technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
24.3 9600LSY LHR + LPS technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
24.4 ADM characteristics (used in WMSN configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

SECTION 3: SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS AND PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . 247

31 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
31.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
31.2 Terminal station configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
31.3 EastWest station configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
31.4 Radio channel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
31.5 System configuration for network solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
31.6 Branching configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
31.7 Rack configurations for frequency reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
31.7.1 Interconnections in reused systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
32 EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

32.1 Rack and shelves summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
32.2 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
32.2.1 General equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
32.2.2 LPS subrack equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
32.2.3 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
32.3 Base Band shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
32.3.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
32.4 Transceiver shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
32.4.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
32.4.2 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
32.5 FAN UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
32.5.1 FAN UNIT equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
32.5.2 Logical composition of the FAN UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

41 MAINTENANCE POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
41.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
41.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
41.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
42 SET AND USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

42.1 Telephone kit and telephone set operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
42.2 EOW Channel use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
42.2.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
42.2.2 Call Setup/End by Telephone Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
42.2.3 Additional standard Party lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
42.3 TPH Channel use (Additional Voice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
42.3.1 General Information and usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
42.3.2 Additional Party lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
43 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

43.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
43.2 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
43.2.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
43.2.2 Maintenance and System Tools Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
43.3 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
43.3.1 Types of Spare Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
43.3.2 Number of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
43.3.3 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 19 / 522
43.3.4 Spare Flash Card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
44 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

44.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

44.2 Procedure summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
44.3 System state display by visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
44.3.1 Inspection of station alarm lamps on TRU (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
44.3.2 Inspection of alarm lamps on SYSCO unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
44.4 Checks by Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
45 PREVENTIVE (ROUTINE) MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

45.1 Preventive (routine) Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
45.2 Preventive (routine) Maintenance for fans (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
45.2.1 Mechanically active substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
46 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
46.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
46.2 General flowchart of corrective maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
46.3 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
46.3.1 Alarm acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
46.3.2 Alarm Attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
46.4 TroubleShooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
46.4.1 Problems with the Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
46.4.2 CARD FAIL red led on SYSCO Unit turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
46.5 TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
46.5.1 Alarm Surveillance (1330AS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
46.5.2 Operators Controls of the protection switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
46.5.3 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
46.5.4 TX mute function (local and remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
46.5.5 Not Intrusive BER measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
46.5.6 J0 Section Trace management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
46.5.7 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
46.5.8 Radio Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
46.5.9 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
46.5.10 Additional information on other handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
46.6 Troubleshooting on the radio link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
47 UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

47.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
47.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
47.2.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
47.2.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
47.2.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
47.3 Summary information on FPGA upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
47.4 Unit replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
47.4.1 PSU replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
47.4.2 PSF replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
47.4.3 SYSCO replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
47.4.4 FLASH CARD replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
47.4.5 SERVICE replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
47.4.6 RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
47.4.7 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
47.4.8 MODEM replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
47.4.9 FAN UNIT replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
47.4.10 Transceiver replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
47.4.11 Standard procedures for Optical Modules to turn the laser OFF and ON . . . . . . . . 352
FRONT MATTER
20 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
48 FAULTY UNIT REPAIR AND REPAIR FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
48.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
48.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

51 SIGNAL MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
51.1 STM1 frame structure and WST mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
51.2 STM0 frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
51.3 RFCOH services structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
51.4 SOH management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
51.5 DCCR Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
51.6 ATPC Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
51.7 Sub STM1 framing processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
51.8 SOH handling in normal operation condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
51.9 Alarms detected in RST section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
51.10 Regenerator Section trace management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
51.10.1 J0 management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
51.10.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
51.10.3 K0 management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
52 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

52.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
52.2 Power supply subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
52.3 Equipment Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
52.3.1 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
52.3.2 System Controller unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
52.3.3 Flash Card description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
52.3.4 Additional Housekeeping unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
52.4 Baseband subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
52.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
52.4.2 N+1 switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
52.4.3 1:N switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
52.4.4 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
52.4.5 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
52.4.6 STM1 optical module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
52.4.7 MODEM STM1 1WST and STM0 0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
52.4.8 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
52.5 Transceiver subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
52.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
52.5.2 DC/DC converter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
52.5.3 Transmit and Service module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
52.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
52.5.5 Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
52.6 Fans subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
53 ALARM MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

53.1 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
53.2 Visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
53.2.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
53.2.2 Alarm visual indications on units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
53.2.3 Status of radio protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
53.3 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
53.4 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 21 / 522
SECTION 6: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
61 APPENDIX A: SAFETY, EMC, EMF, ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . 449

61.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

61.2 Compliance with International Norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
61.3 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
61.3.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
61.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
61.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
61.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
61.3.5 Optical safety: equipment specific data and instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
61.3.6 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
61.3.7 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
61.3.8 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
61.3.9 Equipment emitting RF power (EMF norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
61.3.10 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
61.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
61.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
61.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
61.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
61.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
61.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
61.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
61.7.1 Label specific for standard 9600LSYLHR Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
61.7.2 Label specific for additional HPA Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
61.7.3 General use labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
62 APPENDIX B: HPA CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

62.1 General description and allowed configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
62.2 Equipment layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
62.3 LHR rack equipment provisioning for LHR/HPA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
62.3.1 Rack and shelves layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
62.3.2 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
62.4 HPA rack equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
62.5 LHR/HPA system operative instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
62.5.1 Supporting software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
62.5.2 Hardware setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
62.5.3 HPA module front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
62.5.4 ModemTransceiverBoosterBranching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
62.5.5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
62.6 LHR/HPA system maintenance instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
62.6.1 Management of HPA module state, alarms, squelch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
62.6.2 HPARACKs TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
62.6.3 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
62.6.4 Preventive (routine) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
62.6.5 System state display and troubleshooting by visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
62.6.6 Replacement procedures for Booster and Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
63 APPENDIX C: OBSOLETE ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

63.1 Information on former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
63.2 Information on former version Enhanced TRU P/N 3DB05602AAAA or
3DB05602AAAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
63.3 Information on Additional Housekeeping unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
63.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
63.3.2 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
FRONT MATTER
22 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
63.4 Information on FANS SUBRACK (P/N 3DB03242AA**) AND FANS ASSEMBLED
(P/N 3DB03238AA**) units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
63.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

63.4.2 Equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

63.4.3 Operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

63.4.4 FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
63.4.5 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
63.5 Information on Optical Modules P/N 3AL78815AA** and 3AL78815AB** . . . . . . . . . 493
63.6 Information on Flash Card 48MB P/N 1AB151770002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
64 APPENDIX D: DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

64.1 Handbook guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
64.1.1 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
64.1.2 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
64.2 Documentation set description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
64.2.1 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.x documentation for LHR, LHRLPS and LHRHPA versions 497
64.2.2 9600LSY Rel.2.0 documentation for LHRC version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
64.2.3 Documentation of 9600LSY for both LHR and LHRC versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
64.2.4 Documentation related to obsolete items or features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
64.2.5 Optional handbooks and CDROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
64.3 General on AlcatelLucent Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
64.3.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
64.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
64.3.3 Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
65 APPENDIX E: LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
SECTION 7: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 23 / 522
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES
Fig. 1. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Fig. 2. Regenerator station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fig. 3. High power Regenerator station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 4. WMSN station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 5. High power WMSN station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 6. Regenerator + LPS station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 7. High power Regenerator + LPS station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 8. High power WMSN + LPS station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 9. ETSI rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fig. 10. ETSI rack 4 GHz antenna circulators output interaxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fig. 11. ETSI rack 4 GHz antenna circulators output interaxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fig. 12. ETSI rack 6 to 8 GHz antenna circulators output interaxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fig. 13. ETSI rack 6 to 8 GHz antenna circulators output interaxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fig. 14. ETSI rack 10 to 13 GHz antenna circulators output interaxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fig. 15. ETSI rack 10 to 13 GHz antenna circulators output interaxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fig. 16. Electrical and optical cable distribution terminal strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 17. Right and Left front cover duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fig. 18. Typical station cabling floor side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fig. 19. Fixing the rack using expansion bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fig. 20. Drill Holes for Anchoring to the Floor (single rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 21. Floor tile drilling template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fig. 22. Example of securing rack assembly to computer floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 23. Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 24. Connection of Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 25. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 26. Additional Housekeeping module fastening to the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 27. RACK Connection to the protection ground by crimped cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fig. 28. RACK Connection to the protection ground by cable terminal lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fig. 29. Grounding the racks rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fig. 30. TRU front view and TRU adapters for 21 ETSI Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 31. Rotated TRU for service (only for installation in 21 racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 32. TRU rear and top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fig. 33. Kit Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fig. 34. Main Power Supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 35. Jumpering the Service Battery strips to the Main Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fig. 36. Checking terminals for breaker alarm control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fig. 37. Breakers inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fig. 38. Breaker remotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fig. 39. Power supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 40. Power supply connectors on LHRs Base Band shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 41. TRU breakers terminal numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 42. Connection/disconnection of power supply cables to/from TRU breakers terminals . . . . 95
Fig. 43. Cable for Rack Alarms interconnections between TRU and LHR and ADM shelves . . . . . 96
Fig. 44. Signal cabling of FAN UNIT for LHR (without ADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fig. 45. Signal cabling of FAN UNITs for LHR and ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fig. 46. TRU H.A. Diagram connection (with Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable) . . . . . . 100
Fig. 47. TRU H.A. Diagram connection (with Additional Housekeeping Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fig. 48. Boards of BaseBand shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fig. 49. PSU and PSF units front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 50. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . . 108
Fig. 51. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fig. 52. System Controller front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Fig. 53. Position of dipswitch banks on SYSCO main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fig. 54. Position of dipswitch bank on SYSCOs ESCON subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
FRONT MATTER
24 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Fig. 55. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 56. Service unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fig. 57. RRACHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fig. 58. RRACHANNEL unit and optional optical module front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 59. RRASTANDBY unit front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Fig. 60. LCFC adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 61. LCSC adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 62. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fig. 63. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANCCOMB equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Fig. 64. Modem unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Fig. 65. Assembly and front views of FAN UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 66. Alternative positions for equipping the LPS subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fig. 67. Units equipped in a fully populated LPS subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Fig. 68. Label affixed to a transceiver assembly indicating the frequency plan specialization
(example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Fig. 69. Transceiver front views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 70. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Space Diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fig. 71. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Space Diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Fig. 72. 2G and 2GR Transceiver front view meaning of access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fig. 73. Position of Hardware setting dip switches and guarantee seal for 2GR transceivers . . . . 136
Fig. 74. Position of Hardware setting dip switches for 2G transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 75. Dip switch banks for transceiver hardware setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fig. 76. Choice of frequency setting by HW or SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fig. 77. HW setting of go and return channel frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Fig. 78. HW setting of MASTER/SLAVE Rx Local Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 79. Branching Front Plate Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fig. 80. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fig. 81. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering . . . . . 150
Fig. 82. BALUN adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fig. 83. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at reartop side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Fig. 84. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Fig. 85. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fig. 86. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Fig. 87. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fig. 88. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Fig. 89. System cabling: types of used cables (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fig. 90. System cabling: types of used cables (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fig. 91. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity . . . . . 165
Fig. 92. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . . . 167
Fig. 93. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity . . . . . . . . 169
Fig. 94. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Fig. 95. New radio infrastructures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 96. STMN ring closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 97. N x STM1 radio backbones and fibre optic backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fig. 98. STM1/STM0 radio spurs of stmn backbones or rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fig. 99. LHR system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Fig. 100. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Fig. 101. Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fig. 102. Single channel transceiver block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fig. 103. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fig. 104. Single channel regenerator block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fig. 105. Baseband functional protection scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fig. 106. Baseband board positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fig. 107. FAN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fig. 108. XPIC operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fig. 109. Frequency reuse system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fig. 110. ATPC Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Fig. 111. General Multiplexing Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fig. 112. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 25 / 522
Fig. 113. 1650SMC and unit SERGI front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fig. 114. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Fig. 115. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Fig. 116. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Fig. 117. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fig. 118. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fig. 119. DCC management: Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Fig. 120. DCC management: WMSN case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Fig. 121. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Fig. 122. 9600LSY WMSN eastwest configuration block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Fig. 123. Channel arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fig. 124. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fig. 125. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Fig. 126. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Fig. 127. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fig. 128. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Fig. 129. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Fig. 130. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Fig. 131. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Fig. 132. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration . . . . . . 264
Fig. 133. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per
rack version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Fig. 134. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Fig. 135. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution . 267
Fig. 136. Main / slave LO mutual protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Fig. 137. Rack and shelves layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Fig. 138. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fig. 139. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Fig. 140. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . 276
Fig. 141. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H
channels on the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Fig. 142. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel
on the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Fig. 143. Expansion procedure with reused channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Fig. 144. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Fig. 145. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering) . . . 280
Fig. 146. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering) . . . . . . . 285
Fig. 147. FANS UNIT(slot numbering and board types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Fig. 148. DTMF Telephone kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fig. 149. Telephone set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fig. 150. Special extractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Fig. 151. Special cord for PRx measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Fig. 152. Cord for use with SIBDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Fig. 153. First Level Maintenance procedure summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Fig. 154. Station Alarms on TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Fig. 155. System Controller front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Fig. 156. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fig. 157. System Controller front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Fig. 158. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Fig. 159. Indications on SERVICE and RRASTANDBY for protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Fig. 160. RRA line loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Fig. 161. RRA internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Fig. 162. RFCOH Internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Fig. 163. Troubleshooting on the radio link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Fig. 164. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Fig. 165. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Fig. 166. SOH management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Fig. 167. Service channels functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Fig. 168. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
FRONT MATTER
26 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Fig. 169. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Fig. 170. DCCR management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fig. 171. ATPC management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Fig. 172. VC4 generation from 3 TUG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Fig. 173. Sub STM1 terminal functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Fig. 174. TIM algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Fig. 175. The 16_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Fig. 176. The 1_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Fig. 177. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply
distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Fig. 178. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Fig. 179. LHR control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Fig. 180. LHR communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fig. 181. WMSN control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Fig. 182. System Controller block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Fig. 183. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram . . . . . . . . . 396
Fig. 184. Remote inventory subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Fig. 185. Additional Housekeeping block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Fig. 186. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Fig. 187. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Fig. 188. Switch logic at Tx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Fig. 189. Switch logic at Rx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Fig. 190. Rx section alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Fig. 191. Tx section alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Fig. 192. Switching criteria forwarding to switching logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Fig. 193. RRACHANNEL block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Fig. 194. RRA STANDBY block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Fig. 195. STM1 optical module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Fig. 196. MODEM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Fig. 197. SERVICE block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Fig. 198. DSI channel implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Fig. 199. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fig. 200. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Fig. 201. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Fig. 202. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fig. 203. Transmit and Service module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Fig. 204. Block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Fig. 205. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Fig. 206. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Fig. 207. Fan subsystem block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Fig. 208. Station Alarms on TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fig. 209. Standard 9600LSYLHR equipment identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Fig. 210. Largesubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Fig. 211. Smallsubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Fig. 212. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Fig. 213. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Fig. 214. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Fig. 215. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Fig. 216. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Fig. 217. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Fig. 218. Fully equipped 9600LSYLHR/HPA view (sidebyside configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Fig. 219. LHR rack and shelves layout for LHR/HPA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Fig. 220. Layout of max 4 channels in BB & TR shelves for LHR/HPA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Fig. 221. HPA module front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Fig. 222. ModemTransceiverBoosterBranching logical connections in 9600LSYLHR/HPA
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Fig. 223. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Fig. 224. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views . . . . . . . . 488
Fig. 225. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units . . . . . . . . . . . 489
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 27 / 522
Fig. 226. Fan subsystem block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Fig. 227. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Fig. 228. Phased out Optical Modules P/N 3AL78815AA** and 3AL78815AB** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Fig. 229. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Fig. 230. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
TABLES
Tab. 1. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Tab. 2. Installation and commissioning documentation set for the standard LHR system . . . . . . . . 34
Tab. 3. System components (racks and shelves) according to configuration and SWP release . . 35
Tab. 4. Summary of hardware settings of equipment boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tab. 5. Hardware installation sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Tab. 6. Electrical installation sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tab. 7. TRU alarms software configuration sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Tab. 8. Input Housekeeping Additional Housekeeping units M1 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tab. 9. Additional Housekeeping M1 TRU M2 interconnection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Tab. 10. TRU M1 Station Alarms connector pinout description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tab. 11. TRU M2 circuit breakers alarms connector pinout description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tab. 12. TRU Service Battery and Alarm service M3 connector pinout description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tab. 13. TRU breaker assignment and types in 9600LSY/LHR and WMSN system . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Tab. 14. Power supply interconnections between TRU and LHR shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tab. 15. Power supply interconnections between TRU and ADM shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tab. 16. Interconnections between TRU and LHR and ADM shelves for Rack Alarms . . . . . . . . . . 96
Tab. 17. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Tab. 18. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Tab. 19. Transceiver families and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Tab. 20. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Tab. 21. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Tab. 22. Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tab. 23. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Tab. 24. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT
EXTENSION CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Tab. 25. Signal connections for LHRADM 1650SMC interconnection: Cables belonging to
CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Tab. 26. Signal connections for LHR interconnection with other types of ADM (e.g. 1850TSS) . . 162
Tab. 27. Signal connections for LHRLPS and LHRLPSADM interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Tab. 28. Summary of auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Tab. 29. Aux channel G703 and RS232 BB shelfs M182 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Tab. 30. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker BB shelfs M190 connector pinout . . . . . . . . 175
Tab. 31. Aux channel V11 BB shelfs M191 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Tab. 32. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tab. 33. RS232 for F interface connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tab. 34. Station Alarms (Rack lamps) BB shelfs M184 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tab. 35. Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) BB shelfs M193 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Tab. 36. Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) BB shelfs M183 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Tab. 37. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) BB shelfs M192 connector
pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Tab. 38. Input Housekeeping BB shelfs M185 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Tab. 39. 9600LSY Part list Common parts (frequency independent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Tab. 40. Notes to Tab. 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tab. 41. 9600LSY radio family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Tab. 42. 9600LSY user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Tab. 43. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Tab. 44. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST . 206
Tab. 45. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Tab. 46. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tab. 47. RFCOH byte structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tab. 48. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tab. 49. Rack and shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Tab. 50. System Controller card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Tab. 51. Service card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
FRONT MATTER
28 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 52. RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Tab. 53. Modem cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Tab. 54. PSU cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Tab. 55. Dummy plates for RRAModem and PSU equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tab. 56. PSF cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Tab. 57. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tab. 58. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Tab. 59. Logical Fans assembled unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Tab. 60. Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Tab. 61. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Tab. 62. Indications on SERVICE for Rxside protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tab. 63. Indications on RRASTANDBY for Txside protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tab. 64. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm
severity terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins. . . . . . . . . 317
Tab. 65. FPGA list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Tab. 66. Assembly / unit replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tab. 67. DCC Mapping & Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Tab. 68. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Tab. 69. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives . . . . . . . 441
Tab. 70. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Tab. 71. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Tab. 72. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Tab. 73. Available frequency bands and frequency plans for 9600LSYLHR/HPA system . . . . . . . 471
Tab. 74. Association between LHR racks TRIs and HPA modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Tab. 75. Part List of 9674LSY 2G Transceiver for HPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Tab. 76. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Tab. 77. Fans assembled unit & cover equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Tab. 78. 9600LSY/LHR, LHRHPA and LHRLPS documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Tab. 79. Handbooks related to LHR version only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Tab. 80. Additional handbooks related to LHRHPA version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Tab. 81. Additional handbooks related to LPS subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Tab. 82. 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Tab. 83. Handbooks related to LHRC version only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Tab. 84. LHR and LHRC additional handbooks for installation, commissioning and maintenance
purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Tab. 85. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control 504
Tab. 86. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Tab. 87. Handbooks common to AlcatelLucent Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . 506
Tab. 88. Documentation on CDROM for 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Tab. 89. List Of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Tab. 90. List Of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Tab. 91. List of enclosed documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
FRONT MATTER
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 29 / 522
a)
30 / 522
END OF FRONT MATTER
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x LHR version
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10

INSTALLATION AND TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
FRONT MATTER
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x
LHR version

Part A: Hardware Installation Handbook
HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 31 / 522
This handbook (from page 31 to page 188 ) is the part A of the whole handbook.
For its use during equipment installation operations, this part can be extracted from the whole handbook,
but take into account that, inside it, there are information referenced to (i.e. necessary) by part B
(Technical Handbook).
N.B. Cross references to page numbers > 188 are references to the part B (Technical Handbook).
Such references are for scopes (provisioning, descriptions and maintenance) that are out of the
aim of this Hardware Installation Handbook, so that they can be ignored during the installation
phases.
32 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
SECTION 1: HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK
SECTION CONTENT PAGE
Chapter 11 About this handbook 34
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Chapter 12 Installation and commissioning summary

It sumsup the phases and the documentation to be used in order to install and
35
commission a LHR or WMSN system as delivered from AlcatelLucent factory.
Always start with this chapter to carry out installation!
Chapter 13 Unpacking and warehousing 51
Chapter 14 Installation rules and sequence 53
Chapter 15 Hardware installation sequence 57
Chapter 16 Electrical installation sequence 81
Chapter 17 TRU alarms software configuration sequence 99
OPERATIVE INFORMATION ON EQUIPMENT BOARDS

Detailed operative information regarding the 9600LSYLHRs unit
assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the
access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons) and hardware setting
description are given.
Chapter 18 Operative information on equipment boards (except

105
microwave area)
Chapter 19 Operative information on microwave area (transceivers and

127
branching)
Chapter 110 System cabling

It describes the 9600LSYLHR system cabling: location of access points for cabling,
147
types of cables used for internal connections, pointtopoint cabling of internal
connections, description of pinout of connectors for external connections.
Chapter 111 Equipment part list 183
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 33 / 522
11 ABOUT THIS HANDBOOK

11.1 Handbook structure
This manual is composed by the following parts:

part A (this part): the Hardware Installation Handbook , whose structure is described below
part B: the Technical Handbook, starting on page 189 , whose structure is described in para.21.2
on page 194 .
11.2 Installation Handbook structure
This manual is the part A of the whole handbook, and contains the whole operative information for the
equipment installation and commissioning, as depicted on page 33
N.B. This manual applies to the standard system LHR. For the LHR/HPA system, make reference
to the Appendix B HPA Configuration on page 471.
If supplied on paper, for its use during equipment installation operations, this part can be extracted,
together with the front matter pages, from the whole handbook, but take into account that, inside it, there
are information referenced to (i.e. necessary) by part B (Technical Handbook).
N.B. Cross references to page numbers > 188 are references to the part B (Technical Handbook).
Such references are for scopes (provisioning, descriptions and maintenance) that are out of the
aim of this Hardware Installation Handbook, so that they can be ignored during the installation
phases.
11.3 Installation and commissioning documentation set for the standard LHR
system
Tab. 2. herebelow lists the handbooks that can be used for the installation and commissioning of a
standard LHR system. It is a subset of Tab. 78. on page 498, reference to which must be made for any
additional information you may need.
Tab. 2. Installation and commissioning documentation set for the standard LHR system
USAGE
REF Note
Rel.1.0 Rel.2.x
INSTALLATION AND TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.x & 2.x HW Installation and Technical Handbook
[A] x x
(this handbook)
9600LSY Hardware setting documents [M] x x
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings [B] x x
LINEUP HANDBOOKS
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide [C] x
N.B.
9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide [D] x
Interference investigation procedure [N] x x
OPERATORS HANDBOOKS
9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 [O] x
N.B.
9600LSY Rel.2.x CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.x from V2.0.2 [P] x
N.B. in alternative according to SWP version used
34 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
12 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING SUMMARY
This chapter sumsup the phases and the documentation (parts of this manual or other related
handbooks) to be used in order to install and commission a LHR or WMSN system as delivered from
AlcatelLucent factory.
Different cases must be taken into consideration, according to following table:
Tab. 3. System components (racks and shelves) according to configuration and SWP release
SUPPORTED BY
CONFIGURATION COMPONENTS
SWP RELEASE
AND
DESCRIPTION LHR HPA LPS ADM
1.0 2.0 2.1
rack rack shelf shelf
Regenerator
X X X X
on page 36
High power Regenerator

X X X X
on page 39
WMSN
X X X X X
on page 41
High power WMSN

X X X X X
on page 43
Regenerator + LPS
X X X
on page 44
High power Regenerator + LPS

X X X X
on page 48
High power WMSN + LPS

X X X X X
on page 49
Following information is given for each configuration:
equipment composition: [rack(s) and shelves layout]

supply conditions (as delivered from AlcatelLucent factory)
installation and commissioning (summary procedures)
N.B. In general, the LHR regenerator is housed in one rack only. This chapter deals with this standard
case.
Nevertheless, there are some cases where two racks are envisaged. Such special cases are
described in chapter 31 from page 249
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 35 / 522
12.1 Regenerator case

12.1.1 Regenerator equipment composition

TRU
empty
area
BASE BAND SHELF
FANS SHELF
Rx BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 2. Regenerator station rack configuration
12.1.2 Regenerator supply conditions
Equipment, supplied as a turnkey system according to the configuration defined within the order
processing phase, is composed by:
[1] hardware:
shelves and optional components in LHR rack already mounted and fixed in the rack:
always: Enhanced TRU shelf, Base Band shelf, Transceiver shelf, Branching
if provisioned and ordered: Fan Unit for LHR, TRU Kit Loudspeaker, Additional
Housekeeping unit
internal cabling between shelves and optional components in LHR rack already mounted and
connected, included the Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable
all boards and baby boards, according to configuration, already mounted and fixed
in subequipped configurations, dummy plates already mounted and fixed
cabling between boards front panels already mounted, fixed and connected
cables between Transceivers front panels and Branching filters supplied separately (i.e. neither
installed nor connected)
hardware setting options of units already set to match equipment configuration
spare parts set, composition as ordered
36 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
[2] software:
a) SWP CDROM:
one SWP 1.0.x or SWP 2.0.x CDROM (highest 1.0.x or 2.0.x available, unless Customer
requires explicitly a previous version)
b) SYSCO units FLASH CARD:
already loaded with SW consistent with that of the supplied SWP CDROM
with MIB data base already configured according to actual equipment configuration, with
exception of:
the input housekeeping definition for the Enhanced TRUs circuit breakers
monitoring
the definition of the Auxiliary Channels (see Tab. 28. on page 173 )
[3] hardware and software documentation:
1) standard plantindependent documentation, on CDROM and/or as paper copies, to be

specifically ordered (see para.11.3 on page 34 )
2) specific plantdependent documentation, only if envisaged in the contract. If not available,

Customer must be able to define relevant data by Himself.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 37 / 522
12.1.3 Regenerator installation and commissioning

PROCEDURE:

N.B. Remind that such operations must be done on both stations of the radio link (two LHR NEs).

The Line Up guide explains what to do on both stations to commission the radio link as a whole.
[1] Hardware installation
According to the supply conditions specified in previous para.12.1.2 on page 36 , use:
the part A of this manual the (Hardware Installation Handbook, i.e. this part) to:
unpack equipment (chapter 13 on page 51 )
carry out equipment hardware and electrical installation (chapters 14 , 15 and 16 from
page 53 to page 91 ).
[2] Cabling between Transceivers front panels and Branching filters
To make these connections, refer to:
the specific plantdependent documentation1. , if available
or, if plantdependent documentation not available, to the:
handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings (Ref.[B] in Tab. 2. on page 34 in
this manual)
[3] Preparation of Craft Terminal
Install the SWP in the PC environment, using the delivered SWP CDROM, and according to the
instructions given in section INSTALLATION of the CT Operators Handbook associated to the
delivered SWP CDROM (see Tab. 2. on page 34 in this manual)
[4] Power on and commissioning
According to the SWP employed, use the:
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide (Ref.[C] in Tab. 2. on page 34 in this manual)
or, :
9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide (Ref.[D] in Tab. 2. on page 34 in this manual)
taking into account that, according to the supply conditions specified in previous para.12.1.2 on
page 36 , software download to equipment is not required, and NE configuration data (MIB data base
inside FLASH CARD) has already been created in AlcatelLucent factory, with exception of data
specified in following step [5]
N.B. specific NE network routing data may or may not have been defined in AlcatelLucent
factory. For this information, refer to the plantdependent documentation 1. , if available
[5] Plant specific data
1 ) define the input housekeeping for the TRUs circuit breakers monitoring, using the chapter 17
on page 99 of this manual
2) define the Auxiliary Channels (see Tab. 28. on page 173 ), plantspecific input housekeeping
points, etc. as envisaged by plantdependent documentation 1. , if available
[6] Connection of equipment signal interfaces to the transmission and supervision network
Refer to schemes given in the specific plantdependent documentation 1. , if available.
[7] NE data configuration save

Using the instructions given in section INSTALLATION of the CT Operators Handbook already
used in step [3] above, save the NE MIB data base (data file) and NE network routing data (not
saveable on data file, but on description file or paper) .
1. see point [3]2 ) on page 37

38 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
12.2 High power Regenerator case
12.2.1 High power Regenerator equipment composition

LHRHPA INTERCONNECTIONS
(branching and signals)
LHR TRU HPA TRU

empty
empty area
area Tx BRANCHING
BASE BAND
BOOSTERS
SHELF
FANS SHELF
Rx BRANCHING
empty
TRANSCEIVER area
SHELF
Tx BRANCHING
(present but unused)
LHR HPA
RACK RACK
Fig. 3. High power Regenerator station rack configuration
N.B. The High power Regenerator detailed description is given in Appendix B on page 471
12.2.2 High power Regenerator supply conditions
[1] Regenerator (LHR rack):
a) hardware:
see para.12.1.2 on page 36 , with additional specific information given in para.62.3 from page
474 (LHR rack equipment provisioning for LHR/HPA system)
b) software:
1) SWP CDROM:
one SWP 2.0.x CDROM (highest 2.0.x available, unless Customer requires
explicitly a previous version 2.)
2) SYSCO units FLASH CARD:

see point [2] b ) on page 37
2. minimum version for HPA management is 2.0.5. Refer to V2.x Craft Terminal Operators
Handbook for details.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 39 / 522
[2] HPA rack: according to the configuration defined within the order processing phase, it is usually
delivered with all components (TRU, Tx branching, and boosters) already mounted in the rack and

cabled (rack internal cabling).

[3] Documentation:
1) Regenerator (LHR rack): see point [3]1 ) on page 37
2) HPA rack: see Tab. 80. on page 500
3) specific LHRHPA plantdependent documentation, only if envisaged in the contract. If not

available, Customer must be able to define relevant data by Himself.
12.2.3 High power Regenerator installation and commissioning
Information given in previous para.12.1.3 on page 38 (Regenerator installation and commissioning),

must be integrated by that given in the specific additional handbooks related to LHRHPA version, listed
in Tab. 80. on page 500 .
In particular, the 9600LSY/LHRHPA Installation and Technical Handbook ( REF.[F] on page 500 ),
describes how to:
install the HPA rack
interconnect it to the LHR rack
carry out the commissioning of the High power Regenerator system as a whole.
40 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
12.3 WMSN case

12.3.1 WMSN equipment composition

TRU

ADM SHELF
BB SHELF

FAN UNIT
FOR ADM Additional items
for WMSN
ADMLHR
REGENERATOR configuration
FAN UNIT INTERCONNECTION
(standard
FOR LHR CABLES
LHR)
TRI SHELF
Fig. 4. WMSN station rack configuration
12.3.2 WMSN supply conditions

[1] Regenerator: see para.12.1.2 on page 36
[2] Additional items for WMSN configuration:
1 ) ADM SHELF: it is delivered as separated item together with its specific boards and necessary
installation materials and cables. It is not installed in the LHR rack.
For detailed information, refer to specific documentation, as defined in point [3]2 ) below
2 ) FAN UNIT FOR ADM: it must be equal to that employed in LHR system.
There are two cases:
a ) this FAN UNIT unit is ordered together with the LHR regenerator.
In this case, it is already mounted, fixed and cabled to the LHR system; moreover, its
configuration data are already present in the MIB data base inside LHRs FLASH CARD.
b ) this FAN UNIT unit is ordered not together with the LHR regenerator.
In this case, it is delivered as separated item, not installed in the rack, together with
installation mechanical accessories and cables (1 signal cable + 2 power supply cables).
3 ) ADMLHR INTERCONNECTION CABLES; supplied as individual items, number as defined
by contract. Cables types are:
one Ethernet cable between SYSCOs connector (M1) [see Fig. 52. on page 109 ] and
the corresponding ADMs Ethernet interface (refer to ADM specific documentation)
and, for each STM1 interconnection:
for electric STM1 interface, one special cable as in Fig. 89. on page 159 (for
1650SMC only) , or standard coax cables in case of 1850TSS.
for optical STM1 interface, one couple of optical fibers
[3] Documentation:
1 ) Regenerator: see point [3]1 ) on page 37
2 ) ADM: see para.64.2.5.2 on page 507
3 ) WMSN specific plantdependent documentation, only if envisaged in the contract. If not
available, Customer must be able to define relevant data by Himself.
N.B. Integration test of WMSN system at AlcatelLucent factory is not envisaged.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 41 / 522
12.3.3 WMSN installation and commissioning

PROCEDURE:

[1] Installation and commissioning of LHR: carry out all steps described in para.12.1.3 on page 38
[2] Installation and commissioning of FAN UNIT FOR ADM
N.B. This step must be carried out only in case b ) on page 41 (items ordered not together with
the LHR regenerator)
1) Making reference to descriptions and figures of para.18.3 on page 122 (FAN UNIT unit
operative information), carry out hardware installation, cabling and setting as follows:
a) install the circuit breakers relevant to FAN UNIT for ADM subrack (see para.16.3.5 and
Tab. 13. on pages 90 to 92 )
b) install the FAN UNIT FOR ADM in the rack proper position
c) set its (I1) and (I2) dipswitches (Fig. 65. on page 122), corresponding to the can bus
address 12, in the configuration defined for ADM SHELF in point c ) on page 123
d) by suitably delivered cables:
connect its power supply cables as specified in Tab. 15. on page 94
connect its (M3) connector ( Fig. 65. on page 122 ) to the Base Band shelf as
specified in Tab. 24. on page 161 case b ) Configuration: BB FAN shelf + ADM
FAN shelf
2) Switch ON the TRU breakers of step a ) above and verify that fans rotate
3) By LHR Craft Terminal, define the equipment of the FAN UNIT FOR ADM and, inside it, of the
FANS ASSEMBLED unit (to do that, use the instructions given in section NE MANAGEMENT,
chapter Equipment Management of the CT Operators Handbook already used in step [3]
of para.12.1.3 on page 38 )
4) Save the NE MIB data base, using the instructions given in section INSTALLATION of the CT
Operators Handbook already used in step [3] of para.12.1.3 on page 38
[3] Installation and commissioning of ADM

Operate as specified by its specific documentation, as defined in para.64.2.5.2 on page 507 , and/or
to WMSN specific plantdependent documentation (point [3]3 ) on page 41 )
[4] LHRADM interconnection (see point [2]3 ) on page 41 )

Refer to WMSN specific plantdependent documentation (point [3]3 ) on page 41 )
[5] LHRADM integration tests

Carry out operative checks, taking into account that LHR and ADM are different NEs.
42 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
12.4 High power WMSN case
12.4.1 High power WMSN equipment composition

LHR TRU HPA TRU

empty
INTERCONNECTION
ADM SHELF area

Tx BRANCHING
ADMLHR
CABLES
FANS SHELF FOR ADM
BASE BAND
BOOSTERS
SHELF
FANS SHELF FOR LHR

Rx BRANCHING
empty
TRANSCEIVER area
SHELF
Tx BRANCHING
LHR HPA
RACK RACK
Fig. 5. High power WMSN station rack configuration
12.4.2 High power WMSN supply conditions

[1] Regenerator (LHR rack): see point [1] on page 39
[2] HPA rack: see point [2] on page 40
[3] Additional items for WMSN configuration: see point [2] on page 41
[4] Documentation:
1 ) Regenerator (LHR rack): see point [3]1 ) on page 37
2 ) HPA rack: see Tab. 80. on page 500
4 ) specific High power WMSN plantdependent documentation, only if envisaged in the contract.
If not available, Customer must be able to define relevant data by Himself.
12.4.3 High power WMSN installation and commissioning
This configuration is merely the combination of these cases:

High power Regenerator case, para.12.2 on page 39
WMSN case, para.12.3 on page 41
Refer to both them for system installation and commissioning, according to the plantdependent
documentation stated above.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 43 / 522
12.5 Regenerator + LPS case

12.5.1 Regenerator + LPS equipment composition

The LPS subrack is equipped in the transceiver shelf, taking the unused place of two adjacent transceiver
units, and can be equipped in two alternative positions, as depicted in Fig. 6. below. Such a choice
depends on the adopted polarization configuration. For details refer to para.32.2.2 on page 275
case 1 case 2
TRU
empty empty
BASE BAND
area area
SHELF
INTERCONNECTION
INTERCONNECTION
FANS SHELF
LHRLPS
LHRLPS
CABLES
CABLES
Rx BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER

SHELF

LPS
subrack

Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 6. Regenerator + LPS station rack configuration
Two cases are considered in the following:
a) Regenerator + LPS supplied by AlcatelLucent factory on page 45
b) Upgrade of a Regenerator station to a Regenerator+LPS station on page 47
44 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
12.5.2 Case of Regenerator + LPS supplied by AlcatelLucent factory
12.5.2.1 Regenerator + LPS supply conditions

Equipment, supplied as a turnkey system according to the configuration defined within the order
processing phase, is composed by:
[1] hardware:
shelves and optional components in LHR rack already mounted and fixed in the rack:
always: Enhanced TRU shelf, Base Band shelf, Transceiver shelf with LPS subrack (N.B.),
Branching
N.B. LPS subrack is supplied already installed inside the Transceiver shelf,
populated with the boards defined within the order processing phase
if provisioned and ordered: Fan Unit for LHR, TRU Kit Loudspeaker, Additional
Housekeeping unit
internal cabling between shelves and optional components in LHR rack already mounted and
connected, included the:
Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable
interconnections between LHR and LPS subsystem
all boards and baby boards, according to configuration, already mounted and fixed
in subequipped configurations, dummy plates already mounted and fixed
cabling between boards front panels already mounted, fixed and connected
cables between Transceivers front panels and Branching filters supplied separately (i.e. neither
installed nor connected)
hardware setting options of units already set to match equipment configuration
spare parts set, composition as ordered
[2] software:
1) SWP CDROM:
one SWP 2.1.x CDROM (highest 2.1.x available, unless Customer requires explicitly a
previous version 3. )
2) SYSCO units FLASH CARD:

see point [2] b ) on page 37
N.B. in this case, SYSCO units FLASH CARD contains also the SW data regarding the
LPS subsystem (equipment provisioning and interconnection data)
[3] Documentation:
1) Regenerator: see point [3] 1 ) on page 37
2) LPS subsystem: see Tab. 81. on page 500
3) specific Regenerator + LPS plantdependent documentation, only if envisaged in the contract.

If not available, Customer must be able to define relevant data by Himself.
3. minimum version for LPS management is 2.1.1. Refer to V2.x Craft Terminal Operators
Handbook for details.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 45 / 522
12.5.2.2 Regenerator + LPS installation and commissioning


PROCEDURE:
[1] Installation and commissioning of LHR: carry out all steps described in para.12.1.3 on page 38
N.B. to make things easier, the commissioning phase should be done with the LHR STM1
interfaces connected directly to the external lines (i.e. bypassing the LPS subsystem).
It means that, as the LPS subsystem has been delivered from AlcatelLucent factory
already mounted in the rack and cabled, STM1 signal connections between LHR and LPS
subsystem should be removed.
[2] LHRLPS interconnection remake and check
Remake LHRLPS STM1 signal interconnections (removed in step [1] above), checking that they
comply with those specified in 4. . If necessary, change them making also reference to 5. .
[3] Regenerator + LPS commissioning
1) LPS subsystem SW provisioning
As the SYSCO units FLASH CARD has been delivered from AlcatelLucent factory already
containing the V2.1 SWP and the SW data regarding the LPS subsystem (equipment
provisioning and interconnection data) , by Craft Terminal (making reference to 6. ), check that
they comply with those specified in 4. . If necessary, change them.
2) Regenerator + LPS functional check
Using handbook 6. , and simulating transmission network faults, check the line protection
functionality.
4. Regenerator + LPS specific plantdependent documentation. See point [3]3 ) on page 45

5. 9600LSY/LPS Installation and Technical Handbook REF.[H] in Tab. 81. on page 500 of this
manual.
6. 9600LSY/LPS CT Operators Handbook REF.[I] in Tab. 81. on page 500 of this manual.
46 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
12.5.3 Upgrade of a Regenerator station to a Regenerator+LPS station
Items, supplied as separate parts, necessary for this upgrade are:

LPS subrack and boards (defined within the order processing phase)
cables for interconnections between LHR and LPS subsystem (defined within the order processing
phase)
one SWP 2.1.x CDROM (highest 2.1.x available, unless Customer requires explicitly a previous
version, see footnote 1. on page 38 )
a new FLASH CARD already containing the V2.1 SWP and the SW data regarding the LPS
subsystem (equipment provisioning and interconnection data), besides data of current system
PROCEDURE:
N.B. this operation cannot be without traffic interruption. For additional information and details not
given here, please refer to AlcatelLucent technical assistance.
[1] LPS installation

1) Switch off the four TRUs circuit breakers giving power to LHR Transceiver shelf (see Tab. 14.
on page 94 )
SAFETY RULES
This operation is mandatory, to avoid the presence of battery voltage on
transceiver shelf connectors while inserting the LPS subrack.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,
low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
2) Insert and fix the LPS subrack in the envisaged position of Transceiver shelf, making reference
to 7.
3) Insert and fix the LPS boards in the envisaged position making reference to 7. and 8.
4) Switch on the four TRUs circuit breakers switched off in step [1] 1 ) above
[2] LPSLHR interconnection cabling

Carry out such cabling making reference to 7. and 8.
[3] SWP upgrade
1) Preparation of Craft Terminal
Install the new SWP 2.1 in the PC environment, using the delivered SWP CDROM, and
according to the instructions given in section INSTALLATION of the V2.x CT Operators
Handbook
2) Flash Card replacement
Replace the SYSCO units existing FLASH CARD with the new supplied by AlcatelLucent
factory (containing the V2.1 SWP and the SW data regarding the LPS subsystem (equipment
provisioning and interconnection data), besides data of current system)
[4] Regenerator + LPS commissioning and checks

Proceed as specified in point [3] on page 46
7. 9600LSY/LPS Installation and Technical Handbook REF.[H] in Tab. 81. on page 500 of this
manual.
8. Regenerator + LPS specific plantdependent documentation. See point [3]3 ) on page 45
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 47 / 522
12.6 High power Regenerator + LPS case

12.6.1 High power Regenerator + LPS equipment composition


LHR TRU HPA TRU

empty
empty area
area Tx BRANCHING
BASE BAND
BOOSTERS
INTERCONNECTION
SHELF
FANS SHELF
LHRLPS
CABLES
Rx BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER empty
SHELF area
LPS subrack
Tx BRANCHING
LHR HPA
RACK RACK
N.B. The LPS subrack can be housed also on the right side of the transceiver shelf (see para.12.5.1
on page 44 )
Fig. 7. High power Regenerator + LPS station rack configuration
12.6.2 High power Regenerator + LPS supply conditions

[1] Regenerator (LHR rack) and HPA rack: see points [1] and [2] on page 39
[2] LPS subrack, boards and interconnections between LHR and LPS subsystem : see point [1]
on page 45
[3] Documentation:
3 ) LPS subsystem: see Tab. 81. on page 500
4 ) specific High power Regenerator + LPS plantdependent documentation, only if envisaged in
the contract. If not available, Customer must be able to define relevant data by Himself.
12.6.3 High power Regenerator + LPS installation and commissioning

High power Regenerator case, para.12.2 on page 39
Regenerator + LPS case, para.12.5.2 on page 45
48 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
12.7 High power WMSN + LPS case
12.7.1 High power WMSN+ LPS equipment composition

LHR TRU HPA TRU

empty
ADM SHELF area
Tx BRANCHING
FANS SHELF FOR ADM
INTERCONNECTION
ADMLHRLPS
BASE BAND
BOOSTERS
SHELF
CABLES
FANS SHELF FOR LHR

Rx BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER empty
SHELF area
LPS subrack
Tx BRANCHING
LHR HPA
RACK RACK
N.B. The LPS subrack can be housed also on the right side of the transceiver shelf (see para.12.5.1
on page 44 )
Fig. 8. High power WMSN + LPS station rack configuration
12.7.2 High power WMSN+ LPS supply conditions

[1] Regenerator (LHR rack) and HPA rack: see points [1] and [2] on page 39
[2] Additional items for WMSN configuration: see point [2] on page 41
[3] LPS subrack, boards and interconnections between LHR and LPS subsystem : see point [1]
on page 45
[4] Documentation:
3 ) LPS subsystem: see Tab. 81. on page 500
5 ) specific High power WMSN + LPS plantdependent documentation, only if envisaged in the
contract. If not available, Customer must be able to define relevant data by Himself.
12.7.3 High power WMSN + LPS installation and commissioning

High power WMSN case, para.12.4 on page 43
Regenerator + LPS case, para.12.5.2 on page 45
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 49 / 522
12.8 Summary of hardware settings of equipment boards

Tab. 4. Summary of hardware settings of equipment boards

UNIT
HW SETTING HW SETTING DESCRIPTION
UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTION
NEED IN PARAGRAPH:
IN PARAGRAPH:
SYSCO 18.2.2 page 108 YES 18.2.2.2 page 110
19 page 127 YES 19.6 page 135
TRANSCEIVER N.B. in particular, transceiver hardware setting includes the RF

channelling (setting of Tx and Rx frequencies) as well as the
Frequency Reuse and Space Diversity options
FAN UNIT 18.3 page 122 YES point c ) page 123
for the TC and DipSwitch

SERVICE 18.2.3 page 113 YES physical position on the board
and their meaning, refer to the
specific documents contained in
the handbook 9600LSY
Hardware setting documents
MODEM 18.2.7 page 119 YES (REF.[M] on page 503 of this
manual).
PSF & PSU 18.2.1 page 107
RRACHANNEL 18.2.4 page 115 NO
RRARRASTBY 18.2.5 page 117
N.B. for the ADMs units, refer to the specific handbooks supplied with it
50 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
13 UNPACKING AND WAREHOUSING
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Brace top of rack/subrack during

movement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that can twist or damage
backplane.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Combined equipment weight exceeds
50 Kg. Use materialhandling equipment to lift equipment.
13.1 General
The following procedures have been issued and must be observed when unpacking the equipment.
The reciprocal operation must be done for repacking. In such case it is recommended to use the original
packing material.
The following sturdy outer packing material is utilized in order to protect the equipment against mechanical
and climatic stresses to which they are subjected:
wooden crates for transport by ship, air, on road for periods longer than 60 days
plywood crates for transport by ship, air, on road for periods of 30 to 60 days
cardboard boxes for transport by air or on road for periods of less than 30 days
13.2 Unpacking
13.2.1 Preliminary checks
The following information should be printed on the outer crate:
International symbols:
side up
keep dry
fragile
trade mark/address of the manufacturing company;

labels (or templated marks) indicating information on the contract and destination site of the product;
an envelope holding among others the packing list
Upon receipt check:
that the final destination of the crates is that indicated on the label;
that no damage was made to the cases
Report any shipping damages to the Companys representative or the Shipping Agent.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 51 / 522
13.2.2 Unpacking phases

When having to unpack proceed as follows:

make sure that the packing has been properly positioned, refer to the symbol
open the case;
remove the shockproof material;
remove the goods from the case;
remove prepacking, the polyethylene bag and any other protection;
remove the plastic bags cellotaped to the rack and containing accessories;
remove the dehydrating bags;
ascertain that the goods are not damaged and that they correspond to those indicated on the packing
list enclosed in the envelope. Conversely, contact the agencys representative.
N.B. When unpacking it is advisable to handle the packing material with care; it might be reused for
packing again if it must be reshipped.
No antistatic wearing precaution are required for the unpacking phase.
13.3 Warehousing
If having to store the packed material, the following requirements must be met:
the cardboard boxes must be placed indoors in airy rooms;
the wooden or plywood cases can be placed outdoors, provided they are protected against rain and
direct sunlight.
52 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
14 INSTALLATION RULES AND SEQUENCE
14.1 General installation rules
ATTENTION EMC NORMS
SAFETY RULES
After performing the TRU mechanical installation, perform the TRU ground connection (in case the
rack is not that envisaged by AlcatelLucent).
Before performing any electrical connection operation, make sure that the power supply circuit
breaker at the customer distributor panel is turn OFF.
Before performing any electrical connection operation from TRU to any subrack, make sure that the
correspondent TRU power supply circuit breaker is turn OFF.
In case of expansions, to carry out any new electrical connection from the TRU to a new shelf:
position the TRUtoshelf power supply cables and connect them only to the TRUs
correspondent circuit breaker, without connecting them to the new shelf
turn ON the new circuit breakers and verify the correct polarity and quality connection on it, on
the connector at new shelf side
turn OFF such new circuit breakers
connect the power supply cables to the new NEs connectors, and screw them
power ON the new circuit breakers and check for few minutes if is there any anomalies
condition.
For more details, refer to the Safety Rules stated into Appendix A on page 449 (Technical Handbook part
of this manual), which describes the operations and/or precautions to be observed to safeguard operating
personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the Equipments.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 53 / 522
14.2 Installation sequence

Proceed sequentially as specified in following:

Tab. 5. below: Hardware installation sequence
then, Tab. 6. on page 55: Electrical installation sequence
and, after the commissioning phase, Tab. 7. on page 56: TRU alarms software configuration
sequence
N.B. For standard supplies to Customers, steps denoted by (X) should have already been done in
Factory, according to the standard supply conditions described in Chapter 12 Installation
and commissioning summary on page 35). In such a case you could omit them (nevertheless,
they are described just for information completion).
On the contrary, steps denoted by X must be done in field.
Tab. 5. Hardware installation sequence
LHR with Additional

Housekeeping ..
paragraph
STEP and all its ..
subparagraphs ..
Substitutive
Unit
Cable
Introduction to the Rack (read all subparagraphs till 15.1

X
page 67) page 57
15.2
Information to retrieve from the Plant Documentation X
page 68
15.3
Choice of next step X
page 69
15.3.1
Fixing the Rack Using Expansion Bolts X
page 69
15.3.2
Fixing to floating floor X
page 72
15.4
page 74
(X)
Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable 15.4.1
if not done in
installation page 75
factory
Additional Housekeeping Unit fastening to the rack 15.4.2

X
and cabling page 77
Installation of FAN UNIT for LHR and/or ADM,

necessary only if you need to install it/them (if 15.5
if necessary
envisaged in plant documentation, but not installed in page 80
factory)
54 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 6. Electrical installation sequence
paragraph
STEP and all its need

subparagraphs
16.1
RACK Safety rules read ! X
page 81
RACK Protection ground connections:
16.2.1
Grounding the rack X
page 82
16.2.2 if not done in
Grounding the racks rear cover
page 83 factory
16.3.1
TRU description read pages 84 to 86 ! X
page 84
16.3.2
TRU front cover remotion X
page 88
16.3.3.1
TRU Installation and cabling of TRU Kit Loudspeaker (optional) if necessary
page 88
Electrical connections from TRU toward the Station Power 16.3.4 read safety
Supply batteries page 89 rules!
16.3.4.1
Main Power Supply connections X
page 89
16.3.4.2
Service Battery connection X
page 90
16.3.4.3
Check of correct polarity X
page 90
TRU breaker types, installation (and replacement),
necessary only if you need to install circuit breakers for: 16.3.5
FAN UNIT for LHR and/or ADM (if envisaged in plant pages 90 if necessary
documentation, but not installed in factory) to 92
ADM
Electrical connections from TRU toward equipment shelves,
necessary only if you need to install power supply cables for:
16.3.6
FAN UNIT for LHR and/or ADM (if envisaged in plant if necessary
page 93
documentation, but not installed in factory)
ADM
16.3.6.1 read safety
Cabling of power supply cables
page 93 rules!
16.3.6.1.1
Connection tables read ! if necessary
pages 93 to 94
How to connect/disconnect power supply cables to/from 16.3.6.1.2
if necessary
TRU breakers terminals page 95
16.3.6.2 to be done if
Check of correct polarity on power supply cable connectors
page 95 cables added
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 55 / 522
Tab. 6. Electrical installation sequence

paragraph

STEP and all its need

subparagraphs
Cabling for Rack Alarms interconnections between TRU and
16.3.6.3
ADM shelf, necessary only if you need to install Rack Alarms if necessary
page 96
signal cable for ADM
16.3.7
Final operations on TRU X
page 96
Signal cabling of FAN UNIT for LHR and/or ADM,
necessary only if FAN UNIT for LHR and/or ADM are 16.4
if necessary
envisaged in plant documentation, but were not installed and page 97
cabled in factory
Tab. 7. TRU alarms software configuration sequence
LHR with Additional

Housekeeping ..
paragraph
STEP and all its ..
subparagraphs ..
Substitutive
Unit
Cable
17
page 99
Software Configuration Sequence with Additional 17.1

X
Housekeeping Substitutive Cable page 99
LHR Software Configuration Sequence with 17.2

X
Additional Housekeeping Unit page 101
56 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
15 HARDWARE INSTALLATION SEQUENCE
N.B. Please, read para.14.2 on page 54 , for summary on whole installation sequence.
15.1 Introduction to the Rack
15.1.1 Rack general description
As can be seen from Fig. 9. on page 58, the two fiber and electrical cable ducts (1) located on the front
side of the rack and the two big apertures (2) on the top (3) and bottom (4) frame where the cables can
flow inside the rack without any restriction facilitate the new 9600LSY Radio installation.
The useful height is 2000 / 2200 mm thanks to the structure of the Top Rack Unit TRU (5) and to the upper
and lower sides.
The rack structure consists of two sides secured to the upper and lower sides by means of screws. The
cover (6) on the rear is always screwed to the upright which accomplishes the earthquake shock absorb
function.
The materials have been accurately selected and they are ecological. The surface has not been treated
and all plastic materials are Halogen free.
The rack is equipped with two antistatic points (7) located on the bottom frame on a inclined surface for
a better easy connection.
The parts list of the ETSI rack is described in the plant documentation supplied by AlcatelLucent.
The topologicalfunctional description of TRU and power supply subsystem is given in para.16.3.1 on
page 84 .
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 57 / 522
2

3

5
TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND 1
SHELF)
FANS
Rx
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER
SHELF
Tx
BRANCHING
2
ETSI RACK
EQUIPPED WITH
LHR REGENERATOR
4
Fig. 9. ETSI rack
15.1.2 LHR rack dimensions and antenna circulators output interaxis
The various working radio frequency ranges of the antenna circulators output interaxis are shown in
following figures:
Fig. 10. on page 59 and Fig. 11. on page 60 for the 4 GHz frequency range;
Fig. 12. on page 61 and Fig. 13. on page 62 for the 6/8 GHz frequency range;
Fig. 14. on page 63 and Fig. 15. on page 64 for the 10/13 GHz frequency range.
58 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
N.B. The output waveguide flange are:

9640LSY = UDR40
9647LSY = UDR48
Fig. 10. ETSI rack 4 GHz antenna circulators output interaxis
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 59 / 522

9640LSY = UDR40
9647LSY = UDR48
Fig. 11. ETSI rack 4 GHz antenna circulators output interaxis
60 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10

9662LSY = UDR70
9667LSY = UDR70
9674LSY = UDR70
9681LSY = UDR84
Fig. 12. ETSI rack 6 to 8 GHz antenna circulators output interaxis
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 61 / 522

9662LSY = UDR70
9667LSY = UDR70
9674LSY = UDR70
9681LSY = UDR84
62 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10

9610LSY = UDR100
9611LSY = UDR100
9613LSY = UDR120
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 63 / 522

9610LSY = UDR100
9611LSY = UDR100
9613LSY = UDR120
64 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
15.1.3 User cables installation description
The rack is fitted with two front cover cable ducts through which runs the station cabling.
It is used to gather and direct the cables towards the top or towards the bottom, depending on whether
the station cabling runs at the top of the rack structure (through cable raceways) or under the floor.
The space assigned to the electrical wiring also accommodates the cables used to interconnect the Base
Band and the Transceivers.
Fig. 17. on page 66 illustrates the front cover duct through which runs the electrical and optical wiring;
the Figure details the separators between the two electrical and optical cables runway sections.
Fig. 16. below illustrates the terminal strip used to route the electrical and optical cables towards the lateral
ducts.
Fig. 18. on page 67 illustrates typical station wiring outputting towards the floor.
Optical cable Optical cable Electrical cable

duct inlet terminal strip terminal strip
Fig. 16. Electrical and optical cable distribution terminal strip
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 65 / 522
Fiber ducts Bottom Frame Fiber ducts
Electrical Electrical
cable duct cable duct
Optical cable Electrical cable Electrical and optical

wiring separators
Fig. 17. Right and Left front cover duct
66 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Optional towards
the DDF on the 10 x 2 Mbit/s
Optical right handside unprotected

cable duct I/O cable

cable
BNC connector 1 x 2 Mbit/s STM1 optical STM1 electrical Electrical and optical
Ethernet interface protected connector connector wiring separators
Fig. 18. Typical station cabling floor side
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 67 / 522
15.2 Information to retrieve from the Plant Documentation

LOCATE THE STATION

LOCATE THE RADIO ROOM
RADIO SITE (check compatibility as regards to: width, height and depth)
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL 48V Pwr. Sup. for system and services (rack lamps)
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL 220V
DISTRIBUTION ODF
DISTRIBUTION DDF STM 1 / 2 Mbit/s
DISTRIBUTION CH DATA 64K
DISTRIBUTION /ALL / HA HC / OW
Ground distribution for rack, guide and antenna grounding.
Pressurizer descriptor and waveguide pressurizing descriptor.
Fibers, cables, guide route
Antenna mounting position on the tower
68 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
15.3 Rack Positioning and Fastening
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Brace top of rack/subrack during

movement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that can twist or damage
backplane.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Rack equipment weight exceeds 50 Kg.

Use materialhandling equipment to lift equipment.
N.B. Positioning the rack, be sure to leave at least 600 mm free space to allow the front panel
opening.
Proceed as follows:
Refer to the plant documentation to see rack row assignment
Fasten the rack to the station structure according to one of the following procedures:
fixing the rack to floor, proceed with para.15.3.1 below
fixing the rack to floating floor, proceed with para.15.3.2 on page 72.
15.3.1 Fixing the Rack Using Expansion Bolts
See Fig. 19. on page 70.
1) Mount the rack in a vertical position in the desired place
2) Mark the baseplate with six holes (1) to be drilled on the floor
3) Temporarily remove the rack and drill the holes at the points drawn on the floor (see Fig. 20. on
page 71)
4) Place the inserts into the holes
5) Secure the expander bolts to the floor through the baseplate holes.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 69 / 522
1
20
EXPANSION ANCHOR M8xM40
NOTES:
All dimensions are in
millimetres
* Fixable max thickness
12** ** Diameter drill
Fig. 19. Fixing the rack using expansion bolts
70 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
142 mm
30 mm
30 mm
98 mm
149 mm 300 mm 149 mm
DRILL HOLES
Fig. 20. Drill Holes for Anchoring to the Floor (single rack)
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 71 / 522
15.3.2 Fixing to floating floor

The drilling mask is the same used for concrete floor fastening (Fig. 20. on page 71). In this case must

be create a hole for the cables coming from the bottom according to Fig. 21. below. The rack fastening

is to be realized on the concrete floor below using a suitable stud as shown in Fig. 22. on page 73.
Using the row layout drawing, mark out the cable entry areas in the floor tiles and cut out with a jigsaw.
Remember that the beginning of the row will be agreed with the customer.
N.B. Unused or incompletely used cable entry areas should be blocked off with foam rubber.
598
149 300 149
61.25
96.25
CABLE ENTRY 35
AREA
30
130
30 297.25
35
80
106 81
FIBER DUCTS
26
Fig. 21. Floor tile drilling template
72 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
HEX NUT
LOCKWASHER
FLAT WASHER
BOTTOM
FRAME
STUD
Rack base
FLAT WASHER
LOCKWASHER
HEX NUT
Computer Floor
STUD
HEX NUT
LOCKWASHER Concrete Floor
FLAT WASHER
EXPANSION PLUG
Fig. 22. Example of securing rack assembly to computer floor
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 73 / 522
15.4 Connections between TRU and input housekeepings

The circuit breaker units of Enhanced TRU have state monitoring points, that are forwarded toward the

9600LSY input housekeepings system, in order to detect their alarmed condition (circuit breaker unit

OFF).
There are two alternative solutions to setup this connection:
1) the newer solution makes it through the use of the special Additional Housekeeping
Substitutive Cable (P/N REF.[17] in Tab. 39. on page 183), described in para.15.4.1 on page
75. In this case all circuit breaker alarms are wiredORed, so that it is not possible to
discriminate them.
2) the older solution makes it through the use of the Additional Housekeeping unit (P/N in
Tab. 76. on page 486), described in para.15.4.2 on page 77. With this solution, each TRUs
circuit breaker alarm has its own input housekeeping (the detection of each circuit breaker alarm
is independent from that of the other circuit breaker alarms)
N.B. solution 1 ) is cheaper than solution 2 ) and is that preferably used in newer supplies to
Customers, unless a Customer requires explicitly solution 2 ).
74 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
15.4.1 Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable installation
N.B. In alternative to para.15.4.2 on page 77.

PIN 1
PIN 1 2m
M1
PIN 1
M2
M3
CUSTOMERs
input housekeepings
BBs M185 TRUs breaker alarms
Fig. 23. Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 75 / 522
TRU

female M2
plug cables M3
into TRUs M2
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING SUBSTITUTIVE CABLE

OR all Breakers
21 HK inputs available
to Customer
M3 M2 M1 (22 HK total
male male female 1 HK used for
OR all breakers).
Common rele Common HK
See Tab. 38. on page 182
plug cables M2
into BBs M185
Subrack BB
female M185
Fig. 24. Connection of Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable
76 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
15.4.2 Additional Housekeeping Unit fastening to the rack and cabling
N.B. In alternative to para.15.4.1 on page 75.

Fasten this unit (Fig. 25. below) to the rack, as depicted in Fig. 26. below, and connect its M1 and M2
connectors as described below.
M1
M2
(1) LED
(M1) SUBD25 pins female connector: for pinout see Tab. 8. on page 78.
To be connected to TRU M2 : see Tab. 9. on page 79 and Fig. 32. on page 86
(M2) SUBD9 pins male connector.
To be connected to to BB M179: see Fig. 80. on page 148
LED (red): indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
N.B. This unit has no setting options.
Fig. 25. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view
MINI WIRE WRAP DISTRIBUTOR ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING

AREA
Fig. 26. Additional Housekeeping module fastening to the Rack

3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 77 / 522
Tab. 8. Input Housekeeping Additional Housekeeping units M1 connector pinout

M1 : SUBD25 pins female

PIN SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 INHK1EXT housekeeping input
1
14 9 INHK9EXT housekeeping input
25 14 INHK14EXT housekeeping input
13
19 GND
20 XX internal use
21 XX internal use
22 XX internal use
23 XX internal use
24 XX internal use
25
N.B. Connector position in Fig. 25. on page 77.
78 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 9. Additional Housekeeping M1 TRU M2 interconnection table
BREAKERS M11 ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING Pin con. CANNON M1

1A HK_OUT_23 1
2A HK_OUT_24 2
3A HK_OUT_25 3
4A HK_OUT_26 4
5A HK_OUT_27 5
6A HK_OUT_28 6
1B HK_OUT_29 7
2B HK_OUT_30 8
3B HK_OUT_31 9
4B HK_OUT_32 10
5B HK_OUT_33 11
6B HK_OUT_34 12
Common GND 19
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 79 / 522
15.5 Installation of FAN UNIT for LHR and/or ADM

If the FAN UNIT for LHR and/or for ADM have been ordered together with the LHR system, they are already

installed and cabled in factory.

Otherwise, if one of both have been provisioned and delivered but have not been installed in factory, install
it/them making reference to Fig. 65. on page 122 : fix the FAN UNIT(s) to the rack through the four screws
(A).
Fig. 4. on page 41 shows the position in the rack of the FAN UNIT for LHR and of the FAN UNIT for
ADM.
N.B. Additional operations regarding FAN UNIT(s) are described in following paragraphs:
installation of TRU breaker for FAN UNIT(s) para.16.3.5 on pages 90 to 92
power supply cabling for FAN UNIT(s) para.16.3.6 on pages 93 to 95
signal cabling for FAN UNIT(s) para.16.4 on page 97
80 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
16 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SEQUENCE
16.1 Safety rules
SAFETY RULES
When installing the Rack / Subrack make sure that power has been cutoff.
Connection to protection Ground is the first operation to do.
Power Supply connection must be the last operation to do.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. Ensure
Battery power cables are not connected to office Battery power.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 81 / 522
16.2 RACK Protection ground connections

16.2.1 Grounding the rack

SAFETY RULES
The rack must be connected to the protection ground before performing any other electrical
connection.
The rack must be grounded by means of a cable (max accepted section = 25 mm2) connecting:
the protection ground terminal of the site electrical plant
and any rack grounding point, marked by the symbol
Examples:
lFig. 27. below shows the crimped connection of cable (1) , coming from the site electrical protection
ground, to the cable terminal lug (2) ;
Insert and crimp the cable
2 1
Fig. 27. RACK Connection to the protection ground by crimped cable

following Fig. 28. shows the connection through screw (2) of the cable terminal lug (1) , coming from
the site electrical protection ground, to the rack grounding point (3) .
Fig. 28. RACK Connection to the protection ground by cable terminal lug
82 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
16.2.2 Grounding the racks rear cover
The mechanical coupling between the rack and its rear cover may not guarantee the cover electrical
grounding. Thus (if not already done in factory) as shown in Fig. 29. below, connect the cover grounding
point (1) to any racks grounding point, using a 25 mm2 section cable.
Fig. 29. Grounding the racks rear cover
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 83 / 522
16.3 TRU description and cabling

16.3.1 TRU description

16.3.1.1 General characteristics
Single station battery or double station battery connection
Max. cable section allowed for connection to station batteries is 25mm2
Station battery voltages can be within 48V to 60V 20%
The total amperage, for each battery, must not exceed 100A
Distribution of station battery towards the assemblies: max. 6, housed inside the rack at TRU side;
the cables (max. section allowed 2.5 mm2) are faston connected.
Fuse breakers support: existing breakers of different suppliers with a capacity of 1A, 2A, 10A, 20A
(max.25A) are supported till a max. of 12 (2x6) devices. If the switch amperage is larger than 20 A
it is advisable to space out them in order to reduce the over temperature in between. All the outputs
are protected from short circuit by automatic switches
Distributor for single fuse breaker alarms: the standard working are reported like an open contact
while the alarm will be a ground contact:
open contact 2V | V | 72V = 0.2mA
closed contact 0V | V | 2V = 50mA
The single fuse breaker alarms (housekeepings) are wired to a 25 pins Cannon tagblock fixed on the
back of the TRU mechanical structure. The tagblock can be connected to the Housekeeping unit
(option) fixed on the rack or directly to assembly of the system.
16.3.1.2 Overview
The TRU subrack ( P/N REF.[3] on page 183 ) is always located at the rack top area; it can be installed,
with the adapters supplied with it ( Fig. 30. on page 85 ), in 21 racks or, removing such adapters, in 19
racks. LHR system employs 21 rack type only.
Only in case of 21 racks, the TRU can be rotated on its axis permitting a simpler cabling during installation
activities ( see Fig. 31. on page 85 ).
The TRU can be optionally equipped with the loudspeaker kit (P/N REF.[39] on page 186 ).
The rack lamps are located on the TRU. The optical indications are generated by the Rack Lamps unit
inserted into the TRU.
The TRU can be also connected, independently from the main power supply connections, to the service
power supply (VSERV.) for the internal Rack Lamps unit.
The station power supplies are terminated into the TRU.
The TRU performs the following functions:
delivers the station power supplies to the housed assemblies (equipment).
delivers the service battery (VSERV) if required, to the housed assemblies (equipment).
sums up the commands received from the assemblies (equipment) thus generating optical
indications and transmitting remote alarms towards an external source.
connects the assemblies/equipment to the supervisory network through connectors situated into the
TRU
The detailed functional description of power supply subsystem is given in para.52.2 on page 384.
84 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
16.3.1.3 TRU views
a) Front view
See Fig. 30. and Fig. 31. below:

the 5 screws (1) .. (5) allow the TRU front cover remove and fix for service purpose
the 4 screws (A) .. (D) :
1) in case of 21 racks (this case), allow to disengage the TRU from the adapters, so making
TRU rotation possible for service purpose (easy access the tagblocks and the rear). To
carry out this operation: unscrew the 4 screws (A) .. (D) and withdraw the TRU towards
the front making it slide on the guides.
2) in case of 19 racks (not this case), are used to fix TRU to the rack (after adapters remotion)
TRU adapters for

21 ETSI Rack
(A) (5) (4) (C)

(2)
Holes for loudspeaker sound
TRU
label
(P/N)
(B) Rack 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B (D)

(1) (3)
lamps
BATTERY A BREAKERS BATTERY B BREAKERS
(E) Service battery switch (rack lamps)
Fig. 30. TRU front view and TRU adapters for 21 ETSI Rack
sliding
guide
Fig. 31. Rotated TRU for service (only for installation in 21 racks)
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 85 / 522
the alarm lamps have the following colors and meaning:

RED (1) : URGENT / MAJOR ALARM

RED (2) : NOT URGENT / MINOR ALARM
YELLOW: ALARM ATTENDED OR ABNORMAL CONDITION
GREEN : BATTERY PRESENCE OR EOW LINE BUSY
For additional information, refer to para. 44.3.1 on page 302 .
b) Rear and top view
See Fig. 32. below:
there are 7 connectors M1, fully equivalent with each other (i.e. with paralleled pins), whose
pinout is shown in Tab. 10. on page 87 . Only one of these connectors is reserved to the
connection with the LHRs Base Band shelf. The others can be used to connect other Customer
devices (e.g. the ADM, if equipped), for them to allow the management of TRUs lamps and
buzzer;
the connector M2 collects the alarms of the TRUs 12 circuit breakers, as shown in Tab. 11.
on page 87 . Its use, meaningful only if equipped breaker type is with alarm signalling [see
point b ) on page 91 ] , is explained in para.15.4 on page 74 (Connections between TRU and
input housekeepings) and chapter 17 on page 99 (TRU alarms software configuration
sequence);
the connector M3 is mainly used to connect the Service Battery and includes the alarm service
signals, as shown in Tab. 12. on page 87 .
M3
M2
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
M1
Fig. 32. TRU rear and top view
86 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 10. TRU M1 Station Alarms connector pinout description
PIN ALARM MEANING HW/SW
1 +VSERV +Service Battery

2 C Alarm storing command HW

1 RATTD Yellow LED Switch on Alarm storing HWSW
6
3 ABN Yellow LED Switch on Abnormal condition SW
5 9 4 RURG Red LED (1) Switch on Urgent alarm HWSW

5 RNURG Red LED (2) Switch on Not Urgent alarm HWSW
6 VSERV Service Battery
7 CH Green LED Switch on buzzer HW
8 TOR VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure HW
9 GND GROUND
Tab. 11. TRU M2 circuit breakers alarms connector pinout description

PIN BREAKER
1 1A
2 2A
3 3A
1
14 4 4A
5 5A
6 6A
7 1B
8 2B
9 3B
25 10 4B
13
11 5B
12 6B
13 to 18 Unused
19 Common (GROUND)
20 to 25 Unused
Tab. 12. TRU Service Battery and Alarm service M3 connector pinout description
PIN ABBREVIATION FUNCTION
1 TRNURG Not Urgent Remote Alarm
2 CANC Alarm Cancel Command
3 VSERVI Incoming Service Battery (Negative)
4 +VSERVI Incoming Service Battery (Positive)
5 GND Electric Ground
6 TBUZZER Buzzer Remote Alarm
7 TMEM Storing Remote Alarm
8 TRURG Urgent Remote Alarm
9 COMRELE Command Relay
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 87 / 522
16.3.2 TRU front cover remotion

Undo the 5 screws (1) .. (5) depicted in Fig. 30. on page 85 to remove the TRUs front cover.

N.B. store tidily the screws to restore the cover at the end of all cabling operations.

16.3.3 TRU Installation, cabling and usage of TRU Kit Loudspeaker (optional)
16.3.3.1 Installation and cabling
The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit inserted inside TRU and connected to the LHRs Base Band shelf,
as depicted in Fig. 33. herebelow. If ordered together with the TRU, it is supplied already installed.
TRU holes for

kit
loudspeaker
installation
screwholes for
kit loudspeaker N.B. install with loudspeaker magnet on the left
installation
To be connected to
BB connector M190
(see Fig. 80. on page 148)
Fig. 33. Kit Loudspeaker
16.3.3.2 Usage
With reference to Fig. 56. on page 114 (Service unit front view):
Pushbutton (4) activates/deactivates the loudspeaker
Green led (3) on indicates the loudspeaker activation.
88 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
16.3.4 Electrical connections from TRU toward the Station Power Supply batteries
SAFETY RULES
Before performing this electrical connection operation, make sure that the power supply
circuit breaker at the customer distributor panel is turned OFF.
16.3.4.1 Main Power Supply connections
In case of 21 racks (this case), to make following operations easier, disengage and rotate the TRU as
explained in point a )1 ) and shown in Fig. 31. on page 85 .
a) with reference to Fig. 34. below, in case of:
1) two batteries, undo the screws, insert the Power Supply Cables from Station Power Supply
batteries A and B is into the suitable terminal strips for Battery A and Battery B, then do the
screws to fix cables (max section accepted is 25mm2 )
2) one battery: do not use the terminal strips for Battery B, but:
undo the screws, insert the Power Supply Cables from Station Power Supply battery A into
the suitable terminal strips for Battery A, then do the screws to fix cables (max section
accepted is 25mm2 )
dismount the plastic cover, mount the the supplied mechanical jumper, then restore the
plastic cover
From Battery A
+
plastic cover and From Battery B
screw to unfix it
+
screws
screws
jumper for one battery

power supply
Fig. 34. Main Power Supply connections
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 89 / 522
16.3.4.2 Service Battery connection

The Service Battery presence is mandatory to power the circuits related to the Rack Lamps.

Its connection, by a 3 mm2 cable pair from the Station Service Battery, must be done on pins VSERVI
and +VSERVI of TRUs connector M3 (see Fig. 32. on page 86 and Tab. 12. on page 87 ).
In case of station where the Service Battery is missing, connect such pins directly to the terminal strip of
Battery A by a 3 mm2 cable pair:
From Battery A
Fig. 35. Jumpering the Service Battery strips to the Main Power Supply
16.3.4.3 Check of correct polarity
SAFETY RULES
a) switch off all circuit breakers present on TRU and the Service battery switch [ (E) in Fig. 30. on page
85 ]
b) switch on the power supply circuit breakers at the customer distributor panel (Battery A, Battery B
and Service Battery) and verify the correct polarity and connection quality at TRU main and service
power supply terminal strips
c) to proceed safely, switch off such power supply circuit breakers.
16.3.5 TRU breaker types, installation and replacement
SAFETY RULES
Before performing installation and remotion operations on circuit breakers, make sure
that the power supply circuit breaker at the customer distributor panel is turned OFF.
a) TRU breaker assignment in 9600LSY/LHR and WMSN system
Shown in following Tab. 13.
90 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 13. TRU breaker assignment and types in 9600LSY/LHR and WMSN system
BREAKER
NUMBER
MAX NOMINAL CIRCUIT BREAKER

( Fig. 30.
USAGE ABSORBED ABSORBED n.b.1 n.b.
on page 85
POWER (W) CURRENT (A) P/N
and Fig. 41.
on page 94 )
LHR transceivers
1A and 1B 340 12.75
0 to 4 20A 72VDC
LHR transceivers 1AB162710007
2A and 2B 340 12.75 2
5 to 9
LHR baseband 10A 72VDC
3A and 3B 135 5.06
subrack 1AB162710005
4A and 4B ADM refer to ADM documentation 3
FAN UNIT for
5A and 5B 40 1.5 4
LHR 2A 72VDC
FAN UNIT for 1AB162710002
6A and 6B 40 1.5 5
ADM subrack
n.b.1 The value of circuit breakers is determined as follows:
Circuit Breaker (A) = [ (Max Absorbed Power (W)) / (Nominal Battery Voltage (48V)) * 1.5 * 1.2]
n.b.2 These circuit breakers are always installed in factory
n.b.3 These circuit breakers are never installed in factory
n.b.4 These circuit breakers are installed in factory only if the FAN UNIT for LHR has been ordered
and therefore installed
n.b.5 These circuit breakers are installed in factory only if the FAN UNIT for ADM has been ordered
and therefore installed
b) Breaker failure alarm management
An alarm is embedded inside each breaker unit and is automatically activated in case of breaker
failure. The notification to these alarms is obtained by utilization of housekeeping alarms that can be
detected either in the local or remote stations on ECT or in the supervision centre.
Before mounting breakers (if necessary), verify they do have the three terminals for breaker alarm
control, depicted in following figure:
terminals for breaker alarm control
Fig. 36. Checking terminals for breaker alarm control
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 91 / 522
Verify also the presence of the cable (common alarm), used to allow the management of the breakers
alarm, depicted in following figure:

c) Breaker insertion
To insert a breaker (if necessary), simply position and push it in its own slot. Figure below shows
breakers already inserted
Fig. 37. Breakers inserted
d) Breaker remotion
Figure below shows how to remove a breaker (e.g. for replacement)
Fig. 38. Breaker remotion
92 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
16.3.6 Electrical connections from TRU toward the equipment shelves
16.3.6.1 Cabling of power supply cables

SAFETY RULES
Before performing operations on power supply cables, make sure that the power supply
circuit breaker at the customer distributor panel is turned OFF.
16.3.6.1.1 Connection tables
3pins female 450 for power supply
A B
Length and labelling depends on cable usage
N.B. the writings on cable connectors, i.e. (A) and (B) , are used as CABLE SIDE information in the
following Tab. 14. and Tab. 15. , to point out the correct cable connections.
Fig. 39. Power supply cable
S S R R R R R R M R M R M R M R M
M M M M
Y E R R R M R R R D R D R D R D R D
D A D D D
S R A A D A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
0 1 1 3 4
C V 0 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
P P P P P P P P P P
S S S S S S S S S S
U U U U U U U U U U
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PSF1 PSF2
Fig. 40. Power supply connectors on LHRs Base Band shelf
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 93 / 522
1A
3A 5A

1B
3B

5B

2A
4A
6A
2B
4B 6B
Fig. 41. TRU breakers terminal numbering
The following tables are consistent with the breaker assignment defined in Tab. 13. on page 91 :
Tab. 14. Power supply interconnections between TRU and LHR shelves
Cable of Fig. 39. on page 93 to be connected to:
CABLE SIDE (B) CABLE SIDE (A) connected to: n.b.
( see Fig. 41. above ) connector: of:
TRU breakers terminals 1A M2 (BATT.A)
TRU breakers terminals 1B M3 (BATT.B) LHR Transceiver shelf
TRU breakers terminals 2A M5 (BATT.A) (see Fig. 83. on page 151 )
1
TRU breakers terminals 2B M6 (BATT.B)
TRU breakers terminals 3A PSF1 (BATT.A) LHR Base Band shelf
TRU breakers terminals 3B PSF2 (BATT.B) (see Fig. 40. on page 93 )
TRU breakers terminals 5A M1 (BATT.A) FAN UNIT for LHR
2
TRU breakers terminals 5B M4 (BATT.B) (see Fig. 65. on page 122 )
Tab. 15. Power supply interconnections between TRU and ADM shelves
CABLE SIDE (B) CABLE SIDE (A) connected to:
n.b.
( see Fig. 41. above ) connector: of:
Cable of Fig. 39. on page 93 to be connected to:
TRU breakers terminals 6A M1 (BATT.A) FAN UNIT for ADM 3
TRU breakers terminals 6B M4 (BATT.B) (see Fig. 65. on page 122 )
ADMspecific cable to be connected to:
TRU breakers terminals 4A ADM (BATT.A) refer to ADM 4
TRU breakers terminals 4B ADM (BATT.B) documentation
n.b.1 These cables are always installed in factory

n.b.2 These cables are installed in factory only if the FAN UNIT for LHR has been ordered and
therefore installed
n.b.3 These cables are installed in factory only if the FAN UNIT for ADM has been ordered and
therefore installed
n.b.4 These cables are never installed in factory
94 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
16.3.6.1.2 How to connect/disconnect power supply cables to/from TRU breakers terminals
At TRU side, the terminals of power supply cables (side B in Fig. 39. on page 93 ) must be provided with
fastons.
Unsheathe the cables and connect them to the tagblocks making them pass through the hole on the rear
side of the TRU.
clamp
Cable inserted Use a clamp to extract the cable
Fig. 42. Connection/disconnection of power supply cables to/from TRU breakers terminals
N.B. the free length of cables after their fixing must be such as to allow the TRU rotation (see Fig. 31.
on page 85 )
16.3.6.2 Check of correct polarity on power supply cable connectors
SAFETY RULES
this operation must be carried out whenever you have installed or replaced a cable
a) if connected, disconnect the power supply cable at shelf side
b) switch on:
the power supply circuit breakers at the customer distributor panel (Battery A and Battery B)
the TRU breaker relevant to the specific cable
c) verify the correct polarity (see Fig. 39. on page 93 ) and connection quality on the connector at shelf
side
d) to proceed safely, switch off all breakers switched on in step b ) above
e) reconnect all power supply cables at shelf side that were disconnected in step a ) above, fixing them
with suitable screws.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 95 / 522
16.3.6.3 Cabling for Rack Alarms interconnections between TRU and LHR and ADM shelves

Notes:

a) the writings on cable connectors, i.e. (A) and (B) , are used as CABLE SIDE information in
Tab. 16. below, to point out the correct cable connections;
b) in the CannonCannon cables the pin connection is 1:1 (i.e. pin 1 left connected to pin 1 right, pin
2 left connected to pin 2 right, etc.).
9pins Cannon female / 9pins Cannon male
A B
Length and labelling depends on cable usage
Fig. 43. Cable for Rack Alarms interconnections between TRU and LHR and ADM shelves
Tab. 16. Interconnections between TRU and LHR and ADM shelves for Rack Alarms
Cable of Fig. 43. above to be connected to:
CABLE SIDE (A) connected to: CABLE SIDE (B) connected to: n.b.
(see Fig. 32. on page 86 ) connector: of:
LHR Base Band shelf
TRUs connector M1 (any) M184 1
(see Fig. 80. on page 148 )
ADMspecific cable to be connected to:
2
TRUs connector M1 (any) refer to ADM documentation
n.b.1 This cable is always installed in factory

n.b.2 This cable is never installed in factory
16.3.7 Final operations on TRU
At the end of all operations, restore the TRUs front cover by the 5 screws (1) .. (5) depicted in Fig. 30.
on page 85 and, if rotated on its sliding guides, restore it in standard position and fix it by the 4 screws
(A) .. (D) depicted in the same figure.
96 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
16.4 Signal cabling of FAN UNIT for LHR and/or ADM
If the FAN UNIT for LHR and/or for ADM have been ordered together with the LHR system, they are already
installed and cabled in factory.

Otherwise, if one of both have been provisioned and delivered but have not been installed in factory, it/they
should have already been installed as specified in para.15.5 on page 80 .
Following Fig. 44. and Fig. 45. describes its/their signal cabling.
FAN UNIT
M2 for LHR M3 CANBUS terminator
M187
Base Band Shelf
Fig. 44. Signal cabling of FAN UNIT for LHR (without ADM)
FAN UNIT
M2 for ADM M3 CANBUS terminator
FAN UNIT
M2 for LHR M3
M187
Base Band Shelf
Fig. 45. Signal cabling of FAN UNITs for LHR and ADM
Refer to:
Fig. 65. on page 122 , for FAN UNIT front view
point c ) on page 123 , for FAN UNIT dipswitch setting according to the position in the rack
Tab. 24. on page 161 , for details on interconnection cables
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 97 / 522
98 / 522

17 TRU ALARMS SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION SEQUENCE
This operation is mandatory, but can be done only after the completion of the commissioning phase. It
should be done by same Operators having done the equipment lineup.
If, in step of para.15.4 on page 74, you have installed and cabled:
the Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable, carry out procedure of para.17.1 below;
the Additional Housekeeping Unit, carry out procedure of para.17.2 on page 101.
N.B. The symbols . , , and n used in such procedures have the same meaning as that
employed in the LineUp Guide.
17.1 Software Configuration Sequence with Additional Housekeeping

Substitutive Cable
17.1.1 CT Labelling Configuration with Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable
Purpose: Configure via CT the input housekeeping alarms forwarded by the Additional
Housekeeping Substitutive Cable.
Required Instruments: PC configured as 9600LSY Craft Terminal
Procedure:
LSY C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK
NB1 : Make sure that the Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable has been properly installed
(see Fig. 24. Connection of Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable on page 76 ).
NB2 : HA Extension acquisition exploited by TRU are displayed into CT HA External Points on
HK_22 for a total of 12 circuit breakers. See reference Fig. 46. on page 100 .
NB3 : TRU HA are to be considered as NORMALLY CLOSED, this means that when the Circuit
Breaker is in position OFF the HA contact is closed to the Ground, and viceversa when the
Circuit Breaker is in position ON the HA contact is open from the Ground.
NB4 : C.T. HA access points are to be considered as following:

HA Contact Floating = NO ALARM presence on CT HA External Points PAGE
HA Contact Grounded = ALARM presence on CT HA External Points PAGE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 99 / 522
BATT.
ALM BRK 1A
ALM BRK 2A
ALM BRK 4A
ALM BRK 5A
ALM BRK 6A
ALM BRK 4B
ALM BRK 5B
ALM BRK 3A
ALM BRK 1B
ALM BRK 6B
ALM BRK 2B
ALM BRK 3B

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
A A A A A A B B B B B B
LAMP_BACKPANEL

pin 1
pin 2
pin 3
pin 4
pin 5
pin 6
NB pin 7
pin 8
pin 9
pin 10
pin 11
pin 12
COMUNE / GND pin 19
N.B. see Fig. 23. Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable on page 75.
Fig. 46. TRU H.A. Diagram connection (with Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable)
17.1.2 H.A. C.T. Software Labelling Configuration Procedure with Additional Housekeeping
Substitutive Cable
1) . Connect CT Select EMLUSM Select Views External Points n
2) Select CPI_AUX22 n Select EMLUSM External Points Configuration n
3) Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label TRU Circuit Breaker OR Alarm OK
End of TRU Alarms Software Configuration with

Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable
100 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
17.2 Software Configuration Sequence with Additional Housekeeping Unit
17.2.1 Additional Housekeeping Unit software configuration

Purpose: Configure via CT the Additional Housekeeping Unit.

Procedure:
NB1 : Make sure that the Additional Housekeeping Unit has been properly installed and cabled (see
para.15.4.2 Additional Housekeeping Unit fastening to the rack and cabling on page 77 ).
1) . Connect CT Select EMLUSM Select RACKLHR n n Select SRBBN1 n

Select RACKLHR nnSelect SYSCO n n Select EmptySlot r01sr2sl01/daughter#02 n
2) . Select EMLUSM Equipment Set out of Service n

Select EMLUSM Equipment Set n Select HKDEV n
Select EMLUSM Views Equipment n
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 101 / 522
17.2.2 CT Labelling Configuration with Additional Housekeeping Unit

Purpose: Configure via CT the input housekeeping alarms forwarded by the Additional

Housekeeping Unit.

Procedure:
NB1 : HA Extension acquisition exploited by TRU are displayed into CT HA External Points page
from HK_OUT_23 to HK_OUT_34 for a total of 12 HA points. See reference Fig. 47. below.
NB2 : TRU HA are to be considered as NORMALLY CLOSED, this means that when the Circuit
Breaker is in position OFF the HA contact is closet to the Ground, and viceversa when the
Circuit Breaker is in position ON the HA contact is open from the Ground.
NB2 : C.T. HA access points are to be considered as following:

HA Contact Floating = NO ALARM presence on CT HA External Points PAGE
HA Contact Grounded = ALARM presence on CT HA External Points PAGE
BATT.
ALM BRK 1A
ALM BRK 2A
ALM BRK 4A
ALM BRK 5A
ALM BRK 6A
ALM BRK 4B
ALM BRK 5B
ALM BRK 3A
ALM BRK 1B
ALM BRK 6B
ALM BRK 2B
ALM BRK 3B
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
A A A A A A B B B B B B
LAMP_BACKPANEL

ADD_HK_23 pin 1
ADD_HK_24 pin 2
ADD_HK_25 pin 3
ADD_HK_26 pin 4
ADD_HK_27 pin 5
pin 6
ADD_HK_28
ADD_HK_29 pin 7
ADD_HK_30 pin 8
ADD_HK_31 pin 9
ADD_HK_32 pin 10
ADD_HK_33 pin 11
ADD_HK_34 pin 12
COMUNE / GND pin 19
Fig. 47. TRU H.A. Diagram connection (with Additional Housekeeping Unit)
102 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
17.2.3 H.A. C.T. Software Labelling Configuration Procedure with Additional Housekeeping
Unit
. Connect CT Select EMLUSM Select Views External Points n

Select CPI_AUX23 n Select EMLUSM External Points Configuration n

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label Subrack RT 1A (For HACPI_AUX23)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label Subrack RT 2A (For HACPI_AUX24)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label Subrack BB 3A (For HACPI_AUX25)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label Subrack ADM 4A (For HACPI_AUX26)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label RT Rack FAN 5A (For HACPI_AUX27)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label ADM Rack FAN 6A (For HACPI_AUX28)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label Subrack RT 1B (For HACPI_AUX29)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label Subrack RT 2B (For HACPI_AUX30)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label Subrack BB 3B (For HACPI_AUX31)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label Subrack ADM 4B (For HACPI_AUX32)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label RT Rack FAN 5B (For HACPI_AUX33)

Select under Attributes / User Label Insert Label ADM Rack FAN 6B (For HACPI_AUX34)
End of TRU Alarms Software Configuration with

Additional Housekeeping Unit
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 103 / 522
104 / 522

18 OPERATIVE INFORMATION ON EQUIPMENT BOARDS (EXCEPT
MICROWAVE AREA)
18.1 Introduction
This chapter gives detailed operative information regarding:
the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access
points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
hardware setting description
for all installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes, and is organized as follows:
Cautions to avoid equipment damage refer to point v from page 9
Boards of BaseBand shelf on page 106
FAN UNIT operative information on page 122
TRU shelf operative information on page 123
LPS subrack operative information on page 124
Please refer to:
chapter 19 on page 127 for operative information on microwave area (transceiver units and
branching)
chapter 110 on page 147 for detailed operative information regarding:
system cabling
pinout description of connectors for Customer usage
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 105 / 522
18.2 Boards of BaseBand shelf

M M M M
D A D D D
S R A A D A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
0 1 1 3 4
C V 0 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
P P P P P P P P P P P P
S S S S S S S S S S S S
F U U U U U U U U U U F
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
Fig. 48. Boards of BaseBand shelf
Operative information on:
PSU and PSF on page 107
SYSCO: SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD on page 108
SERV: SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE on page 113
RRA:
RRACHANNEL and optional optical module on page 115
RRASTANDBY and optional optical module on page 117
MD: MODEM on page 119
106 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
18.2.1 PSU and PSF units operative information
Refer to:
para.23.4.4.8 on page 215 for a brief functional description of the PSU unit
point c ) on page 283 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSU unit
para.23.4.4.9 on page 215 for a brief functional description of the PSF unit
para.32.3.1.4 on page 284 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSF unit
chapter 52, and in particular para.52.2 on page 384, for the detailed functional description of the
units
A3
(1) ON/OFF
I O (3) Input
switch
Power
Supply
A1
(2) PSU switched
on
(green)
(4) PSF powered
on
(green)
PSU PSF
Fig. 49. PSU and PSF units front view
18.2.1.1 Power supply connector pinout (on PSF unit)
Pins Meaning
A1 +BATT +BATTERY
A2 GND Ground
A3 BATT Battery
18.2.1.2 Front connector on PSF unit usage

Refer to para.110.4 on page 160.
18.2.1.3 Hardware settings
None
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 107 / 522
18.2.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information

Refer to:

para.23.4.4.7 on page 214 for a brief functional description of the unit

para.32.3.1.1 on page 281 for physical composition and P/Ns.
chapter 52, and in particular:
para.52.3.2 on page 393, for the detailed functional description of the SYSCO unit
para.52.3.3 on page 399, for the detailed functional description of the Flash Card
The following information is given hereafter:
Fig. 50. herebelow shows the unit assembly view
Fig. 51. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
Fig. 52. on page 109 depicts the unit front view :
for the front connectors usage, please refer to para.110.8.6 on page 177.
the usage of the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9), is explained in para.110.8.6 on
page 177 and section MAINTENANCE.
the usage of the other pushbuttons and leds is explained in section MAINTENANCE.
para.18.2.2.2 on page 110 describes the hardware setting options dependent on SWP and
system configuration.
Subunit
ESCON
J1
J2
J3
M1
Flash Card
M2 SYSCO main board
M3
Fig. 50. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
TOP SIDE
INSERTION
Fig. 51. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
108 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
(9) Reset Button
J1
I/O for
QB3 10 BASE 2
J2 J3 (2 BNCs in parallel)
I/O RJ45 for

M1 QB3 10 BASE T
and DEBUGN or
local EC debug
I/O RJ45 for
CAN 0 BB and M2
local EC debug
F interface
M3
for ECT
(1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red)

(2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red)
(3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow)
(4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow)
(5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow)
(7) Lamp Test Pushbutton
(8) Alarm storing Pushbutton

(Attended)
(6) bicolor led:
red on: Card failure alarm
green flashing: SW download in progress (in-
ternal or toward other boards)
off: normal condition
Fig. 52. System Controller front view
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 109 / 522
18.2.2.1 Lamp Test & Reset buttons

With reference to Fig. 52. on page 109, the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9) allow the following

operations:

Lamp test Reset Effect
System lamp test of all the leds in all units of Baseband shelf
X
(Transceivers not affected)
X EC (Equipment Controller) reset

RC (Radio Controller) reset
N.B. to perform correctly this operation, operate as follows:
X X 1 ) push Lamp Test , holding it pushed till step 4 )
2 ) push Reset for one second
3 ) release Reset
4 ) release Lamp Test
For the meaning of EC and RC, make reference to para.52.3.1.1.2 on page 388.
Refer to documents relative to the System Controller unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical position
on the board (contained in handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents REF.[M] on page 503).
In the following, only the DipSwitch banks associated to software configurations are taken into
consideration (for other DipSwitch banks and TC meaning, please refer to the above cited documents).
a) on subunit ESCON (see Fig. 50. on page 108 and Fig. 54. on page 112) :
a Dipswitch bank allows to clear (erase) the System Configuration memory. The use of this
dipswitch bank is explained in the 9600LSY Operators Handbook.
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position.

If unproperly set, these dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the
software herein contained (programs and system configuration data)
b) on SYSCO main board (see Fig. 50. on page 108 and Fig. 53. on page 112) :
1) Equipment Type:
EQTYPE field is fixed to 0110 (Dec. 6) to indicate Long Haul system (there are no Dipswitch
banks to set).
continues..
110 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
N.B. Before using Tab. 17. or Tab. 18. for configuration setting/change purposes, verify that
the values correspond to those stated in the CT Operators Handbook associated to the
Software Package (SWP) running on your system. In the case of conflict between the
values stated in this manual and those indicated in CT Operators Handbook, these latter
will prevail.
2) BKPV (BacKPanel Version) field

according to following Tab. 17.
Tab. 17. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting

BKPV
I4 switches Dec Description
3 2 1
0 0 0 0 LHRC Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
0 0 1 1 LHR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator
DipSwitch I4 /45678 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).
3) SLOTID field for LHR

according to following Tab. 18.
Tab. 18. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting
SLOTID
I1 switches Equip. Subrack STM0/ Space
Dec Subrack TRI
Type BB STM1 Diversity
6 5 4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STM0
SRTRI1HET
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 STM1
1+1
SRBB11
0 0 0 0 1 0 2 HET STM0 SD
SRTRISD1HET
0 0 0 0 1 1 3 STM1 SD
0 0 0 1 0 0 4 STM0
SRTRIN
0 0 0 1 0 1 5 STM1
N+1 SRBBN1
0 0 0 1 1 0 6 STM0 SD
SRTRISDN
0 0 0 1 1 1 7 STM1 SD
0 0 1 0 0 0 8 STM0
SRTRIN
0 0 1 0 0 1 9 STM1
N+0 SRBBN0
0 0 1 0 1 0 10 STM0 SD
SRTRISDN
0 0 1 0 1 1 11 STM1 SD
DipSwitch I1 /78 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 111 / 522
WARNING: These I1 and I4 dipswitch banks are those used to set the equipment type and
its configuration, as specified in Tab. 17. and Tab. 18. on page 111 ; do not
confuse this I1 dipswitch bank with that present on the SYSCOs ESCON
subunit (Fig. 54. below)
Fig. 53. Position of dipswitch banks on SYSCO main board
WARNING: This I1 dipswitch bank is not used to set equipment configuration, but to scratch
the MIB, and must be used only as specified by the parts of this handbook making
reference to it ; do not confuse this I1 dipswitch bank with that present on the
SYSCO main board (Fig. 53. above)
Fig. 54. Position of dipswitch bank on SYSCOs ESCON subunit
WARNING: Drawings above refer to the most recently produced units at the release date of this
handbook. If necessary, refer to the handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents
REF.[M] on page 503 for drawings relevant to older or possibly newer unit versions.
112 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
18.2.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information
Refer to:

para.32.3.1.2 on page 281 for physical composition and P/Ns.

chapter 52, and in particular para.52.4.8 on page 422, for the detailed functional description of the
unit
Fig. 55. herebelow shows the unit assembly view
Fig. 56. on page 114 depicts the unit front view :
for the front connectors (J1) (J2) usage, please refer to para.110.8.4 on page 172.
the usage of the front connector (J5) and leds in LINE O.W. area is explained in para.42.2 on
page 293.
the usage of leds in LINE TPH area is explained in para.42.3 on page 294.
the led (3) and pushbutton (4) are used only if the KIT LOUDSPEAKER is equipped (see
para.16.3.3 on page 88 )
the other indications are selfexplaining.
N.B. For hardware setting options, please refer to documents relative to the Service unit for the
TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning (contained in handbook
9600LSY Hardware setting documents REF.[M] on page 503).
Optional subunit
ADDITIONAL VOICE
(TPHDEV)
J1
J2
J3
J4 SMA
J5
Fig. 55. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 113 / 522
J1
PROTECTED WST 2 Mbit/s
N.B.1: in case of unprotected WST, these
connectors must not be used, but those
J2 on Base Band shelf access panel (see
Fig. 81. on page 150)
J3
NOT OPERATIVE IN
CURRENT RELEASE
J4
(1) Indication of the No
of the Rx
protected channel
(1 digit display) N.B.2
(2) Manual operation

of N+1 logic (6) line busy (yellow)
(yellow led) N.B.2
(7) line free (green)
J5 Telephone jack
(8) line busy (yellow) (*)
N.B.3
(9) line free (green) (*)
operative only
(3) Loudspeaker (*) with TPHDEV
N.B.3 equipped
activated (green)
(4) Pushbutton for

loudspeaker
activation/deactivation
(10) Card failure alarm (red)
N.B.2 For details, refer to Tab. 62. on page 314.

N.B.3 For usage, refer to para.42.2 on page 293 and para.42.3 on page 294.
Fig. 56. Service unit front view
114 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
18.2.4 RRACHANNEL unit and optional optical module operative information
Refer to:

point a ) on page 282 for physical composition and P/Ns.

chapter 52, and in particular:
para.52.4.4 on page 412, for the detailed functional description of the unit
para.52.4.6 on page 417, for the detailed functional description of the optical module
The following Fig. 57. shows:
the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit front panel, and must
be repositioned after having connected the cables
the drawer (fixed by two screws) that must be removed only in case an optional a STM1 optical
module has to be equipped (see Fig. 58. on page 116 )
Connector for the insertion

of a STM1 optical module
J1
J2
Protection cap
Drawer extractable for the insertion of a STM1 optical module
Fig. 57. RRACHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering
18.2.4.1 Front connectors usage
Refer to para.110.8.2 on page 172.

Other information in Fig. 58. on page 116.
None
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 115 / 522
STM1
ELECTRICAL J1
INTERFACE
yellow marker
SAFETY RULES FOR OPTICAL MODULES

Optical safety : refer to
para.61.3.5 on page 455. green marker J2
S
S
signal
flow Hole for drawer
extraction
ALS restart key
S
OPTIONAL
S
STM1 LC OPTICAL
MODULE
S screws for drawer/optical module remove/fix

(1) Card failure alarm led (red)
N.B. for systems with older types of optical modules (SC/PC and FC/PC) refer also to para.18.2.6
on page 118
Fig. 58. RRACHANNEL unit and optional optical module front view
116 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
18.2.5 RRASTANDBY unit and optional optical module operative information
Refer to:

point a ) on page 282 for physical composition and P/Ns.

unit
As far as the protection cap, extractable drawer and optional optical module are concerned, the assembly
view is as in Fig. 57. on page 115.
The front view is as in Fig. 58. on page 116, with a difference in the lower part, where there is the display
shown in Fig. 59. herebelow:
Indication of the No Tx
of the Tx protected channel
(1 digit display) N.B.
N.B. For details, refer to Tab. 63. on page 314.
Fig. 59. RRASTANDBY unit front view (particular)
Refer to para.110.8.2 on page 172.
None
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 117 / 522
18.2.6 Adapter cables for old optical modules

The new STM1 LC OPTICAL MODULE, shown in Fig. 58. on page 116 , is supplied to Customers also

as spare or equipment expansion part for systems equipped with older types of optical modules (SC/PC

and FC/PC) described in para.63.5 on page 493 (phased out, no longer available).
To have interworking with the old Optical Interfaces, without remaking equipment cabling, two adapter
cables have been defined:
LCFC adapter (P/N REF.[33] in Tab. 39. on page 186 )
LC FC

B 2
300 mm
Fig. 60. LCFC adapter
LCSC adapter (P/N REF.[34] in Tab. 39. on page 186 )
LC SC

300 mm
Fig. 61. LCSC adapter
118 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
18.2.7 MODEM unit operative information
Refer to:

point b ) on page 283 for physical composition and P/Ns.

unit
The following Fig. 62. shows the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit
front panel, and must be repositioned after having connected the cables:
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5 MODEM
mother
board
Protection cap
Fig. 62. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering
Refer to para.110.7 on page 163.

Other information in Fig. 63. on page 120 and Fig. 64. on page 121.
They are on the mother board. Refer to documents (contained in handbook 9600LSY
Hardware setting documents REF.[M] on page 503) relative to the Modem unit for the TC and
DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning (choosing the unit type according
to the P/N . WARNING: there are different Modem units).
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 119 / 522
The following Fig. 63. :

depicts the internal connections between IF2 and IF3 inputs and the corresponding CANCCOMB

submodules

describes the equipping rules of CANCCOMB submodules in the various configurations.
POS.A
IF INPUT MAIN
IF2 INPUT POS.B
IF3 INPUT
STM0 CASE
CONFIGURATION POS.A POS.B
NO SPACE DIVERSITY UNEQUIPPED UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY CANCCOMB STM0 UNEQUIPPED
N.B. : XPIC not envisaged with STM0
STM1 CASE
CONFIGURATION POS.A POS.B
NO SPACE DIVERSITY AND NO XPIC UNEQUIPPED UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY OR XPIC CANCCOMB STM1 UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY AND XPIC CANCCOMB STM1 CANCCOMB STM1
Fig. 63. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANCCOMB equipping rules
120 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Modulator output J1
blue marker
Modulator output monitoring J2
Main demodulator input J3

red marker
IF2 input J4
see Fig. 63.

on page 120
IF3 input J5
(1) Card failure alarm (red)
Fig. 64. Modem unit front view
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 121 / 522
18.3 FAN UNIT operative information

N.B. If your system is still equipped with the older Fans subrack (P/N 3DB03242AA**) and Fans

assembled (P/N 3DB03238AA**), make reference to para.63.4 on page 487.

Refer to para.32.5 on page 286 for equipping rules.
Fig. 65. below shows the assembly and front views of the FAN UNIT.
(A)
screws
Power supply
BATT.B M4 input
(A) screws
BATT.A
(1) LED O
M1
Power supply input
I
I2 Can Bus M3
O Connector
DIPSWITCH
I
M2 Can Bus DIPSWITCH

I1
Connector
Legend on page 123
Fig. 65. Assembly and front views of FAN UNIT
122 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Legend for Fig. 65. :
a) (M1) (M4) Power supply connectors :

Usage and connection: in case your system is equipped with the:
TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 39. on page 183 ), please make reference to chapter 16 on
page 81
former version TRUs no longer envisaged in newer supplies, please make reference to
Appendix C Obsolete items on page 485
Pinout:
Pins Meaning
A1 +BATT +BATTERY
A2 GND Ground
A3 BATT Battery
b) (M2) (M3) CANBUS connectors:

see para.16.4 on page 97 , and Tab. 24. on page 161
c) (I1) (I2) DIPSWITCHES : to be set according to the position in the rack:
I1 I2 Subrack No Usage
I I 0 Baseband shelf
I O 1 future use
O I 2 ADM shelf
O O 3 future use
d) (1) LED (red): indicating a failure in at least one of the 8 fans of the FAN UNIT unit
e) (A) : four screws for unit fixing to the rack
18.4 TRU shelf operative information
For detailed information regarding TRU connectors, installation and connections with LHR and ADM
shelves, please refer to chapters 14 , 15 and 16 from page 53 to page 96
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 123 / 522
18.5 LPS subrack operative information

The optional LPS subrack is equipped in the transceiver shelf, taking the unused place of two adjacent

transceiver units, and can be equipped in two alternative positions, as depicted in Fig. 66. below:

TRI
0
TRI
1
TRI
2
TRI
3

LPS
subrack
TRI
6
TRI
7
TRI
8
TRI
9

(TRI 45)

LPS

TRI TRI TRI TRI TRI TRI TRI TRI subrack
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (TRI 89)
Fig. 66. Alternative positions for equipping the LPS subrack
Such a choice depends on the adopted polarization configuration.

For details refer to para.32.2.2 on page 275
Following Fig. 67. shows a fully equipped LPS subrack.
For operative information, refer to the LPS specific documentation (see Tab. 81. on page 500 ).
124 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10

PSLP 1 1

PSLP 2 2

DSCT

EPS ch. 1 main 4

EPS ch. 1 spare 5

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18
EPS ch. 8 main

EPS ch. 8 spare 19
Fig. 67. Units equipped in a fully populated LPS subrack
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 125 / 522
126 / 522

19 OPERATIVE INFORMATION ON MICROWAVE AREA (TRANSCEIVERS
AND BRANCHING)
19.1 Introduction
This chapter gives detailed operative information regarding transceivers:
the unit assembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access points
(connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
hardware setting description
for all installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes.
Refer to:
para.32.4.2 on page 285 for physical composition and P/Ns
chapter 52, and in particular para.52.5 on page 427, for the detailed functional description of the
unit.
Cautions to avoid equipment damage refer to point v from page 9
Transceiver assembly supply to Customer and spare part policies on page 128
Warmup time on page 129
Transceiver front views on page 130
Front connectors usage on page 131
Usage of LO monitoring J7, J8 and J15 sockets on page 135
Transceiver hardware settings on page 135
Branching on page 145, including:

Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections on page 145
Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) on page 145
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 127 / 522
19.2 Transceiver assembly supply to Customer and spare part policies

Two matters together have to taken into consideration:

Frequency plan specialization
Transceiver assembly types
[1] Frequency plan specialization
Each transceiver assembly delivered to the Customer, both as equipment part and as spare part, is
specialized for the frequency plan required by the Customer himself. This specialization, carried out
by firmware settings inside TRIs subunit RT CONTROL not manageable by the Customer, includes:
the value of the frequency of the first channel (channel 1 of the lower half of the frequency band)
of the frequency plan
the value of the channel spacing
the value of the frequency shift between the go (Tx) and return (Rx) channels.
This means that a transmitter cannot be used for any other channel plan than that for which
it has been set in factory.
In order to identify such characteristics of a transceiver assembly, a label like that depicted in
Fig. 68. below is affixed on the transceiver assembly front panel:
Fig. 68. Label affixed to a transceiver assembly indicating the frequency plan specialization (example)
[2] Transceiver assembly types

Each transceiver assembly delivered to the Customer, both as equipment part and as spare part,
contains the internal components, as required by the Customer himself, in accordance to the system
configuration.
Two main families of transceivers are envisaged:
2GR Transceivers:
the possible configurations are:
without / with Space Diversity
always with Frequency Reuse (it can be used also without using the Frequency Reuse
function)
Thus, two different types of 2G transceiver assemblies are envisaged, as depicted in following
Tab. 19.
2G Transceivers:
the possible configurations are:
without / with Space Diversity
without / with Frequency Reuse
Thus, four different types of 2G transceiver assemblies are envisaged, as depicted in following
Tab. 19.
N.B. In the same 9600LSY system, 2GR and 2G Transceivers can be equipped together, in any
combination.
128 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 19. Transceiver families and compatibility
2GR Transceivers 2G Transceivers

Standard Configuration:
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
a
TX LOCAL OSCILLATOR
RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR
Assembly identified by 4 P/Ns
Standard Configuration
A Frequency reuse Configuration:
Assembly identified by 1 P/N
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
b TX LOCAL OSCILLATOR
RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR
RT FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
Space Diversity Configuration:

TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER MAIN
c RECEIVER DIVERSITY
TX LOCAL OSCILLATOR
RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR
Space Diversity Configuration
B Space Diversity and Frequency reuse Configuration:
Assembly identified by 1 P/N
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER MAIN
RECEIVER DIVERSITY
d
TX LOCAL OSCILLATOR
RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR
RT FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
2GR & 2G COMPATIBILITIES
A is compatible with a and b
B is compatible with c and d
Fig. 70. on page 131 shows the transceiver assembly without Space Diversity
Fig. 71. on page 132 shows the transceiver assembly with Space Diversity
N.B. as far as the connector layout is concerned, the 2G and 2GR transceiver assemblies differ:
for J7 and J8 position
for the J15 connector, existing only in 2GR transceiver with Space Diversity
Each transceiver assembly (main board + baby boards + front plate) delivered to the Customer,
both as equipment part and as spare part, must be always considered an unique item from the service
and maintenance points of view. Such an assembly is supplied by AlcatelLucent as it is and must
never be disassembled.
In new supplies, the 2GR Transceiver types are delivered to Customers, also as spare parts for 2G
transceivers that Customer may have bought before the 2GR transceiver availability.
19.3 Warmup time
In all lineup, operation and maintenance activities that include switching on/off/on of transceiver units,
you must take always into account that a 15 minutes warmup time is necessary for the transceiver to
operate at nominal characteristics.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 129 / 522
19.4 Transceiver front views

2GR TRANSCEIVER 2G TRANSCEIVER

WITHOUT WITH WITH/WITHOUT
SPACE DIVERSITY SPACE DIVERSITY SPACE DIVERSITY
Fig. 69. Transceiver front views
130 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
19.5 Front connectors usage
SPACE DIVERSITY DESCRIPTION

No Fig. 70. herebelow

Yes Fig. 71. on page 132
Yes or No Fig. 72. on page 133 (meaning and use of access points)
2G TRANSCEIVER 2GR TRANSCEIVER
J9 J9
J10
J11 J7
J10
J12
J11
M2
J12
I1
M2
J5
J5
L I1
J6
J6
L
J7 J8
J8
J13
J13
J14 J14
Fig. 70. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Space Diversity)
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 131 / 522
2G TRANSCEIVER 2GR TRANSCEIVER
J9
J10 J9
J1 J11 J1 J7
J2 J12 J15 J10
J3 J11
M2 J2
J4 J12
J3
I1
M1 M2
J4
J5 L I1
M1
J6 J5
L
J7 J6
J8
J8
J13
J13
J14
J14
Fig. 71. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Space Diversity)
132 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Fig. 72. 2G and 2GR Transceiver front view meaning of access points
Access
2G view 2GR view MEANING AND USE

point
Rx Rx Rx Rx
Diversity Main Diversity Main
section section section section
Rx diversity sections elements are present

sections only in units with Rx diversity (see
Fig. 71. on page 132)
ON OFF
I1 Power ON/OFF switch
OFF ON
Input RF Rx diversity
J1
N.B.1
J2 J2: Output 1 IF Rx diversity

J2
J3 J3: Output 2 IF Rx diversity
J3
J3: Output IF Rx diversity monitoring
J4 J4 N.B.1
blue marker Input IF Tx: N.B.1

J5 Blue marker: see point b ) in para.110.3 on
blue marker page 153
LO Rx Remote (Input or Output)

J6
N.B.1
LO Rx monitoring
J7
N.B.2
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 133 / 522
Access
2G view 2GR view MEANING AND USE

point

LO Tx monitoring
J8
N.B.2
Input RF Rx main
J9
N.B.1
red marker J10: Output 1 IF Rx main

J10 J11: Output 2 IF Rx main
J10
J12: Output IF Rx main monitoring
J11 J11 N.B.1
J12
Red marker: see point b ) in para.110.3 on
J12
page 153
J13 J13: RF Tx output monitoring

J13
J14: RF Tx output
J14
N.B.1
J14
LO Rx Diversity monitoring
J15 not present
N.B.2
Socket to connect a recording instrument, to

M1 monitor the Diversity Rx input field value
(see Fig. 151. on page 297 )
Socket to connect a recording instrument, to

M2 monitor the Main Rx input field value (see
Fig. 151. on page 297 )
(1)
(1) (1): Unit switched on (green)
L
(2) (2): OR of internal alarms (red)
(2)
N.B.1 Sockets for connection with Modem and Branching, refer to para.110.7 on page 163
N.B.2 See para.19.5.1 on page 135
134 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
19.5.1 Usage of LO monitoring J7, J8 and J15 sockets
With reference to Fig. 72. on page 133, J7 (for Main Rx), J15 (for Diversity Rx) and J8 (for Tx) sockets
can be used to attach:

a bolometer, to read the levels in the following ranges:
LO Main Rx (J7) and LO Diversity Rx (J15): 6 dBm 6dB

LO Tx (J8): 6 dBm 6dB
a frequency counter
a spectrum analyzer
19.6 Transceiver hardware settings
19.6.1 Introduction
In general, a Customer who receives a system from AlcatelLucent factory to be installed and put in
service, does not need to change hardware settings, as they have been already set in factory according
to Customer plant specifications.
You must change hardware setting only in case you want to change the system configuration. With regard
to the Tx/Rx frequency change for a transceiver, take into account that you can do it only inside the
frequencies for which the transmitter has been set in factory (see para.19.6.2 on page 135 and
para.19.6.8 on page 142).
This paragraph describes in detail how to manage the transceiver dipswitches.
Read all paragraphs 19.6.3 to 19.6.6 and understand them before doing anything. An
example of HW setting regarding two transceivers in a link is given in para.19.6.7 on page 141.
Propaedeutic explanations, if necessary, are given in para.19.6.8 on page 142.
19.6.2 Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan
A transceiver is composed by the following types of modules:

TRI (Transmitter)
LO (Local Oscillator module)
R (Receiver module)
FR KIT (Frequency Reuse kit)
Each transmitter sent to the Customer is specialized for the frequency plan required by the Customer
himself. This specialization, carried out by firmware settings inside TRIs subunit RT CONTROL not
manageable by the Customer, includes:
the value of the frequency of the first channel (channel 1 of the lower half of the frequency band) of
the frequency plan
the value of the channel spacing
the value of the frequency shift between the go (Tx) and return (Rx) channels.
This means that a transmitter cannot be used for any other channel plan than that for which it has
been set in factory.
For further propaedeutic explanations , please refer to para.19.6.8 on page 142.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 135 / 522
19.6.3 Hardware setting dipswitches on transceiver

[1] Dipswitch access on 2GR transceivers

The 2GR transceiver dipswitches are are accessible, without opening the transceiver box, as shown

in Fig. 73. below.
GUARANTEE SEAL
WARNING:
GUARANTEE VOID IF SEAL REMOVED
HARDWARE SETTING
DIP SWITCHES
Fig. 73. Position of Hardware setting dip switches and guarantee seal for 2GR transceivers
[2] Dipswitch access on 2G transceivers

The 2GR transceiver dipswitches are accessible opening the transceiver box, as shown in
Fig. 74. below.
COVER PLATE TO
REMOVE FOR
HARDWARE SETTING
Arrows show screws

for cover remove/fix.
HARDWARE SETTING DIP SWITCHES

Fig. 74. Position of Hardware setting dip switches for 2G transceivers
136 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
[3] Dipswitch banks on 2GR and 2G transceivers
Fig. 75. below shows the three dipswitch banks [I2] [I3] [I5] and the On position of their
switches. Please note that their position and orientation is not the same for 2GR and 2G transceivers,
but their use, as well the function of each switch inside its own bank, are exactly the same for 2GR
and 2G transceivers.
The setting tables of these dipswitch banks are reported in following Fig. 76. , Fig. 77. and
Fig. 78. and their meaning is explained in the following paragraphs.
Take also into account that the switch On position corresponds to the value 0.
[I3] [I2] [I5]
On On On
1 8 1 4 1 8
2GR
RX TX
[I2] [I3] [I5]
2G
4 1 8 1 8 1
On On On
RX TX
Fig. 75. Dip switch banks for transceiver hardware setting
19.6.4 Frequency setting by HW
Frequency setting by HW is the only modality to be used in this system. Then, according to
Fig. 76. herebelow, the dipswitch [I2]2 must be always be set to 0.
Fig. 76. Choice of frequency setting by HW or SW
N.B. The dipswitch bank [I2] contains also the switches [I2]1 and [I2]3, use of which is explained
in para.19.6.6 on page 140
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 137 / 522
19.6.5 Hardware setting of the transceiver Tx and Rx frequencies

As shown in Fig. 77. on page 139:

dipswitch bank [I5] is used for the frequency setting of go (Tx) channel
dipswitch bank [I3] is used for the frequency setting of return (Rx) channel
The following points a ) , b ) and c ) describe their usage in detail.
a) usage of dipswitch 6 (lower/upper half band)
As explained in para.19.6.8.1 on page 142, Tx and Rx channels must lay: one in the lower half of
the band, and the other in the upper half of the band, only the following two configurations are correct:
1st Configuration 2nd Configuration
Half Band of: Half Band of:
Tx channel Rx channel Tx channel Rx channel
lower upper upper lower
set [I5]6 to 0 set [I3]6 to 1 set [I5]6 to 1 set [I3]6 to 0
b) usage of dipswitch dipswitch 7 (OL +/)
Following the lower/upper half band setting described in previous point a ) , the standard setting of
the OL+ / OL dip switch must be done as follows:
Half Band of: Half Band of:
Tx channel Rx channel Tx channel Rx channel
lower upper upper lower

(OL+) (OL) (OL) (OL+)
N.B. for some (very rare) frequency plans, the OL+ / OL dip switches are set in the opposite way
with respect to that depicted in the table above.
WORKAROUND AND SUGGESTION
When you receive your system, please verify how the setting of this switch has been done in
factory, and write this information where you can retrieve it, if necessary.
c) usage of dipswitches 5 to 1 (channel choice)
As explained in para.19.6.8.1 on page 142, the # of the channel defined for Tx section must be equal
to the # of the channel defined for Rx section. In fact, the definition of the lower/upper half band for
them is defined by the settings explained in previous points a ) and b ) . The # of the channel chosen
must be consistent with the possible numbers envisaged for the channel plan used.
138 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
d) usage of dipswitch 8
This switch must be always set to 1, both in Tx and Rx sections.

Tx setting by dipswitch [I5] Rx setting by dipswitch [I3]
Fig. 77. HW setting of go and return channel frequencies
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 139 / 522
19.6.6 Settings for reuse configurations

Configurations with reuse are described in:

para.110.7 point c ) on page 168 (with Reuse and without Diversity)
and:
para.110.7 point d ) on page 170 (with Reuse and with Diversity)
As described there:
the transceiver equipped with the TR. Frequency Reuse Kit (and in case d ) with Diversity
Receiver too) must be configured with Rx Local Oscillator set as MASTER
the other transceiver must be configured with Rx Local Oscillator set as SLAVE.
As shown in Fig. 78. herebelow, this setting is performed through the dip switch [I2]3 that must be set
as follows:
Transceiver to be configured with Rx Local Transceiver to be configured with Rx Local

Oscillator set as MASTER Oscillator set as SLAVE
set [I2]3 to 1 set [I2]3 to 0
Fig. 78. HW setting of MASTER/SLAVE Rx Local Oscillator
N.B. The dipswitch bank [I2] contains also the following switches:
[I2]1 that must be always set to 1:
[I2]2 use of which is explained in para.19.6.4 on page 137
140 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
19.6.7 Example of hardware setting of two transceivers in a radio link
Taking into account the example of frequency plan discussed in next para.19.6.8.1 on page 142, the
following table shows how to set the dipswitches of Tx and Rx sections of the couple of transceivers, in
order to use the channel #2 of the plan itself:
3660
3980
Tx Rx Tx Rx
STATION A STATION B
STATION A TRANSCEIVER STATION B TRANSCEIVER
SETTING OF Tx section Rx section Tx section Rx section

f=3660 f=3980 f=3980 f=3660
HALFBAND lower upper upper lower

OL+ OL OL OL+
OL +/
channel 2 [I5] 2 [I3] 2 [I5] 2 [I3]
set 5 4 3 2 1 set 5 4 3 2 1 set 5 4 3 2 1 set 5 4 3 2 1
to 0 1 0 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 0
set [I5]8 to 1
fixed
set [I3]8 to 1
settings
set [I2]1 to 1

set [I2]2 to 0
Note that the channel # is the same for both Tx/Rx sections of both transceivers.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 141 / 522
19.6.8 Propaedeutic explanations

N.B. Just for anybody who needs them.

19.6.8.1 Choice of go and return channel frequencies
The following diagram shows an example of channel plan:
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND UPPER HALF OF THE BAND
3620 3700 3780 3860 3940 4020 4100 4180
H (V)
2 4 6 2 4 6
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
3660 3740 3820 3980 4060 4140
f0 = 3900
In this example you can choose 1 out of 14 frequencies as goradio channel. The returnradio channel
is always inside the opposite half of the band (with respect to the goradio channel) and fixed in factory
in the following way:
goradio channel returnradio channel

(Tx) (Rx)
1 1
2 2
.... ....
7 7
1 1
2 2
.... ....
7 7
This association between the goradio channel frequency and the returnradio channel frequency
cannot be changed in field (because the frequency shift between go and return channels is fixed in
factory, as explained in para.19.6.2 on page 135). This association is in accordance to ITUR
recommendations.
142 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
19.6.8.2 Alternative center band frequencies (normal and interleaved channels)
Many frequency plans envisage normal and interleaved channels.

This choice depends on Customers specific requirement at the purchase order phase and cannot be
changed in field.
In fact, this corresponds to have different channel plans, each of which require a specific firmware settings
inside TRIs subunit RT CONTROL (as explained in para.19.6.2 on page 135).
a) First example
with reference to 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.382
The TRI that is ordered can be alternatively set in factory, according to Customer needs:
NORMAL CHANNELS
LOWER HALF UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND OF THE BAND
Freq. Freq.
Channel Channel
[MHz] [MHz]
1 3824,5 1 4037,5
for this usage
2 3853,5 2 4066,5
3 3882,5 3 4095,5
4 3911,5 4 4124,5
5 3940,5 5 4153,5
6 3969,5 6 4182,5
INTERLEAVED CHANNELS
Freq. Freq.
Channel Channel
[MHz] [MHz]
1 3810 1 4023
or for this usage
2 3839 2 4052
3 3868 3 4081
4 3897 4 4110
5 3926 5 4139
6 3955 6 4168
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 143 / 522
b) Second example
with reference to 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L (STM1)

The TRI that is ordered can be alternatively set in factory, according to Customer needs:

Freq. Freq.
Channel Channel
[MHz] [MHz]
for this usage 1 7128 1 7289
(normal channels) 2 7156 2 7317
3 7184 3 7345
4 7212 4 7373
5 7240 5 7401

Freq. Freq.
Channel Channel
[MHz] [MHz]
or for this usage 1int1 7135 1int1 7296
(interleaved channels 1) 2int1 7163 2int1 7324
3int1 7191 3int1 7352
4int1 7219 4int1 7380
5int1 7247 5int1 7408

Freq. Freq.
Channel Channel
[MHz] [MHz]
3int2 7198 3int2 7359
4int2 7226 4int2 7387
5int2 7254 5int2 7415

Freq. Freq.
Channel Channel
[MHz] [MHz]
3int3 7205 3int3 7366
4int3 7233 4int3 7394
5int3 7261 5int3 7422
144 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
19.7 Branching
19.7.1 Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections

Detailed block diagrams of branching in the various configurations are given in chapter 31 starting on
page 261.
Detailed branching drawings, organized per frequency bands and type (with/without Frequency
Reuse/Diversity) are given in the handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings REF.[B]
on page 499.
These drawings indicate also the connections among the branching and the Transceivers.
As far as the number of channels are concerned, such drawings show only some of the possible
configurations.
19.7.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area)
Tab. 20. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules
SLOT IN RACK (see Fig. 137. on page 272)
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT

Equipping this kit, after having set up the connections involved in Rx branching area, is
mandatory in operating conditions to ensure correct equipment ventilation.
Label for
(F) UNIT
P/N
Remote
(REF in Tab. 39. on page 183)
Inventory
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE
[35]
KIT
Fig. 79. Branching Front Plate Kit
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 145 / 522
146 / 522

110 SYSTEM CABLING
110.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the 9600LSYLHR system cabling with the following information:
location of access points for cabling, with the exception of those present on the units front plates,
that are described in chapter 18 on page 105 and chapter 19 on page 127
types of cables used for internal connections
pointtopoint cabling of internal connections
description of pinout of connectors for external connections.
This chapter does not describe:

the effective cable routing inside the equipment for internal connections. Notice that the
internal connections must be done taking into account the need of extracting any board
without removing cables not strictly relevant to it.
the kinds of cables used for external connections
This chapter is organized as follows:
Shelves connectors, on page 148, including:

TRU connectors, on page 148
Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout, on page 148
Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connectors layout, on page 150
BALUN adapter on page 150
Transceiver shelf connectors, on page 151
Cable kits and cable types, on page 153
Power supply distribution connections, on page 160
Connections between TRU and input housekeepings, on page 160
Signal connections between shelves, on page 161
ModemTransceiverBranching connections, on page 163
External interfaces, on page 172, including:

Power Line Interface, on page 172
SDH interfaces, on page 172
Input / Output Unprotected WST, on page 172
Input / Output Protected WST, on page 172
Auxiliary Channels, on page 173
Management interfaces, on page 177
Station Alarms, on page 178
Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms, on page 178, including:
General characteristics, on page 178
Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms, on page 179
Input Housekeeping alarms, on page 182
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 147 / 522
110.2 Shelves connectors

110.2.1 TRU connectors

In case your system is equipped with the:
Enhanced TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 39. on page 183), please make reference to chapter 16 on
page 81.
former version TRUs no longer envisaged in new supplies, please make reference to the Appendix
C Obsolete items on page 485.
110.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout
M179 M180 M194 M187
M185 M193 M183 M186 M192 M190 M191 M182
M188 M184 M189
Legend: see Tab. 21. on page 149
N.B. Dot in connector front view indicates Pin 1
Fig. 80. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout
148 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 21. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors usage
USAGE
CONN. CONN. TYPE SIGNALS

AND PINOUT
Can 0 B.B Terminator see Fig. 90. on page 159
or
M179 SUBD9 pins female
Additional Housekeeping N.B. see para.15.4.2 on page 77
pins not for Customer use
see Tab. 23. on page 161

M180 SUBD25 pins female Can Bus RT
see Tab. 28. on page 173 and

M182 SUBD25 pins female Aux channel G703 and RS232
Tab. 29. on page 174
Out Remote alarms
M183 SUBD25 pins female see Tab. 36. on page 180
(GA21GA40)

M184 SUBD9 pins male Rack lamps
M185 SUBD25 pins female Input Housekeeping see Tab. 38. on page 182
see Tab. 23. on page 161

M186 SUBD25 pins female RT missing connections
Can 0 bus extension toward see Tab. 24. on page 161
FAN Shelf 0 pins not for Customer use
see Fig. 90. on page 159
M188 SUBD9 pins female CAN 1 (Download) Terminator
see Fig. 90. on page 159
M189 SUBD9 pins female CAN 1 (Download) Terminator
Out party line OW,TPH and see Tab. 28. on page 173 and
loudspeaker Tab. 30. on page 175

M191 SUBD25 pins female Aux channel V11
Out Housekeeping and
Remote alarms (GA41GA48)
Out Remote alarms
(GA1GA20)
M194 SUBD25 pins female Rel command HST for future use
N.B. Unit no longer envisaged in newer supplies (see para.63.3 on page 486). This information is
just for the convenience of Customers having still installed it in their system.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 149 / 522
110.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout

green markers
OUT J1
1
IN J2
OUT J3
2
IN J4
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9
yellow markers
In current release only connectors (J1) and (J2) are used for the connection of the 2Mbit/s WST
of the corresponding channel. Connectors (J3) and (J4) are not used.
Fig. 81. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering
110.2.4 BALUN adapter
P/N 1AB158340001
Provides 2Mbit/s WST Input/Output port impedance conversion from 75 W into 120 W.
Fig. 82. BALUN adapter
150 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
110.2.5 Transceiver shelf connectors
M1
M2
BATT.A
M4 M3
M5
BATT.B
M7 BATT.A
M6
FOR TRANCEIVERS
BATT.B 04
FOR TRANCEIVERS
59
Legend on page 152
Fig. 83. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at reartop side
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 151 / 522
Legend for Fig. 83. :

a) Power supply connectors (M2) (M3) (M5) (M6) :

Usage and connection: see para.16.3.6 on page 93
Pinout:
Pins Meaning
A1 +BATT +BATTERY
A3
A
A2 GND Ground
A1
A3 BATT Battery
b) (M1) (M4) connectors: for usage see Tab. 23. on page 161.
c) (M7) connector: CAN RT bus terminated by a CAN bus terminator (see Fig. 90. on page 159).
152 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
110.3 Cable kits and cable types
The following Tab. 22. lists the cable kits envisaged for 9600LSY system and indicates the cable types
used in such kits, the drawing of which are given in the associated figures.
Notes for figures:
a) the writings on cable connectors (like (A1) , (A2) , etc.) are used as CABLE SIDE information in the
following paragraphs, to point out the correct cable connections;
b) some labels are colored. In conjunction with the colored markers present on some units, this
facilitates cabling, matching the color on cable label with that of colored marker on the unit front plate;
c) in the CannonCannon cables the pin connection is 1:1 (i.e. pin 1 left connected to pin 1 right, pin
2 left connected to pin 2 right, etc.).
Tab. 22. Cable kits and cable types

P/N (REF. in
CABLE
CABLE KIT Tab. 39. on FIGURE
TYPES
page 183)
CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS REF.[9] A, B, C, D, E Fig. 84. page 154
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO SPACE
REF.[10] F, G Fig. 85. page 155
DIV.
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH SPACE
REF.[11] H Fig. 85. page 155
DIV
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (1 RACK) REF.[12] K, N, P Fig. 86. page 156
CABLE KIT FOR
REF.[13] KK, NN, PP Fig. 87. page 157
REUSE (2 RACKS) (N.B.1)
CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL A, D Fig. 84. page 154

REF.[14]
FOR WMSN S Fig. 89. page 159
B Fig. 84. page 154
FANS UNIT CABLE KIT REF.[15]
Q Fig. 88. page 158
B Fig. 84. page 154
FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT REF.[16]
R Fig. 88. page 158
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (N.B.3) D Fig. 84. page 154
Canbus Terminator (N.B.2) T Fig. 90. page 159
N.B. 1 the use of this kit is not specified in current edition of this handbook.
2 Each Can bus line must be terminated by a plug with two load resistors (120 ohm resistors
mounted on SUBD9 pins male connectors inserted on female connectors).
3 Unit no longer envisaged in newer supplies (see para.63.3 on page 486). This
information is just for the convenience of Customers having still installed it in their system.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 153 / 522
A: 3pins female for power supply

A1
N.B. A2
B: 3pins female 450 for power supply
B1
B2
N.B.
C: 9pins Cannon male / 9pins Cannon male C2
N.B.
C1
D: 9pins Cannon female / 9pins Cannon male D2
D1
N.B.
E1 E: 25pins Cannon male / 25pins Cannon male E2
N.B.
N.B. Labelling depending on cable usage
Fig. 84. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E)
154 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
F: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n signal flow MODEM n

F1 J10 J3 F2
blue label red label
G: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900

G1
J5 J1 G2
red label blue label
H: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900

H1 J2 J4 H2
white label white label
Fig. 85. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H)
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 155 / 522
K: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900

K1 J11 V (H) J4 H (V) K2

J11 H (V) J4 V (H)
P: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900

P1 J11 V (H) J5 H (V) P2

J11 H (V) J5 V (H)

N: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n signal flow RT n
J6 H (V) J6 V (H)
N1 N2
Fig. 86. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P)
156 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
KK: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n MODEM n
signal flow
J11 V (H) J4 H (V)
KK1 KK2
(RACK1) (RACK2)
RT n MODEM n
signal flow
J11 H (V) J4 V (H)
(RACK1) (RACK2)
PP: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n MODEM n
signal flow J5 H (V)
J11 V (H)
PP1 (RACK2) PP2
(RACK1)
RT n MODEM n
signal flow J5 V (H)
J11 H (V)
(RACK1) (RACK2)
NN: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n RT n
J6 H (V) signal flow J6 V (H)
(RACK1) (RACK2)
NN1 white label white label NN2
Fig. 87. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP)
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 157 / 522
Q: 9pins Cannon male 300 / 9pins Cannon male

Q2
Q1
R: 9pins Cannon male 300 / 9pins Cannon male 300

R2
R1
Fig. 88. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R)
158 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
S: 1channel extension
S1
signal flow
S2
Sub.ADM STM n
J1 Sub.ADM STM n
J2
yellow label
green label
RRA n
J2
yellow label
S3
RRA n
J1
signal flow
green label
S4
Fig. 89. System cabling: types of used cables (S)
T: CANbus terminator
Fig. 90. System cabling: types of used cables (T)
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 159 / 522
110.4 Power supply distribution connections

In case your system is equipped with the:

TRU P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 39. on page 183, please make reference to chapter 16 on page 81 .
former version TRUs no longer envisaged in new supplies, please make reference to the Appendix
C Obsolete items on page 485 .
110.5 Connections between TRU and input housekeepings
There are the following alternative cases:
a) your system is equipped with the TRU P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 39. on page 183 .
The circuit breaker units of this TRU do have state monitoring points, so that they can be forwarded
toward the 9600LSY input housekeepings system, in order to detect their alarmed condition (circuit
breaker unit OFF).
In this case, refer to para.15.4 on page 74 .
a) your system is equipped with the former version TRUs no longer envisaged in newer supplies.
Make reference to Appendix C Obsolete items on page 485 .
160 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
110.6 Signal connections between shelves
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.110.3 on page
153.
Tab. 23. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
CABLE 1st. SIDE CABLE 2nd SIDE
CABLE
N. CABLE CABLE
TYPE LABEL & CONNECTION LABEL & CONNECTION
SIDE SIDE
E 1 E1 Sub. RT / M4 (N.B.1) E2 Sub. BB / M186 (N.B.2)
C 1 C1 Sub. RT / M1 (N.B.1) C2 Sub. BB / M180 (N.B.2)
D 1 D1 Sub. BB / M184 (N.B.2) D2 TRU connector M1 (N.B.3)
Tab. 24. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT
EXTENSION CABLE KIT
a) Configuration: BB FAN shelf only (see Fig. 44. on page 97 )
CABLE
N. CABLE CABLE
SIDE SIDE
Fans Unit down (up) / M2
Q 1 Q1 Q2 Sub. BB / M187 (N.B.2)
(N.B.4)
T 1 T
(N.B.4)
b) Configuration: BB FAN shelf + ADM FAN shelf (see Fig. 45. on page 97 )
CABLE
N. CABLE CABLE
SIDE SIDE
Q 1 Q1 Q2 Sub. BB / M187 (N.B.2)
(N.B.4)
Fans Unit down (up) / M3 Fans Unit down (up) / M2
R 1 R1 R2
(N.B.4) (N.B.5)
T 1 T
(N.B.5)
N.B. 1 see Fig. 83. page 151

2 see Fig. 80. page 148
3 in case your system is equipped with the:
TRU P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 39. on page 183, refer also to para.16.3.6.3 on page 96 .
Appendix C Obsolete items on page 485 .
4 connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 65. page 122) of FAN UNIT for LHR
(see POS.(E) in Fig. 137. on page 272 )
5 connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 65. page 122) of FAN UNIT for ADM
(see POS.(L) in Fig. 137. on page 272 )
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 161 / 522
Tab. 25. Signal connections for LHRADM 1650SMC interconnection: Cables belonging to

CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR WMSN


CABLE
N. CABLE CABLE
SIDE SIDE
D 1 D1 ADM CONGI / C3 (N.B.1) D2 TRU connector M1 (N.B.2)
S1 Sub.ADM STMn / J1 (N.B.1) S4 RRAn / J2 (N.B.3)

S n
S2 Sub.ADM STMn / J2 (N.B.1) S3 RRAn / J1 (N.B.3)
N.B. 1 refer to 1650SMC documentation

2 in case your system is equipped with the:
TRU P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 39. on page 183, refer also to para.16.3.6.3 on page 96 .
Appendix C Obsolete items on page 485 .
3 see Fig. 58. on page 116
Tab. 26. Signal connections for LHR interconnection with other types of ADM (e.g. 1850TSS)
The ADMs TRU alarm interface connector must be connected to one of TRU connector M1 (see
Fig. 32. on page 86 )
The LHRs STM1 interfaces (electrical or optical) must be connected (by coaxial or fiber cables)
to the corresponding ADMs STM1 interfaces (electrical or optical)
For details at ADM side, refer to its specific documentation.
Tab. 27. Signal connections for LHRLPS and LHRLPSADM interconnections
Refer to the LPS specific documentation (see Tab. 81. on page 500 ).
162 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
110.7 ModemTransceiverBranching connections
The connections among Modems, Transceivers and Branching depend on the following possible
configurations:
case a ) : without Reuse and without Diversity
see page 164
case b ) : without Reuse and with Diversity
see page 166
case c ) : with Reuse and without Diversity
see page 168
case d ) : with Reuse and with Diversity
see page 170
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 163 / 522
a) Without Reuse and without Diversity


In this figure, the writings near the arrows (that show the signal direction) on the cable indicate the
CABLE TYPE and the CABLE SIDE information.
E.g. G2 near MODEM J1 means that:
cable type G is used
and that its side G2 has to be connected to MODEMs connector J1
signal flows out from connector J1
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.110.3 on
page 153.
To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use:
for MODEM unit: Fig. 64. on page 121
for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 70. on page 131
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited
in para.19.7.1 on page 145.
Requirements:
MODEM does not need any CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 63. on page 120)
TRANSCEIVER ASSEMBLY TYPE (see Tab. 19. on page 129 ):
A: Standard Configuration a: Standard Configuration
164 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
MODEM n
G2
J1
BASE BAND SHELF
J2
F2
J3
J4
J5
BRANCHING
RX
J9
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
F1
J10
J11
G1
J5
J6
J14 TRANSCEIVER n
BRANCHING
TX
Fig. 91. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 165 / 522
b) Without Reuse and with Diversity


page 153.
Requirements:
MODEM needs one CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 63. on page 120)
TRANSCEIVER ASSEMBLY TYPE (see Tab. 19. on page 129 ):
B: Space Diversity Configuration c: Space Diversity Configuration
166 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
MODEM n
G2
J1
BASE BAND SHELF
J2
F2
J3
H2
J4
J5
BRANCHING
RX
J1 J9
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
H1 F1
J2 J10
J3 J11
G1
J5
J6
TRANSCEIVER n
J14
BRANCHING
TX
Fig. 92. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 167 / 522
c) With Reuse and without Diversity


page 153.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.:
(MODEM 0 + TRANSCEIVER 0) connected to (MODEM 1 + TRANSCEIVER 1)
....
Requirements:
both MODEMs need one CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 63. on page 120)
TRANSCEIVER ASSEMBLY TYPE (see Tab. 19. on page 129 ) and Rx Local Oscillator
MASTER/SLAVE configuration (see para.19.6.6 on page 140 ) : the two transceivers must be
configured differently from each other:
1st transceiver 2nd transceiver
2GR Transceivers 2G Transceivers 2GR Transceivers 2G Transceivers
A: Standard b: Frequency reuse A: Standard a: Standard

Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration
hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator
must be configured as MASTER must be configured as SLAVE
WARNING: in Frequency Reuse systems with Transceiver and Modem units powered on,
whenever you must disconnect the cable N1N2 shown in Fig. 93. on page 169 (e.g.
for troubleshooting), it is mandatory to disconnect before the cable K1 (slave TR )
K2 (master TR). This caution is not necessary in the unit replacement procedures of
para.47.4 from page 328 , because they envisage the Transceiver or Modem unit
switch off, before the cable remotion.
168 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
MODEM EVEN MODEM EVEN +1

H (V) V (H)
G2 G2
J1 J1
BASE BAND SHELF
J2 J2
F2 F2
J3 J3
K2 K2
J4 J4
J5 J5
BRANCHING
RX
J9 J9
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
F1 F1
TRANSCEIVER V (H)
J10
TRANSCEIVER H (V)
J10
K1 K1
J11 J11
G1 G1
J5 J5
N1 N2
J6 J6
J14 J14
BRANCHING
TX
Fig. 93. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 169 / 522
d) With Reuse and with Diversity


page 153.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.:
....
Requirements:
both MODEMs need two CANCCOMB modules (see Fig. 63. on page 120)
TRANSCEIVER ASSEMBLY TYPE (see Tab. 19. on page 129 ) and Rx Local Oscillator
MASTER/SLAVE configuration (see para.19.6.6 on page 140 ) : the two transceivers must be
configured differently from each other:
1st transceiver 2nd transceiver
2GR Transceivers 2G Transceivers 2GR Transceivers 2G Transceivers
B: Space Diversity d: Space Diversity B: Space Diversity c: Space Diversity

Configuration and Frequency Configuration Configuration
reuse Configuration
hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator
must be configured as MASTER must be configured as SLAVE
WARNING: in Frequency Reuse systems with Transceiver and Modem units powered on,
whenever you must disconnect the cable N1N2 shown in Fig. 94. on page 171 (e.g.
for troubleshooting), it is mandatory to disconnect before the cable P1 (slave TR )
P2 (master TR). This caution is not necessary in the unit replacement procedures of
para.47.4 from page 328 , because they envisage the Transceiver or Modem unit
switch off, before the cable remotion.
170 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
MODEM EVEN MODEM EVEN +1

H (V) V (H)
G2 G2
J1 J1
BASE BAND SHELF
J2 J2
F2 F2
J3 J3
H2 H2
J4 J4
P2 P2
J5 J5
BRANCHING
RX
J1 J9 J1 J9
F1 H1
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
F1
TRANSCEIVER V (H)
J2 J10
TRANSCEIVER H (V)
J2 J10
H1
J11
P1
J3 J3 J11
P1
G1 G1
J5 J5
N1 N2
J6 J6
J14 J14
BRANCHING
TX
Fig. 94. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 171 / 522
110.8 External interfaces

110.8.1 Power Line Interface

The Power Line interface is located on the TRU unit; in case your system is equipped with the:
TRU P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 39. on page 183 , please make reference to chapter 16 on page 81.
former version TRUs no longer envisaged in newer supplies, please make reference to Appendix
C Obsolete items on page 485 .
The main characteristics are reported in the document enclosed at the end of this manual (REF.[C] in
Tab. 91. on page 521):
9600LSY Rel.1 &2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LHR & LHRC VERSIONS
110.8.2 SDH interfaces
The SDH interfaces (line side) can be electrical or optical.

Their access is on the front panel of units RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY (1 channel per unit); see
para.18.2.4 on page 115 (RRACHANNEL), and para.18.2.5 on page 117 (RRASTANDBY).
Electrical interfaces
The connector used is Siemens, 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax.
Optical interfaces
The connector used is SC/PC or FC/PC.
For Optical Safety refer to para.61.3.5 on page 455.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs.
110.8.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST
The Subrack Access Area provides external access for WST channels by Siemens connectors, 1.0/2.3
75ohm male coax.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs on BaseBand Subrack access area; see
para.110.2.3 on page 150.
110.8.4 Input / Output Protected WST
Input /Output WST protected is available on Service unit (see para.18.2.3 on page 113)
The connector used is Siemens 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax.
Maximum cables number: N.1 input and N.1 output.
172 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
110.8.5 Auxiliary Channels
The Subrack Access Area provides external access for auxiliary channels by three SUBD 25 pins female
connectors specified in the following.

This table sums up the interfaces available:
Tab. 28. Summary of auxiliary channels
inserted/
N. bit/s Format Connector wires Notes
extracted
asynchronous
M182 on BB access
1 9600 V24/V28 RSOH/RFCOH 2
area. See
(selectable)
Tab. 29. on page
3 64k G703 RSOH/RFCOH 174 12
64k RSOH/RFCOH
M191 on BB access
3
RSOH/RFCOH area. See (SW configurable)
or V11 24
64K/128K (128 K) only Tab. 31. on page connected to 1 or
2+1
RFCOH 176 2 bytes
RJ11
Connector (J5) on
1 Speech telephonic RSOH/RFCOH 2 EOW
Service Unit
(Fig. 56. page 114)
Analog
3 Speech I/O 3dBm RSOH/RFCOH 12
Party line
M190 on BB access
1 Speech I/O 3dBm RFCOH area. See 4 TPH
Tab. 30. on page
175 Available on
Out 400 mW EOW
1 Speech 2 Remote Unit
4 ohm (only extract)
to loudspeaker
M182 on BB access
area. See
1 64k G703 RFCOH or ADM 4 TPH to ADM
Tab. 29. on page
174
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 173 / 522
Tab. 29. Aux channel G703 and RS232 BB shelfs M182 connector pinout


1 G703 TX+ (A) 64 kb data channel output port A
2 G703 RX+ (A) 64 kb data channel input port A
3 G703 TX+ (B) 64 kb data channel output port B
4 G703 RX+ (B) 64 kb data channel input port B
5 G703 TX+ (C) 64 kb data channel output port C
6 G703 RX+ (C) 64 kb data channel input port C
7
8 DATI 9600 TX 9.6 kb data channel output
9
1
14 10 G703 TX+ TPH 64 kb data channel output for VOAD
11 G703 RX+ TPH 64 kb data channel input for VOAD
12
13 GND
14 G703 TX (A) 64 kb data channel output port A
25 15 G703 RX (A) 64 kb data channel input port A
13
16 G703 TX (B) 64 kb data channel output port B
17 G703 RX (B) 64 kb data channel input port B
18 G703 TX (C) 64 kb data channel output port C
19 G703 RX (C) 64 kb data channel input port C
20
21 DATI 9600 RX 9.6 kb data channel input
22
23 G703 TX TPH 64 kb data channel output for VOAD
24 G703 RX TPH 64 kb data channel input for VOAD
25
174 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 30. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker BB shelfs M190 connector pinout


1 VF TX+ A analog party line output path A
2 VF TX+ B analog party line output path B
3 VF TX+ C analog party line output path C
4 VF RX+ A analog party line input path A
5 VF RX+ B analog party line input path B
6 VF RX+ C analog party line input path C
7 WIRE A TPH output telephone (TPH)
8 VF TX+ A TPH analog party line output path B VOAD
9 VF TX+ B TPH analog party line output path A VOAD
1
14 10 VF RX+ A TPH analog party line input path B VOAD
11 VF RX+ B TPH analog party line input path A VOAD
12 LOUDSPEAKER + output loudspeaker positive
13 GND
14 VF TX A analog party line output path A
25 15 VF TX B analog party line output path B
13
16 VF TX C analog party line output path C
17 VF RX A analog party line input path A
18 VF RX B analog party line input path B
19 VF RX C analog party line input path C
20 WIRE B TPH output telephone (TPH)
21 VF TX A TPH analog party line output path A VOAD
22 VF TX B TPH analog party line output path B VOAD
23 VF RX A TPH analog party line input path A VOAD
24 VF RX B TPH analog party line input path B VOAD
25 LOUDSPEAKER output loudspeaker negative
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 175 / 522
Tab. 31. Aux channel V11 BB shelfs M191 connector pinout


1 DATI+ V11 TX (A) 64 kb data channel positive output port A
2 CK+ V11 TX (A) TX clock positive port A
3 DATI+ V11 RX (A) 64 kb data channel positive input port A
4 DATI+ V11 TX (B) 64 kb data channel positive output port B
5 CK+ V11 TX (B) TX clock positive port B
6 DATI+ V11 RX (B) 64 kb data channel positive input port B
7 DATI+ V11 TX (C) 64 kb data channel positive output port C
8 CK+ V11 X (C) TX clock positive port C
9 DATI+ V11 RX (C) 64 kb data channel positive input port C
1
14 10 DATI+ V11 TX (D) 64 kb data channel positive output port D
11 CK+ V11 TX (D) TX clock positive port D
12 DATI+ V11 RX (D) 64 kb data channel positive input port D
13 GND
14 DATI V11 TX (A) 64 kb data channel negative output port A
25 15 CK V11 TX (A) TX clock negative port A
13
16 DATI V11 RX (A) 64 kb data channel negative input port A
17 DATI V11 TX (B) 64 kb data channel negative output port B
18 CK V11 TX (B) TX clock negative port B
19 DATI V11 RX (B) 64 kb data channel negative input port B
20 DATI V11 TX (C) 64 kb data channel negative output port C
21 CK V11 TX (C) TX clock negative port C
22 DATI V11 RX (C) 64 kb data channel negative input port C
23 DATI V11 TX (D) 64 kb data channel negative output port D
24 CK V11 TX (D) TX clock negative port D
25 DATI V11 RX (D) 64 kb data channel negative input port D
176 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
110.8.6 Management interfaces
The System Controller unit (see Fig. 52. on page 109) provides the following external access points:
I/0 for TMN (QB3)

BNC connector 10base2
RJ45 connector 10baseT and EC Debug Network or EC local debug:
Tab. 32. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit
Pin Signal
1 TPTXP
2 TPTXN
3 TPRXP
4
5
6 TPRXN
7
8 GND
Craft terminal interface (F)

The connection for F interface (RS232 to local PC) is provided on ESC unit through a standard SUB
9pin female connector:
Tab. 33. RS232 for F interface connection table
RS232 RJ45
PAIR WIRE COLOR
(SYSCO side) (PC side)
1 A Not used Not used White / Blue ring
1 B Not used Not used Blue
2 A 5 4 White / Orange ring
2 B Not used Not used Orange
3 A 3 8 White / Green ring
3 B 2 7 Green
4 A Not used Not used White / Brown ring
4 B Not used Not used Brown
N.B. The special cable needed to connect the CRAFT TERMINAL to the system is supplied with
the equipment.
Can Bus and RC debug local access by RJ45

for AlcatelLucent internal use only.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 177 / 522
110.8.7 Station Alarms

Station alarm interface is provided between the LHRs BB shelfs M184 connector and TRUs M1

connector (see Fig. 32. and Tab. 10. on pages 86 87 , with reference to TRU P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 39. on

page 183 ).
N.B. in case your system is equipped with the former version TRUs no longer envisaged in newer
supplies, please make reference to Appendix C Obsolete items on page 485 .
For further information, please refer to para.53.3 on page 440.
Tab. 34. Station Alarms (Rack lamps) BB shelfs M184 connector pinout
M184 : SUBD9 pins male

PIN ALARM MEANING HW/SW
1 +VSERV +Service Battery
2 C Alarm storing command HW
1 RATTD Yellow LED Switch on Alarm storing HWSW
6
3 ABN Yellow LED Switch on Abnormal condition SW
5 9 4 RURG Red LED (1) Switch on Urgent alarm HWSW

5 RNURG Red LED (2) Switch on Not Urgent alarm HWSW
6 VSERV Service Battery
7 CH Green LED Switch on buzzer HW
8 TOR VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure HW
9 GND GROUND
110.8.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms
110.8.8.1 General characteristics
Standard Housekeeping Housekeeping external unit
I/O N I/O N
Input (station alarms) 22 Input (station alarms) 18 (additional)
Output (station controls) 48
The interface characteristics here indicated apply both to summarizing alarms and housekeeping alarms:
The presence of active alarm correspond to closed relay contact with a common wire available to
the customer.
Electrical characteristics (V is voltage between the warm and the common wires) are:
open contact 72 V 2V I 0.2mA
closed contact 2 V <= 0V I 50mA
178 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
110.8.8.2 Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms
Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of three SUBD 25pins
female connectors on Access area subrack specified in the following tables Tab. 35. to Tab. 37.
Tab. 35. Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) BB shelfs M193 connector pinout
N.B. For the meaning of the signals, please refer to Tab. 69. on page 441.
1 OUTGA1 output general alarm

16 COMA common relay for pins 1, 2, 3, 14, 15

1
14 18 OUTGA9 output general alarm
19 COMB common relay for pins 4, 5, 6, 17, 18

25
22 COMC common relay for pins 7, 8, 9, 20, 21

25 COMD common relay for pins 10, 11, 12, 23, 24
13 GND ground (corresponds to the cable earth braid)
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 179 / 522
Tab. 36. Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) BB shelfs M183 connector pinout



16 COME common relay for pins 1, 2, 3, 14, 15

14
19 COMF common relay for pins 4, 5, 6, 17, 18

13
22 COMG common relay for pins 7, 8, 9, 20, 21

25 COMH common relay for pins 10, 11, 12, 23, 24
180 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 37. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) BB shelfs M192 connector pinout

1 OUTHK1 housekeeping output

16 COMI common relay for pins 1, 2, 3, 14, 15

1 18 OUTHK9 housekeeping output
14
19 COML common relay for pins 4, 5, 6, 17, 18

13
9 TAND
22 COMM common relay for pins 7, 8, 9, 20, 21

12 TOR
25 COMN common relay for pins 10, 11, 12, 23, 24
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 181 / 522
110.8.8.3 Input Housekeeping alarms

Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of one SUBD 25pins

female connector on Access area subrack specified in the following Tab. 38. herebelow.

Only for older systems: with the use of the Additional Housekeeping unit (no longer envisaged in newer
supplies), it was possible to increase by 18 the HK Inputs. The access is on the same unit (see Tab. 8. on
page 78).
Tab. 38. Input Housekeeping BB shelfs M185 connector pinout

or Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable M1 : SUBD25 pins female (N.B.)
1 INHK1 housekeeping input
1
14 10 INHK19 housekeeping input
12
13 GND
25 15 INHK4 housekeeping input

13
24 INHK22 (N.B.) housekeeping input
25
N.B. If the special Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable is employed for the connections
between TRUs breaker alarms and input housekeepings, pin 24 (INHK22) is used for the
wiredOR circuit breaker alarm and is not available to Customer; refer to para.110.5 point
1 ) on page 74 for details.
182 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
111 EQUIPMENT PART LIST
This chapter gives information regarding the equipments item P/Ns.

Refer to chapter 32 on page 271 for information on equipping rules, labels for remote inventory and
physical and logical position in the system.
9600LSYLHR part list is given through the Tab. 39. herebelow, which:
lists all items and their P/N
indicates the max quantity envisaged for the item
indicates the figure where the position of the item is indicated
indicates the table or paragraph where detailed information regarding the equipping rules of the item
is given
N.B. This part list is relevant to the frequencyindependent items. For frequencydependent items
please refer to part lists specific for each frequency inside the enclosed document Transceiver
Reference Manual REF.[D] in Tab. 91. on page 521.
Tab. 39. 9600LSY Part list Common parts (frequency independent)
REF [x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item.
For NB see Tab. 40. on page 187
NAME MAX EQUIP.
REF P/N POS
(NB) Qty RULES
RACK AND TRU
[1] ETSI RACK H 2200 3DB04656AA** 1

(A) in Fig. 137.
page 272 para.
[2] ETSI RACK H 2000 3DB04657AA** 1
23.4.2
ENHANCED TRU SUBRACK (B) in Fig. 137. page 208
[3] 3DB05602AAAC 1
(NBa) page 272
[4] CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Tab. 13. on page 91
[5] KIT FUSERBREAKER 3DB03114AA**
Tab. 39. continues ...
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 183 / 522
.. continues Tab. 39.

NAME MAX EQUIP.

REF P/N POS
(NB) Qty RULES

SUBRACKS
(D) in Fig. 137.
[6] SUBRACK 2G LH 3DB02143AA** 1
page 272
(G) in Fig. 137.
[7] RT SUBRACK 3DB02294AA** 1
page 272
(E) , (L) para.
FAN UNIT H=50
[8] 3DB24015AA** 2 in Fig. 137. 32.5
(NBb)
page 272 page 286
SYSTEM WIRING
[9] CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS 3DB02842AA** 1
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO
[10] 3DB02843AA** 8
SPACE DIV.
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH
[11] 3DB02844AA** 8
SPACE DIV
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE
[12] 3DB02845AA** 4
(1 RACK)
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE

[13] 3DB02846AA** 8
(2 RACKS) para.110.3
CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. on page 153
[14] 3DB03202AA** 8
CHANNEL FOR WMSN
[15] FANS UNIT CABLE KIT 3DB03264AA** 1
FANS UNIT EXTENSION
[16] 3DB03266AA** 1
CABLE KIT
PLUGS KIT COMMON PART
3DB03213AA** 1
(LSY)
PLUGS KIT 1 CHANNEL
3DB03214AA** 8
EXTENSION (LSY)
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING para.110.5 point 1 )
[17] 3DB06599AA** 1
SUBSTITUTIVE CABLE on page 74
184 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
NAME MAX EQUIP.

REF P/N POS

(NB) Qty RULES
RSA/RRA
(C) in Fig. 145.
[18] RRA CHANNEL 3DB02147AA** 8
page 280 Tab. 52.
(G) in Fig. 145. pg 282
[19] RRA STANDBY 3DB02151AA** 1
page 280
MODEM LH STM1 1WST
[20] 3DB02136AA** 8
(128QAM) ( NBc ) ( NBd )
MODEM 32/64QAM LH Tab. 53.

[21] 3DB05190AA** 8
( NBc ) ( NBe ) pg 283
MODEM LH STM0 0WST
[22] 3DB02140AA** 8
( NBc ) ( NBf )
(D) in Fig. 145.
CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1 page 280
[23] 3DB00829AA** 16
( NBd ) ( NBg ) Tab. 53.
pg 283
CANCCOMB 32/64 &
[24] 3DB04860AA** 16
( NBe ) ( NBh ) Fig. 63.
CANCCOMB STM0 pg 120
[25] 3DB03373AA** 8
( NBf ) ( NBi )
SERVICE
[26] 3DB02155AB** 1 (B) in Fig. 145. Tab. 51.
( NBj )
page 280 pg 281
[27] ADDITIONAL VOICE 3DB02158AA** 1
(A) in Fig. 145. Tab. 50.
[28] SYSTEM CONTROLLER 3DB02162AA** 1
page 280 pg 281
FLASH CARD 128 MB Fig. 50. Tab. 50.
[29] 3DB24191AA** 1
( NBk ) page 108 pg 281
(E) in Fig. 145. Tab. 54.
[30] DC/DC CONVERTER BB 2G LH 3DB00619AA** 8
page 280 pg 283
(F) in Fig. 145.
Tab. 56.
[31] FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V 3DB01806AA** 2 page 280
pg 284
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 185 / 522

NAME MAX EQUIP.

REF P/N POS
(NB) Qty RULES

OPTICAL MODULES AND ADAPTER CABLES
Fig. 58.
page 116
LC OPTICAL INTERFACE and Tab. 52.
[32] 3DB05598AB** 8
(NBl) (C) , (G) pg 282
in Fig. 145.
page 280
KIT LCSPC DUPLEX/FCSPC
[33] 3DB12184AA** 8
ADAPTER para.18.2.6
KIT LCSPC DUPLEX/SCSPC on page 118
[34] 3DB12185AA** 8
ADAPTER
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE (F) in Fig. 137. Tab. 20.
[35] 3DB03382AA** 1
KIT page 272 pg 145
(C) + (D)
[36] DUMMY PLATE W40 (RRA) 3AN49589AA** 8 in Fig. 145.
page 280 Tab. 55.
pg 284
DUMMY PLATE L40 (DC/DC (E) inFig. 145.
[37] 3DB03010AA** 8
CONV.) page 280
(A) in Fig. 146. Tab. 58.
[38] RT FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB03190AA** 8
page 285 pg 285
(J) in Fig. 137. Tab. 57.
[39] KIT LOUDSPEAKER 3DB04125AA** 1
page 272 pg 284
para.42.1
[40] TELEPHONE KIT (DTMF) 3CY07335AA** 1
on page 291
[41] LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT 3DB03008AA** 1 para. 43.2.2
[42] LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT 3DB03007AA** 1 on page 296
TRANSCEIVERS (NBm)
[43] xx GHZ TRANSMITTER 8
[44] xx GHZ RECEIVER 8

chapter 19 Tab. 58.
(NBm)
[45] 96xxLSY L.O 16 on page 127 pg 285
[46] TR FREQUENCY REUSE KIT 8

SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE LICENCES: Refer to Operators Handbooks listed in Tab. 85. on
page 504
DOCUMENTATION: Refer to para.64.2 on page 497
end of Tab. 39.
186 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 40. Notes to Tab. 39.

NB
The new ENHANCED TRU SUBRACK (P/N 3DB05602AAAC) is equipped, in newer

a supplies, instead of the previous types of TRU. For further information, refer to the Appendix
C Obsolete items on page 485
The new FANS SUBRACK (P/N 3DB24015AA**) is equipped, in newer supplies, instead of
the previous FANS SUBRACK (P/N 3DB03242AA**) and relevant plugin FANS
b
ASSEMBLED (P/N 3DB03238AA**). For further information, refer to the Appendix C
Obsolete items on page 485
MODEM LH STM1 1WST and MODEM LH STM0 0WST and MODEM 32/64QAM LH
c
in alternative
MODEM LH STM1 1WST and CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1 can be used only in
d
conjunction with frequency plans allowing 128QAM STM1 transmission (N.B.)
MODEM 32/64QAM LH and CANCCOMB 32/64 can be used only in conjunction with
e
frequency plans allowing 64QAM STM1 transmission (N.B.)
MODEM LH STM0 0WST and CANCCOMB STM0 can be used only in conjunction with
f
frequency plans allowing 128QAM STM0 transmission (N.B.)
g CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1 only with MODEM LH STM1 1WST
h CANCCOMB 32/64 only with MODEM 32/64QAM LH
i CANCCOMB STM0 only with MODEM LH STM0 0WST
The SERVICE with new P/N 3DB02155AB** is fully compatible and interchangeable with the
j
SERVICE old P/N 3DB02155AA**
The new FLASH CARD 128 MB (P/N 3DB24191AA**) is equipped, in newer supplies,
instead of the previous type FLASH CARD ATA 48MB 40/+85C (P/N 1AB151770002)
whichever the SWP used is (V1.x, V2.0.x, or V2.1.x).
k WARNING:
the use of the new FLASH CARD 128 MB is mandatory with the SWP 2.1.x
in case you still have the old FLASH CARD ATA 48MB in your spare part stock, you must
be aware that it can be used with the SWPs 1.x and 2.0.x only , not with the SWP 2.1.x.
This new LC optical module is equipped, in newer supplies, instead of the previous types
l S1.1 OPTIC.INTERF. FC/PC and S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF. SC/PC . For further information
on such older types, refer to the Appendix C Obsolete items on page 485
m (N.B.)
N.B. refer to the enclosed document Transceiver Reference Manual REF.[D] in Tab. 91. on page
521 of this manual.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 187 / 522
a) END OF HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK
188 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x
LHR version

Part B: Technical Handbook
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 189 / 522
This handbook (from page 189 to page 522 ) is the part B of the whole handbook and is composed by
a main handbook and enclosed documents.
N.B. Cross references to page numbers 188 are references to the part A (Hardware Installation
Handbook). Such references are essential for information completion, so that part A must be
always available together with this part B.
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
190 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
SECTION 2: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
This section provides the 1st level description of the equipment and sumsup its technical characteristics.
Chapter 21 About this handbook 193
Chapter 22 Introduction to the 9600LSY radio system family

It explains briefly the characteristics of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, for all 195
configurations, and introduces the equipment network applications.
Chapter 23 System description

It gives the firstlevel description of 9600LSY equipment in the standard LHR and
WMSN configurations.
203
It introduces the equipment network applications, the hardware components, the
system and radio configurations. Moreover, it describes in detail the main radio
Transmission features and the description of the Equipment Control.
Chapter 24 Technical specifications

It sumsup how to retrieve the technical characteristics of the 9600LSY, for standard 245
LHR, LHR + LPS subsystem, LHR/HPA and WMSN configurations.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 191 / 522
192 / 522

21 ABOUT THIS HANDBOOK
For following information:
preliminary information, refer to page 3
list of changes of this issue, refer to page 12
applicability and purpose of this handbook, refer to para.64.1 on page 495 .
21.1 Handbook structure
This manual is composed by the following parts:
part A: the Hardware Installation Handbook, starting on page 31 , whose structure is described
in para.11.2 on page 34 .
part B: the Technical Handbook (this part), whose structure is described in following para.21.2.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 193 / 522
21.2 Technical Handbook structure

This handbook (from page 189 to page 522) is the part B of the whole handbook and is composed by a

main handbook, enclosed documents and by an extra part for handbook print and assembly
instructions.
N.B. Cross references to page numbers 188 are references to the front matter and the part A
(Hardware Installation Handbook). Such references are essential for information completion,
so that the front matter and the part A must be always available together with this part B.
MAIN HANDBOOK AND ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS

a) SECTION 2: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS on page 191
This section provides the 1st level description of the equipment and sumsup its technical
characteristics.
b) SECTION 3: SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS AND PROVISIONING on page 247

This section contains information for the system configuration and equipment provisioning.
c) SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE on page 287

This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance.
d) SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION on page 355

This section provides the 2nd level description of the equipment.
e) SECTION 6: APPENDICES on page 447

In this section some additional information and instructions are given:
Appendix A Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD norms and equipment labelling
Appendix B HPA configuration
Appendix C Obsolete items
Appendix D Documentation guide
Appendix E List of symbols and abbreviations
f) SECTION 7: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS on page 521

This section lists and contains the documents enclosed to this handbook. Each of them has its own
P/N, different from that of this main handbook and different from one another.
HANDBOOK PRINT AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
This part (after handbook last page 522 ):

is not present in the handbook paper copy, if supplied by AlcatelLucent factory.
is present in the pdf file. Customer can use it to print and assembly the handbook in the same way
that is done by AlcatelLucent factory.
194 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
22 INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600LSY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY
22.1 Foreword
This chapter explains briefly the characteristics of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, for all
configurations:
para.22.2 herebelow General

para.22.3 on page 196 Main Features
para.22.4 on page 199 System usage in MW links and networks
para.22.5 on page 201 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types
22.2 General
The 9600LSY digital radio relay system belongs to the second generation of the AlcatelLucent SDH
(Synchronous Digital Hierarchy ) radio family that has been developed aiming to match the demand of
high quality microwave transmission links and following the SDH standards defined by International
Organizations as ITUT, ITUR and ETSI. Special attention concerning the network management
standards and its integration into a SDH based network has been paid.
Big efforts have been done to expand as much as possible the versatility of the new radio family and the
full compatibility with the optical systems to ensure the utilization of the radio media as natural complement
to the optical fibre transmission.
A 9600LSY radio system can be in fact utilized either with multiplex section termination (MST) or
regenerator section termination (RST) functionality, can be used for optical loop closures or for fibre optic
backup, for spurs or for backbone links and, in general, in all the network interconnections where the
advantages due to an easy installation, a fast commissioning operations and time and cost saving solution
are requested.
The family supports radio transmission of STM0 (51 Mbps) and STM1 (155 Mbps) signals as well
STM4 (622 Mbps) or STM16 (2.4 Gbps) connections, using a proper number of radio frequency
channels in various configurations.
A full set of synchronous and plesiochronous interfaces is available.
By means of the new 9600LSY family, AlcatelLucent intends to answer the growing demand of
transmission capacity either for traditional telephone services or for the new dataoriented services
(including ATM + IP networks, LAN/WAN networks) or for the evolution of the cellular market.
The AlcatelLucent 9600LSY system architecture, based on a full indoor structure, covers all the
frequency bands from 4 to 13 GHz in a complete set of equipment configurations from 2 to 8 channels
in protected (N+1) or unprotected (N+0) radio configurations.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 195 / 522
22.3 Main features

Th AlcatelLucent 9600LSY family exploits the experience gained with the previous SDH generations of

radio equipment and provides an innovative answer to the most recent market requirements:

a) Total interworking with other kinds of network elements present in the network aiming to make the
network independent from transmission medium.
b) Full integration in the AlcatelLucent network management platform able to manage different
types of network elements belonging to different technologies: OMSN, LT, OMSG, microwave radios,
optical systems and submarine systems. 9600LSY is included in AlcatelLucent network release
plan, guaranteeing consistent feature support and allowing, in case of existing SDH NEs, not to
change TMN platform, thus saving investments already done.
c) Double identity of the equipment that can be inserted in the SDH network as:
Radio regenerator to be easily introduced in transparent mode without affecting any

modifications to the network.
Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN) One Side or Two Sides that can be considered as full
performance OMSN or LT with different synchronous physical interface: radio instead of fibre.
d) Transmission capacity easily selectable between STM0 and STM1 according to the bandwidth
availability and, if necessary, following an incremental approach.
e) Bit rate capacity: the 9600LSY family allows the transmission of STM1 signals for all frequency
bands from 4 to 13 GHz and STM0 for 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, according to the customer needs.
The system allows an easy migration from STM0 to STM1 (only hardware and software
presettings are necessary) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change.
Auxiliary traffic can be added by means of RFCOH bytes corresponding to one 2 Mbit/s Way Side
Traffic in STM1 case. Way Side Traffic in STM0 case is not available.
f) Usage of:
128 QAM as standard modulation for all frequency bands. The high number of levels utilised
allows to obtain a high spectrum efficiency that permits the utilisation of the following channel
spacing :
28 MHz, 29 MHz, 29.65 MHz, 30 MHz and 40 MHz for STM1 capacity
14 MHz for STM0 capacity,
64 QAM modulation with 40 MHz channel spacing and STM1 capacity for some frequency
bands,
as depicted in Tab. 41. on page 198.
g) Adoption of frequency reuse technique as option for all the supported frequency bands, allowing
the transmission of 2x STM1 per channel: the way utilised to improve the spectrum efficiency is
based on the CoChannel Dual Polarisation (CCDP) technique.
This technique, consisting in transmitting two different STM1 channels on each radio channel
utilising two different antenna polarisation, has been consolidated in the recent past by means of field
proven results.
In order to meet ITUR transmission quality objectives also in unfavourable propagation condition
causing XPD degradation, Crosspolar Interface Canceller (XPIC) device is adopted to minimise the
negative effects of the crosspolar interference signal, assuring an improvement factor of approx.
18 dB to the cross polar antenna discrimination.
The function is implemented in an optional additional card to be plugged on each couple of
demodulator boards of reused channel.
Particular attention has been paid to the scalability of the system, allowing the extension of a
deployed alternate polar (AP) system to a CCDP reused system only when necessary and
consequently to a progressive investment.
196 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Two possible ways of extension and configurations are available:
CCDP configurations using 2 protection channels up to 2 x (8+1)
CCDP configurations using only 1 protection channel up to 7 working channels plus 1 standby.
The frequency reuse is applicable to STM1 streams in all the frequency bands and with all the
channel spacing foreseen in the ITUR recommendations, while it is not available in case of STM0
transmission.
h) Space Diversity reception as countermeasure against fading exploiting the new baseband
combiner.
i) Further powerful multipath countermeasures: multichannel hitless switch, transversal equaliser,

configurable ATPC functionality, multileved coded modulation.
j) High reliability in order to minimise field intervention.
k) Fully software configurable terminals with software download capabilities.
l) Protections:
Different protection types are available for the 9600LSY systems: Radio Protection, Line Protection
and Network Protection:
Radio Protection (RPS).

The high capacity long haul radio systems utilises, to perform the automatic protection of the
radio channels, a multichannel switching device moving the channel to be protected on a spare
bearer (standby channel). The function, implemented on the RX side is N+1 hitless type; it is
transparent to other types of protection and in particular to network protection.
The switch supplies the protection of the link either in case of failure of the equipment or for
improving the quality performances of the link. In this last case the Early Warning criteria are
utilised to achieve an error free changeover.
Line Protection (LPS).

The optional LPS subsystem, supported from SWP 2.1.1, adds to the standard LHR system the
N+1 line protection functionality.
Network Protection.
For network protection the radio system in regenerator section configuration (RRA) will be fully
transparent to APS channel and criteria allowing the OMSNs present in the network to perform
the network protection activity. On the other hand the radio system in multiplex section
configuration (WMSN) implements, as embedded function, network protection features like
Trail protection and subnetwork protection (APS, SNCP etc.).
m ) High integration of the full indoor structure with very compact size: configurations up to 8+0/7+1
terminal are housed inside a single N3 ETSI rack.
The characteristics AlcatelLucent 9600LSY are compliant with current SDH standards defined within the
International Organisations ITUT, ITUR and ETSI, with special attention to those standards concerning
the network management and its integration into SDH based network.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 197 / 522
The 9600LSY series features the 128/64 QAM modulation offering excellent spectrum efficiency and
covering the following frequency bands, according to following Tab. 41.

Tab. 41. 9600LSY radio family
MODULATION & CAPACITY
SYSTEM FREQUENCY (GHz)
128QAM 64QAM (N.B.)
9640 LSY
3.64.2 STM1 STM1
(L4)
9647 LSY
4.45.0 STM1 STM1
(U4)
9662 LSY
5.96.4 STM1 not available
(L6)
9667 LSY
6.47.1 STM1 STM1
(U6)
9674 LSY 7.17.7 STM1 / STM0 not available
9681 LSY 7.78.7 STM1 / STM0 not available
9610 LSY 1010.7 STM1 not available
9611 LSY 10.711.7 STM1 STM1
9613 LSY 12.75 13.25 STM1 / STM0 not available
N.B. 64QAM is supported starting from SWP Version 2.0.2.
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM1 stream, in cochannel frequency
reuse operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC optional kit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM1 signals
on a single RF channel.
Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM0 capacity.
In the following Tab. 42. the available users interfaces are listed.
Tab. 42. 9600LSY user interfaces

REGENERATOR WMSN
INTERFACES
STM1 STM0 STM1 STM0
STM1 ELECTRICAL G.708 X X X X
STM1 OPTICAL S1.1 G.957 X X X X
STM1 OPTICAL L1.1 G.957 X
STM1 OPTICAL L1.2 G.957 X
140 Mbit/s G.703 X
X
3 x 45 Mbit/s G.703 X
(1 x 45 Mbit/s)
X
3 x 34 Mbit/s G.703 X
(1 x 34 Mbit/s)
X
63 x 2 Mbit/s G.703 X
(21 x 2 Mbit/s)
198 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
22.4 System usage in MW links and networks
The new generation of radio transmission system AlcatelLucent 9600LSY family is specifically designed
to provide a radio solution suitable for a large number of applications, including:

New full radio infrastructures

Closure of STM1, STM4 and STM16 fiber optic rings
Backup to fiber optic trunk links
Radio spurs of fiber/radio at STMn level
Utilization as backbone link in national trunk networks.
Interconnection of cellular networks with public switched networks.
In the following , with the aid of a few figures , the most common applications of 9600LSY radios within
different types of network exploiting radio technology are shown, together with examples of possible
configurations and station types that can be used in the network nodes.
Fig. 95. New radio infrastructures
Fig. 96. STMN ring closure
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 199 / 522
Fig. 97. N x STM1 radio backbones and fibre optic backup
Fig. 98. STM1/STM0 radio spurs of stmn backbones or rings
200 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
22.5 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types
The 9600LSY Long Haul system is based on the following configurations:

a) Regenerator (Network Element type LHR)

This radio system is basically composed by a rack containing up to eight transceivers, eight
modemodulators and eight RRA, and can be configured as follows:
CONFIGURATION MIN MAX
N+1
1+1 7+1
with/without occasional traffic
N+0 2+0 8+0
b) Regenerator +LPS (Network Element type LHR)

This radio system is composed by a LHR rack (only in configuration N+1 with occasional traffic) and
by an additional shelf (LPS), inside the same rack, carrying out the Line Protection functionalities.
c) High Power Regenerator LHR/HPA (Network Element type LHR)

This radio system is composed by a LHR rack and an additional HPA rack (with max 4 transceivers,
in configurations with N+1 with/without occasional traffic, or N+0).
d) Wireless Multi Service Node WMSN (Network Element types LHR + ADM)
This radio system consists of a Regenerator and operates together with the MUX of AlcatelLucent
ADM family, which adds to the LHR system the add/drop functionalities. The assembly is called
WMSN (Wireless Multi Service Node).
N.B. LHR configurations stated above can be combined in various ways, as depicted in Tab. 3. on
page 35
e) Regenerator Compact (Network Element type LHRC)

This radio system is basically composed by one subrack containing up to two transceivers, two
modemodulators and two RRA, and can be configured as follows:
1+0 Terminal Regenerator
1+1/2+0 Terminal Regenerator
1:1 (with occasional traffic) Terminal Regenerator
1+1 HST (Hot Stand By) Terminal Regenerator
One 1+0 or 2+0 LHRC NE can also be configured as Tx ONLY or Rx ONLY or REPEATER
terminal. The combination of such special configurations allows to build unidirectional radio links.
For additional information, refer to the 9600LSY/LHRC Technical Handbook (REF.[J] on page 502)
from ED.04.
This handbook deals with the LHR, LHR+LPS, LHR/HPA and related WMSN
configurations only: for LHRC please make reference to the specific handbook, that has a different
P/N, (see para.64.2.2 on page 501).
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 201 / 522
202 / 522

23 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
23.1 Foreword
This chapter gives the firstlevel description of 9600LSY equipment, LHR and WMSN configurations:
para.23.2 on page 204 Introduction to system configurations

This paragraph introduces the system composition
para.23.3 on page 207 General block diagrams
para.23.4 on page 208 Hardware components of LHR rack

This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can
be used to compose the available configurations
para.23.5 on page 217 Radio Transmission features

This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of
9600LSY family.
para.23.6 on page 223 Signal Transmission

This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of
9600LSY family.
para.23.7 on page 235 Synchronization

This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of
9600LSY family.
para.23.8 on page 239 Equipment Control

This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY
family.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 203 / 522
23.2 Introduction to system configurations

23.2.1 Foreword

This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, and
comprehends the following main paragraphs:
para.23.2.2 herebelow Station types and configurations
para.23.2.3 on page 206 Channel configurations and protection schemes
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is:
chapter 22 on page 195 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family
23.2.2 Station types and configurations
Station types
A complete terminal station (LHR, LHR+LPS, WMSN, WMSN+LPS) utilizing a maximum of 8 radio
channels is housed inside a single ETSI LHR rack that, depending on the customer request, can be 2200
or 2000 mm high. The 1800 mm rack cannot be utilized.
The corresponding high power versions require an additional HPA rack, to be installed sidebyside or
backtoback with respect to the LHR rack.
The structure of the equipment has been developed aiming to obtain a very simple structure, with an
integration as high as possible and reducing at the minimum the number of different functional blocks and,
inside each of them, reducing the number of different units and cards.
These concepts have led to obtain an equipment structure modularly composed by the following functional
blocks (see Tab. 3. and referenced descriptions from page 35 ):
the transceiver shelf, containing all the radio frequency and medium frequency circuits, and, if
envisaged, the LPS subsystem
the baseband subrack containing all the unit devoted to the modulation and demodulation functions,
RRA functions, services management, radio protection switching and system controlling.
a branching unit deployed at the top and bottom sides of the transceiver subrack.
a Top Rack Unit (TRU) for D.C. primary power distribution and battery protection.
a fan subrack, foreseen for all the configurations.
an ADM shelf with its additional fan subrack, that , when required, can be installed into the rack to
perform all the functionalities managed by a multiplex section.
The configurations are easily expansible, passing from a lower one to a higher one simply adding, inside
each functional block, the units needed to support the new radio channels utilized.
In particular, the branching unit is equipped in advance with the channel circulators needed for the
expansion up to 7+1, to consent to expand the radio terminal just connecting the RF filters to the branching,
without the necessity to disassemble the branching itself.
Thanks to a new design of narrow RF filters , the frequency reuse, available in all the frequency bands,
can be obtained avoiding the utilization of the 3 dB hybrids for all the bands and all the frequency
spacings, including 28 MHz.
204 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Despite to the new high integration of the LSY systems and thanks to volume decrease obtained on the
branching, the space diversity optional functionality is supplied in all the configuration up to 7+1/8+0.
The AlcatelLucent 9600LSY systems offer a full set of system configuration and protection schemes to
meet any specific need in a network with a high degree of flexibility.
Two are the envisaged station types, each supplying different functionality:
Regenerator station (RST):
is needed when the RSOH termination and MSOH transparency are requested. I/O network
interface is STM1 electrical or optical.
Multiplex station (MST):
is necessary when a Wireless Multiservice Node (WMSN) (one side or two sides) has to be
implemented. In this case the MST station is used at the terminal ends of the radio link and it gives
the possibility to provide synchronous STM1 electrical and optical interfaces and plesiochronous
140 Mbit/s, 3x45 Mbit/s, 3x34 Mbit/s, 63x2 Mbit/s interfaces.
It is possible to implement a full multiplex section features like synchronization, SOH termination,
network protection (SNCP/I, SNCP/N and linear MSP), VCs cross connection, tributary adddrops.
Station configurations
The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM1 and STM0 utilising protected and
unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 type or 2x (N+1) CCDP.
The basic configurations are named as follows:
Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal regenerator configuration (LHR)
Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal WMSN configuration (LHR + ADM)
The high integration level allows to provide several types of configurations allowing to address different
network applications :
number of ETSI racks for

Radio channels Configuration
standard high power
system system
7+1 Terminal regenerator 1 2
8+0 Terminal regenerator 1 2
7+1 Terminal WMSN 1 2
8+0 Terminal WMSN 1 2
An already operating terminal regenerator can be reconfigured as a terminal WMSN simply adding an
ADM device to the radio regenerator equipment.
Each configuration is easily expansible to a higher capacity just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 205 / 522
23.2.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes
The LHR system can interface from two up to eight channels (STM0/STM1 Electrical or Optical signals

and the corresponding Radio parts) and up to eight WST channels. The system configurations allowed

are with Radio Protection Switching (N+1 without/with Occasional Traffic) or without Radio Protection
Switching (N+0), according to the following table:
Tab. 43. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
N+1 &
NR. of N+0 N+1 Occasional ALL
channels (1:N)
CH CH CH max WST
1+1 2 unpr.
2 2+0 1+1
& Occ. or 1 prot.
2+1 3 unpr. or
3 3+0 2+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+1 unpr.
3+1 4 unpr. or
4 4+0 3+1
4+1 5 unpr. or
5 5+0 4+1
5+1 6 unpr. or
6 6+0 5+1
6+1 7 unpr. or
7 7+0 6+1
7+1 8 unpr. or
8 8+0 7+1
unpr.= unprotected prot.= protected Occ.= occasional

In N+0 configurations, channels are without protection.
In N+1 configurations, channel 0 is always the standby channel.
In N+1 & Occasional configurations (also known as 1:N protection architecture), channel 0 carries the
occasional traffic, that is cut off whenever it becomes the recovery channel for any (faulty) of the protected
channels.
As indicated in Tab. 43. above, the WST configuration is independent from N+0 / N + 1 / 1:N system
configuration. The couple of radio channels which carry both the protected service channels and WST
ones (if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the following five couples:
Tab. 44. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST
CHx CHy
0 1
0 9
1 2
1 9
8 9
N.B. Further information regarding protection schemes is given in para.52.4.2 on page 403 and
206 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.3 General block diagrams
The general block diagrams for LHR and WMSN configurations are respectively shown in following
Fig. 99. and Fig. 100.

CMI 9 RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
CMI 1 RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
DCCR
ECT F
EOW
DCCR 64 Kb
QB3 SC SERVICE WST 2Mb/s
OS
DCCR
DCCR
CMI 0 MD TR
RRA RFCOH
DISTRIB.
RADIO
PROTECTION
Fig. 99. LHR system (N+1 / N+0)
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
CMI 7
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
CMI 2 ADM RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
CMI 1
DCCR
DCCR
CMI 0
F EOW
DCCR 64 Kb
QB3 SC SERVICE WST 2Mb/s
Nx64
Kb DCCR
DCCR
RRA RFCOH MD TR
DISTRIB.
ECT OS RADIO
PROTECTION
Fig. 100. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0)
For block diagrams in high power configurations, refer to Appendix B on page 471, and to HPA specific
documentation (see Tab. 80. on page 500 ). For block diagrams with LPS subsystem, refer to its specific
documentation (see Tab. 81. on page 500 ).
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 207 / 522
23.4 Hardware components of LHR rack

N.B. For LHR/HPA system, please refer to Appendix B HPA configuration on page 471

23.4.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can be used to compose the available
configurations of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
para.23.4.2 herebelow Rack and Top Rack Unit

para.23.4.3 on page 209 Transceiver subrack
para.23.4.4 on page 211 Baseband subrack
para.23.4.5 on page 215 ADM
para.23.4.6 on page 215 FAN UNIT
para.23.4.7 on page 216 System wiring
N.B. As far as Branching configurations are concerned, refer to para.31.6 on page 261.
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is:
23.4.2 Rack and Top Rack Unit
For all the foreseen system configurations the new WTD ETSI rack is available for both heights 2200 mm
and 2000 mm and it is usable either with standard regenerator terminal (LHR) or with WMSN.
In the 9600LSYLHR application, WTD ETSI rack must be supplied with the TRU unit.
The new WTD ETSI rack P/Ns does not include TRU, that must always be separately ordered.
For particular cases, the OPTINEX 2200 mm and 2000 mm rack can also be utilized, however for new
deliveries only the the new WTD racks are utilized.
In general, both OPTINEX and ETSI WTD racks can house 19 and 21 subracks. They are compliant
with ETSI 300 1193 standard. Using 19 subracks, they must be installed utilizing mechanical adapters.
However, in the case of 9600LSY radios, the two main subracks (transceiver and baseband) of the
standard version (LHR) are 21 wide, so they do not need adapters to be installed in the racks.
All the racks (WTD ETSI and Optinex) for all the heights can host the terminals including the ADM and its
fan unit, allowing their utilization also for WMSN configurations.
208 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.4.3 Transceiver subrack
23.4.3.1 Mechanical assembly

The transceiver mechanical assembly has the following dimensions:

530 mm (w) x 470 mm (h) x 240 mm (d)
A complete view of the structure, fully equipped with 8 transceivers, is shown in Fig. 101.
Fig. 101. Transceiver subrack
Each transceiver unit is inserted in a vertical dedicated slot. The coaxial connections with Rx and Tx
branching units are located at the top and bottom positions of each transceiver.
The transceiver shelf is used also to equip the optional LPS subsystem, see Fig. 66. on page 124
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 209 / 522
23.4.3.2 Transceiver block diagram

A simple block diagram, illustrating the main functions performed by transceiver module, is shown in the

following Fig. 102.

Fig. 102. Single channel transceiver block diagram
The transmitter includes an IF amplifier, a SSB up converter, a local oscillator and a RF power amplifier.
The utilization of a high rejection SSB upconverter permits to avoid the use of a RF filter at the output,
allowing a wideband utilization of the unit.
The Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) function is included in the transceiver in order to
decrease the Tx power output and dissipation in case of normal propagation and to push the maximum
power up in deep fading conditions. This function may be disabled and the level of the transmitted RF
power can be manually set by Craft Terminal configuration.
The receiver includes a low noise RF preamplifier, an automatic imagine rejection down converter, an IF
filter, a main amplifier with AGC and a local oscillator.
A space diversity receiver, to be used in junction with a baseband signal combiner, is also available as
countermeasure to the selective fading due to the multipath propagation of the signal.
The advantages obtained by the baseband combiner utilization are mainly due to a higher reliability,
thanks to the adopted digital technology, to the possibility of recovering very high delays between the two
received signals and to the very reduced signature of the combined signal.
210 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.4.4 Baseband subrack
The baseband subrack is used both in regenerator terminal stations and in WMSN stations. In the first case
it is the sole baseband equipment installed in the rack; in the second case, it has to be associated with
ADM device that has to be installed in the upper right area of the rack just above the baseband subrack.
It is mainly subdivided in three different areas:

the upper area (access area) is devoted to host the interface connectors of WST , Service channels
and remote alarms.
in the centre of the subrack the channeldepending units (RRA and Modems, up to ten) are
accommodated, together with the two common units : System Controller (SC) and the Service unit.
in the bottom part, the DC/DC converters for supplying the d.c. voltages to the RRAModem units
are allocated just under the relevant powered units. Two battery filters (including the DC/DC
converters supplying the DC power for the common units ) are also installed in this area.
23.4.4.1 Mechanical assembly
The physical dimensions of the subrack are: 490 mm (w) x 500 mm (h) x 250 mm (d).
In the following Fig. 103. , the baseband subrack is shown.
Fig. 103. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 211 / 522
23.4.4.2 Regenerator Terminal Block Diagram

Hereafter, the block diagram relevant to a single channel is pointed out.

REGENERATOR
RRA BOARD MODEM BOARD
TX
STM1 ELET./OPT. HTL MODEM
MODEM RT
RRA RFCOH
INTERFACE SW RX
AUX. ATPC
SERV. DCCR
SERVICE & WST SYSTEM

Aux.SERV. ATPC CONTROLLER
CH.
F QB3
2x2 Mb/s SERVICE UNIT
V batt. DC/DC
CONVERTER
OS
ECT
Fig. 104. Single channel regenerator block diagram
The baseband subrack does not allow the protection neither of the physical interface (optical or electrical)
of the channel, neither of the RRA function, because the embedded switching section, included inside
each RRA unit is inserted between the RRA and modem function and therefore it protects only the radio
section (modem and transceiver). See next Fig. 105.
BASEBAND SUBRACK
CH1 O/F int RRA1 MODEM 1 TRANSCEIVER 1

HITLESS SWITCH
CH2 O/F int RRA2 MODEM 2 TRANSCEIVER 2
CH3 O/F RRA3 MODEM 3 TRANSCEIVER 3
CH0 O/F RRA STBY MODEM STBY TRANSCEIVER STBY
(occasional)
Fig. 105. Baseband functional protection scheme
212 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Fig. 106. herebelow indicates the slot position of the baseband subrack where the units can be installed
in the various radio configurations.
CONNECTOR
AREA
SERVICECEC NOT USED

E STBY
RRA
RRA
SYSTEM MODEM
CONTROLLER MM
CONTROLLE
R
POWER
NOT USED SUPPLYSUPPL
Y
BATTERY
FILTER
FILTER
Fig. 106. Baseband board positions
In the following, the main characteristics of each unit is reported.
23.4.4.3 RRA board
It performs the following main functions :

STM1 bidirectional interface, electrical or optical selectable by means of interchangeable
plugins
Extraction/Insertion RSOH line side to/from Aux. Service Board
Hitless Switch functionality.
Just one unit has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity.
Each RRA unit is equipped with an embedded STM1 electrical interface. As an option, a S 1.1
STM1 optical interface can be used instead. This optical interface is realized by a plugin unit that
can be installed in the RRA through the front panel.
23.4.4.4 RRA Standby board
The unit performs the same functionalities of RRA board but, moreover, the hitless switch circuits
(Tx/Rx distributors and a switching logic unit) are is installed on board and dedicated to the radio
section protection.
The protection supplied is N+1 type and it is also utilized in 1+1 configuration .
Only one RRA STBY has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 213 / 522
23.4.4.5 Modem unit

It performs the following main functions:

Terminal modulator

Terminal demodulator
XPIC
Baseband signal combiner
Two different 128 QAM modems have been developed, according to the two capacities that can be
transmitted:
STM1 Modem with one 2 Mbit/s WST service stream: to be used in both alternate and copolar
frequency arrangements with all the spacings including 28 MHz.
The STM0 Modem without WST service stream: utilized in 7 , 8 and 13 GHz bands with 14
MHz channel spacing in both alternate and copolar frequency arrangements.
One 64 QAM modem has been developed (it is supported starting from SWP version 2.0.2) with the
capacity of STM1 with one 2 Mbit/s WST service stream, to be used in both alternate and copolar
frequency arrangements with 40 MHz channel spacing.
Each modem can be equipped with an optional plugin board . This board gives the access to the
IF signals necessary to the demodulator for XPIC or for Space Diversity functionalities. In case of
presence of both functions the modem must be equipped with two identical plugin boards.
23.4.4.6 Service Unit
The Service board provides an external access to the auxiliary service channels, utilizing SUBD
connectors in the subrack connector area. Moreover the unit manages the ATPC functionality.
Service unit consents the terminal to transmit one WST 2 Mb/s service stream in Radio Frame
Complementary OverHead in protected way on channels x and y (that can be chosen among the
couples specified in Tab. 44. on page 206), and contains the logic switching unit. The WST interface
is present on the unit front panel. The accesses to the other WST service streams that can be
transmitted one for each channel in nonprotected way are in the connector area.
23.4.4.7 System Controller
The System Controller is devoted to the equipment management. It exchanges alarms, commands
and management information with the other units of the equipment and provides the following
interfaces for local and remote management:
Channel communication for TMN utilizing a QB3 interface (BNC connector) info model based
F interface (RS232 toward the local PC) (SUBD 9 pin connector) towards Local Craft
Terminal
QECC interface for remote management through DCC channels.
214 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.4.4.8 Power Supply
PSU units are grouped in 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1, PSU2+PSU3, ...). Each PSU pair
converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of
RRA, whereas each PSU board supplies only the associated MODEM board (i.e. PSU0 supplies only
MODEM0 board, etc.) If not utilized, the P.S. slots are provided with a front plate cover.
Each P.S. gets the primary voltage from both batteries, connected in parallel.
The P. S. units supply the secondary power voltage to all the units starting from the primary voltage:
48 to 60 Vdc ( 20%);
The system can also be powered by batteries with different voltage: 24 Vdc ( 20%). In this case,
onpurpose designed DC/DC converters are available and have to be installed in the lower area
of the rack.
23.4.4.9 Battery filter
Two battery filters, located in the lower side positions of the subrack, supply the DC power to the
common units (System Controller, Service) in 1+1 protected way.
23.4.5 ADM
When the Wireless Multi Service Node functionality is requested, an additional ADM equipment has to
be installed in the upper position of the LHR rack, just above the baseband regenerator subrack (see
Fig. 4. on page 41 , Fig. 5. on page 43, and Fig. 8. on page 49 )
WMSN provide the mapping functionality (STM1 frame creation), synchronization management and
tributary adddrop, network protection and VCs crossconnection.
Two types of AlcatelLucent ADMs are envisaged to be equipped with LHR : 1650SMC and 1850TSS.
Refer to their documentation for their characteristics (see para.64.2.5.2 on page 507 ).
N.B. In the application for 9600LSY, the FAN SHELF used for ADM is not that described in its
documentation, but that described in this handbook.
23.4.6 FAN unit
The usage of the FAN UNIT inside the rack is mandatory to respect Safety international standards, either
in regenerator and WMSN case (refer to para.32.5 on page 286 for further information on equipping
rules).
The FAN UNIT is developed to be used both in regenerator and in WMSN configurations:
in the first case, one FAN UNIT is installed only between the baseband subrack and the transceiver
assembly, just above the receiving branching.
in the second case, a second FAN UNIT is moreover installed in the higher part of the rack, just under
the ADM unit.
The subrack, 600mm wide and 50 mm high, contains 8 fans as shown in the Fig. 107. herebelow.
Fig. 107. FAN unit
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 215 / 522
23.4.7 System wiring

a) Internal connections

Four different connection kits have been designed to cover all the needed system configurations:

Common kit
This cable kit is utilized in all the configurations in quantity 1. It includes the cables for :
Can bus
Unit presence
Rack lamps
Battery cables
Channel dedicated kit

It includes all the connections among the units relevant to each single channel.
It has to be foreseen with quantity equal to the total number of radio channels present in the
terminal, including the spare channel.
Two different codes are present in this category: one for channels without space diversity, a
second one for channels with space diversity.
Optional kit for reused channels

It includes the cables needed for the frequency reuse operation. They are the IF cables and
RF cables for the synchronization of the Rx local oscillators. One kit is used for one couple of
reused channels.
Two different codes are envisaged: one kit foresee short length cable needed for reused
channels connection inside the same rack.
The second must be used when the interconnections are relevant to two different racks.
Interconnection cables to optional LPS subsystem

Make reference to 9600LSY/LPS Installation and Technical Handbook (REF.[H] on page
500 of this manual)
Interconnection cables to 1650SMC

Three dedicated cable kits have been developed for the interconnection from the radio
regenerator to the 1650SMC unit:
Common part cable kit (including rack lamp cable)
1+1/2+0 basic cable kit (signal cables)
1 cable kit for one extension channel [ signal cables, one for each added channel besides
1+1/2+0) ]
Interconnection cables to 1850TSS

Similar to those for 1650SMC
b) External connections
In standard LHR regenerator (with neither LPS nor ADM equipped), main signal interfaces of the
terminal are present on the front panel of each RRA unit.
Alarm interconnections are directly present in the access area of baseband subrack and no
distributor board is foreseen neither in baseband nor in TRU subrack.
216 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.5 Radio Transmission features
23.5.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends
the following main paragraphs:
para.23.5.2 herebelow Frequency reuse technique (CCDP)

and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller
para.23.5.3 on page 220 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are:

para.23.4 on page 208 Hardware components
23.5.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller
23.5.2.1 Introduction
Efficient bandwidth is a relevant issue in the digital radio application.

Multilevel signalling is a standard mean to get high spectral efficiency.
Unfortunately its sensitivity to channel impairments increases with the number of modulation levels. In
radio links carrying several channels, additional bandwidth saving is usually achieved by using both
horizontal and vertical polarization, with cross polarized adjacent channels to minimize interference.
A further improvement of transmission capacity can be obtained by the simultaneous use of the RF
channel for two independent digital transmissions on orthogonal polarization, which is commonly
addressed to as Crosspolarized cochannel frequency reuse technique.
Frequency reuse systems actually result in doubling the spectral efficiency of conventional transmissions.
However this is paid in terms of additional signal distortion, because of inevitable crosscoupling of dual
polarized channels. This is due both to propagation conditions (notably rain and ground reflections) and
imperfections in the antennae and waveguide feeders. The result of reduced cross polarization
discrimination (XPD) is cross polarization interference (XPI) , which sums up with intersymbol
interference generated by channel dispersions and give rise to potentially serious impairments in
detection.
XPI and intersymbol interference can be jointly contrasted by resorting to adaptive processing techniques.
Baseband equalizations together with cross polarization interference canceller (XPIC) allow signal
distortion to be kept within tolerable limits, thus making frequency reuse a viable option.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 217 / 522
23.5.2.2 XPIC Operating principle and receiver architecture

The idea behind the XPIC operation is that of adjusting the amplitude and phase of the received signal

samples of the opposite polarization, so as to provide an estimate of the XPI corrupting the desired copol

signal. This estimate can then be subtracted from the main signal, producing crosspol interference
cancellation. Taking into account the timevarying nature of the channel, the XPIC operation must be
adaptively adjusted according to a proper rule to track the variation in both copolar and crosspolar
channels parameters.
To counteract both XPI and multipath fading, the joint use of XPIC and adaptive equalization is advised.
Following this approach, the adopted crosspol cofrequency receiver structure results in an arrangement
of four adaptive bandspaced transverse filters, as show in Fig. 108.
H pol.
received signal EQUALIZER H data
XPIC
H error signal
V error signal
XPIC
V pol.
received signal EQUALIZER V data
Fig. 108. XPIC operating principle
In the same figure the XPIC updating criterion is also addressed. The XPIC tapweights are adjusted so
as to minimize the correlation between crosspol received signal and copol error signal.
This operation minimizes the correlation between error signal and cross polarization interference.
A fundamental issue in a frequency reuse system design is the receiver recover capability. As a matter
of fact, deep fading occurrences, which can produce a system loss of lock, are usually of short duration,
so that also moderate hysteresis effects on system lockin can severely increase the total outage time (C/I
typical values 2 5 dB).
Therefore, care must be taken in the choice of the receiver synchronization strategies, in order to avoid
any interaction between dualpol sections of receiver during the recovery process.
The adopted frequency reuse system architecture is sketched in Fig. 109. on page 219.
218 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
H IF
LO DEM H
DOWN
RX IF +
CONV DATA
XPIC
H UP
MOD TX
CONV LO master
DATA
. synchr.
LO slave
V UP
MOD TX
DATA CONV
DEM
DOWN V
RX IF +
CONV
XPIC DATA
LO
V IF
Fig. 109. Frequency reuse system architecture
The only design constraint is that a common RF local oscillator is used for both dualpol signals, while
two independent decision directed carrier recovery loops are employed for the demodulation from IF to
baseband for each equalizer canceller pair input signals.
This approach preserves the precise phase and frequency relationship between the received signal and
the crosspol signal used for XPI cancellation.
And this is true even when the carrier associated with the received signal is out of lock. Such coherence
has very important implications because without cancellation, when the terminal is out of lock, XPI
distortion will be so severe that the terminal will not easily regain lock.
Another advantage of such an arrangement is that no constraints are imposed on Tx oscillators. In
addition, a joint recovery process of crosspol carriers is avoided.
The equalizer/canceller system operation is based on dualpol received signal samples. Therefore, a
critical point of receiver design is to devise the proper signal sampling strategy. We chose to employ a
separate symbol synchronizer for each crosspol branch of the receiver. As indicated in Fig. 109. , the
same clock is used to sample the input signal of an equalizer and of the associated XPI canceller. This
makes the XPIC operation independent of the synchronization of dual polarized transmitted data streams.
It is of great importance to observe that the above synchronization strategies result in a complete
independence of operation of the receiver branches on opposite polarization. This allows operation even
when the receiving digital terminal on the opposite polarization is out of service.
23.5.2.3 XPIF Factor
The receiver performance can be assessed in term of the XPI rejection capability of the canceller. This
is quantified by the crosspolarization improvement factor (XPIF), which is the difference of the carrier
to XPI ratio (C/XPIs) corresponding to a predefined error performance in a dual polarized system with and
without XPIC, respectively.
Typical values (optimum phase) for a 128 MLC system is 22 dB.
23.5.2.4 XPIC Card
The XPIC card is a daughter board that has to be inserted in both modem units of the main and reused
channel of each bearer that is reused. This unit is installed in the system only if the reuse of frequency is
implemented. It can be also added to the modem in second step if a expansion of the system utilizing the
reuse of a frequency is required after the first installation.
The unit has a second utilization, again as daughter board, as baseband combiner when the space
diversity functionality is implemented in the link.
In case of both functionality presence (XPIC and Space diversity), two units are necessary and both must
be installed inside the modems.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 219 / 522
23.5.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC

The product allows two ways to adjust the transmitted power: the first one in a static way, the second one

under automatic control loop (ATPC function).

23.5.3.1 Transmit power static adjustment
The capability to adjust transmitted power in a static and fixed way has been introduced for those countries
where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which, due the short
length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred.
The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band involved and is detailed in chapter
Technical Specifications.
The step for adjustment is 1 dB, with an accuracy of 0.5 dB. The setting of the transmitted power can
be performed locally by means of ECT.
23.5.3.2 ATPC function
The automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) function allows to regulate the transmitted power
in order to supply a reduced power in situation of normal propagation and the maximum power in
conditions of fading.
In synchronous radio link systems, the ATPC device is considered a very important function taking into
account the following advantages:
reduction of the internal interferences of the radio system and with other systems
reduction of the average consumption of the transmitter considering that the maximum power is
supplied for small percentages of time
improvement of the averages conditions of the transmitter about the linearity and consequent
reduction of phenomena of background error due to non linear distortion that with ATPC could be
revealed only in conditions of fading
possibility to increase the System Gain as a consequence to the reduction of the Backoff on the
power transmitted taking into account what above mentioned
substitution of a possible microwaves attenuator to realize different range of power.
As far as concern the values relative to the operating range of the ATPC, refer to chapter Technical
Specifications.
[1] ATPC working principle
The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the power transmitted between a TX transmitter and
a RX receiver connected in a radio link.
With reference to Fig. 110. on page 221, the receiver furnishes through the AGC voltage the
information of the received power to the ATPC controller; it compares the voltage with threshold
values (presettable) and according to the obtained result send through to the ATPC controller on the
remote station of the link the orders of increase/ decrease of transmitted power. These orders are
processed and therefore transferred to the associated transmitter.
220 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
STATION A STATION B
PRX RX
IF IF DEM
MOD
VATPC
COMATPC
ATPC AGC
CONTROL
RFCOH RFCOH
EXTRACT INSERT
RX FAILURE PRX ATPC
ATPC DATA ATPC DATA
PRX PTX
DEM IF RX TX IF MOD
N.B. ATPC regulation shown in one direction of transmission only and valid for each channel
Fig. 110. ATPC Functionality
The information of control of the transmitted power is exchanged between the two stations of a link
utilizing service channel at 64 Kbit/s inserted in RFCOH bytes (avoiding to touch standard SOH
bytes).
In the protected configurations these information are transmitted 1+1 protected.
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel):
received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to
move the Tx output power).
Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration)
ID_channel (for identification of ATPC channel, in order to avoid problems in case of
crosstalk/interference).
These information are organized in registers of SPRI (Serial Peripheral Register Interface) where the
PRx and ID_ch information are transmitted with higher priority than Rx fail.
The information for each channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where
the PRx information received is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down
or hold commands to the RF transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant transmitter in case
of frequency reuse or to set the Tx at low Pout in case of standard configuration (no frequency reuse
application).
The service channel above mentioned is a point to point type and in the SDH systems is terminated
in each RRA/Modemodulator.
[2] Organization of the control system
The ATPC control system is replied for each channel without any centralized function.
The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction:
the Rx system control implementing PRx detection, eventual Rx failure detection and insertion
of the above data in RFCOH bytes
the Tx system control implementing extraction of data from RFCOH bytes and PTx drive.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 221 / 522
[3] ATPC Threshold management

The transmitter is able to change the output power in the range MAX TL (max level) and MIN TL (min

level). The transceiver has an its own default value for MAX TL, MIN TL and NOM TL (nominal level).

It is possible to set the following values:
A MAX TL (max level ATPC) where A MAX TL MAX TL
A MIN TL (min level ATPC) where A MIN TL MIN TL
with the constrain:
MIN TL A MIN TL NOM TL
A MIN TL A MAX TL MAX TL
The extreme thresholds MAX TL and MIN TL are reported in the data sheet (see par. 3.3.2)
It means that:
the ATPC range is not fixed but variable according to the values set for A MAX TL and A MIN
TL
the max ATPC output power can be different from the max output power of the transmitter and
the ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range
The receiver has an its own default value (not changeable) for a receive power threshold called
EXTRA POWER threshold depending on the signal (STM1 or STM0) corresponding to guaranteed
threshold 10E6.
On the receiver it is possible to set a received power Low threshold for loop activation within the
following limits:
LOW threshold: in the range from 40 dBm to EXTRA POWER threshold dBm
When the received signal decreases and overcomes the LOW threshold the transmitter increases
the output power up to the nominal value. Only if the received signal overcomes the EXTRA POWER
threshold the transmitter increases the output power reducing its backoff (if LMA>LN only). The
hysteresis for both thresholds is 3dB.
The PRx value sent to the transmitter is refreshed with 10ms time interval.
In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and
an ATPC loop alarm must be activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is
restored the ATPC loop alarm is disactivated after an hysteresis to be defined.
It is possible to enable or to disable ATPC function: when ATPC is disabled the output power can be
driven normally according to 3.3.2.
Every power change, from manual to automatic and viceversa, is performed at the speed of
1dB/20ms.
To be sure that a decreasing of Rx power of one receiver corresponds to a PTx increasing of the
relevant Tx in remote station an identifier station code must be used. The same identifier station
code should be set on the two station involved in the ATPC functionality avoiding that in
crosstalk/interference or RFCOH bypass in repeater the Tx in one station can be driven by a not
relevant Rx.
222 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.6 Signal Transmission
23.6.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends
the following main paragraphs:
para.23.6.2 herebelow STM0 & STM1 Transmission

para.23.6.3 on page 224 SDH mapping adopted
para.23.6.4 on page 225 SDH interface usage
para.23.6.5 on page 226 SOH bytes and service channel access

23.6.2 STM0 & STM1 Transmission
One of the most important peculiarity of the 9600LSY family is to allow the selection of the system capacity
according to the customer needs (and allowing band saving utilizing STM0 capacity, if it can be useful).
In particular, this feature can be applied to 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, utilizing well defined channel
arrangements for medium capacity transmission. Please refer to section FREQUENCY PLANS & PART
NUMBERS to analyze the frequency arrangements and the channel steps foreseen for the various
frequencies in case of STM0.
Of course, the STM0 transmission is suitable to transport also plesiochronous signals with capacity 21x2
Mbit/s, 1 x 34 Mbit/s or 1 x 45 Mbit/s and the systems have been studied to allow an easy migration from
STM0 to STM1 (or viceversa) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change.
As far as concerns the Way Side Traffic capacity, it is possible to transmit a single 2 Mbit/s WST stream
for each channel carrying STM1, whether in case of STM0 it is not possible to transmit any WST.
It is necessary to underline that no direct interfaces at STM0 level are foreseen. In case of STM0, the
interface user side is always at STM1 level but only the first VC3 is mapped ; in this way it is possible
to maintain the same electrical or optical interface (part numbers) independently from the signal capacity.
The real transformation between STM1 interface and STM0 signal takes place inside the RRA/Modem
unit before modulation (or after demodulation) function.
In case of migration from one capacity to the other, no RRA change is necessary. Only the modem has
to be substituted inside the baseband assembly; simple hardware and software presettings (with a new
software configuration) are sufficient to upgrade the system.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 223 / 522
23.6.3 SDH mapping adopted

Generalized Multiplexing structure

Fig. 111. shows the more generalized multiplexing structure obtained merging the ITUT G.707
multiplexing figure with the correspondent figure of ITUR F.750 (that shows also the RRRP functional
reference point for STM0 transmission).
Note that in European Standard only a subset of the generalized multiplexing structure is adopted, where
only plesiochronous interfaces at 2, 34 and 140 Mbit/s are used, but also the multiplexing of 3xAU3 into
AUG is forbidden (see Fig. 112. ).
Fig. 111. General Multiplexing Structure
Fig. 112. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s
224 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.6.4 SDH interface usage
The system can provide several kinds of user interfaces that may be synchronous (SDH) or
plesiochronous (PDH) and depend on the type of stations involved (Regenerator or WMSN) and the type
of transmitted bit rate (STM1 or STM0)
All the available interfaces are summarized, according to the different possible situations In Tab. 42. on
page 198. Details about electrical characteristic of each interface are reported in chapter Technical
Characteristics.
It is important to point out that a WMSN station (obtained coupling a 9600LSY Regenerator with an ADM
device) inside the same rack), the equipment is represented by two separated NEs .
Some general information that are valid for each version (line rate, physical interface) of the SDH and PDH
traffic interfaces are herewith outlined:
a) general rules for SDH unit:
SOH/POH bytes management according to the standard TTP or CTP rules (see also NERM)
Optical interfaces according to the standard G.957 short and long haul (see also NERM)
Automatic Laser Shutdown in compliance with G.958
b) general rules for PDH unit:
POH bytes management according to the standard TTP rules: (see also NERM)
Asynchronous bit mode mapping into the relevant VC payload.
Structure and /or notstructured PDH signals are transparently transported. The frame
structure information (e.g. : CRC,E,A,S bits) are neither handled nor monitored: bidirectional
passthrough at the PDH/SDH interfaces; furthermore, any potential PDHAIS condition is
transparently forwarded into the relevant VC.
Detection of VC signal fail conditions set to all 1 the outgoing PDH stream.
Detection of the incoming PDHAIS conditions (G.706 standard, detection time = 4 frames) can be
enabled/disabled, without consequent actions at VC layer.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 225 / 522
23.6.5 SOH bytes and service channel access

23.6.5.1 Overview

In the SDH system some SOH bytes (of SDH frame) are used to transmit the service channels. So we
can distinguish:
c) RSOH bytes, that can be inserted/extracted both in multiplex and in regenerator station,
and
d) MSOH bytes that can be inserted/extracted only in multiplex station.
Moreover, radio side, the transmission of 1 Way Side Traffic service stream (only in case of STM1
transmission) is performed mapping it on the bytes of two columns of the RFCOH. The AUX/EOW bytes
handled by the Regenerator and by the WMSN support two types of applications:
1) Local access as termination: the auxiliary bytes of a trail termination can be bidirectionally
interconnected to the voice/data interfaces of the local service unit embedded in the equipment
itself.
2) Crossconnection: the auxiliary bytes of two different trail terminations can be bidirectionally
interconnected providing an auxiliary channel passthrough between every couple of STM1
ports or different OH sections; it means each single byte can be configured to be
passedthrough from one direction (i.e. line side) to another one (i.e. radio side).
The auxiliary bytes connections are always unprotected and the selection of the bytes and the ports are
performed by CT/OS. The dashed cells in Tab. 45. herebelow show the set of potential OH bytes suitable
to be processed as auxiliary channels at the section or the path terminations, with the associated meaning.
RFCOH is a proprietary function implemented to transmit radio specific information (DSI, ATPC,
MC, WST) and to reroute over radio hop a few RSOH byte terminated.
Tab. 45. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 n n 1 J1
B1 d D

E1 d f

F1 n n 2 B3
RSOH

D1 d D

D2 d f

D3 f f 3
4
C2
G1
B2 B2 B2

K1 f f

K2 f f 5 F2 VC4/3

D4 f f

D5

f f

D6

f f 6 H4 OH

MSOH D7 f f D8 f f D9 f f 7 F3

D10 f f D11 f f D12 f f 8 K3
S1 f f f f M1 E2 n n 9 N1
226 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 46. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 n n 1
B1 d d E1 d f F1 n n 2
RSOH
D1 d d D2 d f D3 f f 3
4
5
6
MSOH PASS TRUH 7
8
9
Tab. 47. RFCOH byte structure
Column 1 Column 2
DSI MC
ATPC MC
D1 MC
D2 MC
D3 MC
E1 FAIL serv + K0
F1 d,n,f
d,n,f d,n,f
d,n,f d,n,f
where the meaning of the bytes is summarized as follows:
for RSOH bytes:
A1A2: 6 bytes: A1= (11110110) A2=(00101000) for frame alignment;

J0: RS Trace for STM identification;
d: 6 bytes for media specific usage;
n: 4 bytes reserved for National Use;
f: 4 bytes reserved for Future international standardization;
B1: RS Error checking (BIP8) for regeneration section.
E1: RS Voice for order wire channel;
F1: data channel as user channel;
D1D2D3: RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator
section)];
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 227 / 522
for MSOH bytes:

B2: MS Error checking (BIP24) for terminal station.

E2: MS Express channel.

n: 2 bytes reserved for National Use;
f: 26 bytes reserved for Future international standardization;
K1K2: MPS channel K1(b1..b8) and K2(b1..b5), MSFERF/AIS K2(b6..b8):
110 indicates that the receive end is detecting a section failure or is receiving
MSAIS;
D4..D12: MS DCC data communication channel [576 Kb/s (TMN bytes for multiplex section)];
S1: SDH Synchronization Quality Level: S1 (b5..b8)
M1: Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
for POH bytes:
J1: Path trace (check end to end path connection)

B3: Performance monitoring (BIP8 of VC4)
C2: Signal label (full or empty VC)
G1: Path status (FERF,FEBE) backward to the origin
F2: Path user service channel
F3: Path user service channel
H4: Multiframe alignment (indicates tributary location)
K3: 4 bits for APS channel, 4 bits spare
N1: Network operator byte for Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) function
for RFCOH bytes:
Proprietary channels
MC: Monitoring channel:EWL, EWH, HBER, RTF, FAIL SERV.

k0: Proprietary radio channel identifier
DSI: Digital Switching Information channel for RPS
ATPC: Data channel for automatic transmitting power control
RSOH bytes rerouted over radio hop
E1: radio Order Wire

F1: radio data channel
D1D2D3: RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator
section)];
228 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.6.5.2 Regenerator Case
As far as the 9600LSY Regenerator, it allows the management of:

Termination of RSOH or RFCOH bytes to auxiliary ports

RSOH RFCOH bytes cross connection
The following Tab. 48. shows for the Regenerator the possible AUX/EOW user interfaces suitable to
access the terminated channels:
Tab. 48. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces
USER INTERFACES QUANTITY
9600 baud with interface V24/V28 (selectable) 1
64 Kb/s G.703 (one is 64/128Kb/s selectable) 3
64 Kb/s V11 3
64/128 Kb/s V11 (SW configurable) 1
64 Kb/s G.703 (Party line) 1
Voice frequency (E1) (EOW) 1
Voice frequency (E1) (Party line) 3
Voice frequency (point to point between adjacent radio sections) 1
Among them it is possible to choose, by software presetting, up to six 64 Kbit/s channels plus one voice
frequency channel (EOW), to be transmitted radio side in 1+1 protected way and to be dropped and
inserted in every radio station.
With reference to Tab. 46. on page 227, the RSOH bytes terminated line side may be in principle mapped
upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as summarized in the following table:
USER INTERFACES
RFCOH bytes (line side) [1] EOW
V.11 V.24 G.703
(Q 23)
E1 X X X X
F1 X X X
d,f,n [2] X X X
Notes:
[1] For the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC
[2] max 14 bytes d,n,f.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 229 / 522
With reference to Tab. 47. on page 227, the RSOH bytes terminated radio side through the RFCOH
function may be in principle mapped upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as

summarized in the following table:

USER INTERFACES
RFCOH bytes (radio side) [1] EOW
V.11 V.24 G.703
(Q 23)
E1 X X X X
F1 X X X
5 bytes out of d,f,n X X X
Note:
[1] For the DCCR (D1D3) and k0 the interface is towards SC
Practically common usage of user interfaces and possible mapping is:
E1 always terminated on the EOW two ways (line side and radio side)
F1 plus max 3 bytes accessible (normally radio side) through the user interfaces 2 x 64 Kb/s, 1 x
V11 and 1 x V24.
Each interface (with the exception of the voice type ) supports only one direction; the same byte can
be assigned to different direction (for example line side and radio side) using 2 interfaces.
Way Side Traffic (WST)
Additionally, the regenerator allows the transmission, radio side, of one 2 Mb/s Way Side Traffic (WST)
that represents a service traffic in addition to the main one.
Both the WST and service channels are transmitted using the radio frame complementary overhead
(RFCOH, an arbitrary and unstandardized extra SDH frame overhead).
The main features of the 2 Mbit/s WST Channels management are the following:
STM1 capacity:
One 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted in each STM1 channel whatever is the channel
spacing (28, 29, 29,65, 30, 40 MHz) used in the channel plans.
STM0 capacity:
No 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted.
WST protection:
WST can be transmitted in unprotected way, one for each radio channel, by means of the interfaces
(1.0/2.3 75 Ohm coax male connectors) allocated in the access area of the subrack.
The possibility to transmit one 2Mb/s WST stream in protected way (on channels 0 and 1 ) is also
given. In this case the access is located on the front panel of Service unit that hosts the WST switching
functionality.
Automatic switching criteria are : Signal Fail (SF), HBER, LBER and EW.
230 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.6.5.3 WMSN Case
WMSN functionality is realized utilizing an adddrop multiplexer (ADM).

When WMSN functionality is implemented, all the accesses to services are located on the ADM unit, and
the ones located on the regenerator section no longer are no longer utilized.
For the description of the available service channels relevant to this unit, please refer to ADM
documentation.
Just as an example, hereafter the front view of the 1650SMC view is reported in Fig. 113. herebelow. The
service access ports are located on the SERGI card:
for the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC

for the DCCM (D4D12) , S1 and M1 the interface is towards SC.
POH bytes of terminated VC4
In particular, the SERGI unit supplies the access to the auxiliary channels (A) and to the 2 Mb/s Service
stream (B) . Moreover, the connection for the telephone jack is present (C).
(A)
(B)
(C)
1650SMC
SERGI
Fig. 113. 1650SMC and unit SERGI front view
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 231 / 522
23.6.5.4 Engineering Order Wire characteristic

The EOW Channel allows the access to the phone services of the system.

It is interfaced with the telephone set with DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Tones and with association

circuits, branching, exchange and receiving of the phone signal.
The EOW Channel allows the following types of linking:
between two station (selective call)
between one station and all the others (omnibus call)
between one and more stations called in selective mode (multi selective call).
Numbering System
The compatibility with the actual generation of devices is guaranteed by the type of numbering used, with
the two digits that identify the actual
The above statement, limited the max number of devices linked in 90.
Is important to remember that the numbers available are from 10 to 99.
The omnibus call number is identify in the number 00, as in the actual boards.
The multiselective call can be utilized connecting in conference mode up to the maximum number of
available telephone numbers (90).
This new release is full compatible with the current systems, except few new features here below
described:
Introduction of the time checks during a phones call.
Automatic ring management (Routing)
A second voice channel is also available for voice transmission in point to point link between adjacent
regenerator terminals. The interface is present on the connector area of the baseband equipment and
the channel can be addressed on one byte of RFCOH .
In case of WMSN configuration it is possible also to connect by cable the service to ADM unit to be inserted
in MSOH and to be available in MST sections.
232 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.6.5.5 Data Channel Characteristics
a) In case of G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface the timing signals (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are derived
from the data stream.

Fig. 114. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface
b) In case of RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface the timing signal (64 KHz and 8
KHz) are directed towards the user. The code is NRZ.
Fig. 115. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 233 / 522
c) In case of RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous up to 9600 baud no timing signals are required. The signal
is internally over sampled up to 64 KHZ. The code is NRZ.

Fig. 116. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface
234 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.7 Synchronization
23.7.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the
following main paragraphs:
para.23.7.2 herebelow Introduction

para.23.7.3 herebelow Synchronization in Regenerator station
para.23.7.4 herebelow Synchronization in WMSN station by means of ADM

23.7.2 Introduction
SDH transmission operates on general principles that implies the existence of timing devices that form
part of a synchronizing network.
Different behaviors for synchronization are present depending from the type of station either Regenerator
or WMSN.
23.7.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station
In this case each incoming STM1 stream takes the network synchronization that is recovered by the
equipment and forwarded to the radio hop or to the line retiming the transmitted signal by means of the
recovered clock.
The regenerator does not need any other synchronization circuit.
23.7.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of ADM
The synchronization requirements implies that a WMSN equipment must include a synchronization
subsystem for a slave clock which functions are specified in ITUT Rec. G.783 as the Synchronous
Equipment Timing Source (SETS).
The AlcatelLucent 9600LSY radio families are provided with ADM unit that supplies such functionalities.
By selecting the external or internal reference source, the equipment works synchronized to the reference.
The ADM unit can automatically change the reference involved if the selected one is not correct or can
holdover the operation mode if no input reference is available.
ADM supplies the synchronizing and timing signals to all the equipment units (N.B.) by selecting the
synchronizing signal among the available input references.
To this purpose the unit can:
select the reference source involved;
change the reference (or mode) when it losses synchronism;
lock the Local Oscillator to the reference available;
work in Hold Over/Free Running LO mode when all references are lost.
N.B. In a radio terminal only the ADM takes directly the synchronism from the internal
synchronization path, while units of other subracks take indirectly the synchronism by means
of its own phase locked oscillators (e.g. modemodulators). Finally there are units that do not
need synchronism at all (e.g. units of transceiver).
The ADM also provides an output synchronization signal at 2.048 MHz with an interface according G.703
(T4 signal in G783)
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 235 / 522
This signal is squelched when the unit is working in Free Running or in Hold Over modes.
A maximum of 6 independent references can be defined by mixing type and PDH/SDH parts (the selection

is accomplished by means of craft terminal).

The selection may happen between:

timing reference signals coming from the TTF blocks on CompactADM (T1 signal in G783)
timing reference signals coming from the SDH ports (T1 signal in G783)
2.048 MHz signal coming from the PDH ports (T2 signal)
2.048 MHz clock coming from external source (T3 signal in G783)
The choice of the sources can be made in independent manner for the internal clock reference output and
for the external 2 MHz output.
By Craft Terminal it is also possible either to enable or to disable the Timing Marker algorithm.
The automatic selection of one of the possible synchronization sources is performed on the base of quality
(SSM algorithm) or priority criteria:
a) Priority Algorithm
See flow chart in Fig. 117. on page 238.
The reference source choice is performed checking the signal quality by detecting for every STM1
synchronization source:
LOS (= LOS + MSAIS + LOF + EXCBER)

DRIFT
and for every 2 Bit/s interface or synchronous tributary selected as source:
LOS (= LOS + AIS + LOF)

DRIFT
LOF (+ LOM + CRC4 MISMATCH) For 2 Mbit/s interface only
b) SSM Algorithm
See flow chart in Fig. 118. on page 238.
If the Timing Marker procedure is enabled, the CRU checks the S1 Bytes from the synchronous frame
of the selected sources and the preset value of the 2 Mbit/s sources then, by the SSM algorithm,
chooses the better source to be used.
The SSM algorithm is in compliance with ETSI DE/TM 10156.
The two Algorithms define synchronization source, by switching the reference.
The switch between the source is hitless.
The switch from one reference to the other one occurs without passing through the Holdover mode.
The reference, sent to the PLL circuits, generates the 622 MHz signal used for internal
synchronization.
The PLL can operates in these following different modes:
Normal
The PLL output is frequency locked to one of the selected references.
Holdover
In absence of an external reference, the clock stored the frequency difference to the last
reference.
This information is used to fix the oscillator frequency value.
The holdover mode guarantees .37 ppm of frequency drift within the first 24 h
Free running
236 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Without any reference and information stored in memory, the VCO oscillates at its natural
frequency.
Frequency variations can be due to temperature variations, components degradation etc.

The free running stability is 4.6 ppm. The following setting can also be managed by Craft
Terminal:
Lock out
The command allows to disable/enable a timing input from being considered as possible source
of timing.
Forced switch
The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.
If the source forced becomes unavailable, the internal oscillator will be selected.
Manual selection of timing source

The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.
If the source manual selected becomes unavailable, the manual mode is terminated and
automatic selection algorithm is initiated.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 237 / 522
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority
level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is than priority level of Sj+1)

Fig. 117. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority
level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is >= than priority level of Sj+1).
Fig. 118. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart
238 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.8 Equipment Control
23.8.1 Foreword
This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the
following main paragraphs:
para.23.8.2 herebelow Introduction

para.23.8.3 on page 240 The NE architecture
para.23.8.4 on page 242 The F interface
para.23.8.5 on page 242 The Qecc/QB3 interface
para.23.8.6 on page 243 ECT and RECT
23.8.2 Introduction
9600LSY Digital Radio Relay Systems cannot operate correctly without Control and Management
Functions which are usually partially embedded as Synchronous Equipment Management Function
(SEMF) and Message Communication Function (MCF) in the involved Network elements..
Equipment control may be performed locally through an Equipment Craft Terminal (1320 CT) or remotely
through a Craft Terminal in a remote site.
External control units may be dedicated to a Radio subnetwork or may be the Control Elements of an SDH
Network including Radio Links, Fiber Optic Lines, Synchronous Multiplexers and CrossConnect
Equipment.
Inside an overall Managed Telecommunication Network, SDH Digital Radio Relay Systems are part of a
Managed Synchronous Network. The 9600LSY DRRS equipment interfaces the TMN according to ETSI
Standard and ITUT Rec G.784, G.773 and ITUR Rec 750.
The architecture of the management process, which is intrinsically a distributed process based on
Manager and Agent Functions, may influence in the design, the Equipment Control Architecture and the
identification of the Network Elements to be managed.
To connect SDH Radio Equipment to a TMN System Qtype Interfaces are used, adopting the standard
Infomodel based QType Interfaces Qecc and QB3 for a full integration in a multivendor environment.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 239 / 522
23.8.3 The NE architecture

A Digital Radio Relay Link identified as a Radio Switching Section is composed of two Radio Relay

Terminals (RRT). Each physical entity RRT is a SDH NEs and therefore according to ITUT Rec G.784

they must have TMN Q3 and Qecc Interfaces.
All the SDH NE must be able to terminate the Regenerator Section (RS).
Two types of RRT are available depending on the ability to terminate a Multiplex Section (MS) or a
Regenerator Section (RS) only. This ability is required when the RRT having PDH tributaries (140 Mb/s,
2, 34 or 45 Mb/s) behaves like an SDH Multiplexer (i.e. WMSN station composed at least by two NEs: ADM
+ LHR). When the RRT has SDH tributaries this ability is not strictly required and therefore the RRT may
be equipped with an RRA (Radio Regenerator Adaptation) Assembly (Regenerator station equal to the
NE LHR/LHRC).
Associated to the RS and the MS there are in the SOH of the SDH frame two Embedded Control Channels
(having as physical interfaces the D1D3 bytes in the RSOH and D4D12 bytes in the MSOH) carrying
the management information between the ends of the RS and MS respectively. These channels are
terminated in the Message Communication Function (MCF), located in the Equipment Controller of the
NE, which behaves like a Packet Switching Node. The communication interface of these channels on the
physical interfaces D1D3 and D4D12 is a 7layer full OSI protocol stack as defined in ITUT Rec G.784
named Qecc.
While the intersite or interoffice communications links between SDH NEs will normally be formed from
the SDH ECCs, within a particular site (intrasite connections) or when the SDH NE is acting as Gateway
Network Element (GNE) towards a Data Communication Network connecting the NE with an Operation
System (OS) a 7layer full OSI protocol stack named QBX is used. QBX is a Q3 type interface and with
reference to the foreseen protocol suites: QB1 is a Connection oriented over X.25 (CONS1) interface, QB2
is a Connectionless Mode over X.25 (CLNS2) interface and QB3 is a Connectionless Mode over ISO 8802
LAN interface.
The previous Qtype interfaces in their standardized versions implies the use of a Management
Application Software based on an objectoriented Information Model and the use at the 7th layer of the
OSI stack of protocols as CMISE, ROSE and ACSE.
The availability on the NE of all these QType TMN interfaces do not imply the contemporary use of all
of them. Their use and the criteria for selecting them is the TMN network designer responsibility according
to the management traffic load and the network layout. The only limitation imposed by standards is that
in the RRRs (and obviously in the RRTs equipped with RRA) the only RSOH has to be terminated
whereas the MSOH has to be passedthrough.
As far as the QB3 and Qecc interfaces is concerned the following criteria in their use have been adopted.
In the WMSN station equipped with the Mux assembly, on the line side the DCC bytes of the MSOH and
the RSOH are transferred to the MCF and then processed by the SEMF or rerouted by the MCF to their
destination. While the DCCM bytes of the MSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame, the DCCR bytes of
the RSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame through the RFCOH and MODEM units with 1+1 protection
(Radio Channel 1 and 0). In the Regenerator station, while the DCCR of the RSOH are processed in the
same way as previously described, the MSOH remains untouched and is carried transparently.
240 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
STATION A STATION B
TR radio channels x,y TR

(N.B.)
D1D3
MD MD
radio channels x,y RPS RPS radio channels x,y

(N.B.) (N.B.)
radio channels x,y
D4D12 D4D12 D4D12
D1D3 RRA RRA D1D3
SEMF SEMF
F F
MCF MCF
1320CT
QB3 QB3
ECT for Station A

RECT for Station B
Fig. 119. DCC management: Regenerator case
STATION A (REG.) STATION B (WMSN)
TR radio channels x,y TR

(N.B.)
D1D3
MD MD
RPS radio channels x,y RPS

(N.B.)
D4D12 D4D12 D4D12
D1D3 RRA RRA MUX D1D3
D1D3
SEMF SEMF SEMF
F
MCF MCF MCF
F
1320CT 1320CT
QB3 QB3
ECT for Station A ECT for Station B

RECT for Station B RECT for Station A
Fig. 120. DCC management: WMSN case
N.B. The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 119. and Fig. 120. above) which carry the protected
service channel (as well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels
can be chosen among the five couples defined in Tab. 44. on page 206.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 241 / 522
23.8.4 The F interface

The F interface is the control interface connecting a Craft Terminal to a Equipment Controller.

The F interface is not a standard interface since in TMN there is only the F interface as reference point

between WSF (Work Station Function) and OSF (Operation System Function) and the F interface is not
yet standardized.
An F interface has been standardized for all the AlcatelLucent equipment and is using the following
protocols:
Physical Layer:
Standard: EIA RS232C/ITUT V24V28
Type: Pointtopoint, Asynchronous full Duplex
Transmission rate: 38600 bit/s
Connector: 9 pin female Sub D
Data Link Layer:

Asynchronous HDLC standard protocol
ISO 3309 ISO 4335 ISO 7809
In 9600LSY terminal regenerator, F interface is located on the front panel of the System Controller unit.
In case of WMSN configuration, F interface available on ADM unit is the one to be utilized as terminal
interface and represents the unique access to the terminal. In this case, by means of RECT software it
is possible to control, besides all the other terminals, also the functionality of the regeneration section
of the WMSN terminal. For this reason, the RECT option has to be always foreseen in case of WMSN
functionality.
23.8.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface
In the TMN (Telecommunication Management Network) Architecture, while Qecc is the communication
interface on the DCCs (Data Communication Channel) used as ECCs (Embedded Control Channel) in a
SDH Subnetwork, the QB3 interface is used to interface the SDH Subnetwork to the OSs, usually through
a DCN (Data Communication Network). The Gateway Function performing the protocol conversion (from
Qecc to QB3 and vice versa) is carried out by the GNE (Gateway Network Element) of the subnetwork.
242 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
23.8.6 ECT and RECT
[1] ECT
AlcatelLucent TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a
compatible personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring
transmission equipment. The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called
Equipment Craft Terminal (ECT) or 1320 CT.
For each station an AlcatelLucent proprietary Software Package (SWP) is to be employed:
SWP REG. 9600LSY for the Regenerator station
and, additionally, SWP ADM for the WMSN station.
The Equipment Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, enable an
operator to perform locally the following Element Management functions:
Equipment Management
Transmission Management
Test management
External points management
Alarm (fault) management
Synchronization management
Radio Management
Performance Monitoring Management
Event log manager
Overhead Management
Connection Management
Software Management
Communication and Routing Management
Security Management
Support Management
[2] RECT
The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture
which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the Equipment
Controller, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable SDH
NEs in the SDH.
The Remote NE can be physically reached through QB3/Qecc.
The Remote Craft Terminal feature applies in NR5 to both Q3 and QB3* NEs, with the exception of
DXC. The feature is basically the same as for NR3 NEs, with the usual difference related to the
support of TSDIM interface for the management of Q3 NEs.
Despite the fact that this is supposed to be a NE related feature, it becomes a network feature
considering that the network can be composed of both Q3 and QB3* NEs and that an harmonization
is necessary between the two technologies.
The IMCT is able to manage both Q3 and QB3* NEs (in the sense that both QB3* and Q3 application
are working simultaneously), but it shall be connected to a Q3 NE. Viceversa Nectas CT will keep
on being able to manage only QB3* NEs, and it shall obviously be connected to a QB3* NE.
Its worth reminding that RECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local
NE and to any NE pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly
designed and hence interarea communication is possible from networking viewpoint).
As far as DXC is concerned, the RECT feature is not supported, i.e. a DXC CT can be connected
to only one DXC at a time.
Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some
network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (64),
the number of the QB3 NEs (32), the number of the QB3* NEs (32), the number of associations
permanently open (31) between the CT and the remote NEs.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 243 / 522
The RECT features and limitations are briefly the following:

1) The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage

several configured NEs, included the local one.

2) The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access
disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some
operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering.
3) The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded
with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function
shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local
information.
4) Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs
in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the QB3 NEs is solved locally
by the NE itself.
5) The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole
network .
6) In a SDH network the maximum number of QB3 NEs equipped with the RECT function are 32
and the maximum number of NEs (QB3* NEs and QB3 NEs) manageable by the RECT function
are 64. These figures identify what it is understood as small SDH network for which the RECT
function may substitute the Element Manager.
[3] Security management
The security management allows to define the profile operator in order to access to all the Craft
Terminal functionality according to four different profiles:
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer: no modification are allowed
N.B. Refer to CT Operators Handbooks listed in Tab. 85. on page 504, Tab. 87. on page 506, and
para.64.2.5.2 on page 507 for further information on:
HW and SW requirement of the PC to be used as ECT and RECT

detailed description of ECT and RECT functionalities and operations allowed.
244 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
24 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter sumsup how to retrieve the technical characteristics of the 9600LSY, for standard LHR, LHR
+ LPS subsystem, LHR/HPA and WMSN configurations.
24.1 9600LSY standard LHR technical specifications
Please refer to the document enclosed at the end of this manual (REF.[C] in Tab. 91. on page 521 in this
manual):
24.2 9600LSY LHRHPA technical specifications
Additional technical specifications for the HPA rack are given in the 9600LSY/LHRHPA Technical
Handbook (REF.[F] in Tab. 80. on page 500 in this manual).
24.3 9600LSY LHR + LPS technical specifications
Additional technical specifications for the LHR equipped with the LPS subrack are given in the
9600LSY/LPS Installation and Technical Handbook (REF.[H] in Tab. 81. on page 500 in this manual).
24.4 ADM characteristics (used in WMSN configuration)
Please refer to relevant Technical Documentation (para.64.2.5.2 on page 507).
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 245 / 522
a)
246 / 522
END OF SECTION

SECTION 3: SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS AND PROVISIONING
This section contains information for the system configuration and equipment provisioning.
Chapter 31 System configurations

It describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSYLHR version taking into
account the various peculiar aspects: Station configurations, Radio channel 249
configurations, System configuration for network solutions, Branching configurations,
Rack configurations for frequency reuse
Chapter 32 Equipment provisioning

It gives detailed information regarding the 9600LSYLHR equipments items (P/Ns,
271
equipping rules, labels for remote inventory) and their physical and logical position in
the system
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS AND PROVISIONING
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 247 / 522
248 / 522

31 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
31.1 Foreword
This chapter describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSYLHR version taking into account
the various peculiar aspects, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
para.31.2 herebelow Terminal station configurations

para.31.3 on page 252 EastWest station configurations
para.31.4 on page 253 Radio channel configurations
para.31.5 on page 260 System configuration for network solutions
para.31.6 on page 261 Branching configurations
para.31.7 on page 266 Rack configurations for frequency reuse
As far as Fan subrack configurations are concerned, refer to para.23.4.6 on page 215.

31.2 Terminal station configurations
The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM1 and STM0 utilizing protected and
unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 or 2x (N+1) CCDP type.
Several types of configurations are available, allowing to address different network applications .
Referred to the maximum rack implementation, the list shows the widest allowed configurations:
7+1 Terminal regenerator in 1 ETSI rack

8+0 Terminal regenerator in 1 ETSI rack
7+1 Terminal WMSN in 1 ETSI rack
8+0 Terminal WMSN in 1 ETSI rack
2x(7+1) Terminal regenerator or WMSN CCDP in 2 ETSI racks
The complete list of the possible configurations foreseen for the 9600LSY family is hereafter indicated,
subdivided in several blocks:
a) Regenerator configuration utilizing copolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1 CP

9600LSY REG. 2+1 CP
9600LSY REG. 3+1 CP
9600LSY REG. 4+1 CP
1 RACK
9600LSY REG. 5+1 CP
1 NETWORK ELEMENT
9600LSY REG. 6+1 CP
1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL
9600LSY REG. 7+1 CP
(only in N+1)
9600LSY REG. 2+0 CP
1 POLARIZATION PER RACK
9600LSY REG. 3+0 CP
8 CHANNELS MAX
9600LSY REG. 4+0 CP
9600LSY REG. 5+0 CP
9600LSY REG. 6+0 CP
9600LSY REG. 7+0 CP
9600LSY REG. 8+0 CP
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 249 / 522
b) Regenerator configuration utilizing alternatepolar branching solution:

9600LSY REG. 1+1 AP

9600LSY REG. 2+1 AP

9600LSY REG. 3+1 AP
9600LSY REG. 4+1 AP
1 RACK
9600LSY REG. 5+1 AP
1 NETWORK ELEMENT
9600LSY REG. 6+1 AP
1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL
9600LSY REG. 7+1 AP
(only in N+1)
9600LSY REG. 2+0 AP
4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 3+0 AP
4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 4+0 AP
9600LSY REG. 5+0 AP
9600LSY REG. 6+0 AP
9600LSY REG. 7+0 AP
9600LSY REG. 8+0 AP
c) Regenerator configuration utilizing single protection channel, installed into a single rack and
with alternatepolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY

9600LSY REG. 3+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY 1 RACK
9600LSY REG. 4+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY 1 NETWORK ELEMENT
9600LSY REG. 5+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY 1 PROTECTION CHANNEL
9600LSY REG. 6+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY 4 CHANNELS MAX ON
9600LSY REG. 7+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY H POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 2+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY 4 CHANNELS MAX ON
9600LSY REG. 3+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY V POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 4+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY 4 DIFFERENT
9600LSY REG. 5+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY FREQUENCIES MAX
9600LSY REG. 6+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY 8 CHANNELS MAX
d) Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and copolar
branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1) CP

9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1) CP
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1) CP 2 RACKS
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1) CP 2 NETWORK ELEMENTS
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1) CP 2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELS
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1) CP (only in N+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1) CP SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED
9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0) CP CHANNELS
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0) CP 1 POLARIZATION PER RACK
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0) CP 8 CHANNELS MAX PER EACH RACK
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0) CP
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0) CP
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0) CP
9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0) CP
250 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
e) Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and
alternatepolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1) AP

9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1) AP

9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1) AP 2 RACKS
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1) AP 2 NETWORK ELEMENTS
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1) AP 2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELs
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1) AP (only in N+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1) AP SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED
9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0) AP CHANNELS
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0) AP 2 POLARIZATIONS PER RACK
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0) AP 4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0) AP PER EACH RACK
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0) AP 4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0) AP PER EACH RACK
9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0) AP
N.B. the rack and the subracks have been designed to host up to 10 channels, even if the normal
maximum configuration is limited to 8 channels. In fact, the expansion of the systems without
traffic interruption is available only for this last maximum configuration.
However, it could be possible , for particular customer requirements or utilizing some channel
plans, to foresee even the possibility to get 10 channels per rack.
In the next Fig. 121. , the block diagram of a 7+1 regenerator is shown.
STM1 USER
RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING
INT/RST MODEM TRANSCEIVER

STM1 USER
STM1 USER
STM1 USER
STM1 USER
STM1 USER
STM1 USER
MODEM TRANSCEIVER
Fig. 121. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration
f) Other configurations
A LHR standard terminal:
can be configured as a WMSN simply adding an ADM device to the radio regenerator
equipment.
can be also configured as a high power radio system, installing the suitable HPA rack (with
limitations regarding the frequency band)
can be optionally configured with N+1 Line Protection function, installing the suitable LPS
subsystem
Each configuration is easily expansible to higher capacities just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
Details of equipment configurations (racks and shelves) are given in chapter 12 from page 35
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 251 / 522
31.3 EastWest station configurations

a) EastWest regenerator configurations

The regenerator configuration eastwest is obtained duplicating the structure shown in Fig. 121. on
page 251, because the single LHR system does not allow the repeater functionality. Therefore the
eastwest regenerator station will be composed by 2 different LHR Network Elements (each
housed in its own rack), interconnected to each other by their STM1 interfaces..
b) EastWest WMSN configurations
With respect to the EastWest regenerator configuration, the eastwest WMSN configuration
allows the additional adddrop functionality. It is obtained connecting one or two ADMs (each
installed inside one of the two racks). With one ADM the station will be composed by 3 different
Network Elements (two LHR NEs + one ADM). With two ADMs the station will be composed by 4
different Network Elements (two LHR NEs + two ADM).
Fig. 122. below shows an eastwest Wireless Multiservice Node with (N+1) STM1 streams for
each direction, with possibility to drop/insert each STM1 signal.
Ring closure STM1 (N+1 eastwest)
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
RADIO
RADIO
REG. ADM
REG.
ADM
ADM
ADM
Fig. 122. 9600LSY WMSN eastwest configuration block diagram
252 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
31.4 Radio channel configurations
Channel arrangement
The following Fig. 123. shows the configurations supported according to the frequency arrangement.
.....
V (H)
H (V) .....
Alternate channel dualpolarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0)

(ACDP operation)
.....
V (H)
H (V) .....
Cochannel dualpolarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0)

(CCDP operation)
Fig. 123. Channel arrangement
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 253 / 522
Frequency Channel assignment according to station layouts

In the following the possible station layouts will be analyzed with the relevant evolutions.

Fig. 124. shows an example of basic configurations from which the possible evolutions are depicted in
following Fig. 125. thru Fig. 129.
channels
1357
1 3 5 7
A) O n e p o la r p e r r a c k
BB
(3 + 1)
channels
1234
1 2 3 4
B) One polar per rack
BB
(3 + 1)
channels
13 13 1 3
REUSED C)T w o p o l a r p e r rack
BB (3 + 1 )
f r e q. R e u s e
REUSED
channels
12 12
1 2
REUSED D) Two polar per rack
BB ( 3 +1)
f r e q. R e u s e
channels
13 24 1 3
E )Two polar per rack
BB 2 4 (3 + 1)
Fig. 124. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts
254 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Fig. 125. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case A) of previous
Fig. 124. on page 254.
channels
channels 1357 1357
1357 reused
BB
BB
3 5 7
1
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse

One polar per rack 3+1
channels channels channels

1357 2468 1357 1357 2468 2468
reused reused
BB BB BB
3 5 7
1 3 5 7 1
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1 ) T w o p o l a r p e r rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels channels
1357 2468 1357 2468
reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1 ) f r e q. R e u s e
Fig. 125. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 255 / 522
Fig. 126. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case B) of previous

channels
channels 12345678
1234
BB
BB
1 3 1 3 5 7
2 4 2 4 6 8
One polar per rack 3+1 O n e p o l a r p e r a c k (7+1)

1234 1234 12345678 12345678
reused reused
BB BB BB
1 3 1 3 5 7
2 4 2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1) F r e q. R e u s e O n e p o l a r p e r rack 2 x (7+1) Freq.Reuse
channels channels
1234 1234 5678 5678
reused reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1) f r e q. R e u s e
Fig. 126. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout
256 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Fig. 127. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case C) of previous
channels
channels
1324 1324
13 13 reused
reused
BB
BB
3
1
1 3
2 4
Two polar per rack (3+1) Freq.Reuse Two polar per rack (8+0) Freq.Reuse

1357 1357 1324 1324 5768 5768
reused reused reused
BB BB BB
3 5
1
1 3 5 7 7
2 4 6 8
Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse Two polar per rack 2* (8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels channels
1357 1357 2468 2468
reused reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
Fig. 127. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 257 / 522
Fig. 128. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case D) of previous

channels
channels
1234 1234
12 12
reused
reused
BB
BB
1 3
1
2 2 4
Two polar per rack (3+1) Freq.Reuse Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels channels
1234 1234 5678 5678
reused reused
BB BB
3 5
1 7
2 4 6 8
Fig. 128. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout
258 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Fig. 129. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case E) of previous
channels
channels 1324 2413
13 24 reused
BB
BB
1 3
1 3
2 4 2 4
Two polar per rack (3+1) Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse

1357 2468 1324 2413 5768 6857
reused reused
BB BB BB
3 5 7
1 3 5 7 1
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
Two polar per rack (7+1)

channels channels
1357 2468 1357 2468
reused reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1) Freq.Reuse
Fig. 129. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 259 / 522
31.5 System configuration for network solutions

Besides the radio configurations presented previously, the 9600LSY family supplies an answer to various

transmission problems supplying particular functional solutions.

The purpose of this paragraph is to describe these functionalities giving some simple system block
diagrams and/or short comments.
Space Diversity
All the available configurations in all the frequency bands of 9600LSY family may include the Space
Diversity protection. This feature is obtained adding to the system a second receiver connected,
through a dedicated branching, to the Space diversity second antenna.
This second receiver, exactly equal to the main one, is installed inside the transceiver unit, in the
dedicated area just aside the main one.
The two IF signals (coming from the main and diversity receivers) are sent to the modem, where are
processed by two demodulators and summed by a new designed baseband combiner.
To achieve this function, one plugin IF module with A/D converters must be added to the modem
unit.
Expansion procedure
9600LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0
configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary
to increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration.
The expansion procedure is reported in para.32.2.3 on page 276.
260 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
31.6 Branching configurations
The branching for N+0 or N+1 configurations is realized in two different ways to be connected to a single
or double polarized antenna (1 or 2 polarizations per rack versions) and can manage up to 8 RF channels.
In both cases, Tx and Rx filters and channel circulators are accommodated in two horizontal lines
respectively at the bottom side and at the upper side of the transceiver subrack.
They are connected to the antenna circulators sited over the top of the rack by means of branching
connections installed along one or both rack side walls.
Depending on the frequency band, the branching is realized utilizing coaxial connection (4 and 5 GHz
bands) or using waveguides (from 6 GHz to 13 GHz).
The branchings connected to the space diversity receiver (this function is foreseen in all the bands and
for all the configurations) follow the technological choice utilized for the main branching.
The utilization of narrow band RF branching filters allows to avoid the use of 3 dB hybrids ( 3dB couplers
previously used for CCDP application) in all the frequency plans and for all the frequency spacings
including 28 MHz.
In all configurations, the connections among transceivers and relevant channeldepending branching
units are realized by vertical parallel coaxial cables without any cross connection.
This realization permits to simplify the installation operations (see Fig. 130. herebelow).
Rx Diversity branching
Rx branching
Coaxial interconnections
Branching H or V Branching V or H
Tx branching
Channel circulator block + RF filter
Channel circulator block without RF filter
Fig. 130. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 261 / 522
Branching extension without traffic interruption

More and more often customers require to expand installed systems without causing traffic interruption.

Following this requirement, a particular branching solution has been developed.

This solution consists in having all the channel circulators needed for the maximum rack configuration
installed in advance, even if , at first, only a few of them are really utilized.
Dedicated codes including four circulators have been inserted in the catalogue. These blocks, one code
for each frequency band, are usable for all the terminal configurations. The unused circulator port that
will be connected to the filter branching in the future when expanding of the system, is closed by a short
circuit device. This device consents the signal to flow toward the antenna in transmission side or toward
the first active receiver in receiving side.
During the expansion operation, the short circuits devices are removed and the branching filters are
connected to the open circulator port, with easy and very short operation.
In such a way the traffic interruption can be minimized at minimum.
Taking in account that operating in TX side the expansion is performed adding the new channels as last
respect to the existing ones, this operation could be considered safe from the traffic interruption point of
view.
In Rx side the new channel are inserted between the antenna circulator and the first existing channels.
For this reason removing the short circuit device and leaving open the antenna port can lead to a lack of
signal to the following Rx channels until the new filter in installed.
Moreover, if in the receiving side the space diversity functionality is present, operating the expansion in
separated time on the main receiver branching and on the diversity receiver branching , the traffic
interruption can be completely avoid.
The circulators blocks are available in the bands from 6 to 13 GHz included.
At these frequences, the additional cost due to the presence of all the circulators even not utilized can
be supported by the systems, even in case of simple configurations.
At 4 and 5 GHz, on the contrary, the cost of the circulators is much heavier. For this reason the described
solution is not applied, and the traditional method (addition of the needed circulators at the moment of the
expansion) is still utilized.
Whatever is the number of working channels present in the rack, the number of the circulator blocks to
be used is 4 if the space diversity is not present, and 6 if it is implemented. This rule is valid both with
copolar and alternate polar branching solution.
Balanced branchings
The so called balanced branchings consents to get a constant attenuation of the branching for all the
channels relevant to the same terminal. So, also the system gain is constant whatever channel it is referred
to.
To get this performance the rule that has been followed is to insert the successive transmitters to the first
following the first and , on the contrary, to insert the added receiver before the existing ones.
The next figures give an exemplification of the balanced branching connections in the two cases of one
polarization per rack and two polarization per rack.
Solution for branching in 6L band ( 9662LSY)
ITUR F. 383 channel plan foresees a frequency distance between the innermost channel of 44.49 MHz.
This narrow distance between channels 8 and 1 has obliged to insert, inside the branching in transmission
side, a dedicated wideband filter to avoid local interference between said channels that supplies an
additional filtering to the residual spectrum power generated by the transmitter 8 or 1 at the frequency
of the receiver 1 or 8 .
This filter is always installed in the branching, in all configurations (copolar and alternate polar) and in
independent way respect to the channels effectively installed in the link. It means that even if channels
8 and 1 are not utilized, the branching contains the filter. In such a way, we are free to install successively
the channels 8 and 1 for expansions of the link, without necessity to add the filter and , at last, without
causing traffic interruption.
262 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
One polarization per rack branching
In Fig. 131. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 1 polar per rack configuration
is shown. The picture include the space diversity optional branching.

MAIN
SP.DIV.
SP.DIV.Rx
MAIN Rx BRANCHING
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 131. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels
The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is used for the spare transceiver (TR 0).
All the transceivers present in this configuration are connected to the single polarized branching and are
housed utilizing the slots in sequence starting from left side.
Please note the branching positions utilized for transmitter and receiver filters in the balanced branching
solutions.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 263 / 522
Two polarizations per rack branching

In Fig. 132. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration

is shown. The example here reported includes the space diversity option.

SP.DIV. ANTENNA
MAIN ANTENNA
SP.DIV. Rx
BRANCHING
MAIN Rx
BRANCHING
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX
0 1 2 3 6 7 8 9
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX
0 1 2 3 6 7 8 9
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 132. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
264 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
In Fig. 133. herebelow, a 3+1 configuration, again with 2 polarization per rack, is reported, in this case
including the space diversity functionality.
Note that the expansion of the system is obtained progressively filling the transceiver subrack (and the
branching, as consequence) adding new units starting from the left and right external sides of the subrack.
Diversity Rx
Branching
Main Rx
branching
RX0 RX1 RX8 RX9
TX0 TX1 TX8 TX9
Tx branching
Fig. 133. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack
version
The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is reserved to the transceiver utilized for protection
(TR0).
It can work either on H or V polarization, depending on the RF channel utilized .
As a consequence, the branching installed in the left part of the rack can be connected either to the H
antenna polarization or the V one.
Once that the polarization (H or V) of the left side branching has been chosen, all the units that must be
connected to this antenna polarization will be installed on the left side and connected to this branching .
The others (connected to V or H polarization) will be installed and connected to the branching located on
the right side.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 265 / 522
31.7 Rack configurations for frequency reuse

Frequency reuse technique allows to double the transmission capacity of each radio channel; a certain

number of channels is then transmitted at the same frequency of the main one on the second antenna

polarization.
We can envisage two main different topologies of reused systems: with one spare channel and with two
spare channels.
a) Reused systems with a single protection channel
Terminals with a single protection channel are installed in only one rack .
The maximum number of channels is 8 and up to 4 different frequencies can be utilized.
Each terminal is identified in the network as a single N.E.. Higher configurations are not allowed.
Fig. 134. hereafter reported shows an example of a reused terminal .
In the example all the channels are reused and the spare channel, transmitted by the first transceiver
installed on the left side of the shelf, is channel 1H. The configuration obviously utilizes double
antenna polarization.
TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
CROSSCORRESPONDENCE
1234 4321
OF HV CHANNELS
HHHH VVVV
CHANNELS 0123456789
Tx
BRANCHING
Fig. 134. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H)
266 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
b) Reused systems with two protection channels
Two protection channels are available when a complete 2x(n+1) system is installed in two racks. In
this case there will be two n+1 systems , one for each rack, using n+1 frequencies. One spare channel
for each rack is present. Maximum number of channels for each polarization is 8 (including the spare
channel).
A terminal, configured as above, always consists of two independent Network Elements, one for each
rack.
Two different solutions are available: each rack can be configured with alternate polarization and with
only one polarization.
If the tworack system is foreseen since the beginning, a solution with only one polarization per rack
is recommended. In case of future expansion, in fact, there is no necessity to connect the branchings
of the two racks, avoiding heavy mounting operations and long traffic interruptions.
However, the with 2PPR solution is also available.
Obviously if an 1PPR or 2PPR existing system has to be expanded with reused channels utilizing
the second rack, the AP or CP solution, already adopted in the installed system has to be foreseen
also in the second rack.
In Fig. 135. below, a 7+1 reused terminal with double spare channels, with the 2 polar per rack
recommended solution, is shown.
RACK 0 RACK 1
TRU TRU
RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS AND ACCESS
AREA AREA
(BASEBAND (BASEBAND
SHELF) SHELF)
Rx Rx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
CROSSCORRESPONDENCE
12345678 12345678
OF HV CHANNELS
HHHHHHHH VVVVVVVV
CHANNELS 0123456789 0123456789
Tx Tx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
Fig. 135. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution
In the figure, two other slots are available in each rack for future expansion.
The shown terminal layout foresees the side to side rack position, but the back to back solution
is also possible.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 267 / 522
31.7.1 Interconnections in reused systems

The specific connections needed for the terminals equipped for the frequency reuse technique are
hereafter described:
Local Oscillator Synchronization
The two local oscillators connected to the two RF receivers (main and reused) working on each
reused frequency must be together synchronized. This function is obtained by a phase lock loop
system utilizing a 2 GHz reference signal transferred from the L.O. of the main receiver ( master
local oscillator) to the L.O. of the reused receiver (slave local oscillator). This connection is
performed by means of a coaxial cable between oscillators and a Frequency Reuse Kit (a special
module and associated cabling) inside the Master Oscillator. In case of failure of the main local
oscillator or lack of the synchronization signal due to whatever cause , the slave Rx L.O. of the reused
channel utilizes its own RF signal , obviously unlocked to the main LO, to feed the Rx down converter
and to maintain in service the reused channel.
In case of failure of the master LO, The slave one can assume the master functionality and to be
utilized as source of the reference signal to be used to feed the signal to the frequency multiplier
contained in the main LO and allowing the protection of the master LO .
Fig. 136. herebelow shows how the mutual protection between the two LOs can be obtained.
MASTER LO SLAVE LO
2GHz 2GHz
oscillator oscillator
FR Synch. signal coaxial cable

module
XN XN
multiplier multiplier
RF OUT RF OUT
Fig. 136. Main / slave LO mutual protection
If main and reused channels are located in different racks , cable interconnections between the two
racks are needed . The maximum loss acceptable is 10 dB and the cable length is 7 m .
268 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
I.F. interconnection cables
The XPIC unit, to perform the interference cancellation, must receive the IF signal from both main
and reused receiver. For this reason, in addition to the standard cables (used in a nonreused
systems), a IF cable for each XPIC unit must be utilized to connect the main receiver to the
demodulator of the reused system and vice versa.
Two dedicated cable kits, including both the LO and IF connections, are foreseen. They are available
with different cable lengths depending on the connection necessity (inside the same rack or between
the two racks). Only one kit is needed for a couple of reused channels.
RF branching interconnection
In case of single polarized rack used in two racks terminal, no branching interconnections are needed
between the racks, each of them being connected directly and independently to one antenna port.
All the branching configurations do not include passive hybrids. Their utilization has been avoided
thanks to the use of narrow channel filters that allows to transmit channels down to a minimum
distance of 28 MHz on the same branching .
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 269 / 522
270 / 522

32 EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING
This chapter gives detailed information regarding:
the equipments items:
P/Ns (with reference to chapter 111 on page 183)
labels for remote inventory
equipping rules
their physical and logical position in the system
and is organized as follows:
Rack and shelves summary: on page 272
Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves on page 274
General equipping rules on page 274
LPS subrack equipping rules on page 275
Channel provisioning/expansion guideline on page 276
Base Band shelf on page 279
Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules on page 280
Transceiver shelf on page 285
Transceiver shelf unit layout on page 285
Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates on page 285
FANS UNITS on page 286
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 271 / 522
32.1 Rack and shelves summary

A
J J
B
I
C C
L

G

K

H

REGENERATOR WMSN
Legend on page 273

Fig. 137. Rack and shelves layout
272 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 49. Rack and shelves

P/N
POS in
NAME (REF in Tab. 39. DESCRIPTION
Fig. 137.
on page 183)
ETSI RACK H 2200 [1] para.23.4.2 on page

(A) 208
ETSI RACK H 2000 [2] para.15.1 on page 57
(B) TRU SUBRACK [3] para.16.3 on page 84
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING
[17] para.15.4.1 on page 75
SUBSTITUTIVE CABLE
(C) para.63.3 on page 486

para.15.4.2 on page
N.B.
77
(D) SUBRACK 2G LH [6] para.32.3 on page 279
(E)
FAN UNIT H=50 [8] para.32.5 on page 286
(L)
Area for Rx branching para.19.7.1 on page 145

(F) BRANCHING FRONT PLATE
[35] para.19.7.2 on page 145
KIT
(G) RT SUBRACK [7] para.32.4.1 on page 285
(H) Area for Tx branching para.19.7.1 on page 145
(I) ADM para.23.4.5 on page 215
(J) KIT LOUDSPEAKER [39] para.16.3.3 on page 88
(K) LPS SUBRACK para.32.2.2 on page 275
N.B. The Additional Housekeeping unit is no longer envisaged in newer supplies. This
information is just for the convenience of Customers having still installed them in their system.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 273 / 522
32.2 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves

32.2.1 General equipping rules

According to Fig. 138. herebelow and Fig. 139. on page 275:
a) in Base Band shelf, units SYSCO, SERV, PSF1 and PSF2 are always equipped
b) the number associated to RRA, MD and PSU groups is related to physical (but not necessarily also
logical) channel (0 9). The same number identifies the associated TRI
PHYSICAL CHANNEL BASE BAND SHELF TR SHELF

0 RRA0 MD0 PSU0 TRI0
.... .... .... .... ....
c) only 8 RRA, MD and PSU groups and the associated TRI can be equipped at most. The slot positions
that must be used depend on the system configuration; in particular:
1) with single polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the logical number sequence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (see Fig. 140. on page 276).
Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 8 and 9 are never equipped, as
depicted in Fig. 138. herebelow;

S R M R M RM R
S R R R R R M RM
Y M M R M RM R M R

E R R D R D R D R D RD
S D D A D AD A D A A
R A A A 6 A 8 A9

5 7
C 0
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9
V 0
P P P P P P P P P

P P P
S S S S S S S S S

S S S


1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
UNITS

NEVER
EQUIPPED
T T T T T T T T

T T
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R

I
R
I

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Fig. 138. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations
274 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
2) with double polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the sequence 0, 8, .... (see Fig. 141. on page 277, Fig. 142. on page 278 and Fig. 143. on page
278).
Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 4 and 5 are never equipped, as
depicted in Fig. 139. herebelow;

S
R R R R

R M R M RM R
M RM

S R
Y M M R M RM R M R R
E R R D R D D RD RD

S D D A D AD A D A A
R A A 5 A 6 7 A8 A9
C 0 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5

V 0 1 6 7 8 9
O


1 0 1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2

UNITS
NEVER
EQUIPPED
T T T T
T T T T T T

R R R R R R R R R R
I

I I I I I I I I I
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Fig. 139. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations
d) in the unused slots, dummy plates mus be equipped to ensure EMC performance as well as
equipment correct ventilation;
32.2.2 LPS subrack equipping rules
The optional LPS subrack is equipped in the transceiver shelf, taking the place of two adjacent transceiver
units, and can be equipped in two alternative positions, as depicted in Fig. 66. on page 124 .
Such a choice depends on the adopted polarization configuration; i.e. in case of:
single polarization configurations, the LPS subrack takes the place of TRI 8 and 9, that are never used
in such a configuration (see Fig. 138. on page 274 )
double polarization configurations, the LPS subrack takes the place of TRI 4 and 5, that are never
used in such a configuration (see Fig. 139. above).
Fig. 67. on page 125 shows a fully equipped LPS subrack. For the P/Ns and equipping rules of LPS
boards, refer to the LPS specific documentation (see Tab. 81. on page 500 ).
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 275 / 522
32.2.3 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline

9600 LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0

configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary to

increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration.
Hereafter the expansion procedure is reported with the help of some figures illustrating the slots to be used
to house the added transceivers inside the mechanical assembly. Please, keep in mind that for the
RRA/modem units the same procedure is still valid; it means that the Base Band shelfs slots
corresponding to those utilized for the transceiver will host the associated RRA/modem units. In this way
the connections between transceivers and relevant modem units is realized by vertical parallel coaxial
cables, without cable crossconnections.
a) If the branching unit utilizes a single polarization, the transceivers and the branching unit will be
added using the slots starting from left and going toward the right side of the subrack, as shown in
the next Fig. 140.
The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan. In every case the maximum number
of transceiver that can be housed in the subrack is 8.
The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.
The example reported in the figure is limited to 4 channels.
1+1/2+0 configuration expansion to 2+1/3+0 expansion to 3+1/4+0
H (V)
Fig. 140. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack
276 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
b) If the branching unit utilizes two antenna polarizations , the transceivers and the branching unit
will be added installing them stating from the side walls and filling the subrack going toward the
subrack centre, in position left or right depending on the polarization of each transceiver, as shown
in the next figure.

The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.
So, the antenna polarization of the radio channel used for protection (H or V) defines which branching
(H or V) will be installed at the left side of the rack. For the above reason, it is important to keep
in mind that H or V positions are not strictly associated to the left or right side of the subrack.
The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan.
The example reported in Fig. 141. is limited to 4 channels. It refers to a system with spare channel
on H antenna polarization and, consequently, with transceivers and branching connected to H
polarization on the left side of the subrack.

(adding 1 RT on V pol) (adding 1 RT on H pol)
1 2 1 4 2 1 5 2 4
H V H V V H H V V
2 2 4 2 4
1 1 1 5
V
Fig. 141. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H
channels on the left side
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 277 / 522
c) The next Fig. 142. shows the other possibility, in which the spare channel (2) utilizes the V
polarization and, consequently, the transceivers and branching are connected to V polarization and

are installed on the left side of the subrack.

(1 RT on H pol and (adding 1 RT on V pol) (adding 1 RT on V pol)
1 RT on V pol)
2 3 2 4 3 2 4 6 3
V H V V H V V V H
H 2 2 4 2 4 6
V 3 3 3
Fig. 142. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on the
left side
The above figure shows only two of the possible expansions that depend on the mixing of (H) and
(V) transceivers that must be utilized.
d) The next Fig. 143. gives an example of the installation of the units in case of frequency reuse
technique utilization in a 7+1 protected terminal. At first, the terminal utilizes the first 4 channels (with
channel 4 V as spare channel). The successive expansion of the system is performed adding the
channels working on the same frequencies but transmitted on the opposite antenna polarization.
3+1/4+0 configuration 7+1/8+0 configuration
4 2 3 1 4 2 1 3 4 2 3 1
V V H H V V V V H H H H
1 2 3 4
H 2 4
V 1 3
Fig. 143. Expansion procedure with reused channels
278 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
32.3 Base Band shelf
The following Fig. 144. shows the boardunequipped shelf layout.

SUBD CONNECTORS 2MB WST CONNECTORS
ACCESS
AREA
BOARD
EQUIPMENT
AREA
Fig. 144. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout
The board equipment area is described in para.32.3.1 on page 280.
The access area is described in:
para.110.2.2 on page 148 as far as SUBD connector area is concerned
para.110.2.3 on page 150 as far as 2Mbit/s WST connector area is concerned
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 279 / 522
32.3.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules

Please refer to para.32.2 on page 274, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR

shelves

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
M M M M
D A D D D
S R A A D A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
0 1 1 3 4
C V 0 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
C
A G C C C C C C C C C
B D D D D D D D D D D
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
E E E E E E E E E E
F F
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Fig. 145. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering)
For:
slot (A) equipment, refer to para.32.3.1.1 on page 281
slot (B) equipment, refer to para.32.3.1.2 on page 281
slots (C) + (G) + (D) + (E) equipment, refer to para.32.3.1.3 on page 281
slot (F) equipment, refer to para.32.3.1.4 on page 284.
280 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
32.3.1.1 System Controller card
Tab. 50. System Controller card equipping rules

SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 145. on page 280)

The SYStem COntroller (SYSCO) card contains the subunit ESCON (in its turn, housing
the equipment configuration data memory device FLASH CARD) and the external
connectors for the QB3 and F interfaces.
Label for
(A) P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
SYSCO [28] SYSCO
FLASH CARD [29] MEMDEV
N.B. Refer to para.18.2.2 on page 108 for the unit physical views and operative information.
32.3.1.2 Service card
Tab. 51. Service card equipping rules

The SERVice (SERV) card contains the auxiliary AUX/EOW service channels, the
protection of the WST channels and the service channels, the switch logic of the RPS
protection (used only in case of 1+1 and N+1 configurations) and it can host (as option) a
module (TPHDEV), adding a voice channel.
(B) Label for

P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
SERV [26] SERV
ADDITIONAL VOICE [27] TPHDEV
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 281 / 522
32.3.1.3 RRA, MD and PSU card groups and dummy plates

a) RRA

Tab. 52. RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY cards equipping rules
Read carefully General equipping rules on page 274.

The RRA units are connected to the transmission line through one optical or electrical
interface. The electrical interface is placed directly on RRA units, instead the optical one
on a optical module placed inside the RRA unit itself (a drawer into the front panel).
Slot 3 of Base Band shelf can be used as a standby radio channel in N+1 and 1+1
configurations; otherwise it is used as a main radio channel in N+0 configuration.
In N+1 and 1+1 configurations, this slot can be equipped by a RRAS (RRA standby) unit
and only in N+1, the same interface previously described for the RRA (optical) can be
provided, if extra traffic is actuated; in N+0 configuration, this slot can be equipped by a RRA
unit, in this case the optical interface module can be provided.
(C) Just one physical RRA unit exists both for transmission of STM1 signal or subSTM1 one.
and The same thing is applied to the RRAS unit.
(G) Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
RRA CHANNEL
[18] RRA
all slots (C)
RRA STANDBY
[19] RRAS
slot (G) only
LC OPTICAL INTERFACE [32] IS1.1
N.B. For the unit physical views and operative information, refer to para.18.2.4 on page 115 for
the RRACHANNEL, and to para.18.2.5 on page 117 for the RRASTANDBY.
282 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
b) MD
Tab. 53. Modem cards equipping rules


The MoDem (MD) card types contain the modulator and demodulator function units.
128QAM and 64QAM are supported according to Tab. 41. on page 198. For each type of
MD (supporting STM1 or STM0 signal), an IF module is used in case of space diversity
configuration as daughter board of the MD board. The same physical module is used also
in case of frequency reuse configuration, always as a daughter board, but only for MD
supporting STM1 signals. In case of space diversity with frequency reuse configuration
with MD supporting STM1 signals, two of these daughter boards are used.
Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
(D) (REF in Tab. 39. on page 183)
Inventory
MODEM LHSTM11WST [22] RRAMD1280W0

CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1 [23] IF1WCX
MODEM LHSTM00WST [20] RRAMD1281W1

CANCCOMB STM0 [25] IF0WC
MODEM 32/64QAM LH [21] MD3264W1

CANCCOMB 32/64 [24] IF3264CX
c) PSU
Tab. 54. PSU cards equipping rules

The PSU boards power the Base Band shelf. Usually PSU units are equipped in pairs
(PSU0 + PSU1, PSU2 + PSU3, etc.), because each PSU pair gives power supply in
protected mode to a pair of MD and RRA, that are so protected from the failure of a single
PSU:
PSU0 + PSU1 (MD0+RRA0) + (MD1+RRA1)
(E) PSU4 + PSU5 (MD4+RRA4) + (MD5+RRA5)

Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
DC/DC CONVERTER
[30] PSL4860
BB 2G LH
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 283 / 522
d) Dummy plates

Tab. 55. Dummy plates for RRAModem and PSU equipping rules

When a group of RRA, MD and PSU is not equipped, the corresponding slots must be
closed by dummy plates, to ensure EMC performance as well as equipment correct
ventilation.
Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
(C)
DUMMY PLATE W40
+ (RRA + MD)
[36]
(D)
DUMMY PLATE L40
(E) (DC/DC CONV.)
[37]
32.3.1.4 PSF cards
Tab. 56. PSF cards equipping rules

The PSF boards contain the filter for the PSU boards and the DC/DC converter to supply
System Controller and SERVICE boards; the two PSF boards are in protection between
them.
(F) P/N
Label for
UNIT Remote
Inventory
FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V [31] PSF
32.3.1.5 Kit Loudspeaker
Tab. 57. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules
POSITION IN RACK (see Fig. 137. on page 272)

The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU. The kit includes the cable
for its connection to the system.
Label for
(J) UNIT
P/N
Remote
Inventory
KIT LOUDSPEAKER [39]
284 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
32.4 Transceiver shelf
32.4.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout

The Transceiver shelf unit layout is depicted in the following Fig. 146. herebelow:
T T T T T T T T T T
R R R R R R R R R R
I I I I I I I I I I
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A A A A A A A A A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fig. 146. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering)
32.4.2 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates
Tab. 58. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules
SLOT IN TRANSCEIVER SHELF (see Fig. 146. on page 285)
TRANSCEIVER
Each Transceiver is an assembly made up by components that, from item provisioning
point of view, are independent items that are equipped, for types and number, according
to the system configuration, as shown herebelow:
FREQUENCY COMPONENTS TYPES AND NUMBER

DIVERSITY
REUSE TRI LO R FR KIT
N N 1 2 1 0
N Y 1 2 1 1 or 0
Y N 1 2 2 0
(A)
Y Y 1 2 2 1 or 0
N.B. For the P/Ns and Remote Inventory Labels of TRI units and modules, please
refer to the enclosed Transceiver Reference Manual (REF.[D] in Tab. 91. on
page 521 of this handbook).
DUMMY PLATE
When a transceiver is not equipped, the corresponding slot is closed by a dummy plate.
Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
RT FRONT PLATE KIT [38]
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 285 / 522
32.5 FAN UNITS

32.5.1 FAN UNIT equipping rules

There can be either one or two FAN UNIT, see pos. (E) and (L) in Fig. 137. on page 272:
FAN UNIT pos. (E) is mandatory in all configurations
FAN UNIT pos. (L) is mandatory whenever the ADM shelf is equipped.
32.5.2 Logical composition of the FAN UNIT
To maintain software compatibility with the FANS previous version (see para.63.4 on page 487), the new
FAN UNIT, even though is physically a single unit, contains always two logical FANS ASSEMBLED units,

as depicted in following Fig. 147. :

FANSL
A
FANSL
B

1 2
Fig. 147. FANS UNIT(slot numbering and board types)
Tab. 59. Logical Fans assembled unit equipping rules

SLOT IN FAN UNIT (see Fig. 147. on this page)
Two logical fan units correspond to one FAN UNIT
Label for
(A)
UNIT P/N Remote
(B) Inventory
LOGICAL FANS ASSEMBLED not existing FANSL
N.B. Refer to para.18.3 on page 122 for the unit physical views and operative information.
Rules and indications for fan utilization associated to different temperature ranges, terminal configurations
and eventual ADM presence are hereafter reported:
For temperature range 5C to +50C (standard temperature range):

for radio regenerator cooling:
for 1+1/2+0 copolar and heteropolar configurations: no fans are needed.
for 2+1 and higher copolar and heteropolar configurations : always one FAN UNIT
for ADM cooling (if present): always one FAN UNIT.
For temperature range 5C to +55C (extended temperature range):

all configurations : always one FAN UNIT
for ADM cooling (if present): always one FAN UNIT.
a) END OF SECTION
286 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE
This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance.
GENERAL
Chapter 41 Maintenance Policy

289
It introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance.
Chapter 42 Set and use of EOW functions

It explains how to configure and use the Engineering OrderWire functions of the 291
equipment.
Chapter 43 Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts

It describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are 295
envisaged to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Chapter 44 First Level Maintenance

301
It describes the First Level Maintenance (system state display) of the equipment.
SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE (PREVENTIVE)
Chapter 45 Preventive (routine) Maintenance 307
SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE (CORRECTIVE)
Chapter 46 Troubleshooting
309
It describes how to perform troubleshooting.
Chapter 47 Unit replacement

325
It explains how to replace all units.
Chapter 48 Faulty unit repair and repair form

353
It explains what to do in order to send faulty units to the authorized repair centers.
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 287 / 522
288 / 522

MAINTENANCE
41 MAINTENANCE POLICY
This chapter introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance.
41.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators
The maintenance procedures described in following chapters have been conceived taking into account
the following considerations:
The twostation layout typical of a radio link requires often that different operators can communicate
with each other to solve problems. The EOW functions of this equipment give a simple way for this
communication need.
This matter is described in chapter 42 on page 291.
The possibility of carrying out routine and corrective maintenance is based on the existence of:
a suitable set of instruments and accessories

a suitable set of spare parts
These matters are described in chapter 43 on page 295.
Maintenance can be classified as :
First Level Maintenance :
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
First level maintenance consists of a set of simple operations by means of which a First
Level Maintenance Operator can acknowledge the state of the system and decide whether
or not the intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required in order to
bring back the assembly to optimum operating conditions by troubleshooting and unit
replacement, if necessary. In this philosophy:
First Level Maintenance Operator should not be authorized to change the equipment status;
he should be only authorized to display it or to make some simple tests through the Craft
Terminal, if expressly authorized by the Station Manager.
These actions are described in chapter 44 on page 301.
Second Level Maintenance can be classified as:
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Preventive maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance
discovers those devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need
adjustment or replacement.
These actions are described in chapter 45 on page 307.
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (troubleshooting and repair)

Corrective maintenance consists of a set of operations which bring back the assembly to
optimum operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum
operational availability.
These actions are split as follows:
chapter 46 on page 309 describes how to perform troubleshooting
chapter 47 on page 325 explains how to replace all types of units
chapter 48 on page 353 explains what to do in order to send faulty units to the
authorized repair centers.
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 289 / 522
Second Level Maintenance Operator is authorized to make all actions necessary to repair
the system; moreover he only should be authorized to carry out preventive maintenance.

With regard to the access to the Craft Terminal functionalities, notice that, according to point [3] on

page 244 (Security management) it is possible to use the following operator profiles:
Viewer for the First Level Maintenance Operator

Operator for the Second Level Maintenance Operator.
41.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill
First Level Maintenance Personnel must have got:
an adequate technical training on telecommunications. Experience in first level maintenance

activities is a must;
an adequate presentation on the equipment this handbook refers to;
detailed instructions on what to do and/or who must be contacted in the case he finds the
equipment out of its normal conditions.
41.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill
Second Level Maintenance Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on
telecommunications. Experience in maintenance activities is a must.
In particular, Second Level Maintenance Personnel must be familiar:
with the equipment this handbook refers to
and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.64.2
on page 497 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment.
MAINTENANCE
290 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
42 SET AND USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS
Please refer to chapter 41 on page 289 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment
maintenance.
This chapter explains how to configure and use the EOW (Engineering OrderWire) function of the
equipment.
42.1 Telephone kit and telephone set operative information
The DTMF telephone kit (P/N REF.[40] in Tab. 39. on page 183) allows to carry out EOW in/out calls. As
shown in Fig. 148. herebelow, it is composed by a Telephone set (A) and its holder (B) to be mounted,
through the accessories depicted in the figure, on the rack.
Fig. 148. DTMF Telephone kit
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 291 / 522
Fig. 149. herebelow shows one of the possible versions of supplied Telephone sets.

front rear

(4) (2) (3)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
* 0 #
PAUSE FLASH REDIAL
(1)
if present, these keys have no use
(1) ON/OFF switch (must be set to ON when the Telephone is used)
(2) PULSE/TONE switch (must be set to TONE)
(3) DIAL/LOCK switch (must be set to DIAL when the Telephone is used)
(4) Led (lights on when the Telephone set jack is connected to TPH connector of SERVICE unit and
switch (1) is set to ON)
Fig. 149. Telephone set
MAINTENANCE
292 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
42.2 EOW Channel use
42.2.1 General Information

a) Connection diagram
STATION A STATION B
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
SERVICE SERVICE
Telephone set Telephone set
Telephone kit/set drawings are given in Fig. 148. on page 291 and Fig. 149. on page 292.
N.B. each Telephone set has its own phone number. Phone number can be in the range 10 to
99. Telephone sets must have phone numbers different from each other.
Physical connections on equipment: connect Telephone set jack to to the telephone jack of SERVICE
unit (connector (J5) in Fig. 56. on page 114).
b) Telephone set phone number display/change
Display/setting is done by Craft Terminal by the following menus:
display: Configuration Overhead OH Phone Parameters
change:Configuration Overhead OH Phone Parameters phone number Apply
Refer to CT Operators Handbook for details
c) Telephone set settings (on rear side)

P = Pulse, T = Tone.
Set to T prior to making a call.
P T DIAL LOCK
Set DIALLOCK switch to LOCK,

and OFFON switch to ON
OFF ON
prior to making a call.
d) Ways of Calling : two different ways of calling are possible:
SELECTIVE: a connection between two users (dial a number 10 to 99)
OMNIBUS: a unidirectional connection with all the users (dial digits 00)
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 293 / 522
e) Leds indication: LINE O.W. area in Fig. 56. on page 114:

(7) EOW (GREEN): free line

(6) EOW (YELLOW: busy line
(6) Flashing YELLOW: received and recognized call
f) Telephone set keyboard
HANDSET MEANING
* Force unlocking of the line
# Engage line
42.2.2 Call Setup/End by Telephone Set
a) To Call From Handset:

1. Check that line is free (EOWfree green LED on SERVICE is on).
2. Handset OFF/ON switch to ON.
3. On keypad, press # to engage line.
4. Check that EOWbusy yellow LED on SERVICE is on.
5. On keypad, dial twodigit number of station to be called (or 00 for omnibus call)
b) To Answer Call At Handset:

1. SERVICE EOWbusy yellow LED flashes and audible tone is present.
2. Connect handset to SERVICE, set ON/OFF switch to ON, press # on keypad.
c) To End Call From Handset:

1. On keypad, press *.
2. Move ON/OFF switch to OFF.
42.2.3 Additional standard Party lines
Three PartyLine (VF TX/RX A,B and C) paths are available on BB shelfs connector M190 (see
Tab. 30. on page 175).
42.3 TPH Channel use (Additional Voice)

42.3.1 General Information and usage
It is possible only with subunit TPH equipped inside SERVICE board.

The DTMF Telephone Kit (Ref.[40] in Tab. 39. on page 183) must be connected to the system through
pins 7 and 20 of BB shelfs connector M190 (see Tab. 30. on page 175).
The call procedure is equal to that explained in para.42.2 above but, in this case, the leds in LINE
TPH area are used instead.
42.3.2 Additional Party lines
Two PartyLine (VF TX/RX A and B TPH) paths are available on BB shelfs connector M190 (see
MAINTENANCE
294 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
43 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
43.1 Introduction
maintenance.
This chapter describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are envisaged
to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment, and and is organized as follows:
Instruments and accessories herebelow, including:

Software tools herebelow
Maintenance and System Tools Kits on page 296
Set of spare parts on page 298, including:

Types of Spare Parts on page 298
Number of Spare Parts on page 299
General rules on spare parts management on page 299
Spare Flash Card management on page 299
43.2 Instruments and accessories
43.2.1 Software tools
There is a local terminal (PCECT) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the relevant Craft Terminal Operators Handbook (see Tab. 85. on
page 504).
When a TMN is implemented, an Operation System will display alarms and manage all the connected
Equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
With reference to Fig. 52. on page 109:
connection with the PC is achieved through connector (M3) available on the System Controller unit
through connectors (J1) to (J3), the same unit can be connected to an Operations System associated
to the Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out
by the PC.
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 295 / 522
43.2.2 Maintenance and System Tools Kits

a) The 9600LSY MAINTENANCE TOOLS KIT (for P/N see REF.[42] in Tab. 39. on page 183) is a bag

containing various types of cables and cable adapters.

The complete part list of this kit is given in the document enclosed to this handbook:
9600LSY Maintenance Tools Kit part list, REF.[A] in Tab. 91. on page 521
b) The 9600LSY SYSTEM TOOLS KIT (for P/N see REF.[41] in Tab. 39. on page 183) includes various
types of common usage fixed spanners, standard and crosshead screwdrivers, polygon spanners,
polygon tube spanners, special fixed spanners, a torque wrench, etc.
Moreover, it contains the components of the antistatic wristband depicted in see Fig. 1. on page 9.
The complete part list of this kit is given in the document enclosed to this handbook:
9600LSY System Tools Kit part list, REF.[B] in Tab. 91. on page 521
In the following, drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
[1] Special extractors
See Fig. 150. herebelow.

Two extractors are available:
extractor (1) is used to remove the optical module from the RRACHANNEL unit housing it.
To carry out remotion:
unscrew the fixing screws of the module to the front panel of the RRACHANNEL unit
insert and rotate the extractor (1) in the suitable hole of the optical module
pull out the module.
extractor (2) is used to remove the coaxial cables.
Fig. 150. Special extractors
MAINTENANCE
296 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
[2] Special cords
plug M1 or M2
in Fig. 72. on page 133
Fig. 151. Special cord for PRx measurement
Fig. 152. Cord for use with SIBDL
N.B. For the use of this cord to carry out the NE software download via SIBDL, according to the
SWP used, please refer to the:
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide (REF.[C] on page 499)
or:
9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide (REF.[D] on page 499)
or:
9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 (REF.[O] on page 504) from ED.07.
or:
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 504)
from ED.03.
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 297 / 522
43.3 Set of spare parts

43.3.1 Types of Spare Part

The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plugin
unit.
N.B. The unit replacement procedures described in relevant chapters of this section Maintenance
in this handbook presume that the units present in the sparepart stock correspond exactly to
the plugin replaceable units that are equipped in the system, i.e.:
with the same Part Numbers
and including the same babyboards (with the same Part Numbers) (N.B.1)
with the aim of speedingup the corrective maintenance and to avoid complex unit manipulation
(baby board mounting/dismounting on/from the main board) which could result in unit and/or
babyboard damage.
Tab. 60. Spare parts list

DETAILS FOR P/Ns
UNIT BABY BOARDS AND
EQUIPPING RULES
SYSCO N.B.2
FLASH CARD (see para.43.3.4 page 299)
ADDITIONAL VOICE
SERVICE Tab. 51. on page 281
(optional)
RRA CHANNEL
RRA STANDBY (if used) Tab. 52. on page 282
OPTICAL MODULE (if used) N.B.3
1 or 2 CANCCOMB
MODEM (STM0 or STM1) Tab. 53. on page 283
(STM0 or STM1) (optional)
PSU Tab. 54. on page 283
PSF Tab. 56. on page 284
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (if used) Tab. 76. on page 486
FAN UNIT (if used) Tab. 59. on page 286
REF.[5] in Tab. 39. on
SPARE FUSES FOR TRU
page 183
TRANSCEIVER ASSEMBLY refer to para.19.2 on page 128
N.B.1 According to the sparepart policy, Customers are supplied with spare units already equipped
with front plates and baby boards, according to Customers System configuration.
N.B.2 As spare part, SYSCO is shipped from factory always with its subunit ESCON already mounted.
Customer is never allowed to dismount it from the main board. Conversely, the SYSCO spare
part is usually shipped from factory without the Flash Card, that is available as individual item.
N.B.3 Only for Customers still having older types of optical modules (SC/PC and FC/PC) described
in para.63.5 on page 493 (phased out, no longer available): to have interworking with the
old Optical Interfaces, without remaking equipment cabling, two adapter cables are available,
described in para. 18.2.6 on page 118
MAINTENANCE
298 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
43.3.2 Number of spare parts
The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average
amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
43.3.3 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment
It is suggested to periodically check those spare units that have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
the spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes;
the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas);
if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept,
make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/subunit, make sure that the spare unit/subunit is set exactly as the
replaced one.
43.3.4 Spare Flash Card management
Please refer to para.52.3.3 on page 399 for the Flash Card description.
The Flash Card supplied as spare part is empty (i.e. without SW) and must be left as it is for its possible
use as spare part.
ATTENTION

Do not use a Flash Card already loaded with SW as spare part, unless you use the specific
instructions (that include the Flash Card reset and the SW download through SIBDL application)
given, according to the SWP used, in the:
9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 (REF.[O] on page 504) from ED.07.
or:
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.x from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 504) from
ED.07.
You must be aware that if a Flash Card with a SWP (different from that running in the system) is
inserted as it is in the System Controller (and the System Controller is inserted in its shelfs slot),
the software download will be automatically carried out from the Flash Card toward the Systems EC,
RC and SUs, thus causing a complete system crash.
WARNING: As far as the P/N of the Flash Card is concerned, read carefully NBk on page 187
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 299 / 522
300 / 522

MAINTENANCE
44 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE
44.1 Introduction
maintenance.
This chapter describes the First Level Maintenance of 9600LSY equipment, and and is organized as
follows:
Procedure summary herebelow

System state display by visual indications on page 302
Checks by Craft Terminal on page 304
44.2 Procedure summary
START
SYSTEM STATE DISPLAY BY VISUAL INDICATIONS
check TRU lamps, if equipped

MAJOR MINOR
(para 44.3.1 page 302)
ALARM ALARM
CONDITION CONDITION
perform system lamp test
(para 44.3.2.1 page 303)
check alarm leds on SYSCO unit

(para 44.3.2.2 page 303)
NO ALARM CONDITIONS
IMMEDIATE intervention of a DELAYED intervention of a

Second Level Maintenance Operator Second Level Maintenance Operator
is required is required
END END
CHECKS BY CRAFT TERMINAL

if expressly authorized by the Station Manager
(para 44.4 page 304)
END
Fig. 153. First Level Maintenance procedure summary
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 301 / 522
44.3 System state display by visual indications

44.3.1 Inspection of station alarm lamps on TRU (if equipped)

RED (1)
RED (2)
YELLOW
GREEN
LED ON MEANING ACTION

Detection of an URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm
RED (1) A
(internal and/or external) for which traffic is affected.
Detection of a NOT URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm
RED (2) (internal and/or external) for which traffic is not affected (e.g. something is C
wrong, but the traffic is recovered by an automatic protection switch).
Alarm condition ATTENDED: it means that an Operator [by pushbutton (8)
on SYSCO unit, see Fig. 155. on page 303 or by Craft Terminal] has C
attended the alarm (for details, see para.46.3.2 on page 311).
YELLOW If also SYSCO units led ABN (4) [see Fig. 155. on page 303] is on, there is
an ABNORMAL operative condition: usually it means that there is a
B
condition forced by an Operator (e.g. a manual switch regarding the
protection system), or a SW download is in progress.
GREEN It is activated by the buzzer input. C
ACTION:
A The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required.
B Wait 10 minutes. If persists, the immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator
is required only if Red LED (1) URGENT is on
C The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is not required
Fig. 154. Station Alarms on TRU
MAINTENANCE
302 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
44.3.2 Inspection of alarm lamps on SYSCO unit
44.3.2.1 Lamp test

To be sure to have correct indications, carry out the lamp test, pushing pushbutton (7) in Fig. 155. below:
while pushed, all leds of all units should be turned on, with the exception of those of the transceivers.


(Attended)
(6) bicolor led:
green flashing: SW download in progress
(internal or toward other boards)
Fig. 155. System Controller front view (particular)
44.3.2.2 Check alarms lamps
With reference to Fig. 155. above:

LED ON MEANING ACTION
Detection of an URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm
(1) URG A
(internal and/or external) for which traffic is affected.
Detection of a NOT URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm
(2) NURG (internal and/or external) for which traffic is not affected (e.g. something is C
wrong, but the traffic is recovered by an automatic protection switch).
Alarm condition ATTENDED: it means that an Operator (by pushbutton (8)
(3) ATTD or by Craft Terminal) has attended the alarm (for details, see para.46.3.2 C
on page 311).
Detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition: usually it means that there
(4) ABN is a condition forced by an Operator (e.g. a manual switch regarding the B
protection system), or a SW download is in progress.
Detection of an INDICATIVE alarm: it means that the possible equipment
(5) IND B
alarmed condition can be due to an external alarm.
(6) red SYSCO unit is faulty A
(6) green
SW download in progress (internal or toward other boards) B
flashing
ACTION:
A The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required.
B Wait 10 minutes. If persists, the immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator
is required only if Red LED (1) URG is on
C The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is not required
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 303 / 522
44.4 Checks by Craft Terminal

This paragraph explains how to login the CT application and sums up the common used commands for

system status display and checks. For screen details, please refer to the CT Operators Handbook.

N.B. These operations can be done by the First Level Maintenance Operator only if expressly
authorized by the Station Manager.
a ) Craft Terminal (CT) connection and startup

1) connect Craft Terminal (CT) to Equipment
plug CT suitable cable to PC and to CRAFT TERM connector on SYSCO (see (M3) in
Fig. 52. on page 109 ).
2) CT start
power on CT and wait for PC startup
Start 1320CTQ3CTP v.x.x.x ; notes:
if choice 1320CTQ3CTP v.x.x.x is not available, PC is not configured as Craft
Terminal: Software Package loading is necessary
x.x.x depends on Software Package loaded
after a while, the Network Element Synthesis screen will appear, showing all Network
Elements that can be selected. After this Start operation, all NEs appear with symbol ?
(it means they are not supervised)
b ) Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE)

From screen Network Element Synthesis ( see point a ) 2 ) ) :
1) select interested Network Element (NE) clicking once left mouse button on it
2) while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Start Supervision , and with left mouse
button execute it (click once)
wait until the symbol ? becomes colored (it means NE in supervised state)
c ) Alarm Surveillance
From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state ( see point b ) 2 ) ):
2) while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Show NE alarms , and with left mouse
button execute it (click once)
(note: if Show NE alarms does not appear, wait few seconds, then try again)
after a while, alarm screen will appear showing alarms. At the end close all alarm screens.
d ) Network Element login

From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state ( see point b ) 2 ) ):
2) while NE selected, with right mouse button choose NE login , and with left mouse button
execute it (click once)
(if NE login does not appear, wait some seconds, then try again).
The login screen appears. Type:
in Login field: as communicated by the Station Manager
in Password field: as communicated by the Station Manager
Then click OK with left mouse button
3) if the login is accepted, the USM screen appears. The following checks are now possible.
MAINTENANCE
304 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
e ) Radio Frequency check
From USM screen of the NE ( see point d ) 3 ) ):
1) menu: Radio Frequency

after a while, Frequency screen will appear showing Transmitted and Received frequencies.
At the end close the Frequency screen
f ) Transmitted and Received power levels

1) menu: Radio Power Measurement Graphic Power Measurement
after a while, Graphic Power Measurement screen will appear
2) on Graphic Power Measurement screen, select channel to be measured with left mouse
button, then click OK
after a while, Measure screen will appear
3) on Measure screen, click with left mouse button on j Show Details to see detailed power
measures. At the end close all measure screens
g ) Performance Monitoring
1) menu: Rack SubRack Board
wait for Board screen opening
2) select the circuit Regenerator Section Termination ( RST radio or RST line )
3) menu: Port Performance Display History Data
after a while, measure screen will appear showing RadioSide Performance Monitoring data.
At the end close measure screen.
N.B. It is assumed that PM has already been launched and that at least 15 minutes or 24 hours
(according to the set PM period) have been passed from the launch.
PM launch can be carried out on port view screen as follows:
with left mouse button, select the block RST on the right
menu: Port Performance Configure Performance Monitoring
select NE 15 m or NE 24 h
click on Data Collection
click on Apply
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 305 / 522
306 / 522

MAINTENANCE
45 PREVENTIVE (ROUTINE) MAINTENANCE
maintenance.
Preventive (routine) maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance
discovers those devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or
replacement.
Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance.
The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links or counting the errored events and
obtaining performance data.
The Performance Monitoring Application, described in para.46.5.7 on page 321, allows this function.
45.1 Preventive (routine) Maintenance every year
It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
[1] Mechanical checks

Check that:
the power supply units,
the coaxial cables,
the waveguides,
the mounting fixtures
are connected correctly.
[2] Grounding check

Check that the racks, subracks, and modules are grounded.
[3] Power cables check
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by

48 V dc.

terminals.
Make these operations:
Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded.
Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee
grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground).
[4] Operative checks

Visual check:
During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in Tab. 61. on
page 313
Checks by Craft Terminal
Refer to the specific attachment of the LineUp guide (REF.[C] or [D] on page 499)
N.B. some suggested checks are indicated in para.44.4 on page 304.

MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 307 / 522
45.2 Preventive (routine) Maintenance for fans (if equipped)

The MTBF of the:

FAN UNIT (new type, see para.18.3 on page 122)
FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT (old type, see para.63.4 on page 487)
equipped below BaseBand shelf (and, if equipped, below ADM shelf) is about 20 years, provided that
Environmental Conditions regarding sand and dust are in the limits specified by Recc.ETS 300 019 Class
3.1 (see point 45.2.1 below).
Even though the operating environment is compliant with these limits, it is suggested to pull out Fan units
and clean fans removing dust and sand every three years. N.B.
N.B. In the case of worse environmental conditions, perform this operation more frequently.
To carry out such operation:
in case of FAN UNIT new type, you must: switch off FAN UNIT power supply (operating TRU
breakers), extract completely the unit from the rack, clean fans, then insert again the unit in the rack
and, at last, switch on power supply (operating TRU breakers). To do that safely and more detailed
instructions, refer to para.47.4.9 point [3] from page 347, following all given statements (if allowed
by cable length, do not disconnect signal cables);
in case of FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT old type, you must (see Fig. 224. and Fig. 225. on pages
488489): remove the FANS SHELFs cover, extract one FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT, clean fans,
reinsert the FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT, make same operation for the other FANS ASSEMBLED
UNIT(if equipped), and, at last, restore the FANS SHELFs cover. For more detailed instructions, refer
to para.63.4.4 from page 490.
45.2.1 Mechanically active substances
ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 recommends the following environmental parameters:
Environmental Parameter Value
a) Sand 30 mg/m3
b) Dust (suspension) 0.2 mg/m3
c) Dust (sedimentation) 1.5 mg/ (m2 h)
Overcoming these values could affect fans operation as described above.
MAINTENANCE
308 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
46 TROUBLESHOOTING
46.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the troubleshooting operations to be carried out to identify faulty units:
General flowchart of corrective maintenance on page 310
Alarm acknowledgment and attending on page 311
TroubleShooting starting with visual indications on page 312
TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal on page 316
TroubleShooting on the radio link on page 323
If not yet done, please read N.B. in para.43.3.1 on page 298.
The Corrective Maintenance general flowchart (Fig. 156. on page 310) includes both troubleshooting
operations and replacement/repair procedures described in following chapters of this section.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are:
chapter 23 on page 203 System Description
chapter 31 on page 249 System configurations, to take into account the actual system
configuration
chapter 18 on page 105 Operative information on equipment boards (except

microwave area)
chapter 19 on page 127 Operative information on microwave area (transceivers and

branching)
chapter 110 on page 147 System cabling (if problems on cabling can be suspected)
chapter 41 on page 289 Maintenance Policy
chapter 43 on page 295 Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts
chapter 44 on page 301 First Level Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 309 / 522
46.2 General flowchart of corrective maintenance

START

Alarm acknowledgment and attending
(para.46.3 page 311)
TroubleShooting starting with visual indications

(para.46.4 page 312)
Other measures
TroubleShooting starting via Craft Terminal

(para.46.5 page 316).
Identification of a unit to be replaced.
Unit replacement
(chapter 47 page 325)
System check via Craft Terminal
try again with N

Fault repaired ?
another unit
Y
If possible, restore replaced unit in the system
and perform system check via Craft Terminal,
to verify that is really faulty
possible intermittent N
Fixed fault ?
failure
Y
Restore spare part in the system and perform
system check via Craft Terminal
Send back faulty unit to Repair Centre together with

Repair Form compiled (chapter 48 page 353)
END
Fig. 156. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart
MAINTENANCE
310 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
46.3 Alarm acknowledgment and attending
Please refer to Fig. 156. on page 310, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance
general flowchart.


(Attended)
(6) bicolor led:
green flashing: SW download in progress
(internal or toward other boards)
Fig. 157. System Controller front view (particular)
46.3.1 Alarm acknowledgment
The need for Operator intervention is notified:
locally (in front of the equipment or in the station) when:
on SYSCO board (see Fig. 157. above) one of the leds (1) (2) (3) (4) (URG/NURG/IND/ABN)
lights up
or the same alarms, propagated through the Station Alarms cable, operate the TRU lamps (see
para.44.3.1 on page 302) or similar remote device
and/or when the alarm LEDs listed in Tab. 61. on page 313 are not in normal status.
remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in
the station.
When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending
operation (see para.46.3.2 below). This operation has the scope to notify locally in the station and
remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem.
46.3.2 Alarm Attending
See Fig. 157. above:
the detected alarm condition can be stored through pushbutton (8) on the System Controller unit.
This operation will turn OFF the LEDs URG/NURG (1) (2) and will light up the yellow LED ATTD (3)
on the System Controller unit (Attended).
a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs URG (1) or NURG (2).
when the fault has been repaired, the yellow lamp (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones
(if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms had occurred in the mean time) will turn
off.
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 311 / 522
46.4 TroubleShooting starting with visual indications


general flowchart.

Some problems may be localized looking the LEDs indicated in following Tab. 61.
Refer to Fig. 158. herebelow to carry out this procedure.
In any case, the inspection through the Craft Terminal (if possible) is recommended before doing any unit
replacement.
N.B. Before starting this inspection, perform lamp test (para 18.2.2.1 page 110).
START
N Y
one or both PSF
green led off ?
N
any PSU green
verify circuit breakers on TRU
led off ? Y (see Tab. 14. on page 94 )
Y Y
PSU switch on ? problem solved?
N
N
PSU probably faulty PSF probably faulty
why ?
solve problem
Y
SYSCO card fail on
(led (6) red)?
N
perform lamp test
(para 18.2.2.1 page 110 )
N
OK ?
carry out procedure in Y

para.46.4.2 page 315
try login NE by Craft Terminal
N Y
login successful ?
carry out procedure in carry out procedure in

para.46.4.1 page 315 para.46.5 page 316
Fig. 158. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications
MAINTENANCE
312 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 61. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units
TRU SHELF
NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
TRU Fig. 208. on page 440 all OFF
BASE BAND SHELF board area

NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
System Controller Fig. 155. on page 303 (6) bicolor OFF
Service Fig. 56. on page 114 (10) red OFF
RRACHANNEL and
Fig. 58. on page 116 (1) red OFF
RRASTANDBY (09)
Modem (09) Fig. 64. on page 121 (1) red OFF
PSU (09) Fig. 49. on page 107 (2) green ON
PSF (01) Fig. 49. on page 107 (4) green ON
BASE BAND SHELF access area

NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
Additional Housekeeping Fig. 25. on page 77 (1) red OFF
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
(1) green ON
Transceiver (09) Fig. 72. on page 133
(2) red OFF
FAN UNIT (01)

NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
FAN UNIT Fig. 65. on page 122 (1) red OFF
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 313 / 522
Tab. 62. , Tab. 63. and Fig. 159. herebelow sum up the information that can be seen on SERVICE and
RRASTANDBY units with regard to the status of protections at radio side (refer to para.52.4.2 thru

52.4.3 (pages 403 on, for details).

Tab. 62. Indications on SERVICE for Rxside protections
INDICATION
MEANING (Rx section)
(1) (2)
Rx ch n in service and no manual operation active (automatic switch active).
off
n There is a problem (local or remote) on the link.
on Rx ch n (MAIN) in service for Lockout local manual command
Rx ch 0 (SPARE) in service and no manual operation active (automatic switch
off
0 active).
on Rx ch 0 (SPARE) in service for Force_Switch local manual command
Tab. 63. Indications on RRASTANDBY for Txside protections

INDICATION MEANING (Tx section)
(3)
n Tx ch n (MAIN) protected by Tx ch 0 (SPARE). Occasional traffic not transmitted
All Tx ch n (MAIN) in service.
0
Tx ch 0 (SPARE) in service: free or engaged by occasional traffic
SERVICE
(1) Indication of the No
of the Rx
protected channel
(1 digit display) RRASTANDBY
(2) Manual operation (3) Indication of the No Tx

of N+1 logic of the Tx protected channel
(yellow led) (1 digit display)
Fig. 159. Indications on SERVICE and RRASTANDBY for protections
MAINTENANCE
314 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
46.4.1 Problems with the Craft Terminal
Whenever the login with the Craft Terminal does not work, proceed with the following checks:
Restart the Craft Terminal (logout and switch off/on).
With the Craft Terminal connected to the equipment Finterface, open the Alcatel Lower Layer
Manager screen (by clicking with the mouse pointer on the Alcatel symbol in the MSWindows
menu bar). The fields to be verified in this screen are:
Physical OSI or
Port
Logical
COM1 ON ON
Verify that the CT port is effectively that connected by cable to equipments F interface
If Physical is OFF, the problem can be due to:

CT physical port faulty
SYSCOs Finterface port faulty
the cable
If possible, verify the correct working of the Craft Terminal and of the CTF interface cable using them
with another Alcatel equipment. If the problem persists also with it, solve the problem.
Otherwise, proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.46.4.2
herebelow.
If OSI/Logical is OFF, the problem can be due to:

FLASH CARD missing on SYSCO unit (verify) or FLASH CARD/SYSCO faulty
SYSCOs Radio Controller section faulty or in abnormal condition.
Proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.46.4.2 herebelow.
46.4.2 CARD FAIL red led on SYSCO Unit turned on
If the bicolor LED CARD FAIL on SYSCO unit is redon (led (6) in Fig. 157. on page 311), (or it is off, but
lamp test does not work) and the Craft Terminal application:
responds (login successful), proceed investigating the problems through the Craft Terminal
application
does not respond (login unsuccessful):
1) push the RESET button on SYSCO unit (button (9) in Fig. 52. on page 109) and wait 3 minutes;
2) if, within 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application responds, open the Alarm status procedure
and proceed investigating the system state;
3) if, after 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application does not respond, replace the SYSCO unit,
as described in para.47.4.3 on page 333;
4) if the problem persists also after the SYSCO unit replacement, the failure or content corruption
of the FLASH CARD must be suspected (a very extraordinary event); proceed with its
replacement, as indicated in para.47.4.4 on page 335.
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 315 / 522
46.5 TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal


general flowchart.

The ECT/RECT application (see para.23.8.6 on page 243) includes several types of functions for system
maintenance (used in lineup operations, too), as depicted in following table:
FUNCTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Alarm Surveillance para.46.5.1 on page 317
Operators Controls of the protection switches para.46.5.2 on page 317
Loopbacks para.46.5.3 on page 318
TX mute function (local and remote) para.46.5.4 on page 319
Not Intrusive BER measurements para.46.5.5 on page 320
J0 Section Trace management para.46.5.6 on page 320
Performance Monitoring para.46.5.7 on page 321
Radio Performance Monitoring para.46.5.8 on page 321
Event Log para.46.5.9 on page 322
Additional information on other handbooks para.46.5.10 on page 322
N.B. The actual availability of some of functions listed above depend on the SWP release and version
used. F or further information, please refer to the CT Operators Handbook associated to the
SWP release and version you use.
MAINTENANCE
316 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
46.5.1 Alarm Surveillance (1330AS)
The 1330AS application embedded in the 9600LSY SWP allows the Operator to examine the alarms
currently present in the equipment or in the radio link or in the SDH / PDH network. They can be selected
through suitable SW filters in order to discriminate them according to the subset the Operator wants to see
(e.g. NE alarms, Equipment alarms, Transmission alarms, External Points alarms, etc.).
The troubleshooting operating instructions and details of the alarms for each card and relevant
indications are included in the section Maintenance of the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
The operating instructions make it possible to identify the faulty unit for all assemblies of the system.
Having located the suspected faulty unit/module, replace it with a spare one (see para.47 on page 325).
N.B. On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT
(URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the
relationship between this two terminologies is explained in Tab. 64. herebelow.
Tab. 64. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity
terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins.
Alarm severity terminology used for SYSTEM
Alarm severity terminology
CONTROLLER UNIT remote alarm connector
on C.T. and O.S.
pins
CRITICAL or MAJOR URG , T*URG, T*RURG,
MINOR NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG
WARNING INDICATIVE
INDETERMINATE (not used)
46.5.2 Operators Controls of the protection switches
In certain troubleshooting conditions, changing the state of the protection switches can be useful to fix
problems.
Details on protection switches and on relevant Operators Controls, for each system configuration, are
given in following paragraphs:
N+1 switch logic para.52.4.2 on page 403
1:N switch logic para.52.4.3 on page 410
Such paragraphs describe the actions that can be carried out from the logical point of view. For actual
operative procedures, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 317 / 522
46.5.3 Loopbacks

Loopbacks give the possibility of executing some system functional tests, like the BER test using a pattern

generator connected to the equipment input/output ports, thus making fault locations and maintenance

tests fast and simple. The following loopbacks can be performed:
Line loopback (RRA)

A Line Loopback is a loopback where the incoming signal to a physical port is looped back onto the
outgoing signal (see Fig. 160. )
Internal loopback (RRA RFCOH)

An Internal Loopback is a loopback where the internal outgoing signal of a port is looped back onto
its internal incoming signal (see Fig. 161. and Fig. 162. )
All of these are loop and continue loopbacks (the signal is sent back and continues its path).
RPS RFCOH MODEM RT

SPI RST RST
RSPI
RRA MD TRI
Fig. 160. RRA line loopback
RST RFCOH MODEM RT

SPI RST RPS
RSPI
RRA MD TRI
Fig. 161. RRA internal loopback
MODEM RT
SPI RST RST RPS RFCOH
RSPI
RSPI
RRA MD TRI
Fig. 162. RFCOH Internal loopback
the residual BER values (RBER) are not guaranteed in Radio Local Loop condition on.
For further information, please refer to the C.T. Operators Handbook.
MAINTENANCE
318 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
46.5.4 TX mute function (local and remote)
With the Tx Mute function, the facility to switch off a transmitter is provided to the ECT. This facility is not
available with the RECT.

Operator Commands
The ECT operator has the possibility to manage this functionality on the two stations of a radio link,
switching off a local transmitter (belonging to the NE physically connected to the ECT) or a remote
one (belonging to the farend NE).
In all configurations (N+0, N+1), each transmitter is switched off independently with a dedicated ECT
command.
When a switch off command is executed, an indication of abnormal condition will be notified to
ECT/RECT.
Functional Description
Both for local and remote switch off commands, the request is addressed to the local station. In order
to perform this functionality on remote station, a 64Kb/s Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
(RFCOH) byte is used as communication channel between the stations of the radio link. In the N+1
and N+0 configurations this communication channel is protected (1+1), as well as all the other radio
service channels.
The switchoff request, received by the remote station, is sent to the relevant transmitter for
execution.
When the ECT removes the command, the transmitter returns to be managed according to the
modality active when the switchoff was been activated (with the configured power level if the ATPC
is disabled, according to the standard ATPC way of working if the ATPC is enabled).
Commissioning Phase
In order to make the commissioning phase easier and to avoid to produce interference if the
frequency is not yet properly set, the status of all the transmitters out of the factory is forced to
switched off (default value).
When the commissioning phase is completed, by means of ECT, it is possible to switchon each
transmitter.
The status of each transmitter (switched on or off) is stored in the EC Data Base and in EEPROM
of the RT. Then in case of substitution of the RT, the new RT will be automatically configured with the
Transmitter status stored in the EC Data Base. This configuration does not take place in case of
absence of the SYSCO and the RT is switched on or off, according to the related transmitter status
stored in the RT EEPROM.
For further information and operative procedures about TX mute function, please refer to the CT
OPERATORS HANDBOOK (squelch management).
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 319 / 522
46.5.5 Not Intrusive BER measurements

This feature provides a radio side BER evaluation by means of B1 mismatch computation externally to

the radio switching section, without any degradation on the main signal.

A hop BER measurement is provided on the selected channels and on onesecond basis. This
measurement is activated and deactivated explicitly by the operator. When the measurement is activated
a temporal window is opened during which the number of violations are computed in order to define the
BER.
The temporal duration of this window is not definable a priori, it should be closed when the number of
violations detected from the opening of the temporal window, are sufficient to determine the BER. When
this number of violations is reached, the BER can be calculated. The parameters that the NE has to provide
on request, when the current temporal window is opened, are:
the duration of the current measure period

the number of violations detected till the moment of the reading
A new method has been implemented to support this function. A single time interval is managed, opened
and closed by the operator.
BER is evaluated in this interval using as a reference period the time between the opening of the
measurements and the request for reporting.
Actions supported via ECTUSM

Measurement Start (Open the time interval)
Readout of the data (can be repeated until the interval is closed)
Measurements Stop (Close the time interval).
Data provided from the Equipment at the request

No. of Violations in B1 since the opening of the time interval
BER evaluated in the same period
Elapsed time between opening of the measurement and request of readout. Time when
measurements is not possible are not accounted for
For further information and operative procedures about not intrusive BER measurements, please refer to
the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
46.5.6 J0 Section Trace management
This feature provides the ability to setup the section trace handling on the STM1 interface at Regenerator
layer. The J0 byte of the RSOH is used, according to the standard 16 bytes multiframe format defined
in the G.707 recommendation. The equipment supports setup, validation and monitoring of the section
trace identifiers under control of the CT/OS systems interfaces.
The Section trace monitoring can be enabled/disabled by operator.
A single byte format is optionally supported.
For further information and operative procedures about J0 Section Trace management, please refer to
the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
MAINTENANCE
320 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
46.5.7 Performance Monitoring
The Performance Monitoring is responsible for quality events counting and reporting.
This paragraph concerns the monitoring of the common functional blocks supported by the LHR/LHRC
NE. For the specific radio blocks: RSPI and RPS, refer to the next para.46.5.8.
LHR/LHRC NE supports only the performance monitoring process with the maintenance purpose:
unidirectional performance monitoring of RS
associated collection periods are 15 minutes and 24 hours.
For each channel both line and radio side performance monitoring are supported in the current release
(in case of N+1 configuration the monitoring of the RRA spare channel is possible only if extra traffic is
supported).
Types of counters:
Errored Second (ES)
Severely Errored Second (SES)
Background Block Error (BBE)
Unavailable Second (UAS)
Out of Frame Second (OFS)
For further information and operative procedures about Performance Monitoring, please refer to the CT
OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
46.5.8 Radio Performance Monitoring
The radio specific performance monitoring defines new radio specific performance primitives, events and
parameters with associated requirements for data collection, threshold and history treatment. It covers the
following items:
the performance monitoring of the RSPI functional block;
the performance monitoring of the RPS functional block;
the monitoring of the RPS criteria; it is used as an estimation of the radio hop quality monitoring.
Performance monitoring of the RSPI functional block

Performance monitoring of the RSPI functional block is not supported by the current release.
Performance monitoring of the RPS functional block

Performance monitoring of the RPS functional block is not supported by the current release.
Monitoring of the RPS criteria

The hop section performance monitoring gives the quality of service of the radio section inside the
protection one. Due to the RPS location in the second generation radio NEs, it is not possible to
perform the monitoring of the hop section by means of standard methodologies. In order to provide
the possibility to compare the performance of the hop section of different radio channels, a RPS
Criteria Monitoring is provided.
This monitoring is based on the following primitives:
Early Warning
Low BER
High BER
Signal Fail, it is generated by the RSPI functional block alarms (rx side) and by the fail of the
cards that handle the signal inside the radio section (i.e. RX, DEM).
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 321 / 522
The one second performance events are the following (listed with increasing priority):
Early Warning Second (EWS)

This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of EW.

Low BER Second (LBERS)

This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of LBER.
High BER Second (HBERS)
This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of HBER.
Signal Fail Second (SFS)
This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of SF.
A second is declared EWS, LBERS, HBERS or SFS according to the occurrence of the primitive with
higher priority (i.e. in contemporary presence in one second of EW, LBER, HBER, SF occurrences
only a SFS event is declared).
Monitoring of the RPS criteria is supported by the current release.
N.B. The RPS criteria can be monitored also in the N+0 configuration, even if in this
configuration, the hop and link (outside the protection) sections are coincident.
Performance data collection and history treatment

For each radio specific type of performance monitoring the performance data collection and history
management are performed according to the ITUT Recc. G.784. One current register is required
for 15 minutes and one for 24 hours. At least 16 recent registers are required for 15 minutes and one
for 24 hours.
For further information and operative procedures about Radio Performance Monitoring, please refer to the
CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
46.5.9 Event Log
The generic events occurred and discriminated by the LHR/LHRC NE are stored in one or more Event Log
files.
The ELM (Event Log Manager) application embedded in the 9600LSY SWP allows the Operator to read
such log files, in order to have historical data that can be useful to troubleshoot the equipment or the radio
link or the SDH / PDH network, in case of multiple alarm conditions or intermittent alarms.
The event log file examination is quite complex; it is reserved to AlcatelLucent skilled
personnel as a debug tool (only using filters on the meaningless events, it is possible to
understand the meaning of the stored data).
For further information and operative procedures about Event Log, please refer to the CT OPERATORS
HANDBOOK
46.5.10 Additional information on other handbooks
Lineup Guide (REF.[C] or [D] on page 499) gives summary instructions on how to use many of the
functions explained before, in order to carry out equipment functional checks as a whole, in particular
as far as checks on radio hop are concerned.
Interference investigation procedure (REF.[N] on page 503) describes in detail how to test the
radio hop in order to find possible interferences.
MAINTENANCE
322 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
46.6 Troubleshooting on the radio link
Aim of this procedure is to guide the Operator through a sequence of tests which can help him to identify
the local or remote malfunctioning unit on the stations making up the radio link.
This procedure is based on errors detected by the Rx Error Counter, that can be investigated through the
use of Radio Performance Monitoring, or by the use of a set of Pattern Generator / Error Detector
suitably connected on the links ends.
This procedure, with its sequence of test and operations, does not take into account any possible traffic
interruption in order to identify the unit to be replaced, so is left to the Operator to analyze and foreseen
any possible traffic impact generated by the performed tests.
Errors are repeatedly detected by the Rx Error Counter
Put the Rx Channel under test in HSW LOCK OUT condition
Put the Far Channel under test in PTx Man. condition,

set PTx power on the corresponding Tx to Min. level
NO Have errors disappeared? YES
Set the Far PTx power on the Errors are due to the remote transmitter distortion,
Tx at nominal level REPLACE IT
1 Locally enable the RST LINE loop RRA access test Errors are due to the adjacent freq.
remote transmitter distortion, or
2 Locally enable the RSPI INT loop RRA board test propagation interference.
REPLACE the adjacent RTx or
3 Perform an HW IF ModDem loop ModDem test
investigate on propagation
interference
Errors are due to: 1 Local RRA Tx access Errors are due to: 1 Rem. RRA Tx access
TO BE REPLACED 2 Local RRA Tx board TO BE REPLACED 2 Rem. RRA Tx board
3 Local Mod Tx board 3 Rem. Mod Tx board
Perform an HSW protection on the path under test
Errors are due to: Remote Main Rx or its LO Errors are due to: Local Main Rx or its LO
REPLACE THE REMOTE TRANSCEIVER REPLACE THE LOCAL TRANSCEIVER
Fig. 163. Troubleshooting on the radio link
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 323 / 522
324 / 522

MAINTENANCE
47 UNIT REPLACEMENT
47.1 Introduction
maintenance.
This chapter describes the replacement procedures for all the units of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR
configuration, and and is organized as follows:
Warnings on page 326, including:

EMC norms
Safety rules
Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Summary information on FPGA upgrade on page 327
Unit replacement procedures , on page 328
The handbook parts that should be read or must be known before starting this chapter are:
chapter 23 on page 203 System Description
chapter 31 on page 249 System configurations, in particular the paragraph corresponding

to the actual system configuration
chapter 43 on page 295 Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts
chapter 44 on page 301 First Level Maintenance
chapter 46 on page 309 Troubleshooting
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 325 / 522
47.2 Warnings

47.2.1 EMC norms

ATTENTION EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
61.4.3 ON PAGE 462
47.2.2 Safety rules
The Safety Rules stated in para.61.3 on page 450 thru 459 describe the operations and/or precautions
to observe to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment
safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
General
Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical

connections while the equipment is inservice.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
Electrical safety
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by

48 V dc.

terminals.
Optical safety
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.61.3.4.2 on page 454.
47.2.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Please refer to point v from page 9
MAINTENANCE
326 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
47.3 Summary information on FPGA upgrade
Please refer to the chapter FPGA UPGRADE in section Installation of C.T. Operators Handbook for the
description of this feature and its operative instructions by Craft Terminal.

Some of these descriptions and instructions are repeated here for reader convenience.
Tab. 65. herebelow points out the units involved.
Tab. 65. FPGA list

FPGA HOUSED ON UNIT
DAIANA SYSCO
ENTONI SMA subunit of SERVICE
SCIARON RRASBY
NUNZIA RRACHANNEL
SANDRA MODEM 128QAM
WILLY MODEM 32/64QAM
a) Activation of FPGA automatic upgrade condition

The FPGA automatic upgrade condition set up is performed through the following commands by
Craft Terminal:
select LHRC subrack
select SYSCO board
execute Equipment Reset
b) The execution of the upgrade procedure (FPGA download in progress) is pointed out by the following
indications:
the SEP (*) indication is displayed on ECT
(*) SEP stands for Sfwr Environment Problem, that in this case means Firmware download
in progress.
the greenflashing of the bicolor led (6) on SYSCO board (see Fig. 155. on page 303)
that will last until the procedure ends.
The procedure can last from few minutes (no FPGA upgraded) to some hours (all FPGAs upgraded
in a LHR fully equipped system).
N.B. At the end of upgrading process (signalled by turning off of SEP on ECT, and by end of
greenflashing of the bicolor led on SYSCO board), the RC reset must be obligatorily
carried out (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 110).
c) Upgrade command survival

After the FPGA upgrade procedure launch, the command remains always active, even after the
upgrade procedure has been completed. It means that, if you insert into the system one of the boards
listed in Tab. 65. above, it is automatically subject to the FPGA upgrade process.
Special conditions:
Upgrade command is lost in the following cases:
system power off/on
RC reset
SYSCO board extraction/insertion
Upgrade command survives in the following cases:
EC reset
NE restart
d) FPGA version check (available starting with SWP 2.0)

1 ) execute Diagnosis Log Browsing Software Trace Log
2 ) confirm to see the produced log
3 ) compare logged versions with those stated in the chapter V.xxx specific information of the
Operators Handbook.
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 327 / 522
47.4 Unit replacement procedures

In general, a unit can be replaced:

a) for spare part stock management:
to check periodically the functionality of spare parts present in the spare part stock
b) or, during corrective maintenance:
to replace a faulty (or suspected faulty) unit with the correspondent spare part
to restore the suspected faulty unit (after its successful replacement with a spare unit during
corrective maintenance) to verify that it is really faulty.
general flowchart.
Tab. 66. herebelow lists the specific procedures, according to the unit type. These procedures are
particularly detailed in order to:
avoid injuries to personnel (electric and optical safety)
avoid damages to the equipment and the spare parts
avoid, as far as possible, traffic interruptions or degrade.
Tab. 66. Assembly / unit replacement procedures
UNIT TYPE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ON PAGE
PSU 329
PSF 331
SYSCO 333
FLASH CARD 335
SERVICE 336
RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY 338
OPTICAL MODULE 341
MODEM 343
FAN UNIT 346
TRANSCEIVER 349
Standard procedures for Optical Modules to turn the laser OFF and ON , on page 352
MAINTENANCE
328 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
47.4.1 PSU replacement procedure
For PSU view, see Fig. 49. on page 107.

1) get the spare PSU board from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the
unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components.
ATTENTION

do not extract the spare unit from its antistatic envelope, until you have worn the antistatic
protection device kit
2) turn off (position O) the switch on the PSU unit front panel:
of the spare PSU unit
and of the PSU unit to be replaced
ATTENTION

For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels
connectors.
3) extract the faulty PSU unit as follows:
wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 1. on page 9) and connect its termination
to a grounded structure
ATTENTION

this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
turn off the screws (one present into the extraction/insertion lever of the board, the other
at bottom of the board)
ATTENTION

this avoids the breakage of lever
operate the lever to extract the board
4) insert the spare PSU unit
ATTENTION

Please read carefully pages 1011 for the right operations and forbidden operations to carry
out in order to insert the unit
5) now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 329 / 522
6) if not yet done, turn on the screws fixing the board to the rack

ATTENTION


7) turn on (position I ) the switch on the new PSU unit front panel
8) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units)
N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU
is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
9) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
ATTENTION

To connect the CT cable (at SYSCOs F interface and/or PC side):
verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch
off it)
connect suitable cable to SYSCOs F interface and PC side
10 ) fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the
AlcatelLucent authorized repair center (see para.48.2 on page 353)
MAINTENANCE
330 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
47.4.2 PSF replacement procedure
For PSF view, see Fig. 49. on page 107.

1) get the spare PSF board from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the
unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components.
ATTENTION

2) switch off the TRUs circuit breaker (1) that gives power supply to the cable connected to the
PSF unit to be replaced (3A or 3B in Fig. 30. on page 85 , and Tab. 14. on page 94 )
3) disconnect the power supply cable from the PSF front connector
SAFETY RULES
If operation indicated in previous point 2 ) has not been carried out, a TNV2
(battery) voltage is present on the interface connector (cable side); do not touch
the pins when unplugged.
terminals.
4) extract the faulty PSF unit as follows:

wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 1. on page 9 ) and connect its termination
ATTENTION

turn off the screws (one present into the extraction/insertion lever of the board, the other
at bottom of the board)
ATTENTION

this avoids the breakage of lever
operate the lever to extract the board
5) insert the spare PSF unit
ATTENTION

MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 331 / 522

7) if not yet done, turn on the screws fixing the board to the rack

ATTENTION


8) connect the power supply cable to the PSF front connector
SAFETY RULES
If operation indicated in previous step 2 ) on page 331 has not been carried out,
a TNV2 (battery) voltage is present on the interface connector (cable side); do
not touch the pins when unplugged.
terminals.
9) switch on the circuit breaker 3A or 3B [switched off in step 2 ) on page 331] giving power supply
to the cable connected to the new PSF unit
10 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
ATTENTION

off it)
MAINTENANCE
332 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
47.4.3 SYSCO replacement procedure
For SYSCO views, see Fig. 50. and Fig. 51. on page 108.
1) get the spare SYSCO board from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of
the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components.
N.B. The P/Ns matching of the ESCON subunit is not important.
ATTENTION

2) if the CT is connected to the SYSCOs F interface:

ATTENTION

perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications
close all other running applications, if any
switch off the PC
3) disconnect all cables from the faulty unit front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are
present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
4) extract the faulty SYSCO unit as follows:
ATTENTION

turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION

this avoids the breakage of levers
operate the levers to extract the board
5) extract the FLASH CARD from faulty SYSCO (see Fig. 50. on page 108)
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 333 / 522
6) spare SYSCO unit hardware presetting:

accessing the handbook Hardware setting documentation (REF.[M] on page 503), get

the relevant documents

get the spare unit SYSCO and, using the above said documents to locate switches:
a) set the dipswitches on ESCON subunit exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION

These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position. If unproperly set, these
dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the software
herein contained (programs and system configuration data)
b) set the dipswitches on SYSCO main board exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION

some of these dipswitches (that define the system configuration), if unproperly set,
will cause system malfunction even though hardware is not faulty. Care must also be
taken to switch defining service battery voltage
7) reinsert the FLASH CARD into the spare unit SYSCO (in case of doubts see Fig. 51. on page
108)
8) insert the spare SYSCO board in the system
ATTENTION

10 ) if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION


11 ) reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit
extraction.
MAINTENANCE
334 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
12 ) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units)
After the unit insertion, you should wait about 10 minutes for the completion of software
download from FLASH CARD toward the new boards SC, RC and SU (N.B.); this phase is
notified by bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 52. on page 109). At the end, all
red LEDs on SYSCO unit should be off.
N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SC,
RC and SU, is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
13 ) FPGA automatic upgrade condition setting & SYSCOs FPGA upgrade
Please refer to para.47.3 on page 327 for summary and detailed information on this feature.
After the bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 52. on page 109) ends, you
must launch the FPGA automatic upgrade condition to upgrade the SYSCOs FPGA
as explained in point a ) on page 327 (automatic FPGA upgrade condition, even if set
previously, is always lost every time SYSCO is extracted/inserted).
14 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection
15 ) connect Craft Terminal and check the system status by its Alarm application.
ATTENTION

off it)
47.4.4 FLASH CARD replacement procedure
For views, see Fig. 50. and Fig. 51. on page 108.
The need for this replacement is described in para.46.4.2 on page 315.
The FLASH CARD contains all system software.
Its replacement with an empty spare FLASH CARD (see para.43.3.4 on page 299) must be done
following the specific instructions (NE software download via SIBDL) given, according to the SWP
used, in the:
9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 (REF.[O] on page 504 )

or:
9600LSY Rel.2 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.x from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 504 )
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 335 / 522
47.4.5 SERVICE replacement procedure

For SERVICE views, see Fig. 55. and Fig. 56. on pages 113114.

present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B. to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor [see (2) in Fig. 150. on page 296]
2) extract the faulty SERVICE unit as follows:
ATTENTION

ATTENTION

3) get the spare SERVICE unit from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal (or
compatible with) to that of the board to be replaced:
for compatible P/Ns, see NBj on page 187
see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions; do not touch the electronic components.
If the SERVICE to be replaced houses the ADDITIONAL VOICE babyboard, verify that the
spare part does really have the same babyboard (see Tab. 60. on page 298).
4) spare SERVICE unit hardware setting:
locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate documents
set these switches on the spare part exactly as they are set on the unit to be replaced
5) insert the spare SERVICE board in the system
ATTENTION

MAINTENANCE
336 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
7) if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION


8) reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit
extraction.
9) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units)
download from FLASH CARD toward the new boards SU (N.B.); this phase is notified by
SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 52. on page 109).
10 ) spare FPGA upgrade
There are two cases:
a ) you have replaced a SERVICE P/N 3DB02155AA** (old type) with a spare SERVICE
having the same P/N. In this case the spare FPGA upgrade can be done.
Please refer to para.47.3 on page 327 for summary and detailed information on this
feature.
After the SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 52. on page 109)
ends, there are two cases:
the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is active: in this case you have nothing to do,
because the spare FPGA, if necessary, has already been carried out
the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is not active: in this case you must launch
the FPGA automatic upgrade condition to upgrade the spares FPGA , as
explained in point a ) on page 327
b ) you have used, as spare, the SERVICE P/N 3DB02155BA** (new type) : the highest
9600LSY SWP versions 2.x available at issue date of this handbook (V2.0.6 and V2.1.1)
do not contain the proper SW to be downloaded toward SERVICEs SMA FPGA, so that
the spare FPGA upgrade cannot be done. This is just an informative note, not a warning
requiring special procedures.
ATTENTION

off it)
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 337 / 522
47.4.6 RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY replacement procedure

For RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY views, see Fig. 57. , Fig. 58. and Fig. 59. on pages

115117.

1) get the spare RRACHANNEL or RRASTANDBY from the spare part stock verifying that its
P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions); do
not touch the electronic components.
ATTENTION

2) remove protection cap, if present, from the faulty board front plate
3) disconnect all cables from the faulty board front plate or from the optical module, if equipped.
Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be
able to reconnect them correctly;
SAFETY RULES IN CASE OF OPTICAL MODULES
Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by the fiber

optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific
procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units
containing laser devices or cables transporting optical signals, described in the
relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents
and the general rules pointed out in para.61.3.4.2 on page 454.
Before to disconnect optical fibers , turn off laser as explained in
para.47.4.11.1 on page 352.
4) extract the faulty RRA unit as follows:
ATTENTION

ATTENTION

MAINTENANCE
338 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
5) if the unit is equipped with Optical module to be recovered and mounted on the spare part,
extract it from the faulty RRA board and mount it on the spare RRA board as follows:
a) turn off the two screws fixing the module to the faulty RRA board: these screws are the
same depicted for the module drawer in Fig. 58. on page 116 (do not unscrew the other
two screws of the module)
b) extract the optical module from the faulty RRA board using the special extractor [see (1)
in Fig. 150. on page 296]
c) dismount the module drawer, if present, from the spare RRA board using the same special
extractor
d) insert the optical module (you have taken from the faulty RRA board) into the spare RRA
board
e) turn on the two screws to fix the module onto the spare RRA board
ATTENTION


6) insert the spare RRA board in the system
ATTENTION

ATTENTION


MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 339 / 522
extraction.

SAFETY RULES IN CASE OF OPTICAL MODULES

Before to connect optical fibers , verify that the laser is turned off
as explained in para.47.4.11.2 on page 352.
10 ) in case of OPTICAL MODULE, turn ON the Laser and enable ALS as explained in
para.47.4.11.3 on page 352.
download from FLASH CARD toward the new boards SU (N.B.); this phase is notified by
SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 52. on page 109).
After the SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 52. on page 109) ends,
there are two cases:
the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is not active: in this case you must launch the
FPGA automatic upgrade condition to upgrade the spares FPGA , as explained in
point a ) on page 327
13 ) mount the protection cap, if was present, on the front plate
ATTENTION

off it)
MAINTENANCE
340 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
47.4.7 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure
For OPTICAL MODULE views see Fig. 57. on page 115 and:
for new type (LC) see Fig. 58. on page 116

for older types (SC/PC and FC/PC) see Fig. 228. on page 493
Notes:
a) in order to replace an Optical module without replacing the RRA unit housing it, it is not
necessary to extract the RRA unit from the shelf.
b) you can replace an old type (SC/PC or FC/PC) with the new type (LC).
In this case, to have interworking between the old and new Optical Interfaces, without
remaking equipment cabling, you should have the suitable adapter cable available,
described in para.18.2.6 on page 118
1) get the spare module from the spare part stock (see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions);
do not touch the electronic components.
ATTENTION

2) remove protection cap, if present, from the RRAs front plate

3) disconnect cables from the module. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the
cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly

Before to disconnect optical fibers , turn off laser as explained in
para.47.4.11.1 on page 352.
4) extract the faulty optical module from the RRA board in the following way:
ATTENTION

turn off the two screws fixing the module to the faulty RRA board: see Fig. 58. on page
116 [for new type (LC)] or Fig. 228. on page 493 [for old types (SC/PC and FC/PC)];
do not unscrew the other two screws of the module
extract the faulty module, using the the special extractor [see (1) in Fig. 150. on page 296]
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 341 / 522
5) insert he spare module into RRA slot

ATTENTION

out in order to insert the unit (in this case there are no levers)
6) if not yet done, fix the module to RRA turning on the two screws
ATTENTION

The screw tightening torque for fixing the modules to the unit must be:

7) reconnect cables to the module
N.B. in case you have replaced an older type (SC/PC or FC/PC) with the new type (LC),
use the suitable adapter cable (see para.18.2.6 on page 118 )

Before to connect optical fibers , verify that the laser is turned off
as explained in para.47.4.11.2 on page 352.
8) mount the protection cap, if was present, on the front plate
9) turn ON the Laser and enable ALS as explained in para.47.4.11.3 on page 352
ATTENTION

off it)
MAINTENANCE
342 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
47.4.8 MODEM replacement procedure
For MODEM views, see Fig. 62. , Fig. 63. and Fig. 64. on pages 119121.
1) turn off (position O ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 49. on page 107) of the
PSU corresponding to the MODEM unit to be replaced, i.e.:
PSU0 for MD0
PSU1 for MD1
....
PSU9 for MD9
according to following Fig. 164.
ATTENTION

The successive insertion of the spare MODEM must be done without voltage at its connector
on the backplane. Only the powering on of the MODEM already pluggedin guarantees the
correct startup powering timing. If you insert the MODEM with its PSU switched on, you run
the risk of having subsequent indeterminate (and in some case unrecoverable) unit states.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
M M M M M
Y E R R R R R R D R D R D R D R D
D D D D D
S R A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
0 1 2 3 4
C V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Fig. 164. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement
2) remove protection cap, if present, from the faulty board front plate
3) disconnect all cables from the faulty board front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels
are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 343 / 522
4) extract the faulty MODEM unit as follows:



ATTENTION

ATTENTION

5) get the spare MODEM unit from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the
board to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components.
If the MODEM to be replaced houses one or more CANCCOMB babyboards, verify that the
spare part does really have the same babyboards as far as quantity and P/Ns (see Tab. 60. on
page 298).
6) spare MODEM board hardware setting:
locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate documents
set these switches on the spare part exactly as they are set on the unit to be replaced
7) insert the spare MODEM board in the system
ATTENTION

ATTENTION


MAINTENANCE
344 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
10 ) reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit
extraction.

12 ) mount the protection cap, if was present, on the front plate
13 ) turn on (position I ) the switch on the PSU unit previously switched off
ATTENTION

off it)
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 345 / 522
47.4.9 FAN UNIT replacement procedure

[1] Considerations about MINOR and MAJOR alarms

Whenever the alarm regarding Fans Assembled logical Unit arises, you should be aware of the
following:
the alarm can be:
MINOR for the failure of one fan only of the FANS SHELF unit;
MAJOR for the failure of more than one fan of the FANS SHELF unit;
this condition should be considered in conjunction with:
the rackhousingroom effective environmental temperature, taking into consideration

that the loss of all fans can produce an overtemperature of about 20 0C inside the rack;
and the temperature limits specified in chapter Environmental characteristics of the

document enclosed at the end of this manual (REF.[C] in Tab. 91. on page 521):
because an excessive internal temperature could decrease the equipment overall MTBF.
In conclusion:
the Fans Assembled logical Unit MINOR alarm usually does not require an immediate
intervention; nevertheless, in case of alarm, it is suggested to carry out the unit replacement
without waiting a very long time.
the Fans Assembled logical Unit MAJOR alarm requires an immediate intervention.
[2] Choice of the replacement procedure
There are three cases:
the FAN UNIT to replace and the spare FAN UNIT are both the newer type (see para.18.3 on
page 122). In this case, proceed as specified in point [3] on page 347.
the FAN unit to replace is the older type (FANS SUBRACK + plugin FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT,
see para.63.4 on page 487), and you have still a FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT spare part in your
spare part stock. In this case, proceed as specified in para.63.4.4 on page 490;
the FAN unit to replace is the older type (FANS SUBRACK + plugins FANS ASSEMBLED
UNIT, see para.63.4 on page 487), and you have not a FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT spare part
in your spare part stock, but the newer type (see para.18.3 on page 122). In this case, proceed
as specified in point [4] on page 348;
MAINTENANCE
346 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
[3] Replacement procedure of a new FAN UNIT with a spare new FAN UNIT
See Fig. 65. on page 122:

1) get the spare FAN UNIT from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the
unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions)
2) set the DIPSWITCHES I1 and I2 of the spare FAN UNIT exactly as they are set on the unit to
be replaced [in case of doubts, refer to point c ) on page 123]
3) switch off the TRUs circuit breakers (2) that gives power supply to the cables connected to the
FAN UNIT to be replaced: with reference to Fig. 30. on page 85 , and Tab. 14. and Tab. 15.
on page 94 :
5A and 5B in case of FAN UNIT for LHR
6A and 6B in case of FAN UNIT for ADM
4) before disconnecting cables from the front plate of the FAN UNIT to be replaced, if no labels
are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly
5) disconnect the power supply cables from connectors M1 and M4 of FAN UNIT to be replaced
SAFETY RULES
If operation indicated in step 3 ) above has not been carried out, a TNV2
terminals.
6) loosen the four screws (A) fixing the FAN UNIT (to be replaced) to the rack
WARNING: the operation of following step 7 ) causes the systems can bus not terminated status,
that is a potential source of system malfunctioning; for this reason:
the operations of following steps 7 ) to 10 ) must last as short as possible
ignore any alarm that could arise between steps 7 ) to 10 )
7) disconnect the signal cables from connectors M2 and M3 of FAN UNIT to be replaced
8) remove the faulty FAN UNIT from the rack
9) insert and fix into the rack [ by the four screws (A) ] the FAN UNIT spare part
10 ) connect the signal cables to connectors M2 and M3 of the new FAN UNIT
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 347 / 522
11 ) connect the power supply cables to connectors M1 and M4 of the new FAN UNIT

SAFETY RULES

If operation indicated in step 3 ) on page 347 has not been carried out, a TNV2
terminals.
12 ) switch on the circuit breakers [switched off in step 3 ) on page 347] giving power supply to the
cables connected to the new FAN UNIT
ATTENTION

off it)
[4] Replacement procedure of an old FANS SUBRACK with a spare new FAN UNIT
1) get the spare FAN UNIT from the spare part stock (see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions)
2) set the DIPSWITCHES I1 and I2 of the spare FAN UNIT exactly as they are set on the unit to
be replaced [in case of doubts, refer to point c ) on page 123]
WARNING: the position 0 of DIPSWITCH I2 of the new FAN UNIT is different from that
of the old FANS SUBRACK (compare Fig. 65. on page 122 with Fig. 225. on
page 489).
3) making reference to Fig. 224. and Fig. 225. on pages 488489, remove completely the faulty
FANS SUBRACK together with its FANS ASSEMBLED plugin units from the rack, following
instructions and cautions stated in steps 3 ) to 8 ) on page 347
4) making reference to Fig. 65. on page 122, insert, fix into the rack and connect the FAN UNIT
spare part, following instructions and cautions stated in steps 9 ) to 14 ) on pages 347348.
MAINTENANCE
348 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
47.4.10 Transceiver replacement procedure
In case of LHRHPA system, do not use this procedure, but that described
in para.62.6.6.3 on page 483 (before, read ADDITIONAL SAFETY RULES

on page 482)
N.B. This procedure can be followed if a spare Transceiver is available, with the same frequency plan
specialization and configured internally exactly as the Transceiver unit to be replaced.
1) get the spare from the spare part stock (see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions) verifying:
that its frequency plan specialization is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (compare
the specific labels described in para.19.2, point [1] on page 128)
in case you replace a 2G Transceiver with a spare 2G Transceiver:
that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced
that its assembly type (without / with Frequency Reuse, without / with Space
Diversity) is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see types a b c d in
in case you replace a 2GR Transceiver with a spare 2GR Transceiver:
that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced
in case you replace a 2G Transceiver with a spare 2GR Transceiver, or viceversa:
that their P/Ns are compatible :
for general information refer to Tab. 19. on page 129
for the actual compatible P/Ns, refer to the document (from ED.02) 9600LSY
Rel.1 & 2 Transceiver Reference Manual enclosed to this handbook
(REF.[D] on page 521 of this manual)
ATTENTION

2) turn OFF the power ON/OFF switch on the TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in
Fig. 72. on page 133):
of the spare TRANSCEIVER unit

and of the TRANSCEIVER unit to be replaced
ATTENTION

For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels
connectors.
present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 349 / 522
4) to extract the faulty board:



ATTENTION

ATTENTION

5) spare unit check and hardware presetting:
verify the correspondence between the spare unit with that to be replaced as follows:
a) if not yet done, wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 1. on page 9) and connect
its termination to a grounded structure
ATTENTION

b) put both Transceivers on a work bench
c) in case of:
2GR transceiver, access the dipswitch banks as shown in Fig. 73. on page 136
2G transceiver, access the dipswitch banks as shown in Fig. 74. on page 136
(store tidily cover and screws for successive mounting)
d) verify that all dipswitches of spare unit are set as those of the replaced unit (refer to point
[3] on page 137 ); if different, modify settings of spare unit
e) in case of 2G transceiver(s), restore its/their COVERPLATE
ATTENTION

The screw tightening torque for fixing the coverplate to the unit must be:

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage.
MAINTENANCE
350 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
6) insert the spare board in the system
ATTENTION

Please read carefully pages 10 11 for the right operations and forbidden operations to
carry out in order to insert the unit
ATTENTION


extraction.
10 ) turn ON the power ON/OFF switch of the new TRANSCEIVER unit (pos. (I1) in Fig. 72. on page
133 )
ATTENTION

off it)
Usually, a 15 minutes warmup time is necessary for the transceiver to operate at
nominal characteristics, so that carry out final check at least 15 minutes after its
switching on
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 351 / 522
47.4.11 Standard procedures for Optical Modules to turn the laser OFF and ON

The triangle indicates presence of laser radiation.

When having to disconnect or connect the Optical Fiber, follow the procedures stated below to avoid laser
radiation. Such procedures are done by Craft Terminal commands. For CT screens and details, please
refer to the CT Operators handbook.
47.4.11.1 Procedure to carry out before to disconnect optical fibers
1) Turn OFF the Laser as follows:

by CT Select the board and click twice
Select the port
Select the module
Select the SPI block
Select port Physical media ALS Management
Set ALS function Laser Forced OFF and click on apply
2) Check if the Laser is OFF

by CT, check in the message area port view for the message ALS current state In Test.
3) now, you can disconnect optical fibers safely
47.4.11.2 Procedure to carry out before to connect optical fibers
4) Check if the Laser is OFF as follows:

by CT, check in the message area port view for the message ALS current state In Test.
5) now, you can connect optical fibers safely
47.4.11.3 Procedure to carry out after having connected optical fibers
6) Turn ON the Laser as follows:

Select the port
Select the module
Set ALS function Laser forced ON and click on apply
7) Check the Laser status as follows:

by CT, check in the message area view port for the message ALS current state inactive.
8) Enable ALS as follows:

Select the port
Select the module
Set ALS function ALS Enabled and click on apply
9) Check ALS status as follows:

by CT, check in the message area view port for the message ALS current state OFF.
MAINTENANCE
352 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
48 FAULTY UNIT REPAIR AND REPAIR FORM
48.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center
Faulty unit repair must be done by authorized repair centers only.
According to the policy described in para.43.3.1 on page 298, the units with babyboards (see
Tab. 60. on page 298), transceiver included, must be sent back to the repair center together with their
babyboards, without dismounting them from the assembly.
48.2 Repair Form filling
To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 165. on
page 354.
The repair form must be filledin with as much data as possible and returned to AlcatelLucent together
with the faulty unit.
MAINTENANCE
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 353 / 522
REPAIR FORM

Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to AlcatelLucent

CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT PRODUCT RELEASE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK SUBRACK SLOT

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE REASON FOR REPAIR PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION / CLEAR FAULT DROP IN PERFORMANCE INTERNAL

TURN ON
LIGHTNING
OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE TEMPERATURE FAULT OTHER
DATE NAME OF SENDER

FAULT STILL PRESENT
AFTER REPAIR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING FAULTS DETECTED

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
NO FAULTS FOUND UPGRADE SOLDERING / COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT

WIRING
A I C FL P
STANDARD REPAIRING NOT REPAIRABLE MECHANICAL PRINTED DIRT

(REJECTED) CIRCUIT BOARD
BD M V1 V1 V2
SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT CORROSION OTHER
I SX V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE REPAIRING NUMBER REPAIRING CENTRE NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR
Fig. 165. Repair form
a) END OF SECTION
MAINTENANCE
354 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
This section provides the secondlevel description of 9600LSY/LHR equipment.
Chapter 51 Signal management

357
It describes the signal management performed by equipment.
Chapter 52 Hardware description

It gives the detailed hardware description of the system that have not been given in 383
the previous part of this handbook.
Chapter 53 Alarm Management

It gives summary and detailed information regarding the alarm management carried
439
out by the system (Alarms provided by item HW, Remote Alarms, Station Alarms,
Housekeeping).
N.B. For LHR/LPS subsystem, please refer to its specific documentation: see Tab. 81. on page 500
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 355 / 522
356 / 522

51 SIGNAL MANAGEMENT
This chapter describes the signal management performed by 9600LSY equipment.
51.1 STM1 frame structure and WST mapping
STM1 + WST (4 columns) + RFCOH (2 columns)
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU NU

B1 MD MD E1 MD F1 NU NU

D1 MD MD D2 MD D3

ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD

B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9

D10 D11 D12

S1 M1 E2 NU NU
RFCOH channel 1xWST channels

(2 columns) (4 columns)
MD: Media dependent bytes

NU: Bytes reserved for national use
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition
51.2 STM0 frame structure

STM0 + RFCOH (2 columns)
A1
B1
A2
E1
J0
F1

D1
H1
D2
H2
D3
H3

B2 K1 K2

D4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9

D10
S1
D11
M1
D12
E2

1xWST channel RFCOH channels
(4 columns) (2 columns)
The Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MSREI) M1 is rerouted inside the STM0 frame
from byte #(9,6) of STM1 frame.
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 357 / 522
A single WST channel (2.048 Kbit/s) is composed by 36 bytes as described in the following:
Information (1 byte) 1st byte

WST_POH (1 byte)

Information (8 bytes)
P_WST Sg_stn Sg_stp
P_WST Sg_stn Sg_stp
stn 0 Sg_stn Sg_stp

stp Information (7 bits)
36th byte
WST (2.048 Kbit/s)
WST_POH: global SDH plus WST parity (BIP8 operation)

P_WST: dedicated WST parity (BIP2 operation)
Sg_stn: negative stuffing opportunity
Sg_stp: positive stuffing opportunity
Information: 32 bytes
The STM1 signal with 0 WST channel is used only for special application (frequency reuse operation
in 28 channel spacing).
The STM0 signal with 1_WST is derived directly from the STM1 frame with 2_WST channels dividing
by three.
358 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
51.3 RFCOH services structure
The structure of SERVICE CHANNELS inside the RFCOH area is the following:
RFCOH
column xx column yy
DSI 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
ATPC 1.9 1.10 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
D1 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
D2 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 4.1 4.2
D3 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10
E1 5.1 5.2 K0
F1 reserved for service channel
reserved for service channel reserved for service channel
reserved for service channel reserved for service channel
Monitoring channel management:
1.X EWL alarm

2.X EWH alarm
3.X HBER alarm
4.X ATL alarm
[X=1 to 10number of channel]
5.1 FAIL service 0 (ATL_rfcoh1)

5.2 FAIL service 1 (ATL_rfcoh2)
The decision to select the MC signal coming from ch_ 0 or ch_1 is implemented according to the local DEM
alarms (and BIP4 parity code).
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 359 / 522
51.4 SOH management

This block diagram of Fig. 166. herebelow shows some connection for SOH bytes management:

the SOH_BUS (5.1 Mb/s) thats used to transport the RSOH bytes information from all the lineside
channels (0,1,2, , N) towards AUX board.
the RFCOH_BUS (1.152 Mb/s) towards channel_0 and channel_1 (radioside)
Available bytes with standard interface (NxG.703) and with RS385 interface (NxV11).
CH_0
Crossconnection matrix RFCOH
CH_1 CH_0
CH_2
CH_1
CH N BYPASS FUNCTION
E1
F1
ATPC
1.8 DSI
1.9 MC
SOH BUS 2.2 E1
2.3 F1
2.5 D1
2.6 D2
2.8 D3
2.9 CH1 (#)
3.2 CH2 (#)
3.3 CH3 (#)
3.5 CH4 (#)
3.6 CH5 (#)
3.8
3.9
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
Fig. 166. SOH management
360 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
In case of RRA application, the access to SOH bytes is provided by RRA itself; in case of WADM and WLT
application, the access to SOH bytes is concentrated in the baseband part implementing WADM/WLT
functionality.
Each RSOH_byte, if terminated, must be terminated and accessible both at radioside and lineside. The
managed bytes (lineside) are the following:
E1
F1
#1.8, #1.9,
#2.2, #2.3, #2.5, #2.6, #2.8, #2.9,
#3.2. #3.3, #3.5, #3.6, #3.8, #3.9
E1 and F1 are always connected (radioside) to specific RFCOH channels.

The other ones can be connected (radioside) to 5 available interfaces.
In terminaltoterminal application the passthrough mode for each RSOH_byte is provided.
In WADM/WLT terminal application with radio repeater, when a specific service channel must be dropped
in the regenerator, the interested RSOH byte is rerouted in the RFCOH area according with the service
channel columns format (1152 Kbit/s stream):
Column 1 Column 2
DSI MC
ATPC MC
D1 MC
D2 MC
D3 MC
E1 FAIL serv + K0
F1 Channel #3
Channel #1 Channel #4
Channel #2 Channel #5
The selection of byte rerouting is performed by ECT/OS.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 361 / 522
RSOH standard_bytes

passthrough function
RST RFCOH
RSOH termination
E1
F1
USER INTERFACES
D1, D2, D3
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CROSS CONNECTION
MATRIX FOR
SERVICE CHANNELS
ATPC
DSI
MC
RSOH termination
RST RFCOH
RSOH standard_bytes
passthrough function
Fig. 167. Service channels functional block diagram
362 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
The line side SOH bytes can be managed on the ten RST sections available in the maximum system
configuration ( 8+0 or 7+1 ).
SOH bytes handling:

Byte Handling type Access type User interface
E1 terminated Voice channel DTMF or 64 Kbit/s G.703 or V.11
F1 terminated 64 Kbit/s G.703 or V.11
MSU_RSOH terminated 64 Kbit/s G.703 or V.11
N.U._RSOH terminated 64 Kbit/s G.703 or V.11
D1:D3 terminated 192 Kbit/s Internal towards SC
J0 terminated 64 Kbit/s Internal towards SC
MSOH bypassed
Inside the RRA unit the passthrough function of RSOH bytes is provided, in order to transmit
channels coming from ADM line equipment in transparent mode through the radio system.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 363 / 522
51.5 DCCR Management

The DCCR are managed by EC both in lineside and radioside.

The DCCR towards lineside are provided by the connection for all the channelunits, but are managed

by EC only the streams towards CH_0 and CH_1 on radioside, where they are inserted inside the RFCOH
bytes.
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION CH_0
Lineside Radioside
CK+SYNC REF
EPLD
CK+SYNC
DCCR extraction DCCR RSOH LOGIC

lineside extraction insertion CK+SYNC
& mapping in from RFCOH
6.48 Mb BUS radioside
EPLD CK+SYNC
RST SECTION RFCOH SECTION CH_1
RST SECTION RFCOH SECTION CH_9
Fig. 168. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO)
364 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
CK+SYNC
RFCOH SECTION RST SECTION CH_0
Radioside Lineside
EPLD CK+SYNC REF
DCCR demapping
DCCR from 6.48 Mb BUS
DCCR extraction mapping & insertion line side
EPLD
CK+SYNC
Fig. 169. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM)
Notes (see Fig. 170. on page 366):
On RST section the DCCR are inserted/extracted by dedicated pins (192 Kbit/s) on
contradirectional interface.
The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 0, 1, 2 and the DCCR radioside are mapped inside
the first 6.48 Mbit/s DCC frame (link 1).
The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 3, 4, 5, 6 are mapped inside the the second 6.48 Mbit/s
DCC frame (link 2).
The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 7, 8, 9 are mapped inside the the third 6.48 Mbit/s DCC
frame (link 3).
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 365 / 522
RST section 6.48 Mb/s [link 1]
(channels 0)

RST section
(channels 1) 6.48 Mb/s [link 2]
MUX/DEMUX SC
6.48 Mb/s [link 3]

RST section
(channels 9)
RFCOH section
(channel 0)
SWITCH
RFCOH section
(channel 1)
Fig. 170. DCCR management
Tab. 67. DCC Mapping & Interleaving
The DCC frame is composed by 101.25 bytes (6.48 Mbit/s), and takes into account the information from/
to four STM1 channels:
CR CR CR CR DR DR DR DR
D1(#1) D1(#2) D1(#3) D1(#4) D2(#1) D2(#2) D2(#3) D2(#4) x
D3(#1) D3(#2) D3(#3) D3(#4) CM CM CM CM x
DM DM DM DM D4 D4 D4 D4 x
D5 D5 D5 D5 D6 D6 D6 D6 x
D7 D7 D7 D7 D8 D8 D8 D8 x
D9 D9 D9 D9 D10 D10 D10 D10 x
D11 D11 D11 D11 D12 D12 D12 D12 x
CF2 CF2 CF2 CF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 x
F2 F2 F2 F2 CF3 CF3 CF3 CF3 x
DF3 DF3 DF3 DF3 F3 F3 F3 F3 x
x xx x
DR, DM, DF2, DF3: positive stuffing opportunity bytes

D1, D4, F2, F3: negative stuffing opportunity bytes
CR, CM, CF2, CF3: colored stuffing bytes
X: empty bytes
366 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
51.6 ATPC Management
The ATPC functionality is fully described in para.23.5.3.2 on page 220.

Fig. 171. herebelow depicts the internal processing block diagram.
RX1 unit RRA1 unit
RX0 unit RRA0 unit
PRX DETECTION
Rx failure
From AGC VOLTAGE RFCOH EXTRACTION
MICROPROCESSOR
CAN_BUS
EQUIPMENT SERVICE
CONTROLLER UNIT/ATPC
64 Kb/s
TX1 unit
RFCOH INSERTION
TX0 unit
MOD
On/off
Rx failure
MICROPROCESSOR
CAN BUS
EQUIPMENT SERVICE
CONTROLLER UNIT/ATPC
Fig. 171. ATPC management
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 367 / 522
51.7 Sub STM1 framing processing

In case of multiplexing of an AU4 via AUG, the position and the justification of AU4 structure is managed

by octets H1H2H3 type:

H1 H2 H3
NDF 1 0 POINTER Negative justification
because the other part of the AUOH area:
H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3
is filled with octets:
Y = 1001nn11 (where n is a nonspecified value)
U = 11111111
In this sense, we can assume that the only managed transport situation is for an AU4 structure inside
an STM1 signal, and the STM0 design is mapped with 3xVC3 structures (partially filled with the first
container only) into an AU4 unit (European standard).
The demultiplexing operation from an STM1 signal to an STM0 signal can be provided taking one
column for each three columns group, considering that only the first VC3 inside the AU4 structure of
STM1 frame contains the significant payload.
The VC4 POH is maintained in STM0 frame.

The fixed stuffing columns (11, 12) of STM1 frame are removed in STM0 frame.
When the STM1 standard interface is formed by an STM0 signal, the AUOH row is mapped according
to the previous description (H1, H2 and H3 are extracted from the STM0 format), and B2 parity
calculation has to be recomputed with the following criteria:
B2(#1) = B2 coming from STM0 frame
B2(#2) = Y U H3
B2(#3) = Y U H3
368 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Starting from three TUG3 units, it is possible to generate the VC4 structure with the mapping of
3xTUG3, 18 bytes of fixed justification and the VC4 POH as described below:
86 bytes 86 bytes 86 bytes
TUG3 TUG3 TUG3

VC4

261 bytes
VC4 POH

FILLED BYTES
Fig. 172. VC4 generation from 3 TUG3
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 369 / 522
During the multiplexing/demultiplexing of the STM0 signal for the transmission in the radio section of the
first TUG3 tributary, it is necessary to consider the following multiplexing structure, provided in SDH

European hierarchy:

3rd TUG3 3rd TU3: unequipped
2nd TUG3 2nd TU3: unequipped
STM1 AUG AU4 VC4 TUG3 TU3 VC3 C3 = 34.368 Kbit/s
X7
TUG2 TU12 VC12 C12 = 2.048 Kbit/s
So, when we speak of STM0 signal transmission we intend a nonstandard interface, based on a single
TUG3 container (the first) coming from the mapping of an AU4 partially equipped.
The 2nd and 3rd TUG3 are always considered as filled with TU3s unequipped container.
370 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
STM1 multiplexing structure with 3xTUG3 carrying VC3 container inside an AU4 unit
1st TU3 pointer

VC4 POH 1st VC3 POH

H1 H1 H1
H2 H2 H2
H3 H3 H3
H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3
3xVC3 (interleaved)
H1
H2
H3
H1 H2 H3
1st VC3
Where:
Y=10010011
U=11111111
Fixed stuffing bytes
NOTE:
In case of AU4 pointer = 0 (NDF=0110 and SS_bits=10) the default value for AUOH row is:
AUOH = H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3 = 68 93 93 00 FF FF 00 00 00
In case of 3xVC3 mapping structure, the TU3 pointers for the unequipped containers are fixed to:
H1 H2 H3 = 68 00 00 (NDF=0110, SS_bits=10, pointer=0, pointer offset=0)
The STM0 frame is defined as that frame obtained from the STM1 one, by reducing its capacity to one
third of it.
The SOH bytes are divided into triplets, and the first byte is taken while the other two discarded.
The Higher Order container is a VC4/3, carried in an AU4/3.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 371 / 522
For hardware convenience it is defined a new entity: AU4/3 carrying a VC4/3, being them structured as
an one third of an AU4.

The AU4/3 mapping carries VC3, VC2, VC12 by two pointer levels (AU_level and TU_level, cascaded);

moreover, fixed stuff columns in their mapping into AU4/3 are in fixed position with respect to the VC4/3

carrier.
The most important advantage of this solution is the possibility to transmit only the significant part of an
STM1 signal sub equipped on a radio equipment, without any multiplexing/demultiplexing operation or
pointer processing; using the radio network element as a pure regenerator NE.
RST RREI RPI RF RF RPI RREI RST

branching branching
NNI: network node interface

RST: regenerator section termination
RREI: radiorelay equipment interface
RPI: radio physical interface
Fig. 173. Sub STM1 terminal functional block diagram
372 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
STM1 / STM0 frame processing algorithm:
RPS
RSOH MUX B1 WST & services

termination calculation: Insertion on
the calculation is STM1 frame
made over all bytes of
the frame after
scrambling and the
Filling all 0 bytes for result is inserted in Div by 3
columns Nx2 & Nx3 the next frame before RPS
scrambling.
(except A1, A2 and
AUOH row) Services insertion
M1 change position on STM0 frame
B2(#5.1) compensation
B2 compensation
B3 compensation RST section RFCOH section
STM0 / STM1 frame processing algorithm:
RPS
B1 handling: RSOH
WST & services MUX the byte is recovered from insertion
the SDH frame after
extraction on descrambling and is and B1
STM1 frame compared with the calculation
calculation over the
previous elapsed frame
Interleaving of all 0
Services bytes for columns
extraction on Nx2 & Nx3
RPS
STM0 frame Rewriting A1, A2
Rewriting AUOH M1 change position.
(M1 is moved in the original position
[#9.6] and 00 configuration is inserted
in [#9.4] byte)
B2 compensation
B3 compensation
B2 (#1, #3) compensation
RFCOH section RST section
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 373 / 522
51.8 SOH handling in normal operation condition

SOH handling in normal operation condition according to the default hardware configuration:

SOH BYTES TX SIDE RX SIDE NOTE
A1 A2 Refresh Refresh
B1 Refresh Refresh
E1 insert insert
F1 insert insert
D1 D2 D3 insert insert
All the RSOH bytes are managed one by one
J0 insert insert
character or character or
multiframe multiframe
M.S.U. insert insert
NU_RSOH insert insert
MSOH Bypass Bypass All the MSOH bytes are in a fixed bypass
condition without any possibility to be
managed.
This operation is involved in Radio Section Termination area (RST) as in the following block diagram:
TX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
Line side Radio side

RST RPS RFCOH RSPI
RRA RADIO
RX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
374 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
51.9 Alarms detected in RST section
Alarm Consequent action

LOS (loss of signal) MSAIS
LOF (loss of frame) MSAIS
TIM (trace identifier mismatch) MSAIS
OOF (out of frame) OFS count
MSAIS (multiplex section AIS)
MSRDI (multiplex section remote defect indication)
TIM: when J0 byte, extracted from SDH stream received, is different from the data written in
J0_register by microprocessor interface (according to the regenerator section trace
algorithm), Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm is detected and the AIS condition is
activated.
MSRDI: the Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication is used to return an indication to the
transmit end that the received end has detected an incoming section defect or is receiving
MSAIS.
MSRDI is generated by inserting a 110 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
MSAIS: the Multiplex Section AIS indication detect an incoming AIS signal.
MSAIS is generated by inserting a 111 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
N.B. the Out of Frame Second (OFS) is declared when the STM1 frame alignment process is in the
OOF state.
This parameter is used as additional performance parameter.
The proprietary management of K0 channel (Radio Channel Identification) inside the RFCOH section is
the same of J0 in RST section. The detected alarm is the following:
Alarm Consequent action
RCIM (Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch) MSAIS
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 375 / 522
In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the alarms indication
as reported to ECT/OS:

TX_LOS
LOS
LOF TX_FAIL
TIM (JO) MOD_LOS
MOD_FAIL
SPI RST RST RPS RFCOH RSPI
RRA channel MOD + TX
LINESIDE RADIOSIDE
TX FAIL (#) RX_LOS

LOS RX_FAIL
TX DEGRADED (#)
LOF DEM_LOS
TIM (JO)
RCIM (K0) DEM_FAIL
RRA channel RX + DEM
(#) referred to optical interface.
376 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the primitives for the
performance monitoring as reported to ECT/OS.
OOF
EB (B1) TL
RRA channel MOD + TX
LINESIDE RADIOSIDE
PSA RL
EB (B1) PSR OOF FEC
RRA channel RX + DEM
Legend:
EB: Errored Block
OOF: Out of Frame
TL: Transmitted level, is the level of the estimated transmitter power at the transmitter output.
The parameter is represented by two values:
an integer fixed value expressed in [dBm] defining the transmitted power value;
an integer offset value expressed in [dB] representing the variation with respect to the
nominal value.
RL: Received level, is the level of the estimated received power at the input of the receiver. In 2
release both value will be reported. The parameter unit shall be expressed in [dBm] and
represented by the rounded nearest integer.
PSA: Protection Switch Actual, represents any actual switch from a protected (working) channel to
a protecting (standby) channel
PSR: Protection Switch Request, represents any activation of a switch initiation criteria which may
lead to automatic switches from a working channel to a standby channel and viceversa.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 377 / 522
51.10 Regenerator Section trace management

J0 expected K0 expected

(line side) (radio side)
K0 transmitted J0 transmitted
(radio side) (line side)
J0 transmitted J0 expected
(radio side) (radio side)
RST RST RPS RFCOH RFCOH RST RST

RPS
sink source source source sink source
RRA channel (TX side) RRA channel (RX side)
Action to P: Action to P:
J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame) K0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
J0 received value K0 received value
J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
J0 received value
NOTES:
J0 is represented by an integer of 15 digits (multiframe mode9 or one byte (insert character mode).
The default value for J0 is 0000 0001 (unspecified Regenerator Section Trace).
The methodology of J0 management is described in the following para.51.10.1 on page 379.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).

K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
In the system without protection, J0 only is managed.

K0 transmitted and K0 expected are fixed to the default value (K0 = 000000).
In a repeater configuration only K0 management is performed.
378 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
51.10.1 J0 management
The J0 byte located at # (1, 7) byte in an STM1 is allocated to a Regenerator Section Trace. This byte
is used to transmit repetitively a Section Access Point Identifier so that a section receiver can verify its
continued connection to the intended transmitter. Within a national network, or within the domain of a
single operator, this Section Access Point Identifier may use either a single byte (containing the code
0255) or the Access Point Identifier format as defined in clause 3/G.831. At international boundaries, or
at the boundaries between the networks of different operators, the format defined in clause 3/G.831 shall
be used unless otherwise mutually agreed by the operators providing the transport.
A 16byte frame is defined for the transmission of Section Access Point Identifiers where these conform
to the definition contained in clause 3/G.831. The first byte of the string is a frame start marker and includes
the result of a CRC7 calculation over the previous frame. The following 15 bytes are used for the transport
of 15 T.50 characters (international Reference Version) required for the Section Access Point Identifier.
The 16byte frame description is given in Table 4/G.707 reported herebelow:
TABLE 4/G.707
16byte frame for Trail APId
Byte # Value (bit 1, 2, ,8)
1 1 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
2 0 X X X X X X X
3 0 X X X X X X X
: : :
16 0 X X X X X X X
NOTES
1 C1C2C3C4C5C6C7 is the result of the CRC7 calculation over the
previous frame. C1is the MSB.
2 0XXXXXXX represents a T.50 character.
In the case of interworking of equipment implementing the STM identifier functionality (see N.B.) and
equipment employing the Regenerator Section Trace function, the latter shall interpret the pattern
0000001 in J0 as Regenerator Section Trace unspecified. This unspecified Regenerator Section
Trace can also be used if no use of the Regenerator Section Trace is made.
N.B. STM identifier: C1

In earlier versions of the Recommendation, the content of bytes located at S (1, 7, 1) or [1,
6N+1] to S (1, 7, N) or [1, 7N] was defined as a unique identifier indicating the binary value of
the multicolumn, interleave depth coordinate, c. It may have been used to assist in frame
alignment.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 379 / 522
51.10.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector

The Trail Trace Identifier is a 16_BYTE or 1_BYTE string used in SDH to detect misconnections inside

a communication network. A receiver has to validate the received string, in order to be sure that it has not

been corrupted by line errors, and compare it with an expected value, in order to verify that it is connected
with the right transmitter. If this is not the case, the receiver has to declare a TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
alarm.
The 1_BYTE string is made by a single byte (containing the code 0255), while the 16_BYTE frame is
structured as previously described.
In the following, the algorithm to detect the TIM condition is described: this algorithm is applied at all SDH
layers in which Trail Trace Identifier feature is defined, so it is suitable for processing byte J0 (section trace)
and bytes J1, J2 (VCi path trace).
The algorithm behavior is shown in the following Fig. 174. :
DATA
16_BYTE
t, f, d
t, f, d TIM 1/16
COMB TIM1/16 machine alarm
t, f, d
1_BYTE TIM
1/16
valid CRC7
t = true TIMX
f = false TIMX machine alarm
valid CONST
d = dontcare
Fig. 174. TIM algorithm
Incoming data are at the same time checked in order to find the standard 16_BYTE string with multiframe
alignment word and CRC7, or a fixed 16 times repeating 1_BYTE string. The preset 16/1 is needed to
tell the system if a 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string is expected. After validation process (correct CRC7 and
multiframe for the 16_BYTE string, same value 16 times for the 1_BYTE string), the received string is
compared with the expected one. If the preset 16/1 is set to 16, the comparison with 1 is always false;
if the preset 16/1 is set to 1, the comparison with 16 is always false.
Each output (that can assume three possible values: false, true, dontcare if the received string has
not been validated) of the two comparisons is sent, through a COMB function, to a state machine (the
TIM1/16 machine) with four states: alarm, not alarm, and two intermediate states. False causes the state
machine moving towards the alarm state, true causes the state machine moving towards the not alarm
state, dontcare leaves the machine in the state it is.
In parallel, further control is performed by the TIMX machine, in such a way that if for 8x16 times neither
a fixed string nor a correct multiframe alignment word plus CRC7 can be found, the TIM alarm is anyway
declared (this feature is not required by standards at now).
The TIM algorithm described is fully compliant with the standard promptness requests about maximum
detection time and is able to detect all possible crossmisconnections:
expected 1_BYTE string, with a different 1_BYTE or a 16_BYTE string received;
expected 16_BYTE string, with a different 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string received;
expected 1_BYTE or 16_BYTE string, with a random string received.
380 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Here below, TIM algorithm is described in more details:
a) 16_BYTE DETECTOR
As it can be seen in the following Fig. 175. , the 16_BYTE detector internally consists of four
functions:
a multiframe aligner in order to synchronize the machine itself to the 16_BYTE frame;
a CRC7 extractor, in order to calculate the CRC7 from the received frame;
a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 16_BYTE frame is different from
the expected string;
a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
valid CRC7
CRC7 detector
8
1 sync t, f, d
DATA Multiframe Aligner Command Generator
match
Mismatch detector
8
DATA EXP 1/16
Fig. 175. The 16_BYTE machine
b) 1_BYTE DETECTOR
The 1_BYTE detector internally consists of four functions:

a mod 16 counter, in order to generate an independent sync;
a 16 byte integrator, which detects whether the received bytes are of the 1_BYTE type;
a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 1_BYTE is different from the
expected one;
a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
8 valid const
DATA 16 byte integrator
sync t, f, d
MOD 16 counter Command Generator
match
Mismatch detector
8
DATA EXP 1/16
Fig. 176. The 1_BYTE machine
51.10.3 K0 management
The K0 bits were defined in RFCOH section to perform a proprietary regenerator section trace internally
to the switching section.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).
K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 381 / 522
382 / 522

52 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
52.1 Introduction
This chapter describes in detail the functional operation of 9600LSY/LHR equipment.
This handbook gives no detailed information on ADM equipment. For this purpose, please refer
to its specific documentation (see para.64.2.5.2 on page 507) with the following exception:
In the application for 9600 LSY, the FAN SHELF used for ADM is not that
described in the ADM documentation, but that described in this handbook.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are:
chapter 23 on page 203 System description
Information given in this chapter is organized as follows:
Power Supply subsystem: para.52.2 on page 384
Equipment Control subsystem para.52.3 on page 388

that includes:
Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture: para.52.3.1 on page 388
System Controller unit description: para.52.3.2 on page 393
Flash Card description: para.52.3.3 on page 399
Additional Housekeeping unit description: para.52.3.4 on page 400
Baseband subsystem: para.52.4 on page 401

that includes:
Interconnection general block diagrams: para.52.4.1 on page 401
N+1 switch logic para.52.4.2 on page 403
1:N switch logic para.52.4.3 on page 410
RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST : para.52.4.4 on page 412
RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST : para.52.4.5 on page 414
STM1 optical module: para.52.4.6 on page 417
MODEM STM1 1WSTandSTM0 0WST: para.52.4.7 on page 418
Service and Additional Voice unit: para.52.4.8 on page 422
Transceiver subsystem: para.52.5 on page 427

that includes:
Interconnection general block diagrams: para.52.5.1 on page 427
DC/DC converter module: para.52.5.2 on page 429
Transmit and Service module: para.52.5.3 on page 430
Receive & IF Rx module: para.52.5.4 on page 434
Local Oscillator module: para.52.5.5 on page 435
Fans subsystem: para.52.6 on page 437
N.B. References to 32QAM modulation present in this chapter are for general information purposes.
9600LSYLHR version is not meant to support it.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 383 / 522
52.2 Power supply subsystem

The Power Supply subsystem distributes both batteries BATT.A and BATT.B voltages to each user circuit

in the following way:

a) Primary voltage distribution with rack and TRU
Fig. 177. herebelow shows the block diagram. For physical implementation, refer to the part A
(Hardware Installation) of this Handbook.
Primary sources BATT.A and BATT.B are connected to TRU distribution frame.
From TRU box, BATT.A and BATT.B are distributed by individual cables, each one protected by circuit
breakers, to the subracks (Tab. 13. on page 91 indicates the TRU breaker utilization).
b) Power Supply distribution in the Transceiver shelf (see Fig. 177. herebelow and Fig. 83. on
page 151).
Power supply cables from TRU are connected to following connectors:
(M2) for BATT.A and (M3) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR0 to TR4 receive
power through the shelf backpanel
(M5) for BATT.A and (M6) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR5 to TR9 receive
power through the shelf backpanel
BATT. A
BATT. B
TR0 TR9
TOP RACK UNIT
TRX BACK PANEL
B.B. BACK PANNEL
FAN SUBRACKS
ADM BACK PANEL
Fig. 177. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply
distribution
The ON/OFF position of circuit breakers of Enhanced TRU can be checked by system software connecting
their monitoring points to some housekeeping inputs. For details, refer to para.15.4 on page 74 and
chapter 17 on page 99.
384 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
c) Power Supply distribution to LPS subrack
The power distribution to the LPS subrack is fully equal to that for transceivers: as shown in Fig. 66.
on page 124 , the optional LPS subrack can be equipped in two alternative positions of the
transceiver shelf, taking the unused place of two adjacent transceiver units (4+5 or 8+9).
For power distribution inside the LPS subrack, refer to the 9600LSY/LPS Installation and Technical
Handbook (REF.[H] on page 500 of this handbook)
d) Power Supply distribution in the Baseband shelf
Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 177. on page 384) are connected to following connectors:
BATT.A cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF1 unit equipped in slot 25 (i.e.
on the left) of Baseband shelf
BATT.B cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF2 unit equipped in slot 36 (i.e.
on the right) of Baseband shelf
N.B. PSF unit front view is depicted in Fig. 49. on page 107
PSF1 and PSF2 position in the shelf is shown in Fig. 145. on page 280
The distribution of Power supply from PSF units to the subrack is depicted in following Fig. 178. :
each PSF unit receives also the power supply voltage from the other PSF; after filtering:
BATT.A and BATT.B primary voltages are distributed through the backpanel toward the Power
Supply units PSU0 .... PSU9 (slots (E) in Fig. 145. on page 280)
converted voltages are distributed through the backpanel to units SERVICE and SYSTEM
CONTROLLER in the shelf (respectively in slot (A) and (B) in Fig. 145. on page 280), and,
through its cable, to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING unit (see para.63.3.2 on page 486)
The distribution of Power supply from PSU units to the units MODEM and RRA/RRAS is depicted
in following Fig. 178. :
PSU units are grouped in even/odd 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1 , PSU2+PSU3 , ..).
Each PSU pair converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the
correspondent pair of RRA and MODEM. In particular:
RRA/RRAS units receive power supply from both PSU units; if equipped, optical module
receives power supply from the RRA/RRAS where it is equipped;
each MODEM unit receives power supply only from correspondent PSU unit ( where n =
even and n+1 = odd):
MODEMn from PSUn
MODEMn+1 from PSUn+1.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 385 / 522
+5.3 V
+ 3.5 V MODEM0

PSU0

RRA0 OPT
(or RRAS) MODULE
+5.3 V + 3.5 V
OPT
RRA1
MODULE
PSU1
+5.3 V
+ 3.5 V MODEM1
+5.3 V
+ 3.5 V MODEM8
PSU8
OPT
RRA8 MODULE
battery A battery B
+5.3 V + 3.5 V
BATT.A
PSF1 OPT
RRA9
MODULE
BATT.B PSU9
+5.3 V
+ 3.5 V MODEM9
BATT.A
BATT.B ADDITIONAL
PSF2 HOUSEHEEPING
SERVICE
+ 3.5 V +5.3 V
SYSTEM
M184 CONTROLLER
SERVICE BATTERY
N.B. dashed elements are optional or depending on the configuration
Fig. 178. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf
386 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
e) Service Battery to System Controller unit
In addition to the voltage distributed by PSF1 and PSF2 units, the System Controller unit receives
also the battery voltage by means of the cable used for Station Alarms management (see Tab. 23. on
page 161). This allows the System Controller unit to manage the TRU lamps also in case of power
supply missing from both PSF1 and PSF2 units.
f) Power Supply distribution to Additional Housekeeping unit
The Additional Housekeeping unit is powered as the System Controller unit (of which it must be
considered an extension), as depicted in Fig. 178. on page 386. From the physical point of view,
power supply is lead on the cable connecting the Additional Housekeeping unit to the BB shelf (see
para.15.4.2 on page 77).
g) Power Supply distribution in the Fans shelves
Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 177. on page 384) are connected to following connectors
of Fans shelf:
(M1) for BATT.A

(M4) for BATT.B
shown in:
Fig. 65. on page 122 (new FAN UNIT)

As depicted in Fig. 207. on page 437, there are two power supply units (one receiving BATT.A
power supply voltage, the other receiving BATT.B power supply voltage) from which,
diodedecoupled, power supply is distributed to the eight fans of the assembly.
Fig. 225. on page 489 (old FANS SHELF + FANS ASSEMBLED units)
As depicted in Fig. 226. on page 491, both BATT.A and BATT.B voltages are distributed to both
FANS ASSEMBLED units.
Inside each FANS ASSEMBLED unit, as depicted in Fig. 227. on page 492, there are two power
supply units (one receiving BATT.A power supply voltage, the other receiving BATT.B power
supply voltage) from which, diodedecoupled, power supply is distributed to the four fans of the
assembly.
h) Power Supply distribution in the ADM shelf
Please make reference to ADM specific documentation (see para.64.2.5.2 on page 507 ).
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 387 / 522
52.3 Equipment Control Subsystem

52.3.1 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture

This paragraph describes the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control elements, the
function partitioning among them and the external and internal interfaces managed by this subsystem.
For reader convenience, the content index of this part is detailed herebelow:
LHR control subsystem architecture herebelow:

Function partitioning herebelow
Control elements herebelow
Communication interfaces on page 390
WMSN control subsystem architecture on page 392
52.3.1.1 LHR control subsystem architecture
52.3.1.1.1 Function partitioning
The functionalities performed by the control subsystem can be summarized as follows:

Message Communication Function (MCF)
Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF)
Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)
Physical Machine Management Function on whole equipment basis (PMMF/E)
Physical Machine Management Function on unit basis (PMMF/U)
Basic Functions (BF)
52.3.1.1.2 Control elements
The control elements supporting the functionalities described above are:

Equipment controller (EC)
Radio Controller (RC)
Supervisory Units (SU)
The control elements logical hierarchy is depicted in Fig. 179. on page 389.
The functionalities are splitted on the control elements composing the control subsystem architecture.
Equipment Controller
One EC has in charge the MCF and VMMF: it provides resources (physical interfaces and protocol
stack) required for the communication between NE and the management systems (OS and ECT),
it performs all the control and management functions of the virtual machine (info model).
No protection of this control element is performed. The EC is physically located aboard the System
Controller board.
Radio Controller
One RC has in charge the PMMF/E: it provides the resources to support the control and management
functions related to the real physical machine.
No protection of this control element is performed. The RC is physically located aboard the System
Controller board.
388 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Supervisory Units
The SUs have in charge the PMMF/U and the AF. This function requires a real time processing of
the data coming from the ASICs. The SU on board of each unit has the aim to provide an uniform
interface towards the RC avoiding a RC dependency from the HW where the SUs are
accommodated. One SU is accommodated in each unit.
OS
QB3
F
ECT ISSB
EC RC
SystemController
CAN
Rem Local Rem Local

Inv uP Inv uP
SU SU
Fig. 179. LHR control subsystem architecture
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 389 / 522
52.3.1.1.3 Communication interfaces

A set of (serial and parallel) interfaces are defined as part of the control subsystem to support the

communication task.

They can be classified as system internal or external interfaces.
All the communication links used by the different processing functions (RC and EC) to exchange data each
other or to read/write data from/to the controlled objects (ASICs or other devices on board the different
cards in the equipment) are defined as internal interfaces.
External interfaces are defined as the communication links provided by the control subsystem towards
external devices used for Operation and Maintenance functions or system debug activities.
All the interfaces are reported in Fig. 180. with the association of the units supporting these interfaces.
EC
ISSB
RC
SC
CAN
Inv. RRA Inv. SW Inv. SERV Inv. MOD

Mem. Mem. Mem. Mem.
uP uP uP uP
SPI SPI SPI

SW
ASIC ASIC ASIC
RRAn SERV MODn
RT Inv.
Mem.
uP
RTn
Fig. 180. LHR communication interfaces
390 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
External Interfaces
The control subsystem provides the following external communication interfaces:
QB3 interface
F interface
Qecc interface
DBG interface
HK/RA interface
QAUX interface
All the above interfaces are supported, at the NE level, by the EC processor, as part of its MCF and
VMMF.
The QB, F, Qecc, Qaux interfaces are available as communication links between the NE
and external control equipments, as required by the TMN environment.
The QB3 protocol stack requires a 10BASE2 (or 10baseT) physical layer and IEEE 802.2 / 802.3
for the data link layer. Through this interface the NE is connected to a LAN for message exchange
with the OS station.
The F interface is a local communication port provided to connect the NE to a local Craft Terminal
station (PC or WS); this interface is implemented as a low speed RS232 port (bit rate is 38,4 Kbit/s
max). Remote CT functionality is performed by routing CT messages to DCCs and viceversa.
The Qecc interface is defined as a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the
Embedded Communication Channels, available in the SOH portion of the SDH frame, as physical
layer. Through the Qecc interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS
(or Craft Terminal) station.
Qecc interface is implemented as a TDM serial link between the EC function and the ASICs on board
of port units. The TDM channel is terminated by the MHDLC, providing for the selection of the
channels to terminate and performing the standard HDLC functions. This interface uses the LAPD
(ITUT Q.921) as data link layer protocol, this protocol is performed by the MCF inside the EC
function.
The Qaux interface is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message
exchange between the NE and a remote OS station, based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary
channel.
The DBG interface is a proprietary interface available for software debug activities. A local
communication port for debug is required for each processor (EC and RC) on board the System
Controller. The local debug ports are a low speed RS232 UART based interface, available for VT100
or equivalent debug console.
An equipment network interface for debug activities should be provided as well, implemented as a
10BASE2 Ethernet channel. The EC function should provide a router function between this port and
the internal ISSB bus to allow the use of this port for debugging of RC processor too.
A set of traditional parallel I/O interfaces for local signaling of alarm presence, such as rack lamps,
front panel LEDs and so on are provided by the EC processor.
Internal Interfaces
The control subsystem provides the following internal communication interfaces:
ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface
CAN interface
SPI interface
The ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface is basically an equipmentinternal Local Area Network
for communications among the different microprocessors in the same shelf: the EC processor and
the RC processor and other possible processors. It is a multimaster HDLCbased backplane serial
bus.
The CAN interface allows to connect the RC processor to the microprocessor on board the units.
It is a serial broadcast bus, each node connected to the bus receives all the messages sent by the
other ones. A local filtering mechanism on each node permit to manage only the messages related
to the node. The maximum speed is 1 Mbit/s up to 40 meters length.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 391 / 522
52.3.1.2 WMSN control subsystem architecture

The main characteristics of the WMSN control subsystem architecture are the following (see

Fig. 181. herebelow):

LHR and ADM equipments control architecture reuse
This means that from the management system point of view this equipment is seen as two different
network elements (both of them with an own address). In this way the LHR and ADM hardware control
architecture are reused without any modification, allowing to preserve the independence of the
software developments of the ADM and radio parts.
Only one F and QB3 interface
The F and QB3 interfaces are present on the ADM part. The radio part sees the TMN information
by means of Qecc interfaces. RECT application is used to manage both the ADM part (directly
connected) and the radio part (via Qecc).
RECT OS
F QB3
ISSB QECC ISSB
SC EC EC RC
ADMController SystemController(radio)
SPI
ISPB CAN
Rem ASIC Rem ASIC Rem Local Rem Local

Inv Inv Inv uP Inv uP
Unit Unit Unit Unit
ADM part RADIO part

Legend :
EC : Equipment Controller (MCF, SEMF: Virtual Machine)
RC : Radio Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine)
SC : Shelf Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine)
ISSB : Intra Shelf Serial Bus
SPI : Serial Peripheral & Inventory
CAN : Controller Area Network bus
ISPB : Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
Fig. 181. WMSN control subsystem architecture
392 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
52.3.2 System Controller unit description
Refer to para.18.2.2 on page 108 for the unit physical views and operative information.
The Equipment System Controller (ESC) unit is made with two boards: the mother board and the subunit
ESCON.
The block diagram of Fig. 182. is relevant to the whole unit (mother board and the subunit ESCON).
The subunit ESCON performs the main functions:
Equipment controller
Radio controller
DCCR management
Remote Inventory management
Station alarms management
Summarizing alarms management
Housekeeping alarms management
The mother board performs the following main functions:
DCCR Mux /demux

Alarm expansion
I/0 Housekeeping /Station alarms/ Summarizing alarms with relays to Access area subrack
Management of CANBUSes of baseband shelf and RT shelf
Management of parallel missing card alarms
Drivers and connectors for Equipment controller and Radio controller I/O circuits
Management of Power Supply and Battery alarms
ANDOR function
Routering of SPRI register with a dedicate microcontroller.
On the board there is an 8bits microcontroller, to convert the bus SPI of ESCON into CAN 0 BBBUS,
Can 1 BBBus and CanRT bus.
[1] Equipment Controller and Radio Controller
The functions of Equipment Controller and Radio Controller are described in para.52.3.1 on page
388.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 393 / 522
N.B.
Resistive
394 / 522
Load
RTX0 RTX2RTX2
RTX1RTX1 RTX3RTX3
RTX4RTX4
RTX5RTX5
RTX6RTX6
RTX7RTX7
RTX8RTX8
RTX9RTX9
CAN 0 BB
and
Resistive Resistive CAN0 BB RC local debug
Load Load
ocal
F

MPC860 MPC860
ISS
EN B EN QB3 (10base 2)
MD0MD1MD1
MD2MD2MD3 MD3 MD7 MD7MD8MD8MD9MD9
MD4MD4MD5MD5MD6MD6 QB3 (10base T
and Debug_N
RC or EC debug local)
EC
Resistive Resistive SPI
Load Load Local
bus
CAN0 BB FPGA
FPGA

Can 0 Can 1
CH0CH1 CH1CH2 CH2CH3CH3 CH4CH4CH5CH5CH6CH6CH7CH7 CH8CH8CH9CH9 EXP.
Control. Control. P I O/HK
ALARM
UART
Fig. 182. System Controller block diagram

HC12
SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release

FPGA Card Missing
CAN 1 Download FPGA SPIL and RT Power
SERVICE SERVICE Extension HST
WEST HKHK DRIVER SPRI Supply Alarms
CAN RT
HC12 Router
Remote
SPI Inventory BB
CAN0 BB
Power Supply
and
Battery filter
[2] DCCR Management

The System controller manages the DCCR at line side and radio side.
In order to connect DCCR to the Controller, the FPGA inside ESCON board requires a particular
bidirectional link working at 6.48 MHz.
In order to avoid slips on dropped DCCR byte, due to different frequency between the clock extracted
from STMj (j=0 to 9) and the local timing used to resynchronize the resulting DCCR subframe, a
stuffing mechanism is realized.
The DCC mapping and interleaving is described in Tab. 67. on page 366.
An EPLD performs three bidirectional links in order to insert/extract the DCCR line side of the all
RRA units, and DCCR radio side from/to Service unit:
On the first link 6.48.48 Mbit/s are mapped :

DCCR 192Kbit from/to Service units
DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRASTB0
DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 1
On the second link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped:

On the third link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped:

[3] Summarizing/Housekeeping Alarms
The ESCON subunit manages 9 Input and 14 Output signal alarms. By means of the alarms
expansion circuit located on ESC mother board, there are 22 Input and 56 Output signals available.
In 9600LSY application the following number of alarms are managed:
22 HK input
10 HK output
46 output alarms
In order to reduce the power consumption, all relays are switched off in normal conditions; the
presence of active alarms corresponds always to closed contact with a common wire available to
the Customer.
The electrical characteristics of relays are: (V is voltage between the warm wire and the common
one).
open contact 72 V 2V I 0.2mA

closed contact 2 V 0V I 50mA
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 395 / 522
158 138 374 HK1
396 / 522
4 HK2
HK 14 Lamp OUT 11 0 0 8 OE HK3 ANDOR
HK4
4 4 alarms OUT 12 } 1SEL 1 A GA3
HK 1316 SEL IN 14 OUT 13 2 GA4
2 CK GA5
3 GA6
Vcc 4 Rack lamps
158 5 INT to M184
4 OUT 14 E 6
374 GA7
HK 58 N GA8 connector of
4 4 7 OE GA9
HK 1720 SEL 8 GA10
TUP M184
Accesstoarea
IN 68 OUT 3 10 B GA11
8 GA12
CK GA13 (BB shelf)
GA14
158 ESCONX
GA 912 OUT 1 GA1 FREE
GA 21,22 4 374 GA15
OUT 2 GA2 TUP
SEL GA16
IN 912 8 OE GA17
ORALIM GA18
C GA19
GA20

PWANDOR CK GA21
GA22
From Battery
DCCR TO/FROM RFCOH ( Service) Filter 1 and 2
374 Alarms battery
GA23
Link 1
Stuffing SPI GA24
Link 1
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRASTBY0 ) 8 OE GA25
el.store GA26
D GA27
GA28
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA1) DCCR mapping 6.48 CK GA29 Service Battery
GA30
DCCR TO/FROM
DCCR extracting
RST (RRA2 DCCR extracting Mbit FPGA
374 HK5
HK6
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 3) 8 OE HK7
Stuffing HK8
Stuffing E HK9
Fig. 183. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping

Can 0 Can 1 HK10
Link 2
el.store
Link 2
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA4 ) el.store CK GA31
Control. Control. GA32
DCCR mappingDCCR mapping
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA5)

DCCR extracting
DCCR extracting 374 GA33
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA6 GA34
8 OE GA35
Can 0 Can 1 GA36
GA37
F GA38
Link 3
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 7) Stuffing GA39
CK
Link 3
Stuffing GA40
el.store
el.store
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA8 ) DCCR mapping
DCCR mapping
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA9) DCCR extracting
DCCR extracting 374 GA41
GA42
8 OE GA43
Ck + SY from GA44
main channel G GA45
Sy
from GA46
CK GA47
main channel GA48
Ck + SY from CK 38.88 + SY
RRA 0,1,2,8,9 MUXMUX LogicLogic
Ck + Sy
from
Ck + SY from EPLD EPLD
Sby channel
Daina

Dip Switch
alarms management block diagram
[4] Remote Inventory management

The Remote Inventory function permits the operator to retrieve information about any card or module
present on the equipment.
The available information, written in a 64x16 bit EEPROM on board (RI device), is: construction date,
code number, maker name, Cardtype, etc. (see details in the Operator Handbook).
The Remote Inventory function is present in all the cards.

The RI can be also present on some submodules assembled on the board (such as optical modules,
microcontrollers and so on).
The relevant data are transported by the CAN bus and are managed by the System Controller unit,
which, besides the information retrieved from the units RI device, add the slot identifier (ID)
information.
The System Controller unit can also manage the visual indications of the board (LEDs) and some
I/O parallel commands/contacts/alarms that can eventually be transferred by means of the CAN bus.
The agent microcontroller on each unit manages the Remote Inventory, with the exception of Power
Supply Units (PSU) and Battery Filter units (PSF), that are supported by ESC Agent.
The Remote Inventory of units submodules (CANCCOMB modules, Additional TPHDEV and
Optical interface) are supported by the respective Agent Unit.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 397 / 522
CAN 0 BB

SERVICE Extension HST
SERVICE
WEST HK DRIVER
Add. Add.
IfTPH
unit IfTPH
unit additional
TPHDEV
MD0 MD1 MD2 MD3 MD4 MD5 MD6 MD7 MD8 MD9
If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit CANCCOMB
MODULES
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9
Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical OPTICAL
If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit
interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface
MODULES HC12
ESC
Agent
N.12 Enable
PSU0 PSU1 PSU2 PSU3 PSU4 PSU5 PSU6 PSU7 PSU8 PSU9 ESC
Unit
Battery filter 1
Battery filter 2
CAN 0 BB
Enable
Remoty inventory Clock
Bus Data input EEPROM
Data output
+3.3V
gnd
Missing
N.B. SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release
Fig. 184. Remote inventory subsystem architecture
398 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
52.3.3 Flash Card description
The FLASH CARD contains, after the system SW loading and system configuration carried out through
the Craft Terminal:
a) the whole Equipment software programs (susceptible to be downloaded toward the Supervisory
Units);
b) the software images of FPGAs housed in the following boards: SYSCO, SMA subunit of SERVICE,
RRA (CHANNEL and STANDBY) and MODEM, susceptible to be downloaded toward them; refer
to para.47.3 on page 327 for details;
c) the system configuration data. Such configuration data set is named MIB and can be saved as a
file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well as can be restored in the Flash Card retrieving
this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS);
d) the routing configuration data, that is, according to the Craft Terminal Men (N.B.):
Configuration Comm.Routing
1. Local configuration Systems local address
2. OS. configuration
3. NTP server configuration
4. Interface configuration LAPD configuration

Ethernet configuration
5. OSI configuration RAP configuration

MESA configuration
6. IP configuration IP Static Routing configuration

OSPF AREA configuration
IP Address configuration of point to point configuration
7. Tunneling configuration OSI over IP

IP over OSI
All those listed parameter are NOT stored into the MIB file because considered unique to a
particular system in a network and are NOT meant to be reproduced on other systems in the
same network because will cause conflicts in the supervision network centre.
N.B. This list is merely for general information only. Refer to the C.T. Operators Handbook for a more
precise list.
The presence of the FLASH CARD as individual part simplifies the maintenance procedure in case of
failure of the System Controller, as explained in para.47.4.3 on page 333 and para.47.4.4 on page 335.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 399 / 522
52.3.4 Additional Housekeeping unit description

this unit is no longer envisaged in newer supplies. This information is just for the convenience of

Customers having still installed it in their system.

Refer to para.63.3 on page 486 for the unit physical views and operative information.
The Additional Housekeeping (HKDEV) is an optional unit.

By its use, other 18 HK Inputs become available, besides those already available with the System
Controller unit.
Fig. 185. herebelow shows the unit block diagram.
(M1) is the connector for getting the 18 HK Inputs (for pinout see Tab. 8. on page 78).
The connector (M2) is linked by cable to connector (M179) of Baseband shelf (see Fig. 80. on page 148).
By this cable the unit:
receives power supply

is connected to the System Controller unit by CAN 0 BB bus
sends the Card Fail and Card Missing signals to the System Controller
A red led on the front indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
18 Housekeeping
Inputs
M1 CEPT
INTERFACE
SUBD 25 pins
female
3.45 V
Remote HC12
5.3 V Inventory mP
M2 HKDEV Card Fail
led
SUBD 9 pins
male HKDEV Card Missing
Can 0 BB
Fig. 185. Additional Housekeeping block diagram
400 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Select by ECT
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area
FPGA NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
9 9
1
1 RRA 9
STM1 MOD IF to TR
and message exchange.
O/E RST SRS RFCOH 1
DCCR 5.1 Mb
52.4 Baseband subsystem
The RFCOH and one WST can be protected

only two channels
From RRA 2/8/9
5.1 Mb
F Protected second WST

QB3 SC Protected use with Modem/ RRA
DCCR
52.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams
PIO 1x2Mb/s in future release

Switch logic EOW

SERVICE 64 Kb
N+1
DCCR DSI,MC,ATPC
5.1 Mb
5.1 Mb
0
0
STM1
O/E RST MUX RFCOH
MOD IF 0 to TR0
RRA Stby
Fig. 186. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side

Ktx HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area
FPGA
NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
Select by ECT
401 / 522
The following Fig. 186. and Fig. 187. show the unit interconnection block diagram respectively for Tx
side and Rx side configurations, with regard to the transmitted/received signals and the internal signal
Select by HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area
ECT FPGA
402 / 522
NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
9
9
1
RRA
IF from TR DEM STM1
RFCOH APSE RST O/E

The RFCOH and one WST can be protected 1
only two channels 5.1 Mb RRA 2/8/9
DCCR
5.1 Mb
Protected second WST
Modem/ RRA F
in future release Protected
Switch logic QB3
1x2Mb/s SC
N+1 DCCR PIO
EOW
64 Kb
DSI,MC,ATPC SERVICE 5.1 Mb DCCR

5.1 Mb
0
IF from TR DEM RFCOH STM1

MATRIX RST O/E
RRA Stby
Fig. 187. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side

HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area
FPGA
Select by NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
ECT
52.4.2 N+1 switch logic
Please refer to para.23.2.3 on page 206 for an introduction to N+1 protection architecture.
[1] Block diagrams
Following Fig. 188. and Fig. 189. show the switch logic block diagram respectively at Tx and Rx
section.
DL1_Tx
Delay
IN CH 1 0255 bit
LRST1 RFCOH1 MOD 1 TX 1
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron N.U.
DL2_Tx
Delay
IN CH 2 0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron N.U.
DL3_Tx
Delay
IN CH 3 0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron N.U.
DL4_Tx
Delay
IN CH 4 0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron N.U.
DL5_Tx
Delay
IN CH 5 0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron N.U.
DL6_Tx
Delay
IN CH 6 0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron N.U.
DL7_Tx
Delay
IN CH 7 0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron N.U.
DL8_Tx
Delay
IN CH 8 0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron N.U.
DL9_Tx
Delay
IN CH 9 0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron N.U.
DLA_Tx Sciaron
Delay
0255 bit
N.U.
Delay
IN OCC 0255 bit
LRSTA RFCOHA MOD A TX A
Delay
0255 bit
N.U.
Fig. 188. Switch logic at Tx section
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 403 / 522
KR_SWC 1
OUT CH 1 M.E. Delay 0/255

LRST1 M.E. Delay 0/255 RFCOH1 DEM 1 RX 1

da DTxRx

KR_SWC 2

da DTxRx
KR_SWC 3

da DTxRx
KRA_SWC 4

da DTxRx
KR_SWC 5
LRST5 M.E. Delay 0/255

RFCOH5 DEM 5 RX 5
da DTxRx
KR_SWC 6

da DTxRx
KR_SWC 7

RFCOH7 DEM 7 RX 7
da DTxRx
KR_SWC 8

RFCOH8 DEM 8 RX 8
da DTxRx
KR_SWC 9

RFCOH9 DEM 9 RX 9
da DTxRx
Allarmi KR (09)
SWC
Sciaron
OUT OCC M.E. Delay 0/255
LRSTA M.E. Delay 0/255

RFCOHA DEM A RX A
Fig. 189. Switch logic at Rx section
404 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
[2] Switching criteria
Switching criteria are the pieces of information that the switching logic is able to get, reading them
directly from channels or demodulators, and that describe the status and functionality of the channel
itself and the signal processed by them.

These criteria (for MAIN and SPARE) are:
criterion arising for line error rate= 106>EW>109 . It is generated by the

EW local demodulator and/or by remote regenerators by which it is
retransmitted
criterion arising for line error rate= 103>LBER>106. It is generated by the

LBER local demodulator and/or by remote regenerators by which it is
retransmitted
HBER criterion arising for line error rate >103 originated by Demodulator
DEM Pfail criterion arising for line error rate 103
DEM Card fail criterion arising for internal failure of DEM unit
MODEM Missing MODEM unit missing
criterion arising for LOF_R (Loss Of Frame at radio side) and LOS from
RRA Fail_i
DEMi
criterion arising for LOF_R (Loss Of Frame at radio side) and from
RRA Fail STBY
DEMstandby
RRA Card fail criterion arising for internal failure of RRA unit
RRA Missing RRA unit missing (alarm that inhibits the switch)
LOS_STBYn loss of received signal. Detected by RRA, Rx side (via StBy from Spare)
MOD Card fail criterion arising for internal failure of MOD unit
LOS_M loss of received signal. Detected by MOD on signal from RFCOH
LOS_RRAn loss of received signal. Detected by DTxRx on signal incoming from CHTn
Only for 1:N configuration (N+1 & Occasional).

OCC_KO OR of TIMA + LOFA_L + LOSA_L (criterion used to switch the reference
signal on the spare)
Following Fig. 190. and Fig. 191. show alarm detection respectively at Rx and Tx section.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 405 / 522
LOS1_R
KR_1 RRA1 Card fail

DEM1 Card fail

M.E. Delay 0/256
OUT CH 1 LRST1
RX n
DEM n
M.E.
RFCOH
LOS1_R LOF1_R
Delay EW1
0/256
LBER1
RRA1 fail
HBER1
LOS_STBY
DEM1 P fail
RRA n
Alarms KR (09)
SWC
RRA A
Card fail
Sciaron
LOS A
_R
DEM A
Card fail
OUT OCC M.E. Delay 0/256
LRSTA M.E. Delay 0/256

RFCOHA DEM 0 RX 0
KRRA_RIS LOF A
_R EW A
LBER A
HBER A
RRA A
fail
RRA SPARE DEM A P fail
Fig. 190. Rx section alarms
406 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
CRC1 fail INIG1
ENTONI
TIM1 RRA n
LOF1_L LOS1_L
O/E Card fail

MOD1 Card fail
TIM1 LOF1_L
Delay
IN CH 1
LRST1 0 255 bit MOD n TX n
RFCOHn
Delay
0 255 bit
LOS1_L LOS1_M
A Sciaron
SCIARON
LOS_RRA 9
LOS_RIF LOS_RRA 8
LOS_RRA 7
LOS_RRA 6
LOS_RRA 5
K_OP_n LOS_RRA 4
LOS_RRA 3
LOS_RRA 1
LOS_RRA 2
INIG 1
LOS_RRA 1
LOS_RRA 2 OCC_KO
INIG 2 8 9
INIBER A 2
LOS_RRA 8 1
Delay
INIG 8 0 255 bit
LOS_RRA 9
K_OP (0 9)
INIG 9
MODA Card fail

TIM LOF A _L
A
Delay
IN OCC
LRSTA 0 255 bit MOD 0 TX 0
RFCOHA
Delay
0 255 bit
LOS A _L
LOSA_M
OCC_KO LOF A _ L
TIM A LOS A _ L
O/E Card fail
RRA SPARE
Fig. 191. Tx section alarms
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 407 / 522
Forwarding of switching criteria to switching logic is carried out through a serial frame and according
to the block diagram of Fig. 192. herebelow.

Modem 1
DATA
DATA
SYNCH
MD C.F.
CK
MD Missing
RRA 1
RRA 1 Missing
Modem n
DATA
DATA
MD C.F. SYNCH
MD Missing CK
RRA n
RRA n Missing
Modem
Stby
DATA
DATA
MD C.F. SYNCH
MD Missing CK
RRA Stby
RRA Stby Missing
RRA n Missing
RRA 1 Missing
ENTONI
Fig. 192. Switching criteria forwarding to switching logic
408 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
[3] Operators control at Rx side
Definitions (see also Fig. 188. on page 403):

Ch n = MAIN channel (RXn)

Ch 0 = SPARE channel (RX0)
On protection switch the control by operator (O.C.) is envisaged through commands Lockout,
Force_Switch and Manual_switch via Craft Terminal:
Command Priority
Lockout 1
Force_switch 2
Automatic_switch 3
Manual_switch 4
Command Lockout is connected to the status of channel MAIN efficient, therefore this is put in
service independently from the alarm criteria status.
Command Force_Switch is connected to the status of channel SPARE efficient, therefore this is put
in service independently from the alarm criteria status.
Command Manual_switch forwarded to SPARE channel puts channel 0 in service.
N.B.:
Command Lockout has greatest priority with respect to command Force_switch; therefore it
forces Ch n in service even if command Force_Switch is active for it and/or any switching criteria
are present.
Command Force_Switch has greatest priority with respect to automatic operation; therefore
it forces Ch 0 in service, independently from any active alarms, through a nonhitless switching.
Command Manual_switch has low priority and is executed only if there are no alarms on the
channel to be put in service.
Commands Lockout and Force_Switch activates ABN condition. Command Manual_switch
does not activate ABN condition.
[4] Displays for Operator (Rx section)

In N+1 configuration, with reference to Fig. 159. on page 314:
execution of command Lockout causes display (1) to show n and led (2) to turn on
execution of command Force_Switch causes display (1) to show 0 and led (2) to turn on
[5] Operators control at Tx side
Not envisaged
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 409 / 522
52.4.3 1:N switch logic

Please refer to para.23.2.3 on page 206 for an introduction to 1:N protection architecture.

[1] Block diagrams
As point [1] on page 403
[2] Switching criteria
As point [2] on page 405
[3] Operators control at Rx side
On received channels the control by operator (O.C.) is envisaged through commands Lockout,
Force_Switch and Manual_switch via Craft Terminal:
Prio Description
Command
rity
Command connected to the status of channel EFFICIENT, therefore
the channel put in lockout is NOT protected by spare.
Furthermore, if lockout command is sent to a channel presently spare,
this is immediately unswitched with no alignment check by the following
modality: when Rx section of switch logic receives the lockout
command on channel n it can perform two actions:
Lockout 1 1 ) if channel n is presently not protected, the system configuration
changes dynamically excluding such channel n from the list of
protectable channels.
2 ) if channel n is presently protected, the protection is removed,
after which action 1 ) is performed.
The dynamic configuration will be updated as soon as the lockout
condition will be removed.
Command connected to the status of channel FAULTY, therefore the
channel n for which force_switch command is sent, is protected by the
spare, whichever the alarm status of the spare may be.
Command force_switch is carried out as follows: when Rx section of
logic SWC_N1LH receives the force_switch command on channel n
it can perform two actions:
1 ) if channel n is presently not protected, switching channel n to
Force_switch 2 spare is executed, sending at the same time to the Tx section of
the remote station the command for switching to spare the same
channel n.
2 ) if channel n is presently protected, no other measures are taken.
The force_switch command is not executed if:
the switching logic is frozen
the DSI message exchange with the remote station is unavailable
channel n is inhibited at Tx side.
410 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Prio Description
Command
rity
Automatic_switch 3 Normal working condition. No manual operations active.

Command manual_switch is carried out as follows: when Rx section of

logic SWC_N1LH receives the manual_switch command on channel
n it can perform two actions:
1 ) if channel n is presently not protected, switching channel n to
spare is executed, sending at the same time to the Tx section of
Manual_switch 4 the remote station the command for switching to spare the same
channel n.
2 ) if channel n is presently protected, no other measures are taken.
The manual_switch command is not executed if:
the switching logic is frozen
the DSI message exchange with the remote station is unavailable
[4] Displays for Operator

In 1:n configuration, with reference to Fig. 159. on page 314:
display (1) can show:
the No n of the protected channel at Rx side
or 0 when spare is free and/or is used by occasional traffic stream
led (2) can be:
on, to indicate that a manual operation is active (Lockout, Force_switch or Manual_switch)
off, to indicate that automatic switch is operative (absence of manual operations)
display (3) can show:
the No n of the protected channel at Tx side
or 0 when spare is free and/or is used by occasional traffic stream
[5] Operators control at Tx side

Not envisaged
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 411 / 522
52.4.4 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description

[1] General

RRACHANNEL performs the following main functions:
Electrical CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion
RSOH line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
RFCOH radio side Extraction/insertion from/to Service Unit
DCCR radio side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction
Hitless Switch
Serial BUS (Insertion on parallel wires of Modem/ RRA alarms)
On the front of the board the following interfaces are available:

the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted)
one red led to indicate the card failure
On the RRACHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.52.4.6
on page 417 for its description).
[2] RRACHANNEL description

An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation in Tx section. In
the receive section the complementary operations are performed.
The RRA uses two ASICs:

one implementing:
the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783)
and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function
the other, implementing:
the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function
and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function.
All these functions are bidirectional.
Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the
two signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the
two signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate
the approach during field installation.
At RX side, whenever both paths are aligned, the phase comparator generates an OK command,
indicating that a switching operation can be performed.
The Switch command comes from the logic switch placed on the service board.
Inside the ASIC, the loopback connections are present, as described in para.46.5.3 on page 318.
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.
The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System
controller are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BBBus.
The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
412 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
To
RFCOH
DCCR RSOH RRASTBY
38.800 Vcxo A
Equalizer Mhz
Electrical
STM1 CMI/NRZ TCXO vcxo
SEL
LOS
input Switch Optical To modem
Signal input
ASIC To modem
. RFCOH
NRZ+CK RSTRST RFCOH NRZ
MUXMUX Delay
256 bits
0256 TX
RXRX TX
TX TX Loopback
only local
Loopback
2 * 2Mbit WST
2 * 2Mbit WST only local
Optical Optical loopback loopback
G.A CERBERO
STM1 ElasticElastic
memmemDelay
. Delay NRZ
Interface . 32bit 32bit 256
NRZ
RST 00256 RFCOH RFCOH
NRZ+CK RST CK
CK
Elastic Elastic
mem mem .
DEMUX RX From Modem
DEMUX
A.L.S TX RX 32bit 32bit From Modem
TX RX
PhasePhase 38.88 Mhz
38.88 Mhz
delay

comparcompar
Missing delay vcxo
TCXO WST1 FAIL
vcxo
SEL 155.520 Ok LOS_ R

TX fail /degrade Switch
Mhz Pat 38.88 Mhz
RFCOH
(only optical)version RSOH Ok Bit
DCCR Kofin NRZ 2Mbit WST
KRn From protected.
RRASTBY KAIS From/to Service
12
RRA MISSING
Fig. 193. RRACHANNEL block diagram

SPI Red led
NRZ/HDB3
WST1 LOS
68HC012 Parallel Parallel wire alarms
Serial Fast alarms RRA ALARMS RRA ALARMS
can
HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST
Can 1BB Can 0BB unprotected.
Serial Bus To Service Parallel alarms from Modem
413 / 522
52.4.5 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description

[1] General

The RRASTBY unit performs the following main functions:
Electrical CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion
RSOH and DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion to/ from Service Board
RFCOH radio side Insertion/Extraction to/from Service Board
TX/RX distributor
Switch of the reference signal
Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction
In N+0 configuration there are two possibilities:
1) RRASTBY unit forced to be used as RRA unit

2) Use RRA unit instead of RRASTBY

the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted)
a onedigit display to indicate the number of the channel protected (1... 9)
one red led to indicate the card failure
On the RRACHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.52.4.6
on page 417 for its description).
[2] RRASTBY description

An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation. In the receive
section the complementary operations are performed.
The RRASTBY uses an ASIC and a FPGA:

one implementing:
the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783)
and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function
the other, implementing:
the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function
and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function.
All these functions are bidirectional.
Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the
two signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the
two signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate
the approach during field installation.
The Mux insert one of nine streams (38.88Mbit/s) from RRA 1 to RA 9.

From Switch Logic the unit receives the Keta command that selects, by MUX, the transmit channel
to be paralleled toward the standby path.
414 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
At RX side the unit receives a 155 Mbit stream from RFCOH section (this signal comes from standby
demodulator) and sends it by splitter to the respective RRA1/RRA9 unit.
Inside the RRASTBY there are the loopback connections, as described in the Equipment controller
sub system chapter.
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.
The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 415 / 522
From RRA1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
LOS_RIFn
DCCR RSOH KOP
FPGA
38.800
416 / 522
Equalizer
Mhz
Electrical DelayDelay
256
0
Vcxo
TCXO 0256
STM1 CMI/NRZ SEL A
LOS Switch
input
Optical RST To modem
. RFCOH
Signal I/O NRZ+CK MUX NRZ
TX
RX TX
Loopback
1 * 2Mbit WST only local
Optical loopback ASIC

Optical Elasticmem Delay NRZ
STM1 NRZ+CK 32bit 0256 RFCOH
. Elasticmem.
RST CK
32bit
Interface DEMUX RX From modem
Phase
A.L.S TX RX compar delay
vcxo
Missing TCXO 38.88 vcxo
Mhz 38.88
SEL Mhz LOS_ R
155.520
TX fail/degrade Mhz
(only optical version) RFCOH
RSOH RRA CARD fail

Switch
Red led
NRZ 2Mbit WST
FPGA protected.
Fig. 194. RRA STANDBY block diagram

SPLITTER FPGASCIARON KAIS From/to Service
SPI to ASIC & FPGA 12
RRA
To RRA1..RRA9
MISSING
68HC012 Serial Fast alarmsSerial Fast alarms RRASTBY 1 * 2Mbit WST
ALARMS NRZ/HDB3 unprotected.
can SeeTable
RRASTBY
DATA ALARMS
Parallel wire alarms RRASTBY
Can 1BB Can 0 BB ALARMS
Serial BusTo Service FPGA Parallel alarms from Modem
HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST
unprotected.
52.4.6 STM1 optical module description
See Fig. 58. on page 116 (physical view) and Fig. 195. on page 417 (block diagram).
The STM1 optical module is the optical physical interface for the STM1 cards. Different types are
available according to the connector type, fibre and optical power range.
Each module contains two optical components (Tx and Rx), two level adapters, the remote inventory and
the ALSrestart pushbutton.
The RX optical component converts the 155.52 Mb/s STM1 optical signal into electrical, recoveries the
clock, detects the LOS alarm.
The TX optical component converts the electrical signal (data & clock) into optical, detects the
Laserfailure and Laserdegrade alarms. Receives the Lasershutdown command from the controller
and the ALSrestart command from a front pushbutton.
OPTICAL EDR
INPUT DATA RX
Rx Opt. Module Level
ECKR Adapter CLOCK RX
LOS
EDT DATA TX
ECT Level
OPTICAL Adapter CLOCK TX
OUTPUT Tx Opt. Module
Laser Fail
Laser deg.
Laser
Shutdown
ALSRestart o
o
Remote TO CAN BUS
GND Inventory Rinv
OPTICAL MODULE
Fig. 195. STM1 optical module block diagram
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 417 / 522
52.4.7 MODEM STM1 1WST and STM0 0WST description

[1] General

The modem performs the following main functions:
Terminal / repeater Modulator
Terminal / repeater Demodulator
XPIC / Base Band Combiner

Demodulator first IF input
Second IF input XPIC or IF diversity
Third IF input XPIC from cross polar receiver (has to be utilized when reuse and diversity are
used contemporaneously)
IF Modulator Output
The second and third IF input are associated to optional baby boards.
One red led is also present to indicate the MODEM card fail.
[2] Modem description
In a single ASIC the following parts are implemented: MLC code and decoder, Mapping
32/64/128QAM (different modems are envisaged for different modulations: one for 32/64QAM. the
other for 128QAM), Digital filter, BSE, FSE, XPIC and Base Band combiner.
The main functions are described in the following, according to MODEM block diagram (see
Fig. 196. on page 421):
I/O
The input/output interface, composed by NRZ signal and CK signal, is internal interface. The
signals come from/to RRA unit / RRA STBY or DROP in repeater configuration, no external
access is available.
The input/output signal is converted in four parallel streams; because of different transmission
capacities planned, the streams have, accordingly, different rates.
MLC code error

The MLC 6,5/7 coding scheme employs a set of binary codes of decreasing Hamming distance
combined with nested signal constellations of increasing Euclidean distance. Each code selects
one of the two subsets into which the corresponding constellation level is portioned. In this way
a more efficient use of redundancy is possible, since more powerful codes protect points a low
Euclidean distance, while less powerful codes are used for points at larger Euclidean distance.
The coding scheme uses both convolutional and blocks code.
The convolutional codes are the powerful ones in the scheme, while the block codes is a simple
parity check.
The first level code/decoder convolutional is obtained by Viterbi decoder for the code 2/3
The second level code /decoder convolutional works with an other Viterbi for the code 7/8
The Third level has a Wagner decoder for code 24,23
To reduce the effects of burst errors due to the convolutional code, a suitable interleaving
technique has been implemented. The structure of the interleaving is based on the introduction
of distinct delay chains on the parallel signal stream.
The two signals, the in phase channel and the quadrature channel, after MLC code QAM
mapping they are sent at 1/T frequency to a 36 taps digital shaping filter. The two filtered signals
come out from the ASIC at 2/T frequency.
ASIC output signals are converted into analog signals by two D/A converters (10 bits) and, then,
a Butterworth filter (7 poles) filters them.
418 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
BB/IF Side modulation
Two IF (140 MHz) inquadrature carriers are modulated by the two filtered signals by means
of two balanced mixers. Then, modulated carriers are summed in order to generate a 128 QAM
CROSSmodulated signal.
First IF/BB Side demodulation

First IF (140 MHz) signal (from main Transceiver) is BB converted by means of two mixers that
are controlled by a carrier recovery circuit.
Converted signal is, then, filtered by two Butterworth analog filters that have to guarantee proper
NFD for different modulation formats (poles number =9, cutoff frequency fco=0.55 0.65/T).
Two A/D converters sample filters out coming signals.
Second IF and third IF

A baby board called second IF and third IF carry out the same function of the first IF main.
Second IF is applied from diversity or cross polar signal.
When diversity and copolar are contemporaneously used, a third IF input is connected to
crosspolar main receiver.
Clock recovery
A Gardner synchronizer that controls a VCXO, which provides a sampling signal at 2/T
frequency, performs clock recovery.
Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC Modem
Equalizer cable for space diversity system
The delays
adjustment is
Self acting by
1IF Maim ECT
Delay 1
2IF diversity
Delay 2
3 IF cross Main
0 Delay 3
Every IF can be delayed a maximum 7x Ts/2 at Ts/2 step , compensate the static delays resulting
from the different paths of the two signals diversity.
An automatic procedure by ECT set the difference of the delays respective First and Second
IF.
There is not automatic procedure for delay of the third IF.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 419 / 522
Equalizer (FSE/DFE)
Into ASIC are implemented a synchronous equalizer (BSE Baud Spaced Equalizer), and a

Fractionally Spaced Equalizer (FSE).

FSE consists of a dual structure FIR filter and two mixers. Filtering section is 4D structured, (i.e.

it consists of four 19 taps filters), DFE consist of four 1 tap decision.
XPIC
When the frequency reuse is requested the XPIC cancellers the crosspolar interference.
On each way in dual polarization the IF signal is baseband converted, filtered and sampled
by A/D converters at 2/T frequency. Samples taken at t=KT are distinguished from those taken
at t=(KT+T/2) by XPIC S/P converters by means of 1/T frequency clock signal.
XPIC is adapted by means of error signals coming from equalizer and its central coefficient is
left spare for phase errors recovering.
XPIC output signal is sent to equalizer way adder.
XPIC way ASIC receives algorithm switch control signal and deep fading reset signal from
equalizer way ASIC.
Base band Combiner

Space diversity is based on the simultaneous reception of the transmitted signal at two vertically
separated antennas, its effectiveness depend on the fact that the correlation between the two
fields is low if the antennas are well separated.
The baseband combiner, which operates on the coherently demodulated signals is based on
the minimization if the mean square error at the decision device.
The scheme is the same of XPIC with these difference: the central coefficient is constrained,
we have one Clock recovery by a Gardner synchronizer for each IF signal. An estimation of the
power of the signal at the output of the two FSE is calculated. The clock that has the grater power
is selected Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC Modem
420 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
VCXO A Electronic +5.3

fuses +3.45 v
Los_M
From RRA or RRASTBY Data/ ck

or Elasticinterleaverinterleaver, FIR I D/A
Rate Rate
DROP S/P S/P encoderMLCencoderMLC,
store
adapter adapter mapper
mapper 90 IF out
+
Mod
Mir Pseudo Pseudo FIR QFIR Q D/A
Squelch Main random random
DELAY
DELAY
DROPDROP 140Mhz
A/D XO
Delay to RRA or RRASTBY

IF + vco Decoder
ElasticElastic
VCXO Delay and or
MAIN DecisionDecision MLC P/S
B andEqual SUM memory DROP
DEM 140Mhz T/2 Data/ck
loss 90

T/2 DROP MISSING
Card fail,missing A/D MODEM CARD
and fail
Remote Inventory VCXO C
gardnergardner
Clock Mhz Red led

2 Squelch
select
A/DA/D gardner gardner Modem Alarms

B&W Parallel wire alarms
90 90
Second IF + Delay vcos TO
TO vcos
carriercarrier
andand
Fig. 196. MODEM block diagram

A/DA/D CorrCorr.
EQUAL.
Agent Modem
Second IF loss T/2
T/2
A/DA/D
Baby boards spi ALARMS, SQUELCH
90 90 alarms CONTROL
Third IF + ASIC 68HC12
A/DA/D can
3 Squelch
Card fail,missing Can 0BB
Third IF loss
and
Remote Inventory
421 / 522
52.4.8 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description

[1] General

The Service Terminal performs the following main functions:
Insertion/Extraction and termination of RSOH bytes

Rerouting of RSOH bytes on RFCOH bytes
Protection and management of RFCOH bytes
System service channels and telephone services management
I/O service channels and telephone services
I/O DSI, ATPC, MC bytes, DCCR
Switch logic N+1, 1:N
I/O protected WST channel
Switch and SW logic for WST signals
N.B. The RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST can be protected only on the two channels
selected by ECT from the couples shown in the following table:
Tab. 68. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST
N+1 Terminal 2 X (4+1) WEST (N.B.) 2 X (4+1) EAST (N.B.)
0,1 0,1 9,8
0,9 0,4 9,5
1,2 1,2 8,7
8,9 3,4 6.5
1,9 1,4 8,5
N.B. Configurations not available in current release
On the front of the board are provided the following connectors and led:
Phone Jack (EOW )

Reset button
One red led that indicates engaged line
One green led that indicates free line
One red led that indicates SERVICE card fail
One display that indicates the protected Rx channel
One yellow led indicating the manual operation of switch logic N+1
Input /output 2 x 2Mbit protected WST
422 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
[2] Service Channels
The characteristics of service channels are given in the document enclosed at the end of this manual
(REF.[C] in Tab. 91. on page 521):

The service channels (see Fig. 197. on page 424) are managed by a FPGA able to provide on
external interfaces (programmable by ECT) the RSOH bytes from/to line side channel (channel 0 to
9) and also RFCOH bytes protected in 1+1 from RRA units.
Eight channels are be provided towards Users. In particular:
One (omnibus channels on E1 byte), one telephone jack and three analog party lines
3 x 64 kbit/s V11 or 2 x 64 kbit/s and 1 x128 kbit/s , V11 (Sw configurable for connection to 1
or 2 bytes)
3 x 64 kbit/s G703
1 x 9600 kbit/s V24/V28 Data channel
The service unit manages a TPH byte only to/from the RFCOH byte protected in 1+1 or to/from
external connection.
The desk telephone TPH, by HD selection, can be sent either into RFCOH byte or toward ADM in
format G703 (see block diagram).
E1, F1, D1D3 bytes are always accessible both at radio and line side, while a maximum of 5 bytes
line and radio side may be accessed chosen between the remaining RSOH bytes.
At radio side, the service channels (comprehensive of DCCR, monitoring channels, ATPC, DSI
bytes) are dropped/inserted in 1+1 protected mode (splitted at Tx side and switched at RX side).
The Tx service alarm (ATL RFCOH) is remotized by means of monitoring channel (with 1+1
protection) to be used with ATL and HBER remote alarms as minor switching criteria, while
demodulator alarm and HBER alarm are considered major switching criteria.
By means of a matrix function it is possible:
to address to service the lineside user interfaces RSOH bytes from different RRA and/or
RFCOH bytes (7 bytes) on RRA used for 1+1 protection;
to reroute RSOH bytes to RFCOH and viceversa.
For the detailed description of RSOH, RFCOH and DCCR management, please make reference to
para.51 on page 357 (Signal Management).
[3] 2Mbit Way side traffic
The FPGA, after HDB3/NRZ conversion, splits the 2Mbit/s asynchronous digital stream.
The two channels (N.B.) are inserted/extracted to/from a selected couple of RRA units among
the those specified in Tab. 68. on page 422. To minimize the errors during the switching
operation a make before break switch is adopted and particular care is taken in switching logic.
N.B. In this release, only one channel can be used (see Fig. 56. on page 114).
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 423 / 522
424 / 522
Open on 1st SERVICE
unit in 4+0/4+1 DCCR Dip switch
E/W configuration 192kbit SERVICE CARD fail
Line side
Lineside K
FPGA K RFCOHRX/TX # 0
Rerouting A
Rerouting Radio Radio side
A side
RR
RR M Red led
RFCOHRX/TX # 1
U
# 59
DEMUXDEMUX / RFCOHRX/TX # 2
MATRIX
MATRIX X RFCOHRX/TX # 8
MATRIXMATRIX
/ RFCOHRX/TX # 9
MUXMUX
RFSOHRX/TX
E1E1
# 04

D
FPGA E To /from RRA 0/1/2/8/9
NTONI
E Like RFCOH frame
M
COMBO
DCCR U
I/O Radio DSI,ATPC,MC 192kbit SPI service
I/O Line X
I/O TPH Additional ALARMS,
68HC012 CONTROL
TPHTPH AIS I/O
Hd Insertion can
NRZ, CK, 64, SYNC command
V NRZ
CAN 0 BB

Out
G703
Loudspeaker WST Los 1and 2
NRZ NRZ RZ SERVICE
COMBO
Fig. 197. SERVICE block diagram

V11 G703 MISSING
V28
To M190 ANA ANA
LOG LOG
BB Access DUAL LINE CAN 1 BB
Area INTERFACE 1
EOW To ADM
RJ11
2x2 Mb/s
1x 9600Kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s TPHTPH
Party x Party Lines
3 3xLine 1x 64 Kb/s1x 64 Kb/s
[4] Switch Logic N+1 and 1:N
For the implementation of N+1 and 1:N Switch Logic at system level, please refer to previous
para.52.4.2 on page 403 and para.52.4.3 on page 410.

This function performs the hitless switch, by processing the propagation alarms coming from
demodulators. The Tx and Rx functions, respectively in station A and station B of the link, must be
connected by 64 Kb/s (DSI channel, see Fig. 198. herebelow) to exchange information for Tx signal
parallel before RX switch. The 64 Kbit signal is processed in Switch logic.
Station A Station B
SWC A
SWC A
CH 1 CH 1
5,1 Mb 5,1 Mb
DATA IN DATA IN
SERVICE SERVICE
DATA OUT DATA OUT
5,1 Mb 5,1 Mb
SPARE A SPARE A
Fig. 198. DSI channel implementation
The Switch logic N+1/1:N is carried out inside FPGA and performs the following functions (see
Fig. 192. on page 408 and Fig. 199. on page 426):
gets the switching controls from the regular and standby channels
determines the weights of various channels: priorities and simulations
protects and releases the channels in N+1 configuration, using two service units in 4+1 E/W
configurations (this latter function not used in current release)
performs the lookout and incoming inhibit
manages the freezing operations
manages the manual forcing at the receive side.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 425 / 522
The following figure shows the input/output of the switch logic:

J=0 to 9 channel units

n=1 to 9 channel units

FPGA
Switch commands
FAST SERIAL BUS
Agent Mod FailJ
Service SW forcing EWj
LBERj
HBERj
DSI 64 kb/s DEMfailj Modem
Modem J =0
J =09 9
to/from EPLD SWITCH DemCARD fail j
LOGIC Modem missing j
Los Mod j
KRRA Serial/Parallel
RRA fail j
To RRASTBY
KOP RRACARD fail j RRA and RRASTBY
Logic RRAmissing
Output J=0
Los R side Dem j n=1
Korifn LosStbyn
To RRA 1/9 OK pat n
KRPS
Ok bit n
Yellow led K_OPMAN

Los_Rifn RRASTBY
FROM RRAJ
K display RX
Fig. 199. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic
426 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
52.5 Transceiver subsystem
52.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams

Please refer to:
para.23.4.3.2 on page 210 for an introductive description

Tab. 58. on page 285 for the transceiver equipping rules
para.19 on pages 127 thru 133 for the assembly drawings and operative notes.
The transceiver operates from 4 to 13 GHz. Different P/Ns are envisaged according to the operating
frequency and the modulation (32QAM or 64/128QAM).
Each Radio Transceiver is equipped with the following modules (see Fig. 200. on page 428 for the
transceiver configuration without Rx diversity, and Fig. 201. on page 428 for the transceiver configuration
with Rx diversity):
transmit & service module

receiver & IF Rx module (main & diversity)
DC/DC converter
Local oscillators RX and TX
Fig. 202. on page 429 shows the signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules.
For maintenance and installation purposes each Radio Transceiver unit must be considered as a unique
block.
A RI (remote inventory) identifies the unit Transceiver, the Local oscillator Tx and the Local oscillator Rx,
via software. RI is housed in the service TX.
A pin No_missing is available.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 427 / 522
OL TX MON

+VB

GND DC/DC OL TX RF TX

RF OUT
VB CONVERTER
RI
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN
RI P
OL RX MON
Canbus
No_missing L.O. Sync
.
OL RX RF RX RX IN
RI
IF OUT
Fig. 200. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity
OL TX MON
+VB
GND DC/DC OL TX RF TX
RF OUT
VB CONVERTER
RI
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN
RI P
OL RX MON
Canbus
No_ missing
L.O. Sync
.
OL RX RF RX RX IN
RF RX
RI MAIN
RX IN
RF RX
IF OUT DIV.
IF OUT RF RX
Fig. 201. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity
428 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
V Battery
IF
+5V
+V Battery adj +7V
+8V
Canbus
4 Bit control for +7V adj
DC/DC
+5V
12V
RF
PRX Measurement
Squelch
4 Bit Remote inventory
RX
Main
Manual gain control
IF
Manual/Auto RX command
OL+/ command
52.5.2 DC/DC converter module

+3.3V
+8V
OL
+15V
Main
12V

Squelch
Alarm loss loop
MON
OL
Alarm low level
3 Bit dati control
OL

Diversity
+5V
TX & SERVICE MODULE
12V
RF
Measurement
Squelch
RX
Manual gain control
Diversity
Manual/Auto RX command
IF
OL+/ command
Fig. 202. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules

+3.3V
following voltages: +5V, +8V, +7Vmax (digitally adjustable from 4V to 7V). See Fig. 202.
+8V
OR alarm module
+15V
OL TX
12V
Alarm loss loop
MON
Alarm low level
MW
3 Bit dati control

OL
429 / 522
DC/DC converter receives primary voltage from the shelf backpanel and supplies to Service module the
RF
MON
52.5.3 Transmit and Service module

[1] General

Transmit and Service module here described includes the following hardware components:

RT CONTROL
AMPLIFIER
UP CONVERTER
DELAY LINE
Fig. 203. herebelow shows the module block diagram.
IF input connectors are 75 1.0/2.3 Siemens, microwave output connectors are SMA 50. Coaxial
cable connects Tx output to branching filters. Return loss of TX output is guaranteed by dropin
isolator.
Transmit & service module performs the following functions:

management of all transceiver functions by mean of service module
IF amplification
upconversion of IF input signal to RF frequency
linear microwave amplification
DC/DC +5V MW
+5V +8V
Power. red Drain fet finale
+8V
PTX meas
.
+7V adj
. Meas
Temp .
4 Bit for 7V
Attenuator
. com
+5V
+3,3V
RXmain OL TX
+5V +5V +8V
12V 12V +8V +3,3V
OL+/command +15V +15V
Squelch 12V
Remoteinventory P Alarm loss loop
Alarm low level
Manual gain control
Manual/auto 3 bit dati control
Remote. inv
IFblock
In IF
Can bus
RX div . OL RX
+5V
+8V
12V +3,3V
IF detectorlevel
OL+/ command +15V
OL+/OL command
Squelch 12V
Remote inventory
Alarm loss loop
Manual gain control Alarm low level
Manual/auto 3 bit dati control
Remote. inv
Squelch
Fig. 203. Transmit and Service module block diagram
430 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
[2] RT CONTROL
RT control performs the following functions:

DC power distribution of the following voltages to different modules:

TX amplifier : 12V, +5V, +8V, +15V ,+7Vmax.
RX module: 12V, +5V.
OL module : 12V, +3.3V, +8V, +15V
Gain and output power of amplifying chain control
Cable losses recovering
Input IF level control
OL+/ for upconverter setting
A microprocessor controls all the functions of Transceiver, besides it holds a Remote Inventory made
with an E@PROM. Controlled functions are:
Tx module linearization and temperature compensation of transmitted power.

warning management
protection vs overtemperature
management of BER measure
management of ATPC function with power consumption control
setting of Tx Pout .
ON/OFF by software command.
Selection of LO+ or LO condition.
In Tx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:

RF detector level output
RF Attenuator command series
RF Attenuator command parallel
PTx Measurement
Temperature Measurement
Manual/Automatic TX command
Tx Temperature alarm
IF Tx detector level
OR alarm module
12V
+8V
+15V
+7V (digitally adjustable)
OL+/OL command
Presence reference negative voltage
Switch command for +8V
ATPC control
LO module warning management.

Selection of frequency.
Selection of Master/Slave condition (for RxLO only)
In LO module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:

Alarm loss loop TX
Alarm low level TX
Dati
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 431 / 522
Rx module warning management.
linearization and temperature compensation of field received indication.

Selection of master/slave condition.

Selection of LO+ or LO condition.

squelching.
In Rx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:

PRx Measurement
Manual/Automatic RX command
Squelch command
Manual gain command
OL+/OL command
DC/DC converter warning management.

voltage control with ATPC command for power consumption reduction.
[3] AMPLIFIER, UP CONVERTER AND DELAY LINE
The block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit is shown in Fig. 204. herebelow.
REVEALED
OUT
xn T RF
LO Vatt
IF MONITORED
n = 2 for C band 4 for 11 & 13 GHz
Fig. 204. Block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit
1) IF TX
The IF amplifier line accepts signal from 120 to 160 MHz with an input matched to 75 W.
It recovers cable losses (up to 30 m), therefore the incoming signal level can change from 12
dBm to 4 dBm ( standard input level is: 5 dBm).
IF signal is splitted and used to drive the circuits of Power consumption reduction. These circuits
include a delay line to synchronize the envelope resulting command with RF signal on final Fet
drain.
The output IF signal is held constant with an AGC circuit and with a power splitter 2 way 90_
is possible to select L.O. condition ( USB or LSB).
432 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
2) UPCONVERSION
The mixer is implemented in MMIC technology developed in AlcatelLucent.

In the same package are placed an SSB mixer, with four IF quadrature input signals, and a x2
frequency multiplier. The IF input level is 11 dBm +0 / 1 dB, and LO power is 15 dBm 1 dB
For 11 and 13 GHz frequency band the multiplying factor is x4, obtained with a third MMIC
placed in the same package.
On the same substrate and using the same technologies ,the RF chain is completed with an
active variable attenuator and a power amplifier, both realized in MMIC technology.
3) LINEAR MICROWAVE AMPLIFICATION
The RF output of upconverter is feeded into the input of power amplifier.
This is realized with two discrete transistor (GaAs Mosfets internally matched). Final Fets have
an output power of 4/12 W. At the output, before the dropin isolator, a double microstrip
directional coupler will provide two signals, one for monitoring and one for AGC detector.
The circuits are implemented on a duroid metalbacked substrate.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 433 / 522
52.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module

[1] General

RF
IN
T xn
Vatt
IF LO
n = 2 for C band 4 for 11 & 13 GHz
Fig. 205. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module
Receive & IF Rx module performs the following functions:
low noise amplification of RF incoming signal

signal variable attenuation following the incoming signal variations
downconversion to IF signal
IF amplification.
The RF input of the module is connected to the branching by coaxial cable with SMA connectors/50
.The return losses are guaranteed by dropin isolator. The connectors for IF signals are 75
1.0/2.3 Siemens.
[2] FRONT END
The RF incoming signal is amplified by a first stage ultra low noise HEMT amplifier.
A variable attenuator, driven by the AGC voltage, allows a protection against up fading propagation.
A second stage contains a GaAs MMIC amplifier.
The downconversion from RF to IF frequency is performed by the same micromodule used in

upconversion function. It has four IF outputs signal in quadrature. A MMIC multiplier x2 doubles the
L.O frequency (x4 in 11 GHz version). The LO power is 15 dBm 1 dB.
The four outputs are connected with hybrid 90_ and 180_ to create IF signal ; by properly connecting
hybrid 90_ is possible to select LSB or USB.
[3] IF Rx
IF block amplifier contains two attenuators for AGC, controlled from a filtered detector. Then a IF filter
reduces the signal level of adjacent and alternate channels. The IF section supplies alarms for low
field, for RFRx failure and a measure of received signal level. Another function controlled by IF
section is the squelch of RX for low fields
434 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
52.5.5 Local Oscillator module
[1] General
LO scheme for 9600LSY application includes the following functions:

TX LO module
Rx LO module, selectable master or slave option for H/V reuse applications.
A block diagram of the module is shown in the next Fig. 206.
Master
Lock Power Switch Slave
Alarm Alarm Position
Output Power Detection
Logic
Ext. VCO Power Detection
Diversity
Output
Switch Position
Lock Detect
Splitter
X2
VCO Switch
Multiplier
Main
Output
VCO External
Output VCO
Fig. 206. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 435 / 522
[2] TRANSMITTER LO MODULE

The module houses on the same multi layer board the Synthesizer, the Switch and the Multiplier.

It has two RF outputs port, named main and diversity and a monitor VCO output, moreover, for the

synchronization in master slave configuration, it makes available its VCO signal and can accept an
external VCO signal.
1) Synthesizer
The synthesizer is a single narrow band loop filter with a BiCMOS technology IC used for PLL
function, a low phase noise VCO and a 2 order active loop filter.
The signal is obtained locking the VCO frequency with a stable frequency reference TCXO.
At the output theres RFIC in order to achieve a good isolation from external circuits.
The Synthesizer makes available the Lock Detection status.
2) Multiplier
The multiplier is composed by monolithic input buffer, a BJT active X2 multiplier, bandpass
filter, RFIC amplifier and power splitter.
To avoid dangerous emission, the output power is delivered only when the VCO is locked.
The unit makes available the output power detection
External VCO Input Power 5 dBm + 5 dBm
3) Master/Slave Configuration
The Transmitter LO Module can run only in Master configuration, at the start up the Switch is
connected at the external VCO and only when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the
internal VCO
[3] RECEIVER LO MODULE
1) Synthesizer
As that of Transmitter LO Module
2) Multiplier
As that of Transmitter LO Module
3) Master/Slave Configuration
In Master configuration the LO runs with its internal VCO .

At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO and there is no power delivered
at the output ports; when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the internal VCO and
give power at the outputs.
This setting does not to be modified by alarm during the running condition.
A buffer (Frequency Reuse kit module) is present between the output of the external VCO
and the MASTER/SLAVE input, with the aim of increasing insulation.
In Slave configuration the LO runs with external VCO.

At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO, after the start up time, if is
not detected the VCO external power, the Switch must connect the internal VCO.
During the running condition, in the case of lack of VCO external power, the switch must
connect the internal VCO; when the power of external VCO is back, the Switch must
reconnect the external VCO.
436 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
52.6 Fans subsystem
The following Fig. 207. shows the block diagram of a FAN UNIT.
Please refer to:

para.23.4.6 on page 215 for an introductive description
para.32.5 on page 286 for equipping rules
para.18.3 on page 122 for assembly drawings and operative notes
point g ) on page 387 for the power supply description.
The FAN UNIT unit includes a microprocessor to manage together with the System Control subsystem,
through the CAN bus:
two Remote Inventories (N.B.)

two logical addresses according to the position of the DIPSwitches present on the FAN UNIT front
panel (N.B.)
the unit alarms (internal PSU failure, individual Fan alarms).
N.B. there are two Remote Inventories and two logical addresses to maintain SW compatibility with
the previously envisaged Fans subrack and Fans assembled (see para.63.4 on page 487).
BATT. A
BATT. B
CAN BUS
PSU PSU
RI1
P
RI2
FAN ALARM
PSU ALARM
FAN E FAN F FAN G FAN H
FAN A FAN B FAN C FAN D

0/1 0/1
LED
CAN
CAN TERMINATION BATTERYB
BATTERYA
Fig. 207. Fan subsystem block diagram
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 437 / 522
438 / 522

53 ALARM MANAGEMENT
This chapter gives summary and detailed information regarding the alarm management carried out by the
9600LSYLHR system:
Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) herebelow
Visual indications on page 440
Station Alarms on page 440
Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms on page 441
53.1 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO)
All the alarms detected are collected and processed by the System Controller unit in LHRC shelf.
Alarms provided by item HW

They can be displayed by Craft Terminal as indicated in para.46.5.1 on page 317.
External Alarms
Some input housekeeping signal are available on equipment connector; see para.53.4 on page 441
for details.
By Craft Terminal, each input housekeeping signal can be characterized for severity.
For further information and operative procedures, please refer to the CT OPERATORS
HANDBOOK.
Relationship between Alarms and their severity (Urgent / Not Urgent)

See Tab. 70. on page 445.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 439 / 522
53.2 Visual indications

53.2.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms

All the alarms detected on the units are collected and processed by the System Controller unit in
Baseband shelf which gives centralized optical indications by means of LEDs on its front coverplate.
Specifically (see Fig. 155. on page 303):

Red LED URG (1): detection of an URGENT alarm
Red LED NURG (2): detection of a NOT URGENT alarm
Yellow LED ATTD (3): alarm condition ATTENDED (see para.46.3.2 on page 311)
Yellow LED ABN (4): detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition.
Yellow LED IND (5): detection of an INDICATIVE alarm
53.2.2 Alarm visual indications on units
Besides the LEDs of Centralized Equipment Alarms described in para.53.2.1 on page 440, some other
equipment units are provided with specific alarm LED on their front coverplate, indicating the failure of
the unit.
Tab. 61. on page 313 lists such LEDs and indicate their normal status (alarm absence).
53.2.3 Status of radio protections

Visual indications detailed on page 314 allow to check the present status of radio protections.
53.3 Station Alarms
Some equipment alarms processed by the System Controller unit are carried to Baseband shelfs
connector M184 and then lead by a cable to TRUs connector M8 in order to switch on/off the TRU alarm
lamps.
The four alarm lamps on TRU are depicted in Fig. 208. herebelow.
RED (1)
RED (2)
YELLOW
GREEN
Fig. 208. Station Alarms on TRU
Their management is as follows:
The RED (1) lamp is activated in case of urgent (URG) alarm and a relevant telealarm is released
(this last function is excludible).
The RED (2) lamp is activated in case of non urgent (minor) alarm and a relevant telealarm is
released (this last function is excludible).
The YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of manual storing of alarm events (see para.46.3.2 on page
311). In this case the RED lamps are switched off to be ready to other new alarm indications. This
YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of ABNORMAL condition, together with led (4) of System
Controller unit (see para.53.2.1 on page 440).
The GREEN lamp is activated by the buzzer input. By presetting, it is possible to change this alarm
criteria and to drive the activation with the presence of the service voltage.
The signals sent to TRU are also available for Customer applications on other TRUs connectors (see
para.110.8.7 on page 178 for connectors, connector pinout and signal description).
440 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
53.4 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms
Summarizing and Housekeeping alarms, processed by the System Controller unit, are made available to
Customer by means of relay contacts whose interface access is described in para.110.8.8 on page 178.
The following Tab. 69. gives the relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm
primitives.
Tab. 70. on page 445 gives the relationship between Remote and Station Alarms.
Tab. 69. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives
Remote alarm Refer. Remote Alarm primitives
TOR ANDOR VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure
TAND ANDOR VBATT1 failure and VBATT2 failure
TUP GA2 SYSCO card fail or missing
URG GA4 or of all urgent alarms (severity = Major or Critical)
NURG GA5 or of all not urgent alarms (severity= Minor)
IND GA6 or of all indicative alarms (severity = Warning or
Indeterminate)
ABN GA7 or of all the abnormal conditions
TORC GA8 PSF1 or PSF2 card fail
TANC GA9 PSF1 and PSF2 card fail
Opt STM1 GA44 or of the following alarms:
module fail/missing STM1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module fail
STM1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module missing
INT GA10 or of all the internal alarms
card fail, card missing,
equipment mismatch, RC unreachable,
battery fail/missing,
LAN alarm,
transmitter Failure, transmitter Degraded
software mismatch, software processing error,
housekeeping alarm, unconfigured equipment
FANS card fail/ GA12 or of the following alarms:
missing FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (ADM cooling)
FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (LHR cooling)
SERV card fail/ GA13 or of the following alarms:
missing Service card fail
Service card missing
TPHDEV card fail
TPHDEV card missing
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 441 / 522


RRA GA16 N+0: or of the following alarms :
card fail/missing RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card fail
RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card missing
N+1: or of the following alarms :
RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card fail
RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card missing
RRASBY 0 card fail
RRASBY 0 card missing
MD card fail/missing GA15 or of the following alarms :
MD X (X = 0,..,9) card fail
MD X (X = 0,..,9) card missing
TRI card fail/missing GA11 or of the following alarms :
TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card fail
TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card missing
LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail
LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing
RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail
RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing
HBER GA17 or of highBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9)
LBER GA18 or of lowBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9)
PSF1 card fail/ GA 40 or of the following alarms:
missing PSF1 card fail
PSF1 card missing
PSF2 card fail/ GA 41 or of the following alarms:
missing PSF2 card fail
PSF2 card missing
PSU GA 30 or of the following alarms:
card fail/missing PSU X (X=0,..,9) card fail,
PSU X (X=0,..,9) card missing
Second IF unit GA 42 or of the following alarms:
card fail/missing Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module fail,
Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module missing
Third IF unit GA 43 or of the following alarms:
card fail/missing Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module fail,
Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module missing
442 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10

CHX_affect CH0 = GA 20 or of all alarms related to channels X (from 0 to 9) and

(X = 0,..,9) CH1 = GA 21 affecting the traffic:
CH2 = GA 22 equipment alarms:
CH3 = GA 23 RRA X card fail
CH4 = GA 24 RRA X card missing
CH5 = GA 25 STM1 Opt. X card fail
CH6 = GA 26 STM1 Opt. X card missing
CH7 = GA 27 MD X card fail
CH8 = G A28 MD X card missing
CH9 = GA 29 Second IF (X.1) card fail
Second IF (X.1) card missing
Third IF (X.2) card fail
Third IF (X.2) card missing
TRI X card fail
TRI X card missing
LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card fail
LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card missing
RX X card fail
RX X card missing
PSU X card fail
PSU X card missing
sfwrEnvironmentProblem (RRA X, MD X, TRI X)
communication alarms:
LOS (STM1 Opt. X)
LOF (STM1 Opt. X)
transmitterFailure (STM1 Opt. X)
transmitterDegraded (STM1 Opt. X)
LOF (RRA X, rsCTPBid line/radio side)
modulationFail (MD X)
modLOS (MD X)
demodulationFail (MD X)
demLOS (MD X)
rxFail (RX X)
txLOS (TRI X)
txFail (TRI X)
incompatibleTxPower (TRI X)
LOF (RRA X, radioSPITTPBidR1)
HBER (MD X)
LBER (MD X)
TIM (RRA X)
RCIM (RRA X)
atpcLoop (RRA X)
atpcIdentifierMismatch (RRA X)
rxDivFail (RX Div. X)
demDivLOS (Second IF X.1)
demXpicLOS (Second or Third IF X.1 or X.2)
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 443 / 522


CHX on protection CH1 = GA 31 for each channel, it will indicate if the switch is on protecting
(X = 1,..,9) CH2 = GA 32 channel (in the N+1 configuration only one channel can be on
CH3 = GA 33 protection)
CH4 = GA 34
CH5 = GA 35
CH6 = GA 36
CH7 = GA 37
CH8 = GA 38
CH9 = GA 39
end of Tab. 69.
N.B. Concerning the management of the remote alarms for N+1 configuration, only the alarms raised
by the boards of the allowed channels are considered.
444 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 70. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms
N.B. For the alarm meaning refer to Tab. 69. on page 441
Consequent Remote
Remote Alarm Station Alarm
Alarms
TOR
TOR HW NURG SW HW
RNURG
TAND HW URG HW RURG HW
URG
TUP HW HW RURG HW
INT
URG SW RURG SW
NURG SW RNURG SW
IND SW
ABN SW ABN SW
NURG
TORC SW SW RNURG SW
INT
URG
TANC HW HW RURG HW
INT
Opt. STM1 URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
module fail/missing INT (note 1) RNURG
INT SW
FANS URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
card fail INT RNURG
SERV URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
card fail/missing INT RNURG
RRA URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
card fail/missing INT (note 1) RNURG
MD URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
Second IF unit URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
Third IF unit URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
TRI URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
PSF1 URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
PSF2 URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
RURG/
HBER SW URG/NURG/IND SW SW
RNURG
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 445 / 522

RURG/
LBER SW URG/NURG/IND SW SW

RNURG

CHX_affect
SW
(X=0..9)
CHX on protection
SW
(X=1..9)
end of Tab. 70.
(note 1) A CHX_affect consequent remote alarm is generated according to the channel affected by the
primary alarm.
a) END OF SECTION
446 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
SECTION 6: APPENDICES
Appendix A Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD norms and equipment labelling

It describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must 449
be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
Appendix B HPA configuration

It sumsup the characteristics of the 9600LSYLHR/HPA system, with particular
emphasis on the different equipment rules of the 9600LSYLHR main rack when the 471
additional HPA rack is equipped. Moreover, it describes the maintenance procedures
of the 9600LSYLHR/HPA system.
Appendix C Obsolete items

It describes items no longer envisaged in newer supplies:
the former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA**
the former version Enhanced TRU P/N 3DB05602AAAA or 3DB05602AAAB
the Additional Housekeeping unit
the Fans subrack (P/N 3DB03242AA**) and Fans assembled (P/N 485
3DB03238AA**) units
the Optical Modules P/N 3AL78815AA** and 3AL78815AB**
the Flash Card 48MB P/N 1AB151770002
This information is just for the convenience of Customers having them still installed
in their system or still available in their spare part stock.
Appendix D Documentation guide

It contains all information regarding this handbook (purpose, applicability, history) and
495
the Customer Documentation set it belongs to, in particular the list of the handbooks
the Operators should have in order to carry out the required operations.
Appendix E List of symbols and abbreviations 513
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 447 / 522
448 / 522

APPENDICES
61 APPENDIX A: SAFETY, EMC, EMF, ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT
LABELLING
61.1 Introduction
This appendix describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested (see also point
3 ) on page 3) that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment. The
stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the related
manuals listed in para.64.2 on page 497.
This chapter is organized as follows:
Compliance with International Norms herebelow
Safety Rules on page 450

including:
General Rules on page 450

Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command on page 451
Dangerous Electrical Voltages on page 452
Harmful Optical Signals on page 453
Optical safety: equipment specific data and instructions on page 455
Risks of Explosions on page 458
Moving Mechanical Parts on page 458
Heatradiating Mechanical Parts on page 459
Equipment emitting RF power (EMF norms) on page 460
Specific safety rules in this handbook on page 461
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) on page 462

including:
EMC General Norms Installation on page 462

EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation on page 462
EMC General Norms Maintenance on page 462
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges on page 463
Suggestions, notes and cautions on page 463
Labels affixed to the Equipment on page 464

including:
Labels specific for 9600LSY Equipment on page 465

General use labels on page 466
61.2 Compliance with International Norms
Refer to documents cited in chapter 24 on page 245.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 449 / 522
61.3 Safety Rules

61.3.1 General Rules

Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the related Handbooks, in particular:
Installation
LineUp or Commissioning
Maintenance chapter of the Technical Handbook
Observe safety rules
When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be

aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions etc.
It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
SAFETY RULES
APPENDICES
450 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
61.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are
enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
dangerous electrical voltages
harmful optical signals
risk of explosion
moving mechanical parts
heatradiating Mechanical Parts
microwave radiations
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 451 / 522
The symbols presented in para.61.3.3 through 61.3.9 are all the possible symbols that
could be present on AlcatelLucent equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the

equipment this handbook refers to.

61.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Description specific for 9600LSYLHR/LHRC
61.3.3.1 Electrical safety: Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
As far as electrical safety is concerned, this is a Class I equipment, then the label associated to it states
that the equipment must be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
61.3.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. or
d.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a) Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
APPENDICES
452 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
61.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals

61.3.4.1 Optical safety: Labelling
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a laser, the labels comply with the IEC 608251 and IEC 608252
International Norms.
According to the stated norms, the presence of a laser with Hazard Level 3B or higher is indicated
by the following warning label in compliancy with the IEC 82511993 International Norms:
As far as optical safety is concerned, this equipment is fitted with Hazard Level 1 laser type,
thus the above symbol is not present.
For this equipment (fitted with Hazard Level 1 laser type) no other labels regarding the laser
characteristics are present, with the exception of that (optional) specified in para.61.3.5.4 on page
456.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 453 / 522
61.3.4.2 Optical safety: general rules

For operations limited to 9600LSYLHR/LHRC equipment, no specific cautions regarding optical safety

must be observed.

Nevertheless, if you operate also on other equipment where laser labels are affixed, observe the following
cautions:
On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed
and that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables
transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c) Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d) All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f) Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g) Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h) Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
APPENDICES
454 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
61.3.5 Optical safety: equipment specific data and instructions
61.3.5.1 General
This paragraph applies to LHR system only.

As far as ADM is concerned, please refer to relevant Technical Documentation (para.64.2.5 on page
506).
61.3.5.2 Hazard Level classification
The Optical Safety characteristics and related precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser
radiation given herein, are relevant to the optical modules that can be housed on the equipment units with
STM1 interfaces:
RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY units.
The HAZARD LEVEL classification of the different optical interfaces of LHR system is given in Tab. 71.
herebelow.
The hazard level can be assigned in accordance with the requirements of:
IEC 608251 (1993) + Am. 1 (1997) and IEC 608252 (1993) + Am. 1 (1997)
or
IEC 608251 (1998) + Am. 2 (2001) and IEC 608252 (2000)
Tab. 71. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces
UNIT/PORT OPTICAL INTERFACE HAZARD LEVEL
STM1 S1.1 (short haul) 1
61.3.5.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics
Output optical interfaces data: the wavelength and the maximum optical power at the output connector
of incorporated laser sources is given in the document enclosed at the end of this manual (REF.[C] in
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 455 / 522
61.3.5.4 Labelling

The labels reproduced below are affixed during factory settings, except those (explanatory) concerning

the STM1 ports. In this case the labels are placed in a plastic bag and provided together with the optical

module. The customer shall affix the label on the fibre protection cover of the involved card, depending
on the particular interface of the module (STM1 port). In the following description it is specified when the
label shall be affixed by the customer.
[1] Standard label for all modules
The label is put on the fibre protection cover of all the involved card.
According to stated norms, the presence of this label is not mandatory (for hazard level 1).
[2] Multilanguage Label Kit
The multilanguage label kit, for STM1 ports, is placed in the same plastic bag provided together with
the module where explanatory labels (in English language), above mentioned, are put.
The multilanguage label kit contains a set of labels that reproduce the same (explanatory) above
depicted in the following languages:
Italian
French
Spanish
German
The customer, to its own discretion, may stick the labels with appropriate language upon the
preexisting ones or, in case of STM1 ports, directly on the fibre protection cover of the involved
card.
APPENDICES
456 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
61.3.5.5 Aperture and fiber connectors
The locations of apertures and fibre connectors are reported on topographical drawings of units front view
and access cards front view:

in para.18.2.4 on page 115 (RRACHANNEL unit)

in para.18.2.5 on page 117 (RRASTANDBY unit)
61.3.5.6 Engineering design features
In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.
The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an appropriate connector that totally shuts up the laser
radiation. Moreover a plastic cover is fitted upon optical connectors by means of screws.
In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure according to ITUT G.958 Rec.
is implemented either on STM1 ports.
ALS timing are not longer than maximum specified in G.958.
61.3.5.7 Safety instruction
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning
concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported in
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 457 / 522
61.3.6 Risks of Explosions

61.3.6.1 : Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
61.3.7 Moving Mechanical Parts
61.3.7.1 Labelling and safety instructions
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
APPENDICES
458 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
61.3.8 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts

61.3.8.1 Labelling and safety instructions
The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 459 / 522
61.3.9 Equipment emitting RF power (EMF norms)


Reminder from site preparation procedure:
The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive.
The following rules should be strictly applied by Customer:
Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general
public.
Compliance boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked.
Workers should be allowed to switchoff the power if they have to operate inside compliance
boundaries
Assure good cable connection.
Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access (if possible the
cylinder delimitating the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the
transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than
2 meters high).
Install the antenna as for as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power.
Anyway remind that someone standing in front of the 9600LSY antenna may cause traffic
shutdown
Place the relevant stickers:
On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance
boundaries and/or the transmission area of the antenna, i.e. roof top
installation):
Warning label Do not stand on the antenna axis
On the mast (front side):

EMF emission warning sign (Yellow and black) to be placed at bottom
of antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna (roof top
EMF emission installation)
warning sign
On the antenna (rear side):
EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna.
Antenna compliance boundaries

B
For standard LHR/LHRC systems, antenna diameter 1.8 m (6 ft) and 7+1 configuration (LHR worst
case), the exposure levels calculated directly in front of antenna do not exceed the maximum permissible
exposure levels established for general public/uncontrolled environment and occupational/controlled
environment; as a consequence of the above, it is not necessary to define a compliance boundary (A and
B in figure above).
In case of worse conditions [i.e. with antenna diameter < 1.8 m (6 ft)], if necessary, please contact
AlcatelLucent WTD Quality Dept. (through your local AlcatelLucent dealer), to have A and B boundaries
calculation.
APPENDICES
460 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
61.3.10 Specific safety rules in this handbook
Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters:

Part A (Hardware Installation Handbook):
chapter 12 on page 47
chapter 13 on page 51
chapter 14, para.14.1 on page 53
chapter 15 , para.15.3 on page 69
chapter 16:
chapter 18, para.18.2.4 on page 116
Part B (Technical Handbook):
chapter 45, para.45.1 on page 307
chapter 47:

para.47.4.2 on pages 331332
appendix B, para.62.6.6.1 on page 482
appendix C, para.63.5 on page 493
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 461 / 522
61.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,

grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic

units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).
Before starting any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
Technical Handbook, specifically to Handbooks:
Installation,
LineUp or Commissioning
Maintenance chapter in this Handbook
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION EMC NORMS
61.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation
All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar
documents)
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
Install filters outside the equipment as required
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decrease it.
Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
61.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation
Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility

Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.)
To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
61.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance
Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
APPENDICES
462 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
61.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.
Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with the Antistatic protection device kit described in point a ) on page 9.
61.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions
Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...

statement....
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 463 / 522
61.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment

This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial

labels affixed to the equipment, with the exception of those already mentioned in para.61.3.2 (page 451)

thru 61.5 (page 463).
The label description is grouped as follows:
Label specific for standard 9600LSYLHR Equipment, on page 465
Label specific for additional HPA Equipment, on page 466
General Use Labels, on page 466.
APPENDICES
464 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
61.7.1 Label specific for standard 9600LSYLHR Equipment
LABEL POSITION
A B
SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING
AlcatelLucent Logo
9667LSY (example) Equipment Acronym

CE European Community Logo
12345 (example) Notified body
! Not harmonized frequency logo
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment) Logo (for details refer to document REF.[C] in
N.B. this symbol is present only on equipment supplied
by AlcatelLucent from August 13th, 2005
Electrostatic Device Logo
0503077 (example) Factory identification

A Factory identification bar code 128
B Area for optional additional information (e.g. Omologation
certificate number)
Fig. 209. Standard 9600LSYLHR equipment identification label
N.B. Label indicating power supply data according to CE/UL norms is presently not envisaged for
standard 9600LSYLHR equipment.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 465 / 522
61.7.2 Label specific for additional HPA Equipment

Please refer to the 9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook (REF.[F] on page 500).

61.7.3 General use labels
Fig. 210. thru Fig. 215. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.
Fig. 216. thru Fig. 217. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the
labels.
The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Tab. 72. Label references
Ref. No. Name of Label
1 Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
2 Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
3 Item identification label item on catalog
4 Label identifying the equipment
5 Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.) + CE mark
6 Serial number of item specified on catalogue + Subrack ESD mark
7 Omologation certificate number (optional)
8 Label indicating power supply data according to CE/UL norms
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.
Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
APPENDICES
466 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
4
ABCD
Fig. 210. Largesubrack labels
N.B. the relative label position

could be different from
that depicted here
4 8 6
Fig. 211. Smallsubrack labels
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 72. on page 466.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 467 / 522
2
ABC
3
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxx
Fig. 212. Labels on units with standard cover plate
ABC
Fig. 213. Modules label
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 72. on page 466.
APPENDICES
468 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
NB.1
1
ABC
NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side
Fig. 214. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly
NB.1
ABC
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
Fig. 215. Back panels internal label
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 72. on page 466
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 469 / 522
FACTORY P/N + CS

FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
Fig. 216. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS

ALCATEL FACTORY PART
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE NUMBER + SPACE + CS
(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
ACRONYM
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

SERIAL NUMBER (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
Fig. 217. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
APPENDICES
470 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
62 APPENDIX B: HPA CONFIGURATION
This Appendix sumsup the characteristics of the 9600LSYLHR/HPA system, with particular emphasis
on the different equipment rules of the 9600LSYLHR main rack when the additional HPA rack is
equipped. Moreover, it describes the maintenance procedures of the 9600LSYLHR/HPA system.
62.1 General description and allowed configurations
9600LSYLHR/HPA must be considered an extension of the standard 9600LSYLHR systems.
The main objective of HPA extension is to improve the standard 9600LSYLHR system gain. It is a
nonstandard product developed for specific Customers.
[1] Available Frequency bands and frequency plans
The equipment can operate only on the frequency bands and frequency plans specified in
Tab. 73. below
Tab. 73. Available frequency bands and frequency plans for 9600LSYLHR/HPA system
Band Allowed Frequency plans
ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H

7 GHz
N.B. refer to the enclosed Transceiver Reference Manual (REF.[D] in Tab. 91. on
page 521 of this handbook.
[2] Possible types of configuration
SYSTEM NO OF RF
CONFIGURATION CHANNELS CONFIGURATION
Copolar at 56 MHz
1+1
N+1 channel spacing
with/without
occasional traffic 2+1 Alternatepolar at 56 MHz
3+1 channel spacing
1+0 Copolar at 56 MHz

2+0 channel spacing
N+0
3+0 Alternatepolar at 56 MHz
4+0 channel spacing
N.B. Neither Frequency Reuse nor Space Diversity are allowed
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 471 / 522
62.2 Equipment layout

The 9600LSYLHR/HPA system is composed by:

one 9600LSYLHR quasistandard system inside its own rack, equipped:
with 1 to 4 transceivers (in the transceiver shelf) and relevant RRA, MD and PSU units (in the
baseband shelf)
with a FANS shelf, if necessary
with a top rack unit
without the standard Tx/Rx branching filters system, but with a Rxonly branching filters system
specifically developed for this application
one additional HPA rack equipped with:
1 to 4 HPA units (Tx boosters), a suited Tx branching filters system, and a top rack unit
The 9600LSYLHR rack and the HPA rack can be installed sidebyside or backtoback. This implies,
according to the chosen station layout:
two possible cableinterconnection solutions, from each LHRs transceiver and the relevant HPA
two possible dedicated toprack branching interconnection solutions, among the HPA racks Tx
branching, the LHR racks Rx branching and the antenna/antennas systems.
Fig. 218. and Tab. 74. on page 473 depict a fully equipped 9600LSYLHR/HPA system in sidebyside
configuration, and the fixed association between LHR racks TRIs and HPA modules.
APPENDICES
472 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
TOPRACK BRANCHING INTERCONNECTION
LHR RACKS TRU HPA RACKS TRU
Tx BRANCHING
HPA RACK
LHR RACK
HPA3
HPA2
Rx BRANCHING
HPA1
HPA0
TRI1
TRI0
TRI8 TRI9
N.B. baseband shelf and FANS shelf are not shown in this figure
Fig. 218. Fully equipped 9600LSYLHR/HPA view (sidebyside configuration)
Tab. 74. Association between LHR racks TRIs and HPA modules
ASSOCIATED TO HPA RACKS HPA MODULE
LHR RACKS TRANSCEIVER
(BOOSTER)
TRI0 HPA0
TRI1 HPA1
TRI8 HPA2
TRI9 HPA3
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 473 / 522
62.3 LHR rack equipment provisioning for LHR/HPA system

62.3.1 Rack and shelves layout

A
J
empty area B
empty area
POS in P/N
figure NAME (REF in Tab. 39. DESCRIPTION
above on page 183)
para.23.4.2 on page
(A) ETSI RACK H 2200 [1] 208
(B) TRU SUBRACK [3] para.16.3 on page 84
[17] para.15.4.1 on page 75
SUBSTITUTIVE CABLE
(C) para.63.3 on page 486
para.15.4.2 on page
N.B.
77
SUBRACK 2G LH
(D) [6] para.62.3.2.3 on page 476
(baseband shelf)
(E) FAN UNIT H=50 [8] para.32.5 on page 286
For details refer to manual
9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0
Area for Rx branching
Branching drawings
(F)
(REF.[G] on page 500 of this
manual)
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE
[35] para.19.7.2 on page 145
KIT
RT SUBRACK
(G) [7] para.62.3.2.4 on page 477
(transceiver shelf)
(J) KIT LOUDSPEAKER [39] para.16.3.3 on page 88
Fig. 219. LHR rack and shelves layout for LHR/HPA system
APPENDICES
474 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
62.3.2 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves
62.3.2.1 General equipping rules

According to Fig. 220. herebelow:
a) in Base Band shelf, units SYSCO, SERV, PSF1 and PSF2 are always equipped
b) the number associated to RRA, MD and PSU groups is related to logical and physical channel. Only
not dashed RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups can be equipped.
The same number identifies the associated TRI.
LOGICAL PHYSICAL
BASE BAND SHELF TR SHELF
CHANNEL CHANNEL
1 0 RRA0 MD0 PSU0 TRI0
c) in the unused slots, dummy plates mus be equipped to ensure EMC performance as well as
equipment correct ventilation.

S R M R M RM R
S R R R R R M RM

Y M M M M M
R R R D R D RD R
E R R R D D RD

S D D A D D
A A A
C
R A
0
A
1 2 2
A
3 4 5 A 6 7 A 8 A9

V 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BB SHELF
O

P P P

P P P P P P P P P


UNITS
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2

NEVER
EQUIPPED

T T T T T T T T T T

R R R R R R R R R R
I

I I I I I I I I I TR SHELF
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Fig. 220. Layout of max 4 channels in BB & TR shelves for LHR/HPA system
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 475 / 522
62.3.2.2 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline

1+0 configuration

1+1 / 2+0 2+1 / 3+0 3+1 / 4+0
CP configurations AP configurations AP configurations
H (V) H (V) H (V)
V (H) V (H)
62.3.2.3 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules
For units SYSCO, FLASH CARD, Service card, RRA, MD (*), PSU and PSF (included the dummy plates
to equip in empty slots), please refer to para.32.3.1 on page 280, but taking into account the specific rules
for LHR/HPA system explained in previous paragraphs:
General equipping rules para.62.3.2.1 on page 475
Channel provisioning/expansion guideline para.62.3.2.2 above
(*) As far as MD unit is concerned (see Tab. 53. on page 283), and according to Tab. 73. on page
471, the only possible MD type is MODEM LHSTM11WST with no CANCCOMB module
equipped.
APPENDICES
476 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
62.3.2.4 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates
Tab. 75. Part List of 9674LSY 2G Transceiver for HPA

9674LSY TRANSCEIVER FOR HPA

Each Transceiver is an assembly made up by components that, from item provisioning point of view, are
independent items. For details, refer to the enclosed Transceiver Reference Manual (REF.[D] in
Tab. 91. on page 521 of this handbook), taking into account that Space Diversity and Frequency Reuse
are not used in LHR/HPA system.
Label for
Q.TY
NAME P/N Remote
Inventory
7,17,7 GHz TRANSMITTER FOR HPA

Refer to para.19.6.2 on page 135 for explanations on 3DB12076AA** 07128T 1
transmitter specialization for a frequency plan
7,18,5 GHz RECEIVER 3DB02533AA** 7+128R 1
9674LSY L.O. 3DB02672AA** 07LO 2
N.B. P/Ns of Receiver and Local Oscillator are equal to those of the standard 9674LSY
Transceiver, while the P/N of the transmitter is different.
N.B. Compatible 2GR Transceiver for HPA are not available.
DUMMY PLATE
When a transceiver is not equipped, the corresponding slot is closed by a dummy plate.
Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
RT FRONT PLATE KIT [38]
62.4 HPA rack equipment provisioning
Refer to 9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook (REF.[F] on page 500 of this manual).
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 477 / 522
62.5 LHR/HPA system operative instructions

62.5.1 Supporting software

The 7,17,7 GHz TRANSMITTER FOR HPA P/N 3DB12076AA (see Tab. 75. on page 477) is
supported by SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.0 version V2.0.5 or later.
62.5.2 Hardware setting
For LHR RACKs units refer to chapter 18 on page 105
HPA modules have no setting options
62.5.3 HPA module front view
See Fig. 221. on page 481. For further information, refer to 9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Technical
Handbook (REF.[F] on page 500 of this manual).
62.5.4 ModemTransceiverBoosterBranching connections
For logical connections, refer to Fig. 222. on page 484. For physical implementation, refer to the specific
LHRHPA documentation (Tab. 80. on page 500).
62.5.5 Operation
The ATPC function must always be disabled
The transmit power static adjustment function must never be used
The HPA module squelch can be carried out manually by Craft Terminal. For further information, refer to
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 504 of this manual)
APPENDICES
478 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
62.6 LHR/HPA system maintenance instructions
These instructions are given in addition to those provided in SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE of this
handbook, and are strictly limited to the items specifically belonging to the HPA system:
items in HPA rack
HPAsystemspecific transceiver units (TRI) in LHR rack
62.6.1 Management of HPA module state, alarms, squelch
Trough the IN/OUT control of each HPA module [ (12) in Fig. 221. on page 481]:
module state and alarm signals are connected to the LHRs input housekeeping system. For further
information, refer to 9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook (REF.[F] on page 500 of this
manual)
the module squelch can be carried out manually by Craft Terminal. For further information, refer to
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 504 of this
manual)
No other actions are envisaged.
62.6.2 HPARACKs TRU
The HPARACKs TRU has no alarm lamps (or, even if equipped, they have no use).
Moreover, the on/off position of circuit breakers of the HPARACKs TRU is not monitored.
62.6.3 Spare parts
[1] Spare parts for LHR rack
For all units (*), please refer to para.43.3.1 on page 298

(*) As far as MODEM unit is concerned (see Tab. 53. on page 283), and according to
Tab. 73. on page 471, the only possible MD type is MODEM LHSTM11WST with no
CANCCOMB module equipped.
For Transceiver units, please refer to para.Tab. 75. on page 477
[2] Spare parts for HPA rack

The minimum spare part set to be provisioned includes:
HPA Modules (with different P/Ns)
Fan Unit for HPA Modules (one P/N for all possible types of HPA Module)
Spare fuses for HPA racks TRU
For such P/Ns, refer to 9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook (REF.[F] on page 500 of
this manual)
Moreover, a suitable kit of fuses used in the HPA modules [ (11) in Fig. 221. on page 481] should be
available. They are standard fuses that can be bought in field, and have the following characteristics:
250V, 15A, length = 20 mm , diameter = 5 mm.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 479 / 522
62.6.4 Preventive (routine) Maintenance

Apply the same suggestions given para.45.1 on page 307.

As far as the periodic cleaning of the Fans units housed inside HPA units is concerned, apply the same
rules given para.45.2 on page 308.
62.6.5 System state display and troubleshooting by visual indications
For (x) reference, see Fig. 221. on page 481.
[1] HPA unit
Each HPA unit has two leds:
green led (4) : it is on when the unit is powered on.
If this led is off, verify:
that both HPARACKs TRU circuit breakers giving power to the BOOSTER are ON
that the switch (10) of the HPA unit is ON
cabling on power supply inputs (8) and (9)
If such checks are OK and this led is still off:
verify the status of fuse (11).
if broken, replace it (characteristics in para.62.6.3 point [2] on page 479)
if it breaks again, replace the HPA unit (proceed as specified in para.62.6.6.2 on page
482)
red led (5) : it is ON when the unit is powered on, but has an internal failure. In this case replace
the HPA unit (proceed as specified in para.62.6.6.2 on page 482).
[2] Fans units
Each HPA unit is equipped with two Fans units: upper (13) and lower (16)
Each Fans unit has a red led: upper (14) and lower (17)
If this red led is ON, replace the Fans unit. This replacement does not require specific cautions (HPA
module powering off must not be done). After the replacement, fill the Repair Form and return the
faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the AlcatelLucent authorized repair center (see
para.48.2 on page 353)
APPENDICES
480 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
red led of
(1) RF output to HPA Tx branching filter
(14) upper
fan unit
(2) RF input from associated TRI
(13) upper
fan unit (3) RF OUT monitoring
(15) upper
fan unit (4) green led (unit switched on)
handle
(5) red led (OR of internal alarms)
(6) gain adjustment screw
(7) HPA module

handle
(8) power supply input A
(9) power supply input B
(16) lower (10) ON (1) / OFF (0) switch

fan unit
(18) lower
fan unit
handle (11) fuse
red led of
(17) lower
fan unit
(12) IN/OUT control
Fig. 221. HPA module front view
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 481 / 522
62.6.6 Replacement procedures for Booster and Transceiver

62.6.6.1 Warnings

Read carefully Warnings on page 326
ADDITIONAL SAFETY RULES

Operations described herebelow and on following page 483, if not properly
carried out, could expose the Operator to hazardous high level RF emission.
To avoid this risk, carry out these procedures exactly as they are
described, without excluding any step.
62.6.6.2 BOOSTER (HPA module) replacement procedure
[1] Switch OFF both TRI [ switch (A) ] and BOOSTER [ switch (B) ]
[2] Switch OFF both HPARACKs TRU circuit breakers giving power to the BOOSTER
[3] Disconnect all cables from BOOSTER to be replaced
[4] Verify that the spare BOOSTER P/N is equal to that of BOOSTER to be replaced. Set spare
BOOSTERs switch to OFF, before inserting it in the system
[5] Replace BOOSTER and reconnect all cables disconnected in step [3], with the exception of black
cable (1)
[6] Connect the 30dB/50W attenuator to the power meter
[7] Connect the power meter to the BOOSTERs point (C) (RF Output of HPA)
[8] Switch ON the TRI [ switch (A) ], and wait 15 min for TRI warmup
[9] Switch ON both HPARACKs TRU circuit breakers giving power to the BOOSTER (they were
switched OFF in step [2])
[10] Switch ON the BOOSTER [ switch (B) ]
[11] By means of the front panel screw (G) available on HPA, adjust the output power in order to have
+38dBm
[12] Disconnect the blue cable (3) from TRIs point (F)
[13] Disconnect the power meter (that was connected in step [7]) from BOOSTERs point (C)
[14] Connect the output of HPA to the related TX RF filter, i.e. black cable (1) to BOOSTERs point (C)
[15] Reconnect the blue cable (3) to TRIs point (F) (it was disconnected in step [12])
[16] Check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal
[17] Fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the AlcatelLucent
authorized repair center (see para.48.2 on page 353)
End of procedure
APPENDICES
482 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
62.6.6.3 TRI (Transceiver) replacement procedure

[1] Switch OFF both TRI [ switch (A) ] and associated BOOSTER [ switch (B) ]
[2] Disconnect all cables from faulty TRI (to be replaced)

[3] Extract faulty TRI
[4] Verify that the spare TRI P/N is equal to that of TRI to be replaced
[5] Set the hardware presettings of the spare TRI equal to those of faulty TRI. To do that, proceed as
specified in step 5 ) on page 350
[6] Set spare TRIs switch to OFF, before inserting it in the system
[7] Insert spare TRI and reconnect all cables disconnected in previous step [2]
[8] Connect the 30dB/50W attenuator to the power meter
[9] Disconnect :
the black cable (1) from BOOSTERs point (C)
the point (E) of blue cable (2) from BOOSTERs point (D)
[10] Connect the power meter to the point (E) of blue cable (2) [it is the output of the 5,3 m cable still
connected to the TRI RF Output and, in this moment, it is disconnected from BOOSTERs point (D)]
[11] Switch ON the TRI [ switch (A) ], and wait 15 min for TRI warmup
[12] Connect Craft Terminal to SYSCO unit, login and activate the supervision
[13] By Craft Terminal, verify the TRI correct frequency. Of course, the set TRI frequency must be the
same of the tuned RF filter
[14] By Craft Terminal, set the output power in order to have +16,5 dBm at the output of the RF cable (E)
CRAFT TERMINAL actions:
Radio (menu option)
ATPC
Power and Threshold setting
Channel x
Verify the Disabled state of ATPC function
Set
Apply
[15] Disconnect the blue cable (3) from TRIs point (F)
[16] Disconnect the power meter presently connected to point (E) of blue cable (2) , and connect it to the
BOOSTERs point (C) (RF Output of HPA)
[17] Connect blue cable (2) (E) to the BOOSTERs point (D) [i.e. the TRITXRF cable (OUTPUT) to TX
Booster (INPUT) ]
[18] Switch ON the BOOSTER [ switch (B) ]
[20] By means of the front panel screw (G) available on HPA adjust the output power in order to have
+38dBm
[21] Disconnect again the blue cable (3) from TRIs point (F)
[22] Disconnect the power meter detector (that was connected in step [16]) from BOOSTERs point (C)
[23] Connect the output of HPA to the related TX RF filter, i.e. black cable (1) to BOOSTERs point (C)
[25] Check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal
[26] Fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the AlcatelLucent
End of procedure
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 483 / 522
MODEM HPA TX
BRANCHING

FILTER

blue cable (3) black cable (1)
HPA RX
BRANCHING
FILTER
black blue cable

(C)
(2)
(D)
(E)
red
(G)
(F)
(A)
(B)
BOOSTER
TRI
LHR RACK HPA RACK
N.B. For the TRIBOOSTER association, refer to Tab. 74. on page 473
Fig. 222. ModemTransceiverBoosterBranching logical connections in 9600LSYLHR/HPA system
APPENDICES
484 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
63 APPENDIX C: OBSOLETE ITEMS
This appendix describes items no longer envisaged in newer supplies:
the former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA** and the relevant interconnections with LHR system,
para.63.1 below.
the former version Enhanced TRU P/N 3DB05602AAAA or 3DB05602AAAB and the relevant
interconnections with LHR system, para.63.2 below.
the Additional Housekeeping unit, para.63.3 on page 486
the Fans subrack (P/N 3DB03242AA**) and Fans assembled (P/N 3DB03238AA**) units,
the Optical Modules P/N 3AL78815AA** and 3AL78815AB**, para.63.5 on page 493
the Flash Card 48MB P/N 1AB151770002, para.63.6 on page 494
This information is just for the convenience of Customers having still installed them in their system.
63.1 Information on former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA**
The former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA** and the relevant interconnections with LHR system are
described in a phased out handbook. Refer to para.64.2.4 point [1] on page 505 for details.
63.2 Information on former version Enhanced TRU P/N 3DB05602AAAA or

3DB05602AAAB
The former version Enhanced TRU P/N 3DB05602AAAA or 3DB05602AAAB and the relevant
interconnections with LHR system are described in the previous ED.07 of this same handbook.
If necessary, it can be provided on explicit request specifying the P/N 3DB02839AAAA and the edition
ED.07.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 485 / 522
63.3 Information on Additional Housekeeping unit

63.3.1 General

[1] Unit usage
This optional unit (equipped as depicted in Fig. 137. on page 272) was meant to increase by 18 the
number of Housekeeping inputs available. Its main use was to connect the TRU subracks circuit
breakers, thus to make their ON/OFF position manageable by the equipment Alarm Surveillance
system. In new supplies, this function is entrusted to a suitable Additional Housekeeping
Substitutive Cable [refer to para.110.5 point 1 ) on page 74 for details].
[2] Equipping rules
Tab. 76. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules
POSITION IN RACK (see Fig. 137. on page 272)

The Additional Housekeeping unit is an optional module to expand the number of
housekeeping (up to 40 input contacts in all).
(C) UNIT P/N
Label for
Remote Inventory
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING 3DB02740AA HKDEV
[3] Unit detailed description

Refer to chapter 52, and in particular para.52.3.4 on page 400.
63.3.2 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information
Please refer to para.15.4.2 on page 77.
APPENDICES
486 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
63.4 Information on FANS SUBRACK (P/N 3DB03242AA**) AND FANS
ASSEMBLED (P/N 3DB03238AA**) units
63.4.1 General
In newer supplies, these units are replaced by the FAN UNIT P/N REF.[8] in Tab. 39. on page 183.
63.4.2 Equipping rules
a) FANS SHELF equipping rules

There can be either one or two FAN shelves, see pos. (E) and (L) in Fig. 137. on page 272:
FAN shelf pos. (E) is mandatory in all configurations
FAN shelf pos. (L) is mandatory whenever the ADM shelf is equipped.
b) FANS ASSEMBLED unit equipping rules
The FANS SHELF contains one or two independent FANS ASSEMBLED units, as depicted in

following Fig. 223. :

FANSL
A
FANSL
B

1 2
Fig. 223. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types)
Tab. 77. Fans assembled unit & cover equipping rules

SLOT IN FAN SHELF (see Fig. 223. on this page)
Each fan unit contains four fans, a DC/DC converter and an internal control unit.
When one of the FANS ASSEMBLED is not equipped, the corresponding slot must be
closed by COVER to guarantee correct ventilation.
(A) Label for

UNIT P/N Remote
(B) Inventory
FANS ASSEMBLED 3DB03242AA** FANSL
COVER 3DB03609AA**
Rules and indications for fan utilization associated to different temperature ranges, terminal configurations
and eventual ADM presence are hereafter reported:
For temperature range 5C to +50C (standard temperature range):
for 1+1/2+0 copolar and heteropolar configurations: no fans are needed.
for 2+1 and higher copolar and heteropolar configurations : one subrack with two fan
plugins.
for ADM cooling (if present): always one fan subrack with one fan plugin, installed just below
the ADM (FANSL B, on the rack right side).
For temperature range 5C to +55C (extended temperature range):
all configurations : one subrack with two fan plugins.
for ADM cooling (if present): always one fan subrack with one fan plugin, installed just below
the ADM (FANSL B, on the rack right side).
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 487 / 522
63.4.3 Operative information

Fig. 224. herebelow and Fig. 225. on page 489 show the physical views of the FANS shelf and FANSL unit

and substitutive COVER assemblies.

FANS SHELF
FRONT PLATE
COVER
(must be equipped in not used
FANS ASSEMBLED slots to
guarantee correct ventilation)
FANS ASSEMBLED
Fig. 224. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views
APPENDICES
488 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Hole for unit extraction
(1) LED
M1 M3 Can Bus
Power supply input Connector
DIPSWITCH I
O
O
M2 Can Bus I1 I2 M4
Power supply input
Connector
Legend:
a) (M1) (M4) Power supply connectors: as point a ) on page 123

(the same of the new FANS SUBRACK)
b) (M2) (M3) CANBUS connectors: as point b ) on page 123

c) (I1) (I2) DIPSWITCHES: as point c ) on page 123

d) LED (red): indicating a failure in at least one of the 4 fans of the FANS ASSEMBLED unit
Fig. 225. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 489 / 522
63.4.4 FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT replacement procedure

N.B. This procedure can be used only in case you have still a FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT spare part

in your spare part stock. Otherwise, carry out procedure in point [4] on page 348.

1) get the spare FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal
to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 299 for cautions); do not touch the
electronic components.
ATTENTION

2) set the DIPSWITCH of the spare FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT exactly as it is set on the unit to
be replaced ( I1 or I2 according to the unit position in the FANS SHELF, see Fig. 225. on page
489); in case of doubts, refer to point c ) on page 123
3) Remove FANS SHELFs front plate (see Fig. 224. on page 488) turning off the six screws
4) wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 1. on page 9) and connect its termination to
a grounded structure
ATTENTION

5) Extract the faulty FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT operating the suitable extractor [see (2) in
Fig. 150. on page 296] inside the units suitable hole (see Fig. 225. on page 489)
6) Insert the spare FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT
ATTENTION

out in order to insert the unit (in this case there are no levers)
8) Restore FANS SHELFs front plate (see Fig. 224. on page 488) turning on the six screws
ATTENTION

The screw tightening torque must be:

APPENDICES
490 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
9) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
ATTENTION

off it)
10 ) fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the Alcatel
63.4.5 Functional description
The following Fig. 226. shows the block diagram of a fans shelf equipped with two FANS ASSEMBLED
units.
Fig. 227. on page 492 shows the block diagram of one FANS ASSEMBLED unit.
The FANS ASSEMBLED unit includes a microprocessor to manage together with the System Control
subsystem, through the CAN bus:
the Remote Inventory

its logical address according to the position of the DIPSwitches present on the Fanshelf front panel
the unit alarms (internal PSU failure, individual Fan alarms).
FAN B FAN D FAN B FAN D
FAN A FAN C FAN A FAN C

0/1 0/1
LED LED
CAN CAN TERMINATION
BATTERYA
BATTERYB
Fig. 226. Fan subsystem block diagram
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 491 / 522
BATT. A
CAN BATT. B
P RI PSU PSU
FAN ALARM
PSU ALARM
FAN B
FAN D
FAN A
FAN C
LED
Fig. 227. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram
APPENDICES
492 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
63.5 Information on Optical Modules P/N 3AL78815AA** and 3AL78815AB**
In newer supplies, these phased out modules ( Fig. 228. below) are replaced by the LC OPTICAL
INTERFACE P/N REF.[32] in Tab. 39. on page 186 (the new LC OPTICAL INTERFACE is shown in
Fig. 58. on page 116 ), also as spare part.
SC/PC
S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF. SC/PC
S
P/N 3AL78815AB**
INPUT
OUTPUT
ALS restart key
S
FC/PC
S1.1 OPTIC.INTERF. FC/PC S
P/N 3AL78815AA**
INPUT
OUTPUT
ALS restart key
S
S screws for optical module remove/fix
Optical safety : refer to
Fig. 228. Phased out Optical Modules P/N 3AL78815AA** and 3AL78815AB**
To have interworking between the old and new Optical Interfaces, without remaking equipment cabling,
two adapter cables have been defined, described in para.18.2.6 on page 118
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 493 / 522
63.6 Information on Flash Card 48MB P/N 1AB151770002

In newer supplies, these phased out Flash Card type is replaced by the new 128 MB type P/N REF.[29]

in Tab. 39. on page 185 , also as spare part.

Read carefully NBk on page 187
APPENDICES
494 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
64 APPENDIX D: DOCUMENTATION GUIDE
This appendix contains all information regarding:
this handbook, herebelow

the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to, on page 497
general on AlcatelLucent Customer Documentation on page 508
64.1 Handbook guide
This paragraph contains all information regarding this handbook and is organized as follows:
Handbook applicability herebelow
Purpose of the handbook on page 496
64.1.1 Handbook applicability
This handbook applies to the following product-releases and configurations:
SWP RELEASE
PRODUCT FREQ.RANGE
1.0 2.0 2.1
9640LSY 3.6 4.2 GHz X X X
9647LSY 4.4 5.0 GHz X X X
9662LSY 5.9 6.4 GHz X X X
9667LSY 6.4 7.1 GHz X X X
9674LSY 7.1 7.7 GHz X X X
9681LSY 7.7 8.7 GHz X X X
9610LSY 10 10.7 GHz X X
9611LSY 10.7 11.7 GHz X X X
9613LSY 12.75 13.25 GHz X X X
CONFIGURATION
Regenerator (LHR) X X X
WMSN (LHR + ADM) X X X
Regenerator high power (LHRHPA) X X
WMSN high power (LHRHPA + ADM) X X
Regenerator + LPS (LHR+LPS) X
Regenerator high power + LPS (LHRHPA + LPS) X
WMSN high power + LPS (LHRHPA + LPS + ADM) X
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 495 / 522
64.1.2 Purpose of the handbook

This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para.

64.1.1 on page 495.

Please refer to para.64.2 on page 497 to have the list and description of such Customer Documentation
set.
With reference to equipment configuration stated in para.64.1.1 on page 495, this handbook provides
the following pieces of information:
system hardware installation
system description on two levels: first level and detailed level, both from system, hardware and
software points of view
system Technical Specifications
system hardware structure: item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning)
unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of led, pushbuttons, switches
and connectors for Customer use), connection rules
N.B. this handbook does not contain detailed information regarding:
hardware setting options, that are included in the handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting
documents (REF.[M] on page 503), that must be always available to the Operator in charge
of the equipment installation, commissioning, troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the
information necessary to carry out the hardware setting of the equipments units
branchings, that are included:
for the standard LHR system, in the handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching
drawings (REF.[B] on page 499)
for the LHRHPA system, in the handbook 9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Branching

drawings (REF.[G] on page 500)
that must be always available to the Operator who needs this kind of information.
system cabling
spare parts provisioning
preventive maintenance procedures
corrective maintenance and unit replacement procedures (N.B.)
N.B. In any case, the C.T. Operators Handbook must be always available to the Operator in
charge of the equipment troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the information
necessary to carry out troubleshooting through the Craft Terminal.
APPENDICES
496 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
64.2 Documentation set description
The 9600LSY system can be supplied in the basic configurations (LHR without or with LPS subsystem,
LHRC and WMSN) introduced in para.22.5 on page 201. In addition, LHR can be supplied in a
customized version LHRHPA introduced in Appendix B on page 471.
This paragraph contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation set this handbook
belongs to:
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.x documentation for LHR, LHRLPS and LHRHPA versions herebelow
9600LSY Rel.2.0 documentation for LHRC version on page 501
Documentation of 9600LSY for both LHR and LHRC versions on page 503
Documentation related to obsolete items or features on page 505
Optional handbooks and CDROMs on page 506:

including:
1320CT platform additional documentation on page 506
Handbooks and CDROMs of ADMs on page 507
N.B.1 The list of handbooks given in the following is valid at the issue date of this Handbook and can
be changed without any obligation for AlcatelLucent to update it in this Handbook.
N.B.2 Some of the handbooks listed in the following may not be available at the issue date of this
Handbook.
N.B.3 For some handbooks, the column NOTES (in their description table) may specify the least
reference edition that is consistent with this Handbook. If you own previous editions, please
get the new edition ordering it to AlcatelLucent (if you are reading this Handbook from the
Documentation CDROM, handbook editions are consistent with each other)
N.B.4 (for Italian Users only) If not differently specified, handbooks listed in following paragraphs are
available in English language only.
64.2.1 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.x documentation for LHR, LHRLPS and LHRHPA versions
This paragraph lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for
the LHR version of 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.x product releases, for the LHRHPA version of 9600LSY Rel.2.x
product release, and for the LPS subsystem of 9600LSY Rel.2.1 product release.
Please refer to following para.64.3 on page 508 for a general description of AlcatelLucent Customer
Documentation system.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the LHR , LHRLPS and LHRHPA
versions of 9600LSY system is modularly composed by different handbooks. This allows Customers to
use just handbooks he needs in association with configuration he own.
Tab. 78. herebelow lists the handbooks.
The [REF] indication in Tab. 78. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 79. and
Tab. 84. thru Tab. 86. in the following.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 497 / 522
Tab. 78. 9600LSY/LHR, LHRHPA and LHRLPS documentation

USAGE

Rel.1.0 Rel.2.0 & 2.1 Rel.2.1
REF Note
LHR
LHR LHR LPS
HPA
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.x Installation and
[A] x x x
Technical Handbook (this manual)
9600LSY Hardware setting documents [M] x x x
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings [B] x x
9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Installation and
[F] x
Technical Handbook
9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Branching drawings [G] x
9600LSY/LPS Installation and Technical
[H] x
Handbook
LINEUP HANDBOOKS
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide [C] x
N.B.
9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide [D] x x x
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Expansion
[E] x x x
procedures
Interference investigation procedure [N] x x x x
OPERATORS HANDBOOKS
9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP
[O] x
1.0
N.B.
9600LSY Rel.2 CT Operators Handbook
[P] x x x
SWP 2.x from V2.0.2
9600LSY/LPS CT Operators Handbook [I] x
DOCUMENTATION CDROM
DCP 9600LSY 1.0/2.0 CDROM (English) [Q] x x x x
DCP 9600LSY 2.0 CDROM IT (Italian) [R] x x x
N.B. in alternative according to SWP version used
APPENDICES
498 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 79. Handbooks related to LHR version only
REF HANDBOOK P/N NOTES

IN ENGLISH
9600LSY/LHR Installation and Technical this handbook
3DB 02839 AAAA
Handbook
IN ITALIAN
[A] 9600LSY/LHR Manuale di installazione e Manuale
3DB 02839 ABAA
Tecnico
To be used in the 9600LSY/LHR Regenerator configuration.

Provides information regarding Equipment installation, commissioning, description,
composition and maintenance (together with handbooks REF.[P] and REF.[D])
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings 3DB 02839 CAAA

[B] Contains the detailed drawings of the various configurations of branching envisaged for
9600LSY/LHR Regenerator configuration.
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide 3DB 02841 AAAA
[C] To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations with SWP 1.0.
The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment commissioning procedures,
according to AlcatelLucent Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
IN ENGLISH
9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide 3DB 02841 CAAA
IN ITALIAN
[D] 9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Guida allattivazione 3DB 02841 CBAA
To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations with SWP 2.0.

The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment commissioning procedures,
according to AlcatelLucent Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0

3DB 02841 DAAA
Expansion procedures
[E] To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations.

This handbook explains how to expand the number of channels of a LHR system both from
hardware and software points of view, according to AlcatelLucent Installation Engineering
Dept. rules.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 499 / 522
Tab. 80. Additional handbooks related to LHRHPA version


IN ENGLISH
9600LSY/LHRHPA Installation and Technical

3DB 02839 GAAA
Handbook
IN ITALIAN
[F]
9600LSY/LHRHPA Manuale Tecnico e di
3DB 02839 GBAA
Installazione
Provides information regarding equipment description, composition, installation and

settings regarding the High Power System to be coupled to 9600LSY/LHR system.
BILINGUAL ENGLISHITALIAN
9600LSY/LHRHPA Branching drawings

3DB 02839 HAAA
[G] 9600LSY/LHRHPA Illustrativi delle diramazioni
Contains the detailed drawings of the various configurations of branching envisaged for
9600LSY/LHRHPA equipment.
Tab. 81. Additional handbooks related to LPS subsystem
9600LSY/LPS Installation and Technical

3DB 02839 KAAA
Handbook
[H] Provides information regarding equipment description, composition, installation, settings
and maintenance regarding the LPS subsystem to be inserted in the 9600LSY/LHR
system.
9600LSY/LPS CT Operators Handbook 3DB 02838 FAAA
To be used with:
[I] SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.1 (3DB 12206 AAAA) for SWP versions V2.1.1
in association with both LHRLPS configurations.
Provides 9600LSY/LHRLPS specific screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW
management and maintenance, that are not given in handbook REF.[P]
APPENDICES
500 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
64.2.2 9600LSY Rel.2.0 documentation for LHRC version
This paragraph lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for
the LHRC version of 9600LSY Rel.2.0 product release.

Please refer to following para.64.3 on page 508 for a general description of AlcatelLucent Customer
Documentation system.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the LHRC version of 9600LSY Rel.2.0
system is modularly composed by different handbooks.
Tab. 82. herebelow lists the handbooks.
The [REF] indication in Tab. 82. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 83. thru
Tab. 86. in the following.
Tab. 82. 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 documentation

REF NOTES
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Installation and Technical Handbook [J]
9600LSY Hardware setting documents [M]
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Branching drawings [K]

LINEUP HANDBOOKS
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Line Up guide [L]
Interference investigation procedure [N]

OPERATORS HANDBOOKS
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 [P]

DOCUMENTATION CDROM
DCP 9600LSY 1.0/2.0 CDROM (English) [Q]
DCP 9600LSY 2.0 CDROM IT (Italian) [R]
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 501 / 522
Tab. 83. Handbooks related to LHRC version only


IN ENGLISH
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Installation and

3DB 02840 BAAA
Technical Handbook
IN ITALIAN
[J]
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Manuale di Installazione e
3DB 02840 BBAA
Manuale Tecnico
To be used in the 9600LSY/LHRC Regenerator configuration.

Provides information regarding Equipment installation, commissioning, description,
composition and maintenance (together with handbooks REF.[P] and REF.[L]).
BILINGUAL ENGLISHITALIAN
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Branching drawings

9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Illustrativi delle 3DB 02839 DAAA
[K] diramazioni
Contains the detailed drawings of the various configurations of branching envisaged for
9600LSY/LHRC Regenerator configuration, and, from ED.02, the mounting drawings of
extension branchings envisaged for multiple (up to 3) LHRC installation in one rack.
IN ENGLISH
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Line Up guide 3DB 02841 BAAA
IN ITALIAN
[L] 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Guida allattivazione 3DB 02841 BBAA
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations.
The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment line up and preventive
maintenance procedures, according to AlcatelLucent Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
APPENDICES
502 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
64.2.3 Documentation of 9600LSY for both LHR and LHRC versions
Tab. 84. LHR and LHRC additional handbooks for installation, commissioning and maintenance
purposes
BILINGUAL ENGLISHITALIAN N.B.
9600LSY Hardware setting documents

3DB 02839 EAAA
[M] 9600LSY Documentazione per predisposizioni
Hardware
Contains the hardware setting documents for all 9600LSY configurations.

N.B. Bilingual EnglishItalian from ED.02
IN ENGLISH
Interference investigation procedure 3DB 04165 EAAA
IN ITALIAN
[N]
Interference investigation procedure 3DB 04165 FAAA
Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various RF bands
used by AlcatelLucent Radio Transmission products.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 503 / 522
Tab. 85. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control


9600LSY Rel.1.0
3DB 02838 AAAA
CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0
[O] To be used with:

SWP REG.9600LSY R.1.0 (3DB 03179 AAAA)
Provides 9600LSY/LHR screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management
and maintenance.
IN ENGLISH Reference
edition for
9600LSY Rel.2 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.1:
3DB 02838 CAAA
SWP 2.x from V2.0.2 (N.B.) from ED.07
IN ITALIAN Reference
edition for
9600LSY Rel.2 CT Manuale dOperatore CT SWP 2.1:
3DB 02838 CBAA
SWP 2.x da V2.0.2 (N.B.) from ED.06
To be used with:
[P]
SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.0 (3DB 04401 AAAA) for SWP versions V2.0.2
SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.1 (3DB 12206 AAAA) for SWP versions V2.1.1
in association with both LHR (R.2.0 & 2.1) and LHRC (R.2.0) configurations.
Provides 9600LSY/LHR/LHRC screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW
management and maintenance.
N.B.:
for SWP version V2.0.1 only, see point [4] on page 505
the SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.1 is meant for the management of the LPS subsystem.
Specific screens and operational procedures for LPS SW management and maintenance
are not given in such a manual, but in handbook REF.[I]
Tab. 86. Documentation on CDROM
REF CDROM TITLE P/N NOTES
IN ENGLISH
DCP 9600LSY 1.0/2.0 CDROM 3DB 02831 AAAA n.b.1

[Q]
n.b.1 it contains, in electronic format (Acrobat pdf), all handbooks REF.[A] to [P] in English
and bilingual EnglishItalian.
IN ITALIAN
DCP 9600LSY 2.0 CDROM IT 3DB 02831 ABAA n.b.2

[R]
n.b.2 it contains, in electronic format (Acrobat pdf), all handbooks REF.[A] to [P] in Italian
and bilingual EnglishItalian.
APPENDICES
504 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
64.2.4 Documentation related to obsolete items or features
[1] 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook (P/N 3DB 02840 AAAA)
This handbook describes the installation of the 9600LSY/LHR equipped with:

the Optinex rack,
and the TRU former version P/N 3DB00734AA**, not equipped with circuit breakers monitoring
points,
that are no longer envisaged in newer supplies.
Therefore, this handbook has been phased out and eliminated from the standard documentation set.
Nevertheless, it can be available on explicit request.
[2] 9600LSY/LHRC Technical Handbook (P/N 3DB 02839 BAAA)
Information of this handbook is merged in the handbook REF.[J] on page 502 , from its ED.03
[3] Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook

(P/N 3DB 02840 CAAA English version)
(P/N 3DB 02840 CBAA Italian version)
Information of this handbook is merged in the handbooks:

REF.[A] on page 499 , from its ED.07 (both English and Italian versions)
REF.[J] on page 502 , from its ED.03 (both English and Italian versions)
[4] 9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 V2.0.1 (P/N 3DB 02838 BAAA)
This handbook provides 9600LSY/LHR/LHRC screens and operational procedures for Equipment
SW management and maintenance, in association with:
SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.0 (3DB 04401 AAAA) for SWP version V2.0.1 only
In newer supplies (for SWP versions V2.0.2), this handbook is never used, and is replaced by
handbook REF.[P] in Tab. 85. on page 504.
[5] Documentation for transceiver assembly repair
According to the new transceiver assembly supply to Customer and spare part policies
described in para.19.2 on page 128, the chapter transceiver assembly repair, present in previous
editions, has been removed starting from ED.07 of this handbook.
Nevertheless, just for the convenience of Customers having bought transceivers internal
components and having them still present in their spare part stock, information of above cited chapter
transceiver assembly repair has been set in following new document:
9600LSY Transceiver repair P/N 3DB 02839 JAAA
which does not belong to the standard documentation set, but can be available on specific request.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 505 / 522
64.2.5 Optional handbooks and CDROMs

64.2.5.1 1320CT platform additional documentation

Documentation to be used depends on the Q3CTP/K Version, that is displayed when, on the PC, you
select the 1320CT application for its launch.
The Q3CTP/K Version embedded in the SWP is also specified in the Operator Handbooks paragraph
ECT SW SubComponents of chapter (in Section SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS) related to the
SWP version you use.
Tab. 87. Handbooks common to AlcatelLucent Network Elements using 1320CT platform
Usage according to
Q3CTP/K Version
HANDBOOK P/N 1.3.x 1.7.x N.B.
and and 3.0.1

1.7.x

3.0.1

ED.03
1320CT Rel.1.x Basic

3AL 79186 AAAA 1
Operators Handbook

ED.04 on
1330AS Rel.5.0 Operators

3AL 71079 AAAA X 2
Handbook
1330AS Rel.5.1 Operators

Handbook
3AL 71109 AAAA
X 2,3

ELM Operators Handbook 3AL 37953 AAAA
X

X 4
1320CT Rel.3.x Basic

Operators Handbook
3AL 79551 AAAA

X 1

AS Rel.6.5 Operators
Handbook
3AL 88876 AAAA

X 2
ELB Rel.2.x Operators

3AL 88877 AAAA X 4
Handbook
N.B.1 Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft
terminal) of AlcatelLucent InfoModel Network Elements.
N.B.2 Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance
software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
N.B.3 In 1330AS Rel.5.1 Operators Handbook, information about Historical Alarms and Network
Element Symbols Management (Physical Network Management) are not valid for Craft
Terminal. They are used by Network Management only.
N.B.4 Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Management/Browser software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
APPENDICES
506 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Tab. 88. Documentation on CDROM for 1320CT platform
Q3CTP/K
HANDBOOK P/N
Version
1.x DCP1320CT BASIC CDROM 3AL 79549 AAAA
3.x DCP 1320 CT 3.x CD_ROM EN 3AL 79552 AAAA
Contain, in electronic format (Acrobat pdf), the 1320 CT Operators Handbooks (see Tab. 87. on
page 506)
64.2.5.2 Handbooks and CDROMs of ADMs
The used ADM (1650SMC or 1850TSS) has its own documentation set.
Their P/Ns are not indicated here, as they depend on the Product release and Software Package version.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 507 / 522
64.3 General on AlcatelLucent Customer Documentation

This paragraph describes in general the AlcatelLucent Customer Documentation system, details the

association between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer

Documentation characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery to Customers.
This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of AlcatelLucent WTD
(Wireless Transmission Division) only.
64.3.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation
a) Definition
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as

plantindependent and is always independent of any Customization.
Plantdependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to

commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned
N.B. Plantdependent and Customized documentation is not described here.
b) Aims of standard Customer Documentation
Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel
the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and
maintaining the equipment according to AlcatelLucent Laboratory design and Installation Dept.
choices. In particular:
the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation
of the manmachine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;
maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
N.B. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is
envisaged.
APPENDICES
508 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
64.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

a) Products
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole
of performances and services that it is meant for.
E.g. 9600LSY is a product (STM1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Link).
b) Product-releases
A product evolves through successive product-releases, which are the real products marketed
for their delivery at a certain product-release availability date. A certain product-release performs
more functionalities than the previous one.
E.g. 9600LSY Rel.1.0 and 9600LSY Rel.2.0 are two successive product-releases of the same
product.
A productrelease comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one Software
Package (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment
performances that the specific product-release has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.
c) Configurations and Network Elements

In some cases, a product-release includes different possible configurations which are
distinguished from one another by different Network Element (NE) types and, from the
management point of view, by different SWPs.
E.g. 9600LSY Rel.2.0 includes various configurations with two NE types: Regenerator 1+0/1+1/2+0
with NE type LHRC; Regenerator N+0 (n=max 8) / N+1 (n=max 7) with NE type LHR.
d) SWP Releases and Versions
See Fig. 229. herebelow.

A SWP is identified by the configuration name and by the version number (tree digits).
The versions first digit corresponds to the productrelease number first digit; the second digit
identifies, together with the first, the SWP release.
The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release.
SWP version
SWP Release
Product Patch Level

Releases
first digit
SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes 1. 0. 7

or minor additional features
(same SWP Release within same ProductRelease) 1. 0. 9
SWP evolution for major additional features 1. 0. 7

(new SWP Release within same ProductRelease)
(N.B. see next page) 1. 1. 2
1. 0. 7
SWP evolution for additional features
(new SWP Release of a new ProductRelease) 2. 0. 2
Fig. 229. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering
N.B. Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same ProductRelease) are commercially
distinguished by different names, e.g. :
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 509 / 522
SWP version SWPRelease commercial name

1.0.x 1.0

1.1.x 1.0B
1.2.x 1.0C
e) Customer Documentation
A product-release(configuration) has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually

formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general:
System and Hardware documentation:

one (or more) Technical Handbook(s)
an Installation Handbook
a LineUp Guide or Commissioning Handbook
Software documentation:
a Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, associated to the specific SWPRelease
other Operators Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded
in the SWP)
PRODUCT
evolution
PRODUCTRELEASE 1.0 PRODUCTRELEASE 2.0
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
CONFIG.A CONFIG.B
evolution
PRODUCT SWP REL.1.0 SWP REL.1.1
LEVELS
DOCUMENTATION
CONFIG.A SWP REL.1.0 SWP REL.1.1

System & HW SW SW
Documentation Documentation Documentation
Fig. 230. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
APPENDICES
510 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
64.3.3 Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers
a) Standard supply
Handbooks and CDROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any
other AlcatelLucent commercial item.
Handbooks and CDROMs are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer
to.
The number of handbooks or CDROMs per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
b) Productdocumentation consistency
Equipment description and layout are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual
composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plantdependent
documentation).
Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the
production issue of such units.
Softwareassociated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release.
Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific productrelease previously delivered can be required
specifying P/N and edition.
c) Inadvance supply
Whenever handbooks or CDROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is
the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be
delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree.
d) Supplying updated handbooks and CDROMs to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks or CDROMs to Customers who have already received previous
issues is subject to commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the
handbook (supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).
e) Copyright notification
The technical information of the handbooks and CDROMs supplied to Customers is the property
of AlcatelLucent and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written
consent.
f) Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files
Presently not envisaged.
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 511 / 522
512 / 522

APPENDICES
65 APPENDIX E: LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Tab. 89. List Of Symbols
N.B. This Table Lists Some Symbols Whose Interpretation Could Be Doubtful.
SYMBOL MEANING AND COMMENTS

In this handbook it is not the division symbol. It means from .. to ...
E.g.:
<value1> <value2>
means:
from <value1> (included) to <value2> (included)
A polarization symbol like this:
H V
POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal or vertical
SYMBOLS H
Once you have decided a polarization (e.g. )
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g. )
V
Tab. 90. List Of Abbreviations

ABBREVIATION MEANING
A
AC Alternate Current
ACSE Association Control Service Element
ADC Analog to Digital Converter
ADM Add Drop Multiplexer
AE Access Enable
AF Atomic Function
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
ANSI American National Standard Institute
AOW Additional Order Wire
API Access Point Identifier
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASE Application Service Element
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT Attend alarm
ATL Far Terminal Alarm
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC Automatic Transmitter Power Control
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 513 / 522

ATTD ATTendeD

AUG Administration Unit Group
AUn Administrative Unit n (Order)
AUX AUXiliary
B
BB Base Band
BBE Background Block Error
BCA Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set)
BER Bit Error Rate
BIPx Bit Interleaved Parity x
C
CAN Controller Area Network (communication protocol patented by Robert
Bosch GmbH)
CCDP CoChannel Dual Polarized (Frequency reuse)
CFRD Component Failure Rate Date
C/I Carrier to Interference ratio
CK Clock
CMI Code Mark Inversion
CMISE Common Management Information Service Element
CPU Central Processor Unit
CRCn Cyclic Redundancy Check n
CRU Clock Reference Unit
CSW Common SoftWare
CTP Connection Termination Point
D
DA Distant Alarm
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channels (D1D12)
DCC/M Multiplex Section DCC (D4D12)
DCC/R Regenerator Section DCC (D1D3)
DCN Data Communication Network
DEFEC FEC Decoder
DEM Demodulator
DF Dialog Failure
DIV Diversity
DM Degraded Minute
DS Defect Second
DTI Department of Trade and Industry
DTMF Dual Tone MultiFrequency
E
APPENDICES
514 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
EB Error Block
EBC Errored Block Count

EC Equipment Controller
ECC Embedded Control Channel
ECS External Communication Service
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EE Equipment Engineering
EF Equipment Failure
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMF Equipment Management Function
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
ES Error Second
ETR European Telecommunication Report
ETS European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EW Early Warning
EWH Early Warning High
EWL Early Warning Low
EXCBER Excessive BER
F
FE Front End
FEBE Far End Block Error
FEC Forward Error Correction (Code)
FERF Far End Receiver Failure
FIT Failure Unit
FR Failure rate
FSRC Failed Switch Request Count
FSRD Failed Switch Request Duration
G
GA General Alarm
GB Ground Benign
GF Ground Fixed
GM Ground Mobile
H
HBER High Bit Error Rate
HDLC High level Data Link Control
HET Heterofrequency (Radio system configuration)
HEW High Early Warning
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 515 / 522

HK HouseKeeping

HPT High order Path Termination
HPC High order Path Connection
HS High Speed
HST Hot StandBy
I
ID IDentifier
IDU InDoor Unit
IEC International Electro technical Commission
IF Intermediate Frequency
IRC International Radiotechnical Commission
ISO International Standard Organization
ISPB Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
ISSB Intra Shelf Serial Bus
ITUR International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication
ITUT International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication
L
LAN Local Area Network
LBER Low Bit Error Rate
LC Loss of Configuration
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEW Low Early Warning
LHR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator
LHRC Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
LO Local Oscillator
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOP Loss Of Pointers
LOS Loss Of Signal
LPA Lower order Path Adaptation
LPS Line Protection Subsystem
LPT Lower order Path Termination
LS Low Speed
LSY Long haul SYstem
M
MC Monitoring Channel
MCF Message Communication Function
MDT Mean Dawn Time
MIR Loss of incoming pulses
MLC Multi Level Coding
MMIC Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
APPENDICES
516 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
MOD Modulator
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSAIS Multiplex Section Alarm Indication Signal
MSOH Multiplex Section OverHead
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSRDI Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication
MSREI Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
MST Multiplex Section Termination
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
N
NA Not Applicable
NDS Nearend Defect Second
NE Network Element
NEBC Nearend Errored Block Count
NEFA Network Element Function Application
NF Noise Figure
NFD Net Filter Discrimination
NG Not Urgent
NRZ Non Return to Zero
NURG Not Urgent
O
OCT Office Craft Terminal
ODU OutDoor Unit
OFS Out of Frame Second
OH OverHead
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OIRT Russian Regulatory Body
OOF Out Of Frame
OS Operation System
OVF Overflow
OW Order Wire
P
PC Personal Computer
PDH Plesiocronus Digital Hierarchy
PI Physical Interface
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PM Performance Monitoring
POH Path Overhead
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 517 / 522

PSA Protection Switch Actual

PSAC Protection Switch Count
PSAD Protection Switch Actual Duration
PSR Protection Switch Request
PSU Power Supply Unit
Q
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QOS Quality Of Service
R
RAPS Radio Automatic Protection Switch
RC Radio Controller
RCIM Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch
RCT Remote Craft Terminal
RECT Remote Equipment Craft Terminal
RES Radio Equipment and Systems
RF Radio Frequency
RFCOH Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RL Received Level
RLTS Received Level Threshold Second
ROSE Remote Operation Service Element
RPI Radio Physical Interface
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RRA Radio Regenerator Adaptation
RRR Radio Relay Repeaters
RRT Radio Relay Terminals
RS Regenerator Section
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead
RSPI Radio Synchronous Physical Interface
RST Regeneration Section Termination
RTF Remote Terminal Failure
RX Receiver/Received
S
SA Service Alarm
SBL Security Block
SC System Controller
SD Space Diversity
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SERS Synchronous E1 Regeneration Section
SES Severly Errored Seconds
APPENDICES
518 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source

SF Signal Failure
SNCP Sub Network Connection Protection
SOH Section Overhead
SOHF SOH Failure
SPI Synchronous Physical Interface
SPS Synchronous Path Sink
SR Synchronous Radio
SRMR Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Repeater
SRMT Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Terminal
SRST Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Terminal
SRSR Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Repeater
SSM Synchronisation Status Message
STBY Standby
STMN Synchronous Transport Module N (Hierarchic level)
STM0 51 Mbit transmission bit rate
SU Supervisory Unit
SW Switch
T
TA TeleAlarms
TAT Turn Around Time
TC Terminal Connector / Tandem Connection
TEM Transversal Electric Mode
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TL Transmitted Level
TLTS Transmitted Level Threshold Second
TM Transmission and Multiplexing
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TP Termination Point
TPH Telephone
TR TRansceiver
TRU Top Rack Unit
TTP Trail Termination Point
TUn Tributary Unit n (Order)
TUGn Tributary Unit Group n (Order)
TX Transmitter/Transmitted
U
U Unavailability
UDR Unpressurized Rectangular Waveguide Type
UG Urgent Alarm
APPENDICES
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 519 / 522

UHM Urban Haul split mount terminal Multiplexer

UHR Urban Haul split mount terminal Regenerator
USK Stackable Unit
UT Unavailability Time
V
VCn Virtual Container n (Order)
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VF Voice Frequency
VHM Virtual Hardware Machine
W
WADM Wireless Add and Drop Multiplexer
WLT Wireless Line Terminal
WST Way Side Traffic
X
XPD Cross Polar Discrimination
XPIC Cross Polar Interference Cancelled
XPI Cross Polar Interference
XPIF Cross Polar Improvement Factor
XPOL Cross Polar/Polarization
a) END OF SECTION
APPENDICES
520 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
SECTION 7: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
This section lists and contains the documents enclosed to this handbook.
The enclosed documents are listed in following Tab. 91. ; each of them has its own P/N, different from that
of this main handbook and different from one another.
Tab. 91. List of enclosed documents
REF [x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item.
N.B. The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook
is the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents
is not specified in this table.
REF DOCUMENT P/N DOCUMENT CONTENT
[A] 3DB 03007 AAAA MSZZQ 9600LSY Maintenance Tools Kit part list
n.b.1
[B] 3DB 03008 AAAA MSZZQ 9600LSY System Tools Kit part list
9600LSY Rel.1 & 2 Technical Specifications for

[C] 3DB 02839 LAAA TQZZA n.b.2
LHR & LHRC versions
3DB 02839 IAAA TQZZQ 9600LSY Rel.1 & 2 Transceiver Reference

[D] n.b.3
from ED.02 n.b.4 Manual
n.b.1 referenced to by para.43.2.2 on page 296.

n.b.2 referenced to by para.24.1 on page 245 and in other parts of this manual.
n.b.3 this document gives the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the
frequencydependent items (2GR transceivers and 2G transceiver components) and
describes the envisaged channel plans utilized with all 9600LSY radio systems. It is
referenced to by many parts of this manual.
n.b.4 2GR transceivers are described from ED.02 of document 3DB 02839 IAAA TQZZQ
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 521 / 522
All rights reserved
Passing on and copying of this document,
use and communication of its contents is not permitted
without written authorization from Alcatel Lucent.
www.alcatellucent.com
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE PRINTED HANDBOOK
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE STAMPATO

COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N:
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x
LHR version
HANDBOOK PRINT AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
ISTRUZIONI DI STAMPA ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE
This manual can be printed and assembled in two ways:

w whole handbook: see chapt.1 on page 524
w only the HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK: see chapt.2 on page 527
Questo manuale pu essere stampato ed assiemato in due modi:

intero manuale: vedi cap.1 a pag. 524
solo il HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK: vedi cap.2 a pag. 527
Handbook print & assembly
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 523 / 522
1 STAMPA DELLINTERO MANUALE PRINT OF WHOLE HANDBOOK
COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:

HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
SERVONO 9 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 9

9 SEPARATORS NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 9 ARE NECESSARY
STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
No pagine numerate
fase numbered
step
(facciate)
No pages da from a to
TARGHETTE - LABELS
1
Fig. 1. pg.526
2 PARTE INIZIALE - FRONT MATTER 1/522 30/522
3 INSERIRE SEPARATORE 1 - INSERT SEPARATOR 1
4 PART A: HW INSTALLATION HANDBOOK 31/522 188/522
PART B: TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

PARTE INIZIALE - FRONT MATTER
6 189/522 246/522
SECTION 2: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 3: SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS AND

8 247/522 286/522
PROVISIONING
10 SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE 287/522 354/522
12 SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 355/522 446/522
14 SECTION 6: APPENDICES 447/522 520/522
CONTINUA CONTINUES
524 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
CONTINUA CONTINUES
No pagine numerate
fase numbered
step
(facciate)
No pages da from a to
16 SECTION 7: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS 521/522 522 /522
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 522
STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO I SEGUENTI DOCUMENTI ED INSERIRLI DOPO LA PAGINA 522

PRINT FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS RECTO-VERSO AND INSERT THEM AFTER PAGE 522
I seguenti documenti sono archiviati individualmente in PDM; prendere ledizione pdf pi alta
disponibile.
The following documents are individually archived in PDM; get the pdf file highest edition
available.
INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT

17 3DB 03007 AAAA MSZZQ
9600LSY Maintenance Tools Kit part list
18 3DB 03008 AAAA MSZZQ
9600LSY System Tools Kit part list
20 9600LSY Rel.1 & 2 Technical Specifications for LHR & 3DB 02839 LAAA TQZZA N.B.
LHRC versions
22 3DB 02839 IAAA TQZZQ N.B.
9600LSY Rel.1 & 2 Transceiver Reference Manual
N.B. Non inserire le ultime pagine del documento con la scritta QUESTA PAGINA NON VA
INSERITA NEL MANUALE STAMPATO
N.B. Do not insert last pages of the document with thw writing THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE
INCLUDED IN THE PRINTED HANDBOOK
fine istruzioni assemblaggio end of assembly instructions
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 525 / 522
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x
LHR version
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x

LHR version
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x

LHR version
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 INSTALLATION AND TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x

LHR version
Fig. 1.
526 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
2 STAMPA SOLO DELLHARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK

ONLY PRINT OF THE HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK
COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:

HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
Pagine numerate
fase Pages numbered
step
da from a to
TARGHETTE DEL VOLUME VOLUME LABELS

Fig. 2. pg.528
N.B. se il manuale viene termorilegato senza cartelletta, le
targhette non servono. Utilizzare il frontespizio, stampato su
1
cartoncino col suo retro, come copertina.
N.B. if handbook is thermobound without binder, labels are not
necessary. Use the front, printed with its back side, as
bookcover.
2 PART A: HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK 1/522 188/522
fine istruzioni assemblaggio end of assembly instructions
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 527 / 522
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x
LHR version
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x

LHR version
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x

LHR version
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x

LHR version
Fig. 2.
FINE ISTRUZIONI ASSEMBLAGGIO END OF ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
528 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
FOR ALCATELLUCENT INTERNAL PURPOSE ONLY
HANDBOOK EDITORIAL INFORMATION

(not inserted in the CDROM)
PART FOR ALCATELLUCENT INTERNAL USE ONLY
Note for Customers: this part contains editorial information for Alcatellucent internal use only,
and should have not be given to you. Nevertheless, in case you receive it, take into account that
it does not contain information useful for you, so that you can simply ignore it.

COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N:
9600LSY Rel.1.x & 2.x
LHR version
1 PUBLISHING NOTES FOR THIS MANUAL
Labels on pages 526 and 528 are done according to A-Italy binder format.
Source files and printable files of this manual are archived in PDM:
Printable file without revision bars: PDF file must be opened with ACROBAT Reader
Version 5.0 at least.
(N.B. : it has been created with ACROBAT DISTILLER 7.0)
Source file with revision bars:
PDM ARCHIVE
SOURCE FORMAT SIZE Mbytes TOTAL N.PAGES
METHOD
QUICKSILVER 1.5.3 IDU WINZIP 294 540
WARNING: the source file folder contains also the pdf file with revision bars
Note on revision bars: revision bars point out changes with respect to the previous edition
archived in PDM
N.B. page numbers specified in tables on pages 524 525 and on page 527 are
automatic and obtained by autoreference to tags of:
part first page
section first page
section last page, marked by the special component sectionend.
N.B. components sectionend have white color, to avoid their printing.
DO NOT REMOVE THEM, otherwise tables said above will have NO
TAGs.
handbook last page, marked by the special component efme.
N.B. component efme correspond to writing www.alcatellucent.com
on page 522 . DO NOT REMOVE IT, otherwise all pages will have
NO TAGs in footer.
N.B. additional information (source file) in first catalog.
Handbook editorial information
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 529 / 522
2 NOTES ON PREVIOUS EDITIONS
This handbook has been done merging the information previously spread over three handbooks:
Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (P/N 3DB 02840 CAAA)
9600LSY/LHR Installation Handbook (P/N 3DB 02840 AAAA)
9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook (P/N 3DB 02839 AAAA)
2.1 9600LSY Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (P/N

3DB02840CAAA)
2.1.1 History:
DATE CHANGE NOTE

(yymmdd) ECO
01 030930 G.Giovanni O.Benaglia
02 031111 S403111401 G.Giovanni O.Benaglia
03 060404 00000 29729 O.Benaglia E.Corradini
N.B. This handbook must be phased out
2.2 9600LSY/LHR Installation Handbook (P/N 3DB02840AAAA)

2.2.1 History:
DATE CHANGE NOTE

(yymmdd) ECO
01 020313 G.Giovanni O.Benaglia
02 020510 S402050901 G.Giovanni O.Benaglia
N.B. This handbook must be phased out
530 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
2.3 9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook (P/N 3DB02839AAAA up to ED.06)

2.3.1 History:
DATE CHANGE NOTE

(yymmdd) ECO
01 011115 G.Consonni E.Corradini
02 020418 S4 0204 0402 G.Consonni E.Corradini
03 020927 S4 0209 2301 G.Consonni E.Corradini
04 040629 S4 0406 2101 V.Rodella E.Corradini
05 050208 S4 0501 14 01 S.Solimena E.Corradini
06 060228 00000 24654 V.Rodella, T.Angeloni E.Corradini
2.3.2 Notes on Ed.01
Ed.01ADRAFT created on October 23th, 2001 is the first NEITHER validated NOR officially released issue, for validation
internal purposes
Ed.01 created on November 15th, 2001 is the first validated and officially released issue.
Ed.02 created on April 18th, 2002.

The following main changes have been done:
in Chapter Physical Configuration : Part List has been updated; descriptions regarding equipment provisioning and unit
operative information have been updated and improved
in Chapter Technical Specifications : Branching Interface description has been added, and Environmental characteristics
description has been improved
Chapter Maintenance has been improved with revised and fully new parts, in particular with regard to information relevant
to Spare Part Set, Preventive Maintenance and Corrective Maintenance (troubleshooting and unit replacement procedures)
the new Chapter Documentation Guide has been updated to list and describe new handbooks
in the new Chapter SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling : information regarding equipment labelling has been
updated
in Chapter Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents has been updated
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 531 / 522
Ed.03 created on September 27th, 2002.

The following main changes have been done:
throughout the handbook:
new items added: Frequency Reuse kit, Kit Loudspeaker (P/N and operative information)
elimination of High Power Transceivers
important changes and improvements regarding Transceivers:
operative information in chapters Physical Configuration and System Cabling
description in chapter Functional Description
spare part list and fully new repair procedure in chapter Maintenance
in chapter Physical Configuration circuit breaker values updated
Chapter Technical Specifications updated
in section Frequency Plans & Part Numbers: new chapter for 9610LSY, new Transceiver for 9681LSY
in Chapter Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents has been updated.
Ed.04 created on June 29th, 2004 is the fourth validated and officially released issue.
This edition has been fully revised; major changes are:
handbook structure has been changed, shifting less used information (from operative point of view) toward its end, in the new
sections FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION and APPENDICES.
all chapters of section SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS have been modified for:
64QAM modulation, supported starting from SWP 2.0 Version 2.0.2
the use of the new WTD ETSI rack (2200mm or 2000mm high) instead of Optinex rack
in chapter Technical specifications, besides changes for 64QAM modulation, the characteristics regarding the 99% power
channel bandwidth and Emission Designator have been specified
chapter Equipment part list and provisioning has been modified for:
rack, enhanced TRU subrack, items for 64QAM modulation and other items
equipping rules of FANS shelf and FANS assembled units in the rack
chapter Operative information has been modified for:
Cautions to avoid equipment damage information
TRU breaker types
detailed TRU shelf cabling information in chapters Operative information and System cabling has been removed, because
already included in the Installation Handbooks
section Frequency plans, transceiver P/N & HW setting has been updated for the following:
addition of Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan information, previously missing
addition of detailed instructions for Transceiver hardware settings, because the only usage of their setting documents
(MSZZQ documents) was not fully clear to many Customers
the usage of 64QAM modulation in some frequency plans of 9640LSY, 9647LSY, 9667LSY and 9611LSY
correction of some frequency plans (in particular 9647LSY Channel plan Spain UN56)
section Maintenance has been greatly improved, adding and changing the following:
new chapters Maintenance Policy, Set and use of EOW functions, First Level Maintenance
Corrective Maintenance has been split in 4 main chapters, with improved operative instructions
in whole handbook, the term transceiver has been changed to transmitter, when applicable, to distinguish the transmitter
subassembly from the transceiver assembly.
chapter Documentation guide has been updated for new handbooks
section HW SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES has been removed, because the previously annexed documents are
now separately available in the new handbooks 9600LSY HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION and 9600LSY/LHR
BRANCHING DRAWINGS.
532 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Ed.05 created on February 8th, 2005 is the fifth validated and officially released issue.
This edition has been done to introduce some corrections and improvements; major changes are:
in section System description and technical specifications :
in chapter Technical specifications, update of Characteristics applicable to 64QAM systems
in section System composition and configurations :
in chapter Operative information , additional information for Cautions to avoid equipment damage
in section Frequency plans, transceiver P/N & HW setting :
in chapter Introduction , propaedeutic explanations regarding the Alternative center band frequencies (normal and
interleaved channels) have been improved with additional examples
in chapter 9674LSY , frequency plans ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H and ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L corrected
in section Maintenance :
chapters Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts and Unit replacement improved
chapter Transceiver repair and replacement corrected and improved
in section Appendices :
in chapter Documentation guide information regarding Documentation set description updated.
Ed.06 created on February 28th, 2006 is the sixth validated and officially released issue in English language, and has been done for
the following major changes:
throughout the handbook:
information regarding the Additional Housekeeping unit (no longer equipped in new supplies) has been shifted to
Appendix 63 Obsolete items
added information regarding the Additional Housekeeping Substitutive Cable [detailed description in para.110.5
point 1 ) on page 74]
in section System description and technical specifications:
chapter Technical specifications makes now reference to the new document 9600LSY Rel.1&2 Technical
Specifications for LHR & LHRC versions annexed in the new SECTION 7: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
in section System composition and configuration:
chapter System configurations corrected for twosides configurations
in chapter Operative information on equipment boards:
description of RC (Radio Controller) reset improved
location of SYSCO dipswitch banks added
warmup time for Transceiver unit information added
usage of Transceiver units LO monitoring J7 and J8 sockets added
new chapter Installation and commissioning summary
in section Maintenance:
in chapter Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts description of Maintenance and System Tools Kits updated; in
particular, their part list has been shifted to specific documents annexed in the new SECTION 7: ENCLOSED
DOCUMENTS
chapters Troubleshooting and Unit replacement improved and corrected
in section Appendices :
new equipment labelling, according to 2002/96/EC WEEE and to CE/UL norms for power supply data, described in
Appendix Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD norms and equipment labelling
new Appendix HPA configuration
in Appendix Documentation guide information regarding Documentation set description updated.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 533 / 522
2.4 9600LSY/LHR HW Installation and Technical Handbook (P/N

3DB02839AAAA from ED.07)
2.4.1 History:
DATE CHANGE NOTE

(yymmdd) ECO
10 080205 00000 57196 V.Rodella, B.Gabbrielli E.Corradini
534 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
2.4.2 List of the editions and modified parts
The following Tab. 92. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legend: n = new part m = modified part s = shifted and modified part

blank= part unchanged
Tab. 92. Handbook history

HANDBOOK EDITION 07 08 09 10 11
i Navigation principles
ii Preliminary information s
n
s
m m
iii Quick Guide

s s m m

s

v Cautions to avoid equipment damage s

vi Notes on present edition n m m
PART A: HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK

n m
n
m
SECTION 1: HARDWARE INSTALLATION HANDBOOK
11 About this handbook
n
n
m
m
m
m
m
12 Installation and commissioning summary s m m
13 Unpacking and warehousing n
14 Installation rules and sequence n m
15 Hardware installation sequence n m m
16 Electrical installation sequence n m m m
17 TRU alarms software configuration sequence n m
Operative information on equipment boards (except
18 s m m m
microwave area)
Operative information on microwave area (transceivers and
19 s m m
branching)
110 System cabling s m m m
111 Equipment part list s m m m
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 535 / 522
Tab. 92. Handbook history

HANDBOOK EDITION 07 08 09 10 11
PART B: TECHNICAL HANDBOOK m m
SECTION 2: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL
m m
SPECIFICATIONS
21 About this handbook n m m m
22 Introduction to the 9600LSY radio system family m m
23 System description m m m
24 Technical specifications m
SECTION 3: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND PROVISIONING m m
31 System configurations m m
32 Equipment provisioning s m m
SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE m m
41 Maintenance Policy m
42 Set and use of EOW functions
43 Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts m m
44 First Level Maintenance m
45 Preventive (routine) Maintenance m m
46 Troubleshooting m m m
47 Unit replacement m m m m
48 Faulty unit repair and repair form m
SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION m m
51 Signal management
52 Hardware description m m
53 Alarm Management
SECTION 6: APPENDICES m m m
61 A Safety, EMC, EMF, ESD norms and equipment labelling m m m
62 B HPA configuration m m m
63 C Obsolete items m m m m
64 D Documentation guide m m m m
65 E List of symbols and abbreviations m
SECTION 7: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS m m m
536 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Ed.07ADRAFT created on October 27th, 2006, NEITHER validated NOR officially released, for
validation internal purposes
Ed.07 created on November 6th, 2006 is the seventh validated and officially released issue.
handbook structure change:
a) from this edition, this handbook contains, as new part A, the Hardware Installation Handbook,
which fully annuls and replaces the handbooks previously envisaged for the same scopes:
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook (P/N 3DB 02840 AAAA)
Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (P/N 3DB 02840 CAAA), as far
as the LHR version is concerned
b) for documentation optimization, most of contents of previous section 3 Frequency Plans &
Transceiver P/Ns has been removed from this handbook and relevant information is now
available in a new document enclosed to it (it is used also in other 9600LSY handbooks)

new FAN UNIT; main affected parts: para.18.3 from page 122, chapter 111 from page 183,
para.23.4.6 on page 215, para.32.5 on page 286, para.45.2 on page 308, para.47.4.9
from page 346, para.52.2 point g ) on page 387, para.52.6 on page 437, para.63.4 from
page 487
new SERVICE P/N; main affected parts: chapter 111 from page 183, para.47.4.5 on pages
336337
new policy for Transceiver assembly (main and spare) supply to Customer ; main
affected parts: chapter 19 from page 127 (in particular para.19.2 from page 128), para.32.4
on page 285, para.43.3 from page 298, Fig. 156. on page 310, para.47.4.10 from page 349,
chapter 48 on page 353. Note: information for Transceiver repair (present in previously
existing chapter Transceiver repair and replacement) has been removed
improvements and corrections:

para.22.5 on page 201 (unidirectional configurations for LHRC)
Tab. 35. to Tab. 37. on pages 179 to 181 (corrected pinout of connectors M193, M183, M192)
para.31.3 on page 252 (corrected description of EastWest station configurations)
para.47.4 on page 328 (scopes of unit replacement procedures)
para.61.3.9 on page 460 (antenna compliance boundaries)
updated.
Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with respect to
previous edition.
N.B. Revision bars in chapters from 13 to 17 point out only changes with respect to the original
documents listed in point a ) above.
Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated or shifted
in other places of the handbook.
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 537 / 522
Ed.08ADRAFT created on February 14th, 2007, NEITHER validated NOR officially released, for
validation internal purposes.
Ed.08 created on February 22th, 2007, validated, archived and released.

new TRU (P/N 3DB05602AAAC) and associated Kit Loudspeaker; main affected parts:
all Chapters from 12 to 16 (from page 35 to 96 )
Chapter 110 on pages 160 to 162
Chapter 111 on page 183
other changes:
updated.
Ed.09ADRAFT created on April 24th, 2007, NEITHER validated NOR officially released, for
Ed.09 created on May 15th, 2007, validated, archived and released.

introduction of the 2GR transceiver family. Main affected parts:
chapter 19 on pages 127 to 137
para.110.7 on pages 164 to 170
whole para.47.4.10 from page 349
other changes:
new Warning for cable disconnection in Frequency Reuse systems, on pages 168 and 170
factory P/Ns have been removed
538 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10
Ed.010ADRAFT created on November 19th, 2007, NEITHER validated NOR officially released, for
Ed.010BDRAFT created on December 3rd, 2007, NEITHER validated NOR officially released, for
Ed.10 created on February 5th, 2008, validated, archived and released, annuls and replaces previous
ED.09. This edition has been made for the following major changes:
new LPS subsystem and related new SWP 2.1. Main affected parts: whole chapter 12
from page 35 , para.18.5 from page 124 , chapter 22 on pages 197 and 201 ,
new LC Optical Module. Main affected parts: chapter 18 on pages 116 and 118 , chapter
111 on pages 186 and 187 , chapter 32 on page 282 , chapter 43 on page 298
, chapter 47 on pages 341 to 342, appendix C on page 493
new FLASH CARD 128 MB. Main affected parts: chapter 111 on pages 185 and 187
, para.43.3.4 on page 299 , appendix C on page 494
new ADM (1850TSS). Main affected parts: whole chapter 12 from page 35 , chapter
16 on page 91 , chapter 110 on page 162
other changes:
for remotion of Alcatel logo, modified Fig. 69. , Fig. 70. and Fig. 71. on pages 130 to
132
75 W 120 W Balun adapter on page 150
AlcatelLucent logo in Fig. 209. on page 465
in chapter 31 System configurations, removed information regarding Reused
systems with two protection channels, not available
in Appendix Documentation guide information regarding Documentation set
description updated
moreover, adopted the new standardized template look

Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with respect to the
previous edition of this manual (N.B.).
Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated or shifted
in other places of the handbook (N.B.).
N.B. The handbook officially distributed to Customers (as paper copy or pdf file inside the specific
Customer Documentation CDROM) contains neither revision bars nor this part (handbook
editorial information). Source and pdf files of final edition with revision bars are archived in PDM
as specified in chapter 1 on page 529
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10 539 / 522
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
540 / 522 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.10

Manual LSY9600

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Manual LSY9600

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AlcatelLucent 9600LSY

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System

Hardware Installation and Technical Handbook

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Tab. 1. Quick guide

GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND

EQUIPMENT CRAFT TERMINAL USE AND SYSTEM UPGRADE PROCEDURES

EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING AND ITEMS PART NUMBERS

a) GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND

have details on Branching of use handbook 9600LSY/LHRHPA Rel.2.0 Branching

carry out unit hardware setting read para.12.8 on page 50

set and use the EOW functions of

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

provision and manage spare parts

carry out First Level Maintenance

carry out Preventive Maintenance

carry out Corrective Maintenance chapter 46 on page 309 (troubleshooting)

know general characteristics of ECT read para.23.8.6 on page 243

login and logoff according to SWPversion used, get associated CT Operators

d) EQUIPMENT PROVISIONING AND ITEMS PART NUMBERS

system as a whole, read chapter 31 on page 249

BaseBand and Transceiver shelves as a whole, read

FANS shelf, read para.32.5 on page 286

units in ADM shelf, refer to handbooks cited in

common parts (frequency independent), read chapter

get information on system

get specific information regarding

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

Compliance with International norms

TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT

Dangerous Electrical Voltages

Harmful optical signals

Moving mechanical parts

Heatradiating mechanical parts

Equipment emitting RF power

TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT

Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges

2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

Other Labels affixed to the Equipment

b) Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than

a) Antistatic protection device kit

b) Boards extraction/insertion levers

c) Unit assemblies and transceiver subassemblies

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 % 2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

document, use and communication of its contents not

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

To connect the CT cable (at IDUs F interface and/or PC side):

g) Craft Terminal disconnection

To disconnect the CT cable (at IDUs F interface and/or PC side):

h) Right operations for board insertion in the subrack

2) To mate the plastic body of

4) Fix the unit to the subrack by means

NO Dont push just on one lever only.

NO Dont force the units.

NO Avoid impact during the units handling.

j) To populate an empty subrack

permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent

changes for new items/features:

Errors found in previous edition have been corrected.